BANKERS LIFE FIELDHOUSE SUITE CONSOLIDATION (BP2) … · Light Fixture Types: SR2, SF3-1, and SF3-4. ADDED: Zoning plan notes. Addendum 1 4/18/2016 BP2 E4 – 2 REVISED: Receptacle

BANKERS LIFE FIELDHOUSE – SUITE CONSOLIDATION (BP2)

POPULOUS #16.4224.00 ADDENDUM NO. 2 APRIL 18TH

, 2016

©Populous Group, LLC 2016 ADDENDUM NO. 1 - 1

TO THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ENTITLED: Bankers Life Fieldhouse Populous No. 16.4224.00 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT PACKAGE DATE: April 8th, 2016 PREPARED FOR: Capital Improvement Board of Managers of

Marion County, IN 100 South Capitol Avenue Indianapolis, IN 46225 (317) 262-3421 ARCHITECT: Populous, Inc. 4800 Main Street, Suite 300 Kansas City, MO 64112 Contact: Adam Stover Email: [email protected] (816) 221-1500 (816) 221-1578 – fax no. Drawings and Specifications for the above noted project and the work covered thereby are herein modified as follows, and except as set forth herein, otherwise remain unchanged and in full force and effect. This addendum is part of the bidding documents for the above named project and modifies the Construction Documents – Bid Package #2, Suite Consolidation issued on Friday, April 8

th, 2016.

TABLE OF CONTENTS DOCUMENT CATEGORY DESCRIPTION

A. PRIOR ADDENDA CHANGES B. PROJECT MANUAL CHANGES C. DRAWING CHANGES D. CLARIFICATIONS / BIDDER’S QUESTIONS

A. PRIOR ADDENDA CHANGES Not Applicable to Date B. PROJECT MANUAL CHANGES Not Applicable to Date C. DRAWING CHANGES

4/18/2016 BP2 274100 ADDED: Additional verbiage to clarify Alternate 1 requirements.

Addendum 1

4/18/2016 00 01 10 Table of Contents Clarify sections being issued. Sections being issued.

4/18/2016 03 54 16 Hydraulic Cement Underlayment

Underlayment’s for patching and filling concrete surfaces. New Section.



, 2016


4/18/2016 04 20 00 Unit Masonry Masonry being used in Food Service areas. New Section.

4/18/2016 05 73 13 Glazed Decorative Metal Railings

Glazed railings. New Section.

4/18/2016 06 16 00 Sheathing Plywood subfloor. New Section.

4/18/2016 06 41 13 Wood Veneer Faced Architectural Cabinets

Added accessories. Reissued.

4/18/2016 06 41 16 Plastic Laminate Faced Architectural Cabinets


4/18/2016 08 71 00 Door Hardware Clarifications to section. Reissued.

4/18/2016 08 80 00 Glazing Clarified laminate glazing. Reissued.

4/18/2016 09 65 13 Resilient Base and Accessories

Clarified nosing’s. Reissued.

4/18/2016 09 68 16 Sheet Carpeting Clarifications to section. Reissued.

4/18/2016 12 36 91 Simulated Stone Countertops


4/18/2016 Volume 2 Table of Contents

Coordinated Table of Contents to sections issued on 4/8/16. No additional Division 21 or 22 sections are issued with this Addendum.

Reissued.

STRUCTURAL

MEP

4/18/2016 BP2 M2-4C REVISED: Architectural slot diffuser (ASD1) locations within Suite Club due to architectural coordination. REVISED: Linear slot diffuser LSD1 within Suite Club to have light shield for all unused portions of the slot in lieu of blank off plates due reduction in ASD1 return slot length as a result of architectural coordination. REVISED: Grease exhaust duct routing in Food Service 4C36B due to revised food service information. REVISED: Supply ductwork and diffuser layout in Food Service 4C36B to coordinate with revised grease duct routing.

Addendum 1



, 2016


4/18/2016 BP2 M2-4D REVISED: Architectural slot diffuser (ASD1) locations within Suite Club due to architectural coordination. REVISED: Linear slot diffuser LSD1 within Suite Club to have light shield for all unused portions of the slot in lieu of blank off plates due reduction in ASD1 return slot length as a result of architectural coordination. REVISED: Grease exhaust duct routing in Food Service 4C36B due to revised food service information. REVISED: Supply ductwork and diffuser layout in Food Service 4C36B to coordinate with revised grease duct routing. REVISED: Supply diffuser airflows associated with unit FR54 3 due to revised food service information.

Addendum 1

4/18/2016 BP2 M5-1 REVISED: Kitchen exhaust fan (E) KE 12 due to revised food service information. REVISED: Fan-powered terminal unit FR54 3 due to revised food service information.

Addendum 1

4/18/2016 BP2 TN2-4C REVISED: Locations of data outlets to match POS stations. DELETED: (2) data outlets to POS stations.

Addendum 1

4/18/2016 BP2 P2-3D REVISED: Revised underfloor piping to relocated hand sink and oven-steamer ADDED: Underfloor waste piping to disposer to match foodservice schedule.

Addendum 1

4/18/2016 BP2 P3-1 DELETED: TMV’s and bar dump sinks. REVISED: Gas piping from 2” to 1-1/2” diameter.

Addendum 1

4/18/2016 BP2 P3-2 REVISED: Gas piping from 2” to 1-1/2” diameter. REVISED: Revised piping to relocated hand sink and oven-steamer. ADDED: Detail callout to disposer.

Addendum 1

4/18/2016 BP2 P4-1 DELETED: Detail #12. REVISED: Detail # 6.

Addendum 1

4/18/2016 BP2 E3 – 4C REVISED: Light Fixture layout at Bar Area Task; Light Fixture Types: SF1, SF6, SF4 and remote transformer locations. REVISED: Light Fixture ceiling layout at bar area and coffer ceiling; Light Fixture Types: SD4/SD4E, SF2, SD1/SD1E, and SP1. REVISED: Light Fixture ceiling layout at Theatre Boxes; Light Fixture Types: SR2, SF3-1, and SF3-4 ADDED: Zoning plan notes.

Addendum 1



, 2016


4/18/2016 BP2 E3 – 4D REVISED: Light Fixture layout at Bar Area Task; Light Fixture Types: SF1, SF6, SF4 and remote transformer locations. REVISED: Light Fixture ceiling layout at bar area and coffer ceiling; Light Fixture Types: SD4/SD4E, SF2, SD1/SD1E, and SP1. REVISED: Light Fixture ceiling layout at Theatre Boxes; Light Fixture Types: SR2, SF3-1, and SF3-4. ADDED: Zoning plan notes.

Addendum 1

4/18/2016 BP2 E4 – 2 REVISED: Receptacle locations and associated circuiting in base of millwork for drop in freezer (7.038) in Suite Club 4C31 for revised food service information. REVISED: Receptacle locations and associated circuiting for mobile warning cart (16.045) to north wall of Food Service 4C36B for revised food service information. DELETED: Receptacle and associated circuiting for mobile warning cart (16.045) along west wall of Food Service 4C36B for revised food service information. REVISED: Junction box location and associated circuiting for oven (4.031) to east end of center wall of Food Service 4C36B. DELETED: Deleted junction box and associated circuiting for oven/steamer (4.038) under hood in Food Service 4C36B for revised food service information. REVISED: Connections for hood in Food Service 4C36B.

Addendum 1

4/18/2016 BP2 E5 - 1 ADDED: Dimming Panel board RD1-4NED1. Addendum 1

4/18/2016 BP2 E6 - 1 REVISED: Panel board RP-4SW4D and RP-4SW6. Addendum 1

4/18/2016 BP2 E6 - 2 ADDED: The following to the Light Fixture and Notes: SD1-ALT004, SD1-ALT005, SD2-ALT004, SD2-ALT005, SD3-ALT004, SD3-ALT005, SD4-ALT004, SD4-ALT005, General Note #8. REVISED: The following in the Light Fixture Schedule:: SD2 - Description Clarification SD4 - Model Number, Equivalents, Description Clarification SR2 - Model, Lamp, Description Clarification SP1 - Lamp Specification Clarification SW1 - Lamp Specification Clarification SW2 - Lamp Specification Clarification

Addendum 1

FOOD SERVICE

4/18/2016 BP2 FS3-1.01 Corrected qty. #2.012 beer towers Addendum 1

4/18/2016 BP2 FS3-1.01 Added "existing" in hood description Addendum 1



, 2016


4/18/2016 BP2 FS3-1.01 Corrected Revit family for item #4.103, cook station Addendum 1

ARCHTIECTURAL

4/18/2016 BP2 X1-1 REVISED: Corrected Project Number on Title Block Addendum 1

4/18/2016 BP2 AD2-2C REVISED: Clarify extents of patch work at demolished wall ADDED: Note to remove extents of concrete block and seats at adjacent section

Addendum 1

4/18/2016 BP2 AD2-2D REVISED: Clarify extents of patch work at demolished wall ADDED: Note to remove extents of concrete block and seats at adjacent section REVISED: Clarified note for extents of door frame & hardware at existing doors

Addendum 1

4/18/2016 BP2 AD4-2-C REVISED: Clarify extents and finish of demolished ceilings Addendum 1

4/18/2016 BP2 AD4-2-D REVISED: Clarify extents and finish of demolished ceilings Addendum 1

4/18/2016 BP2 A0-01 REVISED: Adjusted General Notes, applicable to all sheets Addendum 1

4/18/2016 BP2 A3-4-01 ADDED: Added dimensions, graphic modifications, referenced sections at the bar, added notes REVISED: Detail #3: Custom Millwork tables to both be fixed. REVISED: Changed doors 4C361-1, 4C36A-2 & 4C36B-1 to 4'-0" wide doors REVISED: Adjusted stairs & railing in theatre box enlarged plan REVISED: Adjusted scope of theatre box enlarged plan to include another box REVISED: Added detail 16 to show end wall condition REVISED: Changed profiles of walls separating theatre boxes

Addendum 1

4/18/2016 BP2 A3-4-02 ADDED: Added ceiling height tags, added curtain track radius dimension REVISED: Clarify extents of coffered ceiling REVISED: Update Reflected Ceiling Plan Legend

Addendum 1

4/18/2016 BP2 A3-4-04 REVISED: Modified tags, added notes, carpet to run to edge of new tub wall.

Addendum 1



, 2016


4/18/2016 BP2 A6-1-01 REVISED: Detail #8: WD3 boarder should be 6" REVISED: Modify wall base and crown molding callouts to WD5 & WD6 REVISED: Revised elevations 4 & 12 adjusted to reflect new profile of half height walls REVISED: Added notes, lightened gyp pattern, graphic modifications.

Addendum 1

4/18/2016 BP2 A8-1-02 DELETED: Removed detail #5 REVISED: Added notes to detail #6 REVISED: Revise wainscot detail to reflect profile shown in elevation at #1, #17, #20

Addendum 1

4/18/2016 BP2 A8-2-01 REVISED: Modified countertops to align with millwork hardware. ADDED: At detail #14, added SS5 on back panel to top row of tables only

Addendum 1

4/18/2016 BP2 A8-3-01 DELETED: Deleted frame types 3, 4, 5 & 6 DELETED: Deleted types V, G, & CR1 REVISED: Adjusted lite dimensions for types N & FG REVISED: Updated door schedule to reflect door size & type changes

Addendum 1

4/18/2016 BP2 A8-4-01 REVISED: Updated Detail 1 at track attachment Addendum 1

4/18/2016 BP2 A8-6-01 REVISED: Clarified existing precast REVISED: added elevations 15 & 16 to show dimensions of theatre box partition wall with railing REVISED: Adjust elevation 17 to reflect profile change of wall REVISED: Clarified sheet detail number of Detail 12, and corresponding views REVISED: Clarified sheet detail number of Detail 18, and corresponding views REVISED: Detail 2, added note to show OPEN

Addendum 1

4/18/2016 BP2 A9-0-01 ADDED: Added WD5: wall base, WD6 crown molding. Addendum 1

D. CLARIFICATIONS / BIDDER’S QUESTIONS Not Applicable to Date

BANKERS LIFE FIELDHOUSE – PHASE 1 BID PACKAGE #2 – SUITE CONSOLIDATION ADD #1

POPULOUS 16.4224.10 ....................................................................................................... APRIL 18, 2016

©Populous Group, LLC 2016 TABLE OF CONTENTS 01 01 10 - 1

SECTION 00 01 10 - TABLE OF CONTENTS

VOLUME 1 SECTION ................................................................................................................................................. NUMBER SECTION TITLE ...................................................................................................................... DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS ........................................................................................................... INVITATION TO BID ................................................................................................................ INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS .................................................................................................. PROJECT DELIVERY FORMS ................................................................................................ AVAILABLE INFORMATION .................................................................................................... EVENTS SCHEDULE .............................................................................................................. GENERAL SALES TAX EXEMPTION CERTIFICATE (OCT 2015) ........................................ BID FORM ................................................................................................................................ BID FORM FOR PUBLIC WORK – FORM 96 ......................................................................... SUBCONTRACTOR AND MATERIAL LIST ............................................................................ BID BOND ............................................................................................................................... XBE PARTICIPATION FORM .................................................................................................. XBE PARTICIPATION PROGRAM .......................................................................................... APPLICATION FOR XBE WAIVER ......................................................................................... XBE PARTICIPATION REPORT ............................................................................................. CONTRACT AND BOND FORMS ........................................................................................... OWNER AND CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT (A132-2009) ................................................... OWNER AND CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AGREEMENT (A232-2009) ............................ VERITY AFFIDAVIT ................................................................................................................. PERFORMANCE BOND .......................................................................................................... PAYMENT BOND .................................................................................................................... CONTRACTOR AFFIDAVIT AND PARTIAL WAIVER AND RELEASE OF CLAIMS FOR PAYMENT ............................................................................................................................. SUBCONTRACTOR SUPPLIER AFFIDAVIT AND PARTIAL WAIVER AND RELEASE OF CLAIMS FOR PAYMENT .......................................................................................................

CONTRACTOR AFFIDAVIT AND FINAL WAIVER AND RELEASE OF CLAIMS FOR PAYMENT .............................................................................................................................

SUBCONTRACTOR SUPPLIER AFFIDAVIT AND FINAL WAIVER AND RELEASE OF CLAIMS FOR PAYMENT ......................................................................................................

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 SCOPE OF WORK .................................................................................................................. 01 10 01 SUMMARY ............................................................................................................................... 01 23 00 ALTERNATES .......................................................................................................................... 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES ............................................................................................ 01 25 01 REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION FORM ................................................................................ 01 26 00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES ....................................................................... 01 29 00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES ..................................................................................................... 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION ................................................................ 01 31 01 ELECTRONIC DATA TRANSFER AGREEMENT FORM ....................................................... 01 31 02 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION FORM ................................................................................. 01 32 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION .............................................................. 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ................................................................................................... 01 33 01 SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL FORM ....................................................................................... 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................... 01 42 00 REFERENCES ......................................................................................................................... 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ........................................................................


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 ....................................................................................................... APRIL 18, 2016


01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................. 01 73 00 EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................ 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES ................................................................................................... 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA ............................................................................. 01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS ....................................................................................... 01 79 00 DEMOSTRATION AND TRAINING ......................................................................................... DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION ...................................................................................................... DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMWOK ......................................................................................................... 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING ................................................................................................... 03 30 00 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE ................................................................................................. 03 54 16 HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT ................................................................ 4/18/16 DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY ......................................................................................................... 4/18/16 DIVISION 05 - METALS 05 12 00 STRUCTUAL STEEL FRAMING .............................................................................................. 05 31 50 COMPOSITE STEEL FLOOR DECK ....................................................................................... 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING ........................................................................................ 05 41 00 STRUCTURAL COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING .............................................................. 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS .......................................................................................................... 05 52 13 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS .................................................................................................... 05 70 00 DECORATIVE METAL ............................................................................................................. 05 73 13 GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS .............................................................. 4/18/16 DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 10 53 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY ............................................................................. 06 16 00 SHEATHING ................................................................................................................ 4/18/16 06 20 23 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY ............................................................................................ 06 41 13 WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS .......................................... 4/18/16 06 41 16 PLASTIC-LAMINATE FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS ................................... 4/18/16 DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 84 13 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING ............................................................................................ 07 84 43 JOINT FIRESTOPPING ........................................................................................................... 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS ................................................................................................................... DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES .............................................................................. 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS ........................................................................................................... 08 31 13 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES............................................................................................ 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE .................................................................................................... 4/18/16 08 80 00 GLAZING ...................................................................................................................... 4/18/16 08 83 00 MIRRORS ................................................................................................................................ DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING ................................................................................. 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD .................................................................................................................... 09 30 13 TILE .......................................................................................................................................... 09 51 13 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING .............................................................................................. 09 65 13 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES .................................................................... 4/18/16 09 68 16 SHEET CARPETING ................................................................................................... 4/18/16


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 ....................................................................................................... APRIL 18, 2016


09 72 00 WALL COVERINGS ................................................................................................................. 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING .............................................................................................................. 09 93 00 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING ........................................................................ DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10 26 00 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION .......................................................................................... DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 FOOD SERVICE ...................................................................................................................... DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12 22 00 CURTAINS AND DRAPES ...................................................................................................... 12 36 61 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS ...................................................................... 4/18/16 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT NOT APPLICABLE


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 ....................................................................................................... APRIL 18, 2016


VOLUME 2 DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 10 GENERAL FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS ............................................................. 21 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION ..................................................... 21 05 15 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS .................................. 21 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT........................... 21 13 13 WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS ................................................................ DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 22 00 10 GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................. 22 00 15 COORDINATION ..................................................................................................................... 22 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING ...................................................................... 22 05 15 BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS ........................................................................ 22 05 23 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING ............................................................ 22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING ........................................................ 22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ............................................ 22 07 00 PLUMBING INSULATION (V1.02) ........................................................................................... 22 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING AND SPECIALTIES ............................................................ 22 13 00 SANITARY DRAINAE AND VENT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES ............................................. 22 15 10 BEVERAGE BULK CO2 SYSTEM ........................................................................................... 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES (V1.02) ............................................................................................... 22 70 00 NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS (V1.04) ......................................................................................... DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 10 GENERAL MECH REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................... 23 00 15 COORDINATION ..................................................................................................................... 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC ............................................................................... 23 05 10 BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS ........................................................................ 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENT FOR HAVAC EQUIPMENT .......................................... 23 05 19 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HAVAC PIPING ...................................................................... 23 05 23 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING ..................................................................... 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT .................................. 23 05 50 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR HAVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ....................................... 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT .................................................... 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC ......................................................... 23 07 00 HVAC INSULATION ................................................................................................................. 23 09 23 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC .............................................................................. 23 21 13 HYDRONIC PIPING ................................................................................................................. 23 31 13 METAL DUCTS ........................................................................................................................ 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES ..................................................................................................... 23 36 00 AIR TERMINAL UNITS ............................................................................................................ 23 37 13 DIFFUSERS REGESTERS AND GRILLES ............................................................................. DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 26 00 10 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................... 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ................................................................... 26 05 02 EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS (V1.01) .............................................................................. 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES .............................. 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS .............................................. 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ................................................ 26 05 33 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRIAL SYSTEMS ......................................................... 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FJOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ................................................................. 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES ............................................................................................. 26 09 43 NETWORK DIMMING CONTROLS ......................................................................................... 26 22 00 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS (V1.01) ...........................................................................


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 ....................................................................................................... APRIL 18, 2016


26 24 16 PANELBOARDS (V1.01) ......................................................................................................... 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES (V1.01) ...................................................................................................... 26 28 13 FUSES (V1.02)......................................................................................................................... 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS ............................................................ 26 29 13 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS (V1.01) .................................................................................... 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING (V1.02) ................................................................................................. DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 10 GENERAL COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS ............................................................... 27 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS ....................................................... 27 10 00 STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM ........................................................................................ 27 15 00 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING ...................................................................... 27 41 00 AUDIO VIDEO SYSTEMS (V1.03) .......................................................................................... 27 41 10 TELECOMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS FOR AUDIO VIDEO SYSTEMS ..................... 27 41 16 AUDIO VIDEO SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT ................................................................................. 27 41 33 TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS ............................................................................... DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 31 11 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS ............................................................ DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 34 - TRANSPORTATION NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 35 - WATERWAY AND MARINE NOT APPLICABLE

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

BANKERS LIFE FIELDHOUSE – PHASE 1

BID PACKAGE #2 – SUITE CONSOLIDATION ADD#1 POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016

©Populous Group, LLC 2016 HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT 03 54 16 - 1

SECTION 03 54 16 - HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes polymer-modified, self-leveling, hydraulic cement underlayment for application below interior floor coverings.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00 “Cast in Place Concrete” for concrete slab information. 2. Division 9 Sections -for all applied floor finishes 3. Division 9 Sections -for moisture and PH testing requirements of flooring substrates

before underlayment or flooring is installed.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product, including mix designs, certifications and laboratory test reports.

B. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plans indicating substrates, locations, and average depths of underlayment based on survey of substrate conditions.

C. Warranties: Sample of manufacturer’s warranty.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1. Installation contractor shall be approved by the manufacturer as a qualified contractor

trained in the application of underlayment/topping systems. Installation contractor shall provide proper documentation from manufacturer of approval of qualifications.

2. Installation contractor shall oversee and manage all aspects of the topping process utilizing its own trained forces, subcontracting any portion of the process is disallowed.

3. Installation contractor shall provide written proof of the successful completion of previous work similar in scope and size to the work scheduled in this section.




1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of underlayment products required for this Project.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ventilation, ambient temperature and humidity, and other conditions affecting underlayment performance.

1. Place hydraulic cement underlayments only when ambient temperature and temperature of substrates are between 50 and 80 deg F (10 and 27 deg C).

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Underlayment: Manufacturer’s Installer extended manufacturer warranty. 1. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.

2.2 HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENTS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Ardex Engineered Cements, Inc.

a. Basis of Design. 2. BASF 3. Dayton Superior 4. Euclid 5. Laticrete 6. MAPEI Corporation 7. TEC, HB Fuller Construction Products. 8. Uzin Floor Systems, Ufloor Systems.

B. Hydraulic Cement Underlayment: Polymer-modified, self-leveling, hydraulic cement product that can be applied in minimum uniform thickness of 1/4 inch (6 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement, or hydraulic or blended hydraulic

cement as defined by ASTM C 219. 2. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days when tested

according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.




3. Underlayment Additive: Resilient-emulsion product of underlayment manufacturer, formulated for use with underlayment when applied to substrate and conditions indicated.

C. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm); or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

1. Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for underlayment thickness required.

D. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F (21 deg C).

E. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate, conditions, and application indicated.

F. Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for metal substrates.

G. Applications: 1. Underlayment material for renovation areas:

a. Ardex K 15 2. Final Patch material: Repair material installed just before flooring is installed to provide

final leveling: a. Ardex Forti Finish.

3. Trench Filler: Repair material for trenches remaining after partitions are demolished or for repairing deep areas before installing underlayment. a. Ardex TRM: Transportation Repair Mortar.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment.

2. Moving joints: All moving joints and cracks must be honored up through the moisture control system, underlayment and floor covering by installing a flexible sealing compound designed specifically for use over moving joints.

3. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking.

A. Concrete Substrates: Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants incompatible with resinous flooring. 1. Roughen concrete substrates as follows:




a. Shot-blast surfaces with an apparatus that abrades the concrete surface, contains the dispensed shot within the apparatus, and recirculates the shot by vacuum pickup. 1) CSP-3 minimum or as needed to ensure adequate absorption and intimate

bond with the concrete substrate. b. Comply with ASTM D4258 and ASTM D4259 requirements unless manufacturer's

written instructions are more stringent. 2. Verify that concrete substrates are dry and moisture-vapor emissions are within

acceptable levels according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Moisture Testing: Perform tests indicated below for all areas to receive hydraulic cement

underlayment. a. In-Situ Probe Test: Perform relative-humidity test using in-situ probes per

ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 85 percent relative-humidity-level measurement. 1) Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 1,000 sq. ft., and

perform not less than two tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas. a) For interior spaces, perform test in each enclosed, conditioned room

at a minimum. Add additional test locations in rooms over 1,000 sq. ft. 2) Record testing locations on floor plans. 3) Report test results by floor location to Contractor and Architect.

4. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Verify that concrete substrates have pH within acceptable range. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with application only after substrates pass testing. a. Perform testing for pH per ASTM 4262 Test:

1) Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 1,000 sq. ft., and perform not less than two tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas.

2) Record testing locations on floor plans. 3) Report test results by floor location to Contractor and Architect.

5. Slab absorption Testing: Verify that concrete substrates by wetting slab. a. Perform testing per ASTM F21, Standard Test Method for Hydrophobic Surface

Films by Atomizer Test. 1) Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 1,000 sq. ft., and

perform not less than two tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas.

2) Record testing locations on floor plans. 3) Report test results by floor location to Contractor and Architect.

B. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after application recommended in writing by manufacturer.

2. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion to substrate and between coats.

3. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to continue through underlayment.




B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.

C. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface.

1. Apply a final layer without aggregate to product surface. 2. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

D. Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes.

E. Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer.

F. Apply surface sealer at rate recommended by manufacturer.

G. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped.

3.4 FINISHED SURFACES

A. Completed underlayment to be uniform in texture and finish. Repair any surface defects in underlayment

B. Finished surfaces to have a maximum slope of 3/16” in ten feet (10’) and a maximum slope of 1/32” in one foot (1’- 0”).

C. Repair underlayment surface as required just before installing finish flooring.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction period.

END OF SECTION

BANKERS LIFE FIELDHOUSE – PHASE 1 BID PACKAGE #2 – SUITE CONSOLIDATION ADD#1

POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016

©Populous Group, LLC 2016 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 1

SECTION 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Steel reinforcing bars. 3. Masonry joint reinforcement. 4. Ties and anchors. 5. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).

B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.


A. Provide unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28 days. 1. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry from average net-area

compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

2. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms according to ASTM C 1314.

1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. 1. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to ASTM C 140 for

compressive strength. 2. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to

ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength. 3. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 780 for

compressive strength. 4. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 1019. 5. Prism Test: For each type of construction required, according to ASTM C 1314.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


2. Stone Trim Units: Show sizes, profiles, and locations of each stone trim unit required. 3. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars.

Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show elevations of reinforced walls.

4. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications. 5. Shop drawings showing control and expansion joint locations, reinforcing, and detailing.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following: 1. Accessories embedded in masonry.


A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following: 1. Masonry units. 2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. 3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 5. Reinforcing bars. 6. Joint reinforcement. 7. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

C. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test

according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content.

2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement.

D. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated.

B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required.

C. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination."


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry, conditioned location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry conditioned location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.

E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.

B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout and mortar from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 2. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and

integral finishes, from mortar droppings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL

A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for fire-resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, movement joints, headers, bonding,

and other special conditions. 2. Provide bullnose units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated.

B. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


1. Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested according to ASTM E 514 as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive, with test period extended to 24 hours, shall show no visible water or leaks on the back of test specimen. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) ACM Chemistries; RainBloc. 2) BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Plus. 3) Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block.

C. CMUs: ASTM C 90. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive

strength of 2800 psi. 2. Density Classification: Medium weight. 3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions. 4. Exposed Faces: Provide color and texture matching the range represented by Architect's

sample.

2.3 CONCRETE AND MASONRY LINTELS

A. General: Provide one of the following:

B. Concrete Lintels: ASTM C 1623, matching CMUs in color, texture, and density classification; and with reinforcing bars indicated. Provide lintels with net-area compressive strength not less than CMUs.

C. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured. 1. For masonry openings no wider than 6’-8”.

2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Capital Materials Corporation; Flamingo Color Masonry Cement. b. Cemex S.A.B. de C.V.; Citadel Type N. c. Essroc, Italcementi Group; Brixment. d. Holcim (US) Inc.; Mortamix Masonry Cement. e. Lafarge North America Inc.; Magnolia Masonry Cement. f. Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Masonry Cement. g. National Cement Company, Inc.; Coosa Masonry Cement.

B. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

C. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ACM Chemistries; RainBloc for Mortar. b. BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Mortar Admixture.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block Mortar Admixture.

D. Water: Potable.

2.5 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60.

B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M. 1. Interior Walls: Mill- galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. 3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. 4. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 5. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet.

C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods.

2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mill-Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 641/A 641M,

Class 1 coating. 2. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, G60 zinc coating. 3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Corrugated Metal Ties: Metal strips not less than 7/8 inch wide with corrugations having a wavelength of and an amplitude of 0.06 to 0.10 inch made from 0.030-inch- thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication.

C. Partition Top anchors: 0.105-inch- thick metal plate with 3/8-inch- diameter metal rod 6 inches long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS

A. Postinstalled Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors. 1. Load Capacity: Capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load

imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

2. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5 unless otherwise indicated.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene, urethane or PVC.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

D. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells and hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 810, D/A 812 or D/A 817. b. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 376 Rebar Positioner. c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; #RB or #RB-Twin Rebar Positioner. d. Wire-Bond; O-Ring or Double O-Ring Rebar Positioner.

2.9 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. EaCo Chem, Inc. c. ProSoCo, Inc.

2.10 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use masonry cement mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. For reinforced masonry, use masonry cement mortar. 4. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to

view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated. 1. For reinforced masonry, use Type N. 2. For interior non-load-bearing partitions, use Type N.

D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.

2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1. 3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to

ASTM C 143/C 143M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental

to performance of work. 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated.

B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.

C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.

D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. 1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.

F. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry. Tooth in connections between new and existing CMU walls.

3.3 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or

minus 1/4 inch.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch.

3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.

B. Lines and Levels: 1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4

inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary

from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet,

3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and

expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units.

C. Joints: 1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch,

with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. 2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more

than 1/8 inch. 3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8

inch or minus 1/4 inch. 4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus

1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch.

3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 4-inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.

G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.

H. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.

I. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure

above. 2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells

of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to provide 1/2-inch clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 48 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

3. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Section 07 84 46 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."

3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows: 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on

footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on

footings where cells are not grouted.

B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.

D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and

extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.

3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE

A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete where masonry abuts or faces structural steel or concrete to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch wide between masonry and structural steel

or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials.

2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches

o.c. horizontally.

3.8 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.

B. Show locations of joints on Drawings. 1. Place control joints according to National Concrete Masonry Association TEK 10 “Crack

Control in Concrete Masonry Walls”, Table 4.

C. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows: 1. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is

complete for application of sealant.

D. Form expansion joints in brick as follows: 1. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4 inches in direction

of water flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints if any.

2. Build flanges of factory-fabricated, expansion-joint units into masonry. 3. Build in compressible joint fillers where indicated. 4. Form open joint full depth of wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 1/2 inch for

installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."

3.9 LINTELS

A. Provide concrete or masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches for brick-size units and 24 inches for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.

B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

3.10 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during construction.

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout

placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches.

3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

B. Inspections: Level 1 special inspections according to the "International Building Code." 1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-

prepared mortar. 2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades,

sizes, and locations of reinforcement.

C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.

D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof.

E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength.

F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780.

G. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.

H. Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, according to ASTM C 1314 at 28 days.

3.12 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape

hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for

comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.

3. Protect adjacent nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.

4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.

5. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20.

6. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.

7. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces.

3.13 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.

END OF SECTION


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016

©Populous Group, LLC 2016 GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 05 73 13 - 1

SECTION 05 73 13 - GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Glass-supported railings.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring

railings. 2. Section 08 80 00 “Glazing” for glazing products installed in this Section. 3. Section 09 22 16 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for metal backing for anchoring railings.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Railings: Guards, handrails, and similar devices used for protection of occupants at open-sided floor areas and for pedestrian guidance and support, visual separation, or wall protection.

1.3 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written instructions to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver items to Project site in time for installation.




A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Manufacturer's product lines of railings assembled from standard components. 2. Glazing accessories. 3. Grout and paint products.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design, including mechanical finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails, posts, and balusters.

2. Each type of glass required. 3. Fittings and brackets. 4. Assembled Samples of railing systems, made from full-size components, including top

rail, post, handrail, and infill. Show method of finishing members at intersections. Samples need not be full height.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

B. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.

D. Preconstruction test reports.

E. Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions for Owner's maintenance, and removal and replacement of glass panels.


A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockups as shown on Drawings. 2. Build mockups for each form and finish of railing consisting of two posts, top rail, infill

area, and anchorage system components that are full height and are not less than 24 inches in length.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on laboratory mockups. Payment for these services will be made by Owner. Retesting of products that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. 1. Build laboratory mockups at testing agency facility; use personnel, materials, and

methods of construction that will be used at Project site.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


2. Test railings according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when laboratory mockups

will be tested.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Architectural Railings & Grilles, Inc. 2. ARTACO Railing Systems, a Division of TACO Metals Inc. 3. Julius Blum & Co., Inc. 4. CraneVeyor Corp. 5. C. R. Laurence Co., Inc. 6. Livers Bronze Co. 7. Newman Brothers, Inc. 8. Tri Tech, Inc. 9. Tuttle Railing Systems. 10. The Wagner Companies.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer.

D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods, including structural analysis, preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with

Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design railings, including attachment to building construction.

B. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: 1. Aluminum: The lesser of minimum yield strength divided by 1.65 or minimum ultimate

tensile strength divided by 1.95.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


2. Copper Alloys: 60 percent of minimum yield strength. 3. Stainless Steel: 60 percent of minimum yield strength. 4. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength. 5. Glass: 25 percent of mean modulus of rupture (50 percent probability of breakage), as

listed in "Mechanical Properties" in AAMA's Aluminum Curtain Wall Series No. 12, "Structural Properties of Glass."

C. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.. b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

3. Glass-Supported Railings: Support each section of top rail by a minimum of three glass panels or by other means so top rail will remain in place if any one panel fails.

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior railings by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.3 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.

B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 STAINLESS STEEL

A. Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.

B. Pipe: ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP 304.

C. Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade CF 8 or CF 20.

D. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar: ASTM A 666 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.

E. Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.

2.5 STEEL AND IRON

A. Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M (cold formed).

B. Bars: Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M, Grade 1010.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


2.6 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Safety Glazing: Glazing shall comply with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.

B. Laminated Glass: See Section 08 80 00 “Glazing”.

C. Safety Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark glass with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

D. Glazing Accessories for Dry Structural Glazing: Setting blocks, tapers, tools and related accessories as recommended or supplied by railing manufacturer for installing structural glazing in metal subrails. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide C. R. Laurence Co., Inc.;

CRL TAPER-LOC Dry Glaze System.

2.7 FASTENERS

A. Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Stainless-Steel Components: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners. 2. Dissimilar Metals: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.

B. Fasteners for Anchoring to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.

C. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching railings to other work unless exposed fasteners are the standard fastening method for railings indicated. 1. Provide Phillips tamper-resistant flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless

otherwise indicated.

D. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC193. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with

ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

B. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

2.9 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.

E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. Locate weep holes in inconspicuous locations.

F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

G. Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. 1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is

manufacturer's standard splicing method.

H. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

I. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

J. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work where indicated. 1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-

resistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and to prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.

K. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.

2.10 GLAZING PANEL FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate to sizes and shapes required; provide for proper edge clearance and bite on glazing panels. 1. Clean-cut or flat-grind edges at butt-glazed sealant joints to produce square edges with

slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces. 2. Grind smooth exposed edges, including those at open joints, to produce square edges

with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.

B. Structural Balusters: Provide laminated, heat-strengthened glass panels for both straight and curved sections.

C. Infill Panels: Provide laminated, heat-strengthened glass panels for both straight and curved sections.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


2.11 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipment.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

C. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of railings.

2.12 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.

B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches. 1. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.

C. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.

D. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.

B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or

finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.

2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel

with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.

C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.

E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


3.2 RAILING CONNECTIONS

A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings.

B. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint within 6 inches of post.

3.3 INSTALLING GLASS PANELS

A. Glass-Supported Railings: Install assembly to comply with railing manufacturer's written instructions, and approved Shop Drawings. 1. Attach base channel to building structure. 2. Adhere pressure blocks to the bottom edge of glass and insert glass into base channel. 3. Install tapers and lock glass into place. 4. Install glazing gaskets. 5. Erect glass railings under direct supervision of manufacturer's authorized technical

personnel.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. Payment for these services will be made by Owner.

B. Extent and Testing Methodology: Testing agency will randomly select completed railing assemblies for testing that are representative of different railing designs and conditions in the completed Work. Test railings according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935 for compliance with performance requirements.

C. Remove and replace railings where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements unless they can be repaired in a manner satisfactory to Architect and comply with specified requirements.

D. Perform additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean aluminum and stainless steel by washing thoroughly with water and soap, rinsing with clean water, and wiping dry.

B. Clean copper alloys according to metal finisher's written instructions in a manner that leaves an undamaged and uniform finish matching approved Sample.

C. Clean and polish glass as recommended in writing by manufacturer. Wash both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


D. Clean wood rails by wiping with a damp cloth and then wiping dry.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.

END OF SECTION


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016

©Populous Group, LLC 2016 SHEATHING 06 16 00 - 1

SECTION 06 16 00 - SHEATHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Subflooring and underlayment for raised platforms.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and

certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials.

2. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated plywood both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5516.

3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

4. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.


A. Evaluation Reports: For following products, from ICC-ES: 1. Fire-retardant-treated plywood.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.


A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance

Directory."

2.2 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS

A. Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2 unless otherwise indicated.

B. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated.

C. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED PLYWOOD

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less

when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated.

3. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber plywood shall be tested according ASTM D 5516 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6305. Span ratings after treatment shall be not less than span ratings specified.

C. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated plywood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency.

E. Application: Treat plywood indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Subflooring and underlayment for raised platforms.

2.4 SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT

A. Plywood Subflooring: Exposure 1, Structural I single-floor panels or sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 24 o.c.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 7/8 inch.

B. Underlayment, General: Provide underlayment in nominal thicknesses indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/4 inch over smooth subfloors and not less than 3/8 inch over board or uneven subfloors.

C. Plywood Underlayment for Carpet: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, Underlayment.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

E. Screws for Fastening Wood Structural Panels to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members.

B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated.

C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."

D. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements.

E. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast.

3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated.

B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


1. Subflooring: a. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. b. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends.

END OF SECTION


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016

©Populous Group, LLC 2016 WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 13 - 1

SECTION 06 41 13 - WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Architectural wood cabinets. 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing architectural wood

cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. 3. Shop finishing of architectural wood cabinets.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips

required for installing cabinets and concealed within other construction before cabinet installation.

2. Section 08 80 00 “Mirror” for decorative mirror installed in wood cabinetry. 3. Section 12 36 61 “Simulated Stone Countertops” for grommets located in cabinetry and

countertops.




A. Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products fire-retardant-treated materials cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing materials and processes. 1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and

certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed

blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for electrical switches and outlets and

other items installed in architectural wood cabinets. 4. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification

numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf. 5. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Shop-applied transparent finishes. 2. Shop-applied opaque finishes. 3. Thermoset decorative panels.

D. Samples for Verification: 1. Lumber for transparent finish, not less than 5 inches wide by 24 inches long, for each

species and cut, finished on one side and one edge.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


2. Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparent-finished cabinets.

3. Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, 5 inches wide by 12 inches long for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels, for each finish system and color, with one-half of exposed surface finished.

4. Thermoset decorative panels, 8 by 10 inches, for each color, pattern, and surface finish, with edge banding on one edge.

5. Corner pieces as follows: a. Cabinet-front frame joints between stiles and rails, as well as exposed end pieces,

18 inches high by 18 inches wide by 6 inches deep. b. Miter joints for standing trim.

6. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish.


A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.

B. Product Certificates: For the following: 1. Composite wood and agrifiber products. 2. Thermoset decorative panels. 3. Mirror. 4. Decorative metal. 5. Adhesives.

C. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.

D. Evaluation Reports: For fire-retardant-treated materials, from ICC-ES.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.

D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups of typical architectural wood cabinets as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas,


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field

measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wood-veneer-faced architectural cabinets can be supported and installed as indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ARCHITECTURAL CABINET FABRICATORS

A. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production of architectural wood cabinets with sequence-matched wood veneers.

2.2 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CABINETS, GENERAL

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of architectural wood cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Provide certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork, including

installation, complies with requirements of grades specified. 2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard

and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard.

2.3 WOOD CABINETS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Grade: Custom.

B. Type of Construction: Frameless.

C. Cabinet and Door and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


D. Wood for Exposed Surfaces: As indicated. 1. Cut: Quarter cut/quarter sawn. 2. Grain Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels. 3. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Book match. 4. Veneer Matching within Panel Face: Balance match.

E. Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels.

a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC tape, 0.018-inch minimum thickness, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.

b. Edges of Thermoset Decorative Panel Shelves: 1 mm PVC or polyester edge banding.

c. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS.

F. Dust Panels: 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers unless located directly under tops.

G. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body. 1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical

fasteners or glued dovetail joints.

2.4 WOOD MATERIALS

A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.

B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130. 2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue. 3. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1. 4. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with

thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.

2.5 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials, General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. 1. Use treated materials that comply with requirements of referenced woodworking

standard. Do not use materials that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective. 2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise

adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials.

3. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on surfaces that will be concealed from view after installation.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Kiln dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15

percent, respectively. 2. For items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use organic resin chemical

formulation. 3. Mill lumber after treatment within limits set for wood removal that do not affect listed fire-

test-response characteristics, using a woodworking shop certified by testing and inspecting agency.

4. Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during treatment and drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated woodwork.

2.6 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets except for items specified in Section 08 71 11 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)."

B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of opening.

C. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.

D. Pulls: Mockett DP3 Series Back mounted, solid metal, 6 inches long.

E. Catches: Push-in magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03131.

F. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04102; with shelf brackets, B04112.

G. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal.

H. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9. 1. Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated-steel

ball-bearing slides. 2. For drawers more than 3 inches high but not more than 6 inches high and not more than

24 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-100. 3. For drawers more than 6 inches high or more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-

200. 4. For computer keyboard shelves, provide Grade 1HD-100. 5. For trash bins not more than 20 inches high and 16 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-200.

I. Door Locks: Cam locks; BHMA A156.11, E07261. 1. Provide cam locks at all cabinet door locations.

J. Drawer Locks: Cam locks; BHMA A156.11, E07261. 1. Provide cam locks at all cabinet drawer locations.

K. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


L. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base.

Match Architect's “Brushed Nickel” sample: a. Location: Suites.

M. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.

N. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain added urea formaldehyde or added pigments. 1. Through Color Laminates: Do not use adhesives that contain added pigments or

resorcinols.

O. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement. 1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive.

P. Mirror Glass for Cabinet Doors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Select, Quality-Q3, 6.0 mm thick. See Division 08 “Mirrors” and Finish Legend for information on mirror product installed in cabinetry.

Q. Air Vents: Provide air vents by Doug Mockett or equal. Plastic finishes as selected from manufacturer’s standard range. 1. Metal Grommet with cover: ZGAVG2. 2. Locate where equipment is behind cabinetry doors. Final locations determined in Shop

Drawings.

R. Removable Panel Clips: Hafele Keku push in fastener set.

S. Panel Roller: Small casters for use at base cabinet with attached toe kicks. Hafele Caster, low profile single wheel with Hafele threaded bracket.


A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Corners of Cabinets: 1/16 inch unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled.

Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment.

C. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

2.9 SHOP FINISHING

A. General: Finish architectural wood cabinets at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.

B. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural wood cabinets, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to

concealed surfaces of cabinets.

C. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: System - 11, catalyzed polyurethane. 3. Wash Coat for Closed-Grain Woods: Apply wash-coat sealer to cabinets made from

closed-grain wood before staining and finishing. 4. Staining: Match Architect's sample. 5. Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods. 6. Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.

B. Before installing cabinets, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.

B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop.

C. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

D. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


E. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. 1. For shop finished items use filler matching finish of items being installed.

F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a

straight line. 2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16

inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips or No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish.

G. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. 1. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces

where only sealer/prime coats are applied in shop.

H. Refer to Section 09 93 00 "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

END OF SECTION

BANKERS LIFE FIELDHOUSE – PHASE 1 BID PACKAGE #1 – LOCKER ROOM RESTAURANT RENOVATION


©Populous Group, LLC 2016 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16 - 1

SECTION 06 41 16 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets. 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-faced

architectural cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet installation.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips

required for installing cabinets and concealed within other construction before cabinet installation.

2. Section 12 36 61 “Simulated Stone Countertops” for grommets located in cabinetry and countertops.




A. Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products, high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate, and cabinet hardware and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed

blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for electrical switches and outlets and

other items installed in architectural plastic-laminate cabinets. 4. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Plastic laminates. 2. PVC edge material. 3. Thermoset decorative panels.

D. Samples for Verification: 1. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with

one sample applied to core material and specified edge material applied to one edge. 2. Wood-grain plastic laminates, 12 by 24 inches, for each type, pattern and surface

finish, with one sample applied to core material and specified edge material applied to one edge.




3. Thermoset decorative panels, 8 by 10 inches, for each color, pattern, and surface finish, with edge banding on one edge.

4. Corner pieces as follows: a. Cabinet-front frame joints between stiles and rails, as well as exposed end pieces,

18 inches high by 18 inches wide by 6 inches deep. b. Miter joints for standing trim.

5. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.

B. Product Certificates: For the following: 1. Composite wood and agrifiber products. 2. Thermoset decorative panels. 3. High-pressure decorative laminate. 4. Glass. 5. Adhesives.

C. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.

D. Evaluation Reports: For fire-retardant-treated materials, from ICC-ES.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products and certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups of typical plastic-laminate cabinets as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the



A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article.





A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field

measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that cabinets can be supported and installed as indicated.

B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in Section 08 71 11 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)" to fabricator of architectural woodwork; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Provide labels or certificates from AWI certification program indicating that

woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified. 2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard

and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard.

B. Grade: Custom.

C. Type of Construction: Frameless.

D. Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay.

E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

indicated on Finish Legend or comparable product by one of the following: a. Abet Laminati, Inc. b. Formica Corporation. c. Lamin-Art, Inc. d. Panolam Industries International, Inc. e. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.




F. High-Pressure Through Color Laminate: Grade CC. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

indicated on Finish Legend or comparable product by one of the following: a. Formica Corporation.

G. Laminate Cladding for Through Color Laminates for Exposed Surfaces: 1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade CC. 2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade CC. 3. Edges: Grade CC. 4. Pattern Direction: Vertically for doors, and fixed panels.

H. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: 1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS. 2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. 3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. 4. Edges: Grade VGS. 5. Pattern Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels.

I. Laminate Cladding for Through Color Laminates for Exposed Surfaces: 1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade CC. 2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade CC. 3. Edges: Grade CC. 4. Pattern Direction: Vertically for doors, and fixed panels.

J. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels.

a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC tape, 0.018-inch minimum thickness, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.

b. Edges of Thermoset Decorative Panel Shelves: PVC or polyester edge banding. c. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide

surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS.

K. Dust Panels: 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers unless located directly under tops.

L. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL.

M. Drawer Constructions: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body. 1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical

fasteners or glued dovetail joints.

N. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations.

2.2 WOOD MATERIALS

A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.




B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130. 2. Softwood Plywood: See Interior Finish Carpentry section. Plywoods are not to be used

for through color laminate substrates. 3. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): See Interior Finish Carpentry

section. Plywoods are not to be used for through color laminate substrates. 4. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with

thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials, General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. 1. Use treated materials that comply with requirements of referenced woodworking

standard. Do not use materials that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective. 2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise

adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials.

3. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on surfaces that will be concealed from view after installation.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Kiln dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15

percent, respectively. 2. Mill lumber after treatment within limits set for wood removal that do not affect listed fire-

test-response characteristics, using a woodworking shop certified by testing and inspecting agency.

3. Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during treatment and drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated woodwork.

2.4 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets except for items specified in Section 08 71 11 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)."

B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of opening, self-closing.

C. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04102; with shelf brackets, B04112.




D. Pulls: Mockett DP3 Series Back mounted, solid metal, 6 inches long.

E. Catches: Push-in magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03131.

F. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal.

G. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9. 1. Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated-steel

ball-bearing slides. 2. For drawers more than 3 inches high but not more than 6 inches high and not more than

24 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-100. 3. For drawers more than 6 inches high or more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-

200. 4. For computer keyboard shelves, provide Grade 1HD-100. 5. For trash bins not more than 20 inches high and 16 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-200.

A. Door Locks: Cam locks; BHMA A156.11, E07261. 1. Provide cam locks at all cabinet door locations.

B. Drawer Locks: Cam locks; BHMA A156.11, E07261. 1. Provide cam locks at all cabinet drawer locations.

C. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.

D. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base.

Match Architect's “Brushed Nickel” sample: a. Location: Suites.

E. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.

F. Air Vents: Provide air vents by Doug Mockett or equal. Plastic finishes as selected from manufacturer’s standard range. 1. Metal Grommet with cover: ZGAVG2. 2. Locate where equipment is behind cabinetry doors. Final locations determined in Shop

Drawings.

G. Casters: Provide casters by Doug Mockett or equal. Final finishes as selected from manufacturer’s standard range. 1. Locking Caster: 3” CA30PA-23. Provide (2) locking casters per portable unit. 2. Caster: 3” CA29PA-23. Provide remaining non-locking casters as needed for size of

portable unit to ensure load is adequately distributed.

H. Removable Panel Clips: Hafele Keku push in fastener set.

I. Panel Roller: Small casters for use at base cabinet with attached toe kicks. Hafele Caster, low profile single wheel with Hafele threaded bracket.





A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.

C. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain added urea formaldehyde or added pigments. 1. Through Color Laminates: Do not use adhesives that contain added pigments or

resorcinols.

D. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement. 1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication.

B. Fabricate cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.

C. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will

be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled.

Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment.

D. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.

B. Before installing cabinets, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required.




3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.

B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop.

C. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

D. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

E. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. 1. Use filler matching finish of items being installed.

F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a

straight line. 2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16

inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips, and No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.

END OF SECTION


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016

©Populous Group, LLC 2016 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 1

SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Glass for windows, doors, interior borrowed lites, and storefront framing. 2. Glazing sealants and accessories.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 08 83 00 "Mirrors."

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.

C. IBC: International Building Code.

D. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's

personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Glazing Accessory Samples: For sealants and colored spacers, in 12-inch lengths.

C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Product Certificates: For glass.

C. Product Test Reports: For coated glass insulating glass and glazing sealants, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations

within previous 36-month period.

D. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.

E. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings: A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved and certified by coated-glass manufacturer.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

C. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.

D. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

E. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Install glazing in mockups for decorative glazing in millwork. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the



A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glass product, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants. 1. Testing is not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant

products and glazing materials matching those submitted. 2. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation

techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.

3. Test no fewer than eight Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


4. Schedule enough time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective

measures including the use of specially formulated primers.


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are

outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Glass Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated in glass schedules or comparable product by one of the following: 1. AGC Glass Company North America, Inc. 2. Guardian Industries Corp. 3. Pilkington North America. 4. PPG Industries, Inc. 5. SCHOTT North America, Inc. 6. Viracon, Inc.

B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type. 1. Obtain reflective-coated glass from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016



A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined according to the IBC and ASTM E 1300. 1. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass

deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1 inch, whichever is less.

C. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.

D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick. 2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated. 3. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "Glazing Manual." 2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and

AAMA TIR A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines." 3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped Glazing." 4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing

Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

C. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated. 1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: 6 mm. 2. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated

throughout Project.

D. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat-strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.

B. Ultraclear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class I (clear), Quality-Q3; and with visible light transmission of not less than 91 percent. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. AGC Glass Company North America, Inc.; Krystal Klear. b. Guardian Industries Corp.; Ultrawhite. c. Pilkington North America; Optiwhite. d. PPG Industries, Inc.; Starphire.

C. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel

to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. a. Roll-Wave Distortion Limits: Maximum peak to valley deviation of 0.003 inch in

center field of lite, and 0.008 inch within 10.5 inches of leading and trailing edges. b. Millidiopter: Plus or minus 100 mD over 95 percent of glass surface. c. Overall Bow/Warp, Maximum: ASTM C 1048 Table 2 requirements, but not

exceeding 0.50-inch regardless of edge dimension. d. Maintain measurement documentation for each lite. Upon request provide

documentation for verification.

2.5 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General: 1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact,

including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. Field-applied sealants shall have a VOC content of not more than 250 g/L. 4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full

range.

B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 795. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf NB SCS9000. c. Pecora Corporation; 895NST. d. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI-641. e. Sika Corporation U.S.; Sikasil WS-295. f. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2.

2.6 LAMINATED GLASS

A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, Condition A (uncoated), Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


1. Construction: Two plies of glass laminated with ionoplast interlayer not less than 0.060 inch thick.

2. Kind: LHS (laminated heat strengthened). 3. Glass Color: Clear. 4. Interlayer Color: Clear. 5. Glass Plies for Structural Glass Balusters: Thickness required by structural loads,

but not less than 6.0 mm thick each.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, with requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

2.8 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. 1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on

glass framing members and glazing components. a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.

C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and

offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed Work.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance.

C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.

Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

I. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.

J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.

F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.5 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains. 1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass,

remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.

D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

3.7 MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Glass Type GL-1: Not Used.

B. Glass Type GL-2: Clear fully tempered float low-iron ultra clear glass. 1. Door lites and sidelites: Where safety glazing is required.

C. Glass Type GL-4: Clear fully tempered float glass. 1. Door lites and sidelites: Where safety glazing is required.

3.8 LAMINATED GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Glass Type GL-3: Clear laminated glass with two plies of fully tempered float glass.

END OF SECTION


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

BANKERS LIFE FIELDHOUSE – PHASE 1 BID PACKAGE #2 – SUITE CONSOLIDATION ADD #2 POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016

©Populous Group, LLC 2016 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 1

SECTION 087100 – DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following: 1. Swinging doors. 2. Sliding doors.

B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Mechanical door hardware. 2. Electromechanical door hardware. 3. Automatic operators. 4. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections.

C. Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”. 2. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors”. 3. Division 08 Section “Stile and Rail Wood Doors”. 4. Division 08 Section “Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts”. 5. Division 08 Section “Access Control Hardware”.

D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code. 3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 4. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 5. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 6. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 7. State Building Codes, Local Amendments.

E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards: 1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series 2. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes.

B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door



Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and

Format for the Hardware Schedule." 2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating

complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission.

3. Content: Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware

item. b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor

plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Warranty information for each product.

4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.

C. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control hardware indicating the following: 1. Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system wiring

diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and control of the access control system electrified hardware. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Include the following:

a. Elevation diagram of each unique access controlled opening showing location and interconnection of major system components with respect to their placement in the respective door openings.

b. Complete (risers, point-to-point) access control system block wiring diagrams.

c. Wiring instructions for each electronic component scheduled herein. 2. Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related sections the voltages and wiring details

required at electrically controlled and operated hardware openings.

D. Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a separate keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders/cores.

E. Informational Submittals: 1. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on

evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency.

F. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals.




A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying.

D. Automatic Operator Supplier Qualifications: Power operator products and accessories are required to be supplied and installed through current members of the manufacturer's "Power Operator Preferred Installer" program. Suppliers are to be factory trained, certified, and a direct purchaser of the specified power operators and be responsible for the installation and maintenance of the units and accessories indicated for the Project.

E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section from a single source unless otherwise indicated. 1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line

by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted. 2. Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufacturer as mechanical

door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced standards.

G. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document: 1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required. 2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion. 3. Requirements for key control storage and software. 4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software. 5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys.

H. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware. 1. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other

preparatory work performed by other trades. 2. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening. 3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. 4. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures



I. Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for installing door hardware. 1. Prior to installation of door hardware, door hardware supplier shall conduct a project

specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required.

2. Hardware supplier shall engage factory personnel for installation training on locks, exit devices and door closers.

J. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule.


A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.

C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference".

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

B. Door Hardware and Electrical Connections: Coordinate the layout and installation of scheduled electrified door hardware and related access control equipment with required connections to source power junction boxes, low voltage power supplies, detection and monitoring hardware, and fire and detection alarm systems.

C. Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.



B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of the hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation.

C. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Special Warranty Periods: 1. Ten years for mortise locks and latches. 2. Five years for exit hardware. 3. Twenty five years for manual surface door closer bodies. 4. Two years for electromechanical door hardware.

1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under.

B. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

C. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule.

D. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01, Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and their designated consultants.

2.2 HANGING DEVICES

A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles as specified in the Door Hardware Sets. 1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity, unless otherwise indicated:



a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inchesb. Three Hinges: For doors with heights

. 61 to 90 inches

c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights .

91 to 120 inchesd. For doors with heights more than

. 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge

for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for

door thickness and clearances required:

.

a. Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified. b. Sizes from 3’1” to 4’0”: 5” standard or heavy weight as specified.

3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated

bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight. b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated

bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight. 4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Hardware Sets or on

Drawings: a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened

into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the all out-swinging lockable doors.

5. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. McKinney Products (MK). b. Ives (IV). c. Stanley Hardware (ST).

B. Continuous Geared Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.26 Grade 1-600 certified continuous geared hinge. with minimum 0.120-inch thick extruded 6060 T6 aluminum alloy hinge leaves and a minimum overall width of 4 inches. Hinges are non-handed, reversible and fabricated to template screw locations. Factory trim hinges to suit door height and prepare for electrical cut-outs. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Ives (IV). b. McKinney Products (MK). c. Pemko Manufacturing (PE). d. Stanley Hardware (ST).

C. Sliding and Folding Door Hardware: Hardware is to be of type and design as specified and should comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.14. 1. Pocket Sliding Door Hardware: Rated for doors weighing up to 175 lb2. Acceptable Manufacturers:

.

a. Johnson Hardware (JO). b. Pemko Manufacturing (PE). c. KN Crowder (KC). d. Stanley Hardware (ST).

2.3 POWER TRANSFER DEVICES

A. Electrified Quick Connect Transfer Hinges: Provide electrified transfer hinges with Molex™ standardized plug connectors and sufficient number of concealed wires (up to 12) to accommodate the electrified functions specified in the Door Hardware Sets. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Ives (IV) - CON (# wires) Option.



b. McKinney Products (MK) - QC (# wires) Option. c. Stanley Hardware (ST) – C Option.

B. Concealed Quick Connect Electric Power Transfers: Provide concealed wiring pathway housing mortised into the door and frame for low voltage electrified door hardware. Furnish with Molex™ standardized plug connectors and sufficient number of concealed wires (up to 12) to accommodate the electrified functions specified in the Door Hardware Sets. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Securitron (SU) - EL-CEPT Series. b. Stanley Hardware (ST) EPT-12C Series. c. Von Duprin (VD) - EPT-10 CON Series.

C. Electric Door Wire Harnesses: Provide electric/data transfer wiring harnesses with standardized plug connectors to accommodate up to twelve (12) wires. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Provide sufficient number and type of concealed wires to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. Provide a connector for through-door electronic locking devices and from hinge to junction box above the opening. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. Determine the length required for each electrified hardware component for the door type, size and construction, minimum of two per electrified opening. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. McKinney Products (MK) – QC-C Series. b. Von Duprin (VD) – CON Series. c. Stanley Hardware (ST) – WH Series.

2.4 DOOR OPERATING TRIM

A. Door Push Plates and Pulls: ANS/BHMA A156.6 certified door pushes and pulls of type and design specified in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. 1. Push/Pull Plates: Minimum .050 inch thick, size as indicated in hardware sets,

2. Door Pull and Push Bar Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door unless otherwise indicated.

with beveled edges, secured with exposed screws unless otherwise indicated.

3. Offset Pull Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door and offset of 90 degrees unless otherwise indicated.

4. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as indicated in Hardware Sets.

5. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Ives (IV). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). c. Trimco (TC).

2.5 CYLINDERS AND KEYING

A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy.



B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Stanley Best (BE). b. No substitution – facility standard.

C. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following: 1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application. 2. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised

trim ring. 3. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks. 4. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be

flush and be free spinning with matching finishes. 5. Keyway: Match Existing Facility Standard.

D. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the following: 1. Removable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key, and for use with only

the core manufacturer's cylinder and door hardware. Provide removable core (small or large format) as specified in Hardware Sets.

E. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed. 1. Conduct specified "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system

instructions and requirements. 2. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control

number as directed by Owner. 3. Existing System: Key locks to Owner's existing Best CORMAX Patented system.

F. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys: 1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2) 2. Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5). 3. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10).

G. Construction Keying: Provide temporary keyed construction cores.

H. Key Registration List (Bitting List): 1. Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for importing

into key control software. 2. Provide transcript list in writing or electronic file as directed by the Owner.

I. Key Control Cabinet: Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, and tags with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet. Key control cabinet shall have expansion capacity of 150% of the number of locks required for the project. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Lund Equipment (LU). b. MMF Industries (MM). c. Telkee (TK).



2.6 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES

A. Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1 certified. Locksets are to be manufactured with a corrosion resistant steel case and be field-reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock body. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Stanley Best (BE) – 40H Series.

2.7 ELECTROMECHANICAL LOCKING DEVICES

A. Electromechanical Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): Subject to same compliance standards and requirements as mechanical mortise locksets, electrified locksets to be of type and design as specified below. 1. Electrified Lock Options: Where indicated in the Hardware Sets, provide electrified

options including: outside door lock/unlock trim control, latchbolt and lock/unlock status monitoring, deadbolt monitoring, and request-to-exit signaling. Support end-of-line resistors contained within the lock case. Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrified locksets standard as fail secure.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Stanley Best (BE) - 40HW EL/EU Series.

B. Electromechanical Multi-Point Locks: Vertical rod locking devices designed for openings requiring multiple latching points within one locking mechanism. Rods are retracted by dual mounted outside lever trim controls available in a variety of ANSI/BHMA operational functions. Option for single top latching only eliminates the need for bottom strikes. Electromechanical options include solenoid activated trim, electric latch retraction, and inside and outside lever monitoring. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) –7000Series.

2.8 AUXILIARY LOCKS

A. Mortise Deadlocks, Small Case: ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1, certified small case mortise type deadlocks constructed of heavy gauge wrought corrosion resistant steel. Steel or stainless steel bolts with a 1" throw and hardened steel roller pins. Deadlocks to be products of the same source manufacturer and keyway as other specified locksets. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Stanley Best (BE) - 48H Series.

2.9 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES

A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows: 1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by

manufacturer. 2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for

aluminum framing. 4. Double-lipped strikes: For locks at double acting doors. Furnish with retractable stop for

rescue hardware applications.



B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. 2. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. 3. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.5. 4. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16.

2.10 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES

A. General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed

and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as required by manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the Hardware Sets.

2. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with NFPA 80 and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the proper fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements.

3. Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging device to hold the pushbar and latch in a retracted position. Provide optional keyed cylinder dogging on devices where specified in Hardware Sets.

4. Devices must fit flat against the door face with no gap that permits unauthorized dogging of the push bar. The addition of filler strips is required in any case where the door light extends behind the device as in a full glass configuration.

5. Electromechanical Options: Subject to same compliance standards and requirements as mechanical exit devices, electrified devices to be of type and design as specified in hardware sets. Include any specific controllers when conventional power supplies are not sufficient to provide the proper inrush current.

6. Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's heavy duty escutcheon trim with threaded studs for thru-bolts.

a. Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and designs to match that of the specified locksets.

b. Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide a cylinder (Rim or Mortise) as specified in Hardware Sets.

7. Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Where surface or concealed vertical rod exit devices are used at interior openings, provide as less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise indicated. Provide dust proof strikes where thermal pins are required to project into the floor.

8. Narrow Stile Applications: At doors constructed with narrow stiles, or as specified in Hardware Sets, provide devices designed for maximum 2” wide stiles.

9. Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application. 10. Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets.

B. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 certified panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets. Exit device latch to be stainless steel, pullman type, with deadlock feature. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - ED4000 / ED5000 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 80 Series. c. Stanley Precision (PR) - Apex 2000 Series. d. Von Duprin (VD) - 35A/98 Series.



2.11 DOOR CLOSERS

A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with

the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers including installation and adjusting information on inside of cover.

2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L. listed for use of fire rated doors.

3. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1.

4. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in Hardware Sets.

5. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics.

6. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates, and through-bolt and security type fasteners as required for proper installation.

B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted: ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 surface mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. LCN Closers (LC) - 4040XP Series. b. Norton Door Controls (NO) – 9500 Series. c. Stanley (ST) – D4550 Series. d. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 281 Series.

2.12 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS

A. General: Provide operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and movement; for condition of exposure; and for compliance with UL 325. Coordinate operator mechanisms with door operation, hinges, and activation devices. 1. Fire-Rated Doors: Provide door operators for fire-rated door assemblies that comply with

NFPA 80 for fire-rated door components and are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency.

B. Electromechanical Door Operators: Self-contained units powered by permanent magnet DC motor, with closing speed controlled mechanically by gear train, connections for power, activation and safety device wiring, and manual operation including spring closing when power is off.

C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard, fabricated from aluminum with nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

D. Standard: Certified ANSI/BHMA A156.19. 1. Performance Requirements:



a. Opening Force if Power Fails: Not more than 15 lbf required to release a latch if provided, not more than 30 lbf required to manually set door in motion, and not more than 15 lbf

b. Entrapment Protection: Not more than required to fully open door.

15 lbf

E. Configuration: Surface mounted. Door operators to control single swinging and pair of swinging doors.

required to prevent stopped door from closing or opening.

F. Operation: Power opening and spring closing operation capable of meeting ANSI A117.1 accessibility guideline. Provide time delay for door to remain open before initiating closing cycle as required by ANSI/BHMA A156.19. When not in automatic mode, door operator to function as manual door closer with fully adjustable opening and closing forces, with or without electrical power. 1. On-off switch to control power to be key switch operated.

G. Features: Operator units to have full feature adjustments for door opening and closing force and speed, backcheck, motor assist acceleration from 0 to 30 seconds, time delay, vestibule interface delay, obstruction recycle, and hold open time from 0 up to 30 seconds.

H. Provide outputs and relays on board the operator to allow for coordination of exit device latch retraction, electric strikes, magnetic locks, card readers, safety and motion sensors and specified auxiliary contacts.

I. Activation Devices: Provide activation devices in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.19 standard, for condition of exposure indicated and for long term, maintenance free operation under normal traffic load operation. Coordinate activation control with electrified hardware and access control interfaces. Activation switches are standard SPST, with optional DPDT availability.

J. Signage: As required by cited ANSI/BHMA A156.19 standard for the type of operator.

K. Acceptable Manufacturers Door Operators: 1. Stanley Access (ST) - Magic Force Series. 2. Besam (BM) – SW200i Series 3. Horton (HO) – 4000 Series

2.13 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM

A. Door Protective Trim 1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the

Hardware Sets. 2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door

width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1” LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets.

3. Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified protection plates (kick, armor, or mop), fabricated from the following:

a. Stainless Steel: 300 grade, 050-inch thick. b. Brass or Bronze: 050-inch thick.

4. Options and fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the Hardware Sets. Provide countersunk screw holes.




2.14 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets.

B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated, unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Ives (IV). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). c. Trimco (TC).

C. Overhead Door Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.6, Grade 1 certified overhead stops and holders to be surface or concealed types as indicated in Hardware Sets. Track, slide, arm and jamb bracket to be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber spring of heavy tempered steel. Provide non-handed design with mounting brackets as required for proper operation and function. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Architectural Builders Hardware (AH). b. Glynn Johnson (GJ). c. Rixson Door Controls (RF). d. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO).

2.15 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS

A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated.

B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784. 1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings.

C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C. 1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure

Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and UBC 7-2, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated.



E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. National Guard Products (NG). 2. Pemko Manufacturing (PE). 3. Zero (ZE).

2.16 ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES

A. Door Position Switches: Door position magnetic reed contact switches specifically designed for use in commercial door applications. On recessed models the contact and magnetic housing snap-lock into a 1" diameter hole. Surface mounted models include wide gap distance design complete with armored flex cabling. Provide SPDT, N/O switches with optional Rare Earth Magnet installation on steel doors with flush top channels. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Security Door Controls (SD) - DPS Series. b. Interlogix (IX) – 1078 Series. c. Securitron (SU) - DPS Series.

B. Power Supplies: Provide Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Listed 12VDC or 24VDC (field selectable) filtered and regulated power supplies. Include battery backup option with integral battery charging capability in addition to operating the DC load in event of line voltage failure. Provide the least number of units, at the appropriate amperage level, sufficient to exceed the required total draw for the specified electrified hardware and access control equipment. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – 782. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – 3500 Series. c. Securitron (SU) - BPS Series. d. Von Duprin (VD) - PS.

2.17 FABRICATION

A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended.

2.18 FINISHES

A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products.

B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.

C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series.

B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications. 1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation

and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals.

B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural

Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for

Wood Flush Doors." 3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1

"Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is

located.

C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

E. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation.




A. Field Inspection: Supplier will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and state in report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.


A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame.

B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and electromechanical door hardware.

3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SETS

A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality.

B. Manufacturer’s Abbreviations:

1. MK - McKinney 2. PE - Pemko 3. SA - Sargent 4. AT - Accurate Lock and Hardware 5. AD - Adams Rite 6. RO - Rockwood 7. WI - WIKK 8. RF - Rixson



9. BM - Besam 10. SU - Securitron 11. BE – Best Access Systems 12. 00 - Other

Hardware Schedule

Doors: 4C36A-1 Set: 2-1.0

Description: Single Food Service 3 Hinge (heavy weight) T4A3786 NRP 5" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Mortise Deadlock 48H7K Patented 626 BE 1 Pull RM3110-11 US32D RO 1 Push Plate 73F CFTT US32D RO 1 Door Closer 281 PSH EN SA 1 Armor Plate K1050 42" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 406 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO

Doors: 4C31-1 Set: 2-2.0

Description: Pair Suite Club 6 Hinge T4A3786 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US10BE MK 2 Exit Device 43 55 56 NB8710 US10BE SA 2 Pull RM3311-36 Mtg-Type 12HD US10BE RO 2 Door Closer 281 PSH EB SA 2 Kick Plate K1050 8" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US10BE RO 2 Silencer 609 RO 2 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C series as required (Door) MK 2 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C series as required (Frame to J-box) MK 2 Electric Power Transfer EL-CEPT 10B SU 2 Position Switch DPS-M-BK SU 1 Power Supply BPS-24-2 SU Notes: Operation: 1. Doors electrically unlocked or locked during established time zones as programmed by the access control system. When devices are locked then the card reader grants access upon presentation of a valid credential. Exit devices mechanically lock during power failure with a mechanical key override entry. 2. Egress always free from inside by depressing inside push pad. 3. Request to exit switch in the push pad to signal authorized egress to the access control system. 4. Door position switch to signal door open/closed to the access control system.

Doors: 4C31-2, 4C31-3 Set: 2-3.0

Description: Single Suite Club 3 Hinge T4A3786 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US10BE MK 1 Electric Exit Device LC 43 55 8876 ETREM US10BE SA 1 Cylinder 12E-72 Patented 613 BE 1 Door Closer 281 PSH EB SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 8" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US10BE RO



3 Silencer 609 RO 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C series as required (Door) MK 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C series as required (Frame to J-box) MK 1 Electric Power Transfer EL-CEPT 10B SU 1 Power Supply BPS-24-1 SU Notes: Operation: 1. Doors electrically unlocked or locked during established time zones as programmed by the access control system. When devices are locked then the card reader grants access upon presentation of a valid credential. Exit devices mechanically lock during power failure with a mechanical key override entry. 2. Egress always free from inside by depressing inside push pad. 3. Request to exit switch in the push pad to signal authorized egress to the access control system. 4. Door position switch to signal door open/closed to the access control system.


Description: Single Service 2 Hinge T4A3786 NRP 5" x 4-1/2" US10BE MK 1 Hinge T4A3786 CC as required 5" x 4-1/2" US10BE MK 1 Electromechanical Lock 45HW7DEU 91H Patented RQE 613 BE 1 Surface Overhead Holder 9ADJ-X26 613E RF 1 Door Closer 281 O EB SA 1 Armor Plate K1050 42" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US10BE RO 3 Silencer 609 RO 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C series as required (Door) MK 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C series as required (Frame to J-box) MK 1 Position Switch DPS-M-BK SU 1 Power Supply BPS-24-1 SU Notes: Operation: 1. Doors electrically unlocked or locked during established time zones as programmed by the access control system. When outside lever is locked the card reader grants access upon presentation of a valid credential. Locksets mechanically lock during power failure with a mechanical key override entry. 2. Egress always free from inside by depressing inside lever. 3. Request to exit switch in lever to signal authorized egress to the access control system. 4. Door position switch to signal door open/closed to the access control system.

Doors: 4C31A-1, 4C31A-2 Set: 2-5.0

Description: Single Pocket Door 1 Sliding Door Hdwe PF28200A x PF134 KIT PE 1 Sliding Door Lock 2002CPDL-4 US10B AT 1 Flush Pull Set S2002B x S2002T US10B AT

Doors: 4C36B-1 Set: 2-6.0

Description: Single Food Service 3 Hinge (heavy weight) T4A3786 5" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Mortise Deadlock 48H7K Patented 626 BE 1 Pull RM3110-11 US32D RO 1 Push Plate 73F CFC US32D RO



1 Surface Overhead Holder 9ADJ-X26 652 RF 1 Door Closer 281 O EN SA 1 Armor Plate K1050 42" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 406 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO


Description: Single Food Service 3 Hinge (heavy weight) T4A3786 54-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Mortise Deadlock 48H7K Patented 626 BE 1 Pull RM3110-11 US32D RO 1 Push Plate 73F CFC US32D RO 1 Door Closer 281 PSH EN SA 1 Armor Plate K1050 42" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 406 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO

END OF SECTION



SECTION 087100 – DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following: 1. Swinging doors. 2. Sliding doors.

B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Mechanical door hardware. 2. Electromechanical door hardware. 3. Automatic operators. 4. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections.

C. Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”. 2. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors”. 3. Division 08 Section “Stile and Rail Wood Doors”. 4. Division 08 Section “Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts”. 5. Division 08 Section “Access Control Hardware”.

D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code. 3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 4. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 5. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 6. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 7. State Building Codes, Local Amendments.

E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards: 1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series 2. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes.

B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door



Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and

Format for the Hardware Schedule." 2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating

complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission.

3. Content: Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware

item. b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor

plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Warranty information for each product.

4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.

C. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control hardware indicating the following: 1. Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system wiring

diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and control of the access control system electrified hardware. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Include the following:

a. Elevation diagram of each unique access controlled opening showing location and interconnection of major system components with respect to their placement in the respective door openings.

b. Complete (risers, point-to-point) access control system block wiring diagrams.

c. Wiring instructions for each electronic component scheduled herein. 2. Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related sections the voltages and wiring details

required at electrically controlled and operated hardware openings.

D. Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a separate keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders/cores.

E. Informational Submittals: 1. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on

evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency.

F. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals.




A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying.

D. Automatic Operator Supplier Qualifications: Power operator products and accessories are required to be supplied and installed through current members of the manufacturer's "Power Operator Preferred Installer" program. Suppliers are to be factory trained, certified, and a direct purchaser of the specified power operators and be responsible for the installation and maintenance of the units and accessories indicated for the Project.

E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section from a single source unless otherwise indicated. 1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line

by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted. 2. Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufacturer as mechanical

door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced standards.

G. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document: 1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required. 2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion. 3. Requirements for key control storage and software. 4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software. 5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys.

H. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware. 1. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other

preparatory work performed by other trades. 2. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening. 3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. 4. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures



I. Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for installing door hardware. 1. Prior to installation of door hardware, door hardware supplier shall conduct a project

specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required.

2. Hardware supplier shall engage factory personnel for installation training on locks, exit devices and door closers.

J. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule.


A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.

C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference".

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

B. Door Hardware and Electrical Connections: Coordinate the layout and installation of scheduled electrified door hardware and related access control equipment with required connections to source power junction boxes, low voltage power supplies, detection and monitoring hardware, and fire and detection alarm systems.

C. Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.



B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of the hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation.

C. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Special Warranty Periods: 1. Ten years for mortise locks and latches. 2. Five years for exit hardware. 3. Twenty five years for manual surface door closer bodies. 4. Two years for electromechanical door hardware.

1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under.

B. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

C. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule.

D. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01, Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and their designated consultants.

2.2 HANGING DEVICES

A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles as specified in the Door Hardware Sets. 1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity, unless otherwise indicated:

a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches.



b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge

for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches. 2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for

door thickness and clearances required: a. Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified. b. Sizes from 3’1” to 4’0”: 5” standard or heavy weight as specified.

3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated

bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight. b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated

bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight. 4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Hardware Sets or on

Drawings: a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened

into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the all out-swinging lockable doors.

5. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. McKinney Products (MK). b. Ives (IV). c. Stanley Hardware (ST).

B. Continuous Geared Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.26 Grade 1-600 certified continuous geared hinge. with minimum 0.120-inch thick extruded 6060 T6 aluminum alloy hinge leaves and a minimum overall width of 4 inches. Hinges are non-handed, reversible and fabricated to template screw locations. Factory trim hinges to suit door height and prepare for electrical cut-outs. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Ives (IV). b. McKinney Products (MK). c. Pemko Manufacturing (PE). d. Stanley Hardware (ST).

C. Sliding and Folding Door Hardware: Hardware is to be of type and design as specified and should comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.14. 1. Pocket Sliding Door Hardware: Rated for doors weighing up to 175 lb. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Johnson Hardware (JO). b. Pemko Manufacturing (PE). c. KN Crowder (KC). d. Stanley Hardware (ST).

2.3 POWER TRANSFER DEVICES

A. Electrified Quick Connect Transfer Hinges: Provide electrified transfer hinges with Molex™ standardized plug connectors and sufficient number of concealed wires (up to 12) to accommodate the electrified functions specified in the Door Hardware Sets. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Ives (IV) - CON (# wires) Option. b. McKinney Products (MK) - QC (# wires) Option. c. Stanley Hardware (ST) – C Option.



B. Concealed Quick Connect Electric Power Transfers: Provide concealed wiring pathway housing mortised into the door and frame for low voltage electrified door hardware. Furnish with Molex™ standardized plug connectors and sufficient number of concealed wires (up to 12) to accommodate the electrified functions specified in the Door Hardware Sets. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Securitron (SU) - EL-CEPT Series. b. Stanley Hardware (ST) EPT-12C Series. c. Von Duprin (VD) - EPT-10 CON Series.

C. Electric Door Wire Harnesses: Provide electric/data transfer wiring harnesses with standardized plug connectors to accommodate up to twelve (12) wires. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Provide sufficient number and type of concealed wires to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. Provide a connector for through-door electronic locking devices and from hinge to junction box above the opening. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. Determine the length required for each electrified hardware component for the door type, size and construction, minimum of two per electrified opening. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. McKinney Products (MK) – QC-C Series. b. Von Duprin (VD) – CON Series. c. Stanley Hardware (ST) – WH Series.

2.4 DOOR OPERATING TRIM

A. Door Push Plates and Pulls: ANS/BHMA A156.6 certified door pushes and pulls of type and design specified in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. 1. Push/Pull Plates: Minimum .050 inch thick, size as indicated in hardware sets, with

beveled edges, secured with exposed screws unless otherwise indicated. 2. Door Pull and Push Bar Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware

sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door unless otherwise indicated. 3. Offset Pull Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum

clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door and offset of 90 degrees unless otherwise indicated.

4. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as indicated in Hardware Sets.


2.5 CYLINDERS AND KEYING

A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Stanley Best (BE). b. No substitution – facility standard.



C. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following: 1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application. 2. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised

trim ring. 3. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks. 4. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be

flush and be free spinning with matching finishes. 5. Keyway: Match Existing Facility Standard.

D. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the following: 1. Removable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key, and for use with only

the core manufacturer's cylinder and door hardware. Provide removable core (small or large format) as specified in Hardware Sets.

E. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed. 1. Conduct specified "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system

instructions and requirements. 2. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control

number as directed by Owner. 3. Existing System: Key locks to Owner's existing Best CORMAX Patented system.

F. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys: 1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2) 2. Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5). 3. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10).

G. Construction Keying: Provide temporary keyed construction cores.

H. Key Registration List (Bitting List): 1. Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for importing

into key control software. 2. Provide transcript list in writing or electronic file as directed by the Owner.

I. Key Control Cabinet: Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, and tags with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet. Key control cabinet shall have expansion capacity of 150% of the number of locks required for the project. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Lund Equipment (LU). b. MMF Industries (MM). c. Telkee (TK).

2.6 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES

A. Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1 certified. Locksets are to be manufactured with a corrosion resistant steel case and be field-reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock body. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Stanley Best (BE) – 40H Series.



2.7 ELECTROMECHANICAL LOCKING DEVICES

A. Electromechanical Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): Subject to same compliance standards and requirements as mechanical mortise locksets, electrified locksets to be of type and design as specified below. 1. Electrified Lock Options: Where indicated in the Hardware Sets, provide electrified

options including: outside door lock/unlock trim control, latchbolt and lock/unlock status monitoring, deadbolt monitoring, and request-to-exit signaling. Support end-of-line resistors contained within the lock case. Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrified locksets standard as fail secure.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Stanley Best (BE) - 40HW EL/EU Series.

B. Electromechanical Multi-Point Locks: Vertical rod locking devices designed for openings requiring multiple latching points within one locking mechanism. Rods are retracted by dual mounted outside lever trim controls available in a variety of ANSI/BHMA operational functions. Option for single top latching only eliminates the need for bottom strikes. Electromechanical options include solenoid activated trim, electric latch retraction, and inside and outside lever monitoring. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) –7000Series.

2.8 AUXILIARY LOCKS

A. Mortise Deadlocks, Small Case: ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1, certified small case mortise type deadlocks constructed of heavy gauge wrought corrosion resistant steel. Steel or stainless steel bolts with a 1" throw and hardened steel roller pins. Deadlocks to be products of the same source manufacturer and keyway as other specified locksets. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Stanley Best (BE) - 48H Series.

2.9 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES

A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows: 1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by

manufacturer. 2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for

aluminum framing. 4. Double-lipped strikes: For locks at double acting doors. Furnish with retractable stop for

rescue hardware applications.

B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. 2. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. 3. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.5. 4. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16.



2.10 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES

A. General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed

and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as required by manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the Hardware Sets.

2. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with NFPA 80 and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the proper fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements.

3. Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging device to hold the pushbar and latch in a retracted position. Provide optional keyed cylinder dogging on devices where specified in Hardware Sets.

4. Devices must fit flat against the door face with no gap that permits unauthorized dogging of the push bar. The addition of filler strips is required in any case where the door light extends behind the device as in a full glass configuration.

5. Electromechanical Options: Subject to same compliance standards and requirements as mechanical exit devices, electrified devices to be of type and design as specified in hardware sets. Include any specific controllers when conventional power supplies are not sufficient to provide the proper inrush current.

6. Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's heavy duty escutcheon trim with threaded studs for thru-bolts.

a. Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and designs to match that of the specified locksets.

b. Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide a cylinder (Rim or Mortise) as specified in Hardware Sets.

7. Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Where surface or concealed vertical rod exit devices are used at interior openings, provide as less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise indicated. Provide dust proof strikes where thermal pins are required to project into the floor.

8. Narrow Stile Applications: At doors constructed with narrow stiles, or as specified in Hardware Sets, provide devices designed for maximum 2” wide stiles.

9. Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application. 10. Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets.

B. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 certified panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets. Exit device latch to be stainless steel, pullman type, with deadlock feature. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - ED4000 / ED5000 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 80 Series. c. Stanley Precision (PR) - Apex 2000 Series. d. Von Duprin (VD) - 35A/98 Series.

2.11 DOOR CLOSERS

A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with

the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers including installation and adjusting information on inside of cover.

2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L. listed for use of fire rated doors.



3. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1.

4. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in Hardware Sets.

5. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics.

6. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates, and through-bolt and security type fasteners as required for proper installation.

B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted: ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 surface mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. LCN Closers (LC) - 4040XP Series. b. Norton Door Controls (NO) – 9500 Series. c. Stanley (ST) – D4550 Series. d. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 281 Series.

2.12 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS

A. General: Provide operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and movement; for condition of exposure; and for compliance with UL 325. Coordinate operator mechanisms with door operation, hinges, and activation devices. 1. Fire-Rated Doors: Provide door operators for fire-rated door assemblies that comply with

NFPA 80 for fire-rated door components and are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency.

B. Electromechanical Door Operators: Self-contained units powered by permanent magnet DC motor, with closing speed controlled mechanically by gear train, connections for power, activation and safety device wiring, and manual operation including spring closing when power is off.

C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard, fabricated from aluminum with nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

D. Standard: Certified ANSI/BHMA A156.19. 1. Performance Requirements:

a. Opening Force if Power Fails: Not more than 15 lbf required to release a latch if provided, not more than 30 lbf required to manually set door in motion, and not more than 15 lbf required to fully open door.

b. Entrapment Protection: Not more than 15 lbf required to prevent stopped door from closing or opening.

E. Configuration: Surface mounted. Door operators to control single swinging and pair of swinging doors.

F. Operation: Power opening and spring closing operation capable of meeting ANSI A117.1 accessibility guideline. Provide time delay for door to remain open before initiating closing cycle as required by ANSI/BHMA A156.19. When not in automatic mode, door operator to function as



manual door closer with fully adjustable opening and closing forces, with or without electrical power. 1. On-off switch to control power to be key switch operated.

G. Features: Operator units to have full feature adjustments for door opening and closing force and speed, backcheck, motor assist acceleration from 0 to 30 seconds, time delay, vestibule interface delay, obstruction recycle, and hold open time from 0 up to 30 seconds.

H. Provide outputs and relays on board the operator to allow for coordination of exit device latch retraction, electric strikes, magnetic locks, card readers, safety and motion sensors and specified auxiliary contacts.

I. Activation Devices: Provide activation devices in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.19 standard, for condition of exposure indicated and for long term, maintenance free operation under normal traffic load operation. Coordinate activation control with electrified hardware and access control interfaces. Activation switches are standard SPST, with optional DPDT availability.

J. Signage: As required by cited ANSI/BHMA A156.19 standard for the type of operator.

K. Acceptable Manufacturers Door Operators: 1. Stanley Access (ST) - Magic Force Series. 2. Besam (BM) – SW200i Series 3. Horton (HO) – 4000 Series

2.13 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM

A. Door Protective Trim 1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the

Hardware Sets. 2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door

width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1” LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets.

3. Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified protection plates (kick, armor, or mop), fabricated from the following:

a. Stainless Steel: 300 grade, 050-inch thick. b. Brass or Bronze: 050-inch thick.

4. Options and fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the Hardware Sets. Provide countersunk screw holes.


2.14 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets.

B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated,



unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Ives (IV). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). c. Trimco (TC).

C. Overhead Door Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.6, Grade 1 certified overhead stops and holders to be surface or concealed types as indicated in Hardware Sets. Track, slide, arm and jamb bracket to be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber spring of heavy tempered steel. Provide non-handed design with mounting brackets as required for proper operation and function. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Architectural Builders Hardware (AH). b. Glynn Johnson (GJ). c. Rixson Door Controls (RF). d. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO).

2.15 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS

A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated.

B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784. 1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings.

C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C. 1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure

Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and UBC 7-2, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated.

E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. National Guard Products (NG). 2. Pemko Manufacturing (PE). 3. Zero (ZE).

2.16 ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES

A. Door Position Switches: Door position magnetic reed contact switches specifically designed for use in commercial door applications. On recessed models the contact and magnetic housing snap-lock into a 1" diameter hole. Surface mounted models include wide gap distance design



complete with armored flex cabling. Provide SPDT, N/O switches with optional Rare Earth Magnet installation on steel doors with flush top channels. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Security Door Controls (SD) - DPS Series. b. Interlogix (IX) – 1078 Series. c. Securitron (SU) - DPS Series.

B. Power Supplies: Provide Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Listed 12VDC or 24VDC (field selectable) filtered and regulated power supplies. Include battery backup option with integral battery charging capability in addition to operating the DC load in event of line voltage failure. Provide the least number of units, at the appropriate amperage level, sufficient to exceed the required total draw for the specified electrified hardware and access control equipment. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – 782. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – 3500 Series. c. Securitron (SU) - BPS Series. d. Von Duprin (VD) - PS.

2.17 FABRICATION

A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended.

2.18 FINISHES

A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products.

B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.

C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series.

B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications. 1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation

and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals.

B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural

Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for

Wood Flush Doors." 3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1

"Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is

located.

C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

E. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation.


A. Field Inspection: Supplier will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and state in report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.




A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame.

B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and electromechanical door hardware.

3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SETS

A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality.

B. Manufacturer’s Abbreviations:

1. MK - McKinney 2. PE - Pemko 3. SA - Sargent 4. AT - Accurate Lock and Hardware 5. AD - Adams Rite 6. RO - Rockwood 7. WI - WIKK 8. RF - Rixson 9. BM - Besam 10. SU - Securitron 11. BE – Best Access Systems 12. 00 - Other Hardware Schedule Set: 2-1.0 Doors: 4C36A-1 Description: Single Food Service 3 Hinge (heavy weight) T4A3786 NRP 5" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Mortise Deadlock 48H7K Patented 626 BE 1 Pull RM3110-11 US32D RO 1 Push Plate 73F CFTT US32D RO



1 Door Closer 281 PSH EN SA 1 Armor Plate K1050 42" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 406 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO Set: 2-2.0 Doors: 4C31-1 Description: Pair Suite Club 6 Hinge T4A3786 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US10BE MK 2 Exit Device 43 55 56 NB8710 US10BE SA 2 Pull RM3311-36 Mtg-Type 12HD US10BE RO 2 Door Closer 281 PSH EB SA 2 Kick Plate K1050 8" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US10BE RO 2 Silencer 609 RO 2 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C series as required (Door) MK 2 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C series as required (Frame to J-box) MK 2 Electric Power Transfer EL-CEPT 10B SU 2 Position Switch DPS-M-BK SU 1 Power Supply BPS-24-2 SU Notes: Operation: 1. Doors electrically unlocked or locked during established time zones as programmed by the access control system. When devices are locked then the card reader grants access upon presentation of a valid credential. Exit devices mechanically lock during power failure with a mechanical key override entry. 2. Egress always free from inside by depressing inside push pad. 3. Request to exit switch in the push pad to signal authorized egress to the access control system. 4. Door position switch to signal door open/closed to the access control system. Set: 2-3.0 Doors: 4C31-2, 4C31-3 Description: Single Suite Club 3 Hinge T4A3786 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US10BE MK 1 Electric Exit Device LC 43 55 8876 ETREM US10BE SA 1 Cylinder 12E-72 Patented 613 BE 1 Door Closer 281 PSH EB SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 8" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US10BE RO 3 Silencer 609 RO 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C series as required (Door) MK 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C series as required (Frame to J-box) MK 1 Electric Power Transfer EL-CEPT 10B SU 1 Power Supply BPS-24-1 SU Notes: Operation: 1. Doors electrically unlocked or locked during established time zones as programmed by the access control system. When devices are locked then the card reader grants access upon presentation of a valid credential. Exit devices mechanically lock during power failure with a mechanical key override entry. 2. Egress always free from inside by depressing inside push pad. 3. Request to exit switch in the push pad to signal authorized egress to the access control system. 4. Door position switch to signal door open/closed to the access control system. Set: 2-4.0 Doors: 4C31A-3 Description: Single Service



2 Hinge T4A3786 NRP 5" x 4-1/2" US10BE MK 1 Hinge T4A3786 CC as required 5" x 4-1/2" US10BE MK 1 Electromechanical Lock 45HW7DEU 91H Patented RQE 613 BE 1 Surface Overhead Holder 9ADJ-X26 613E RF 1 Door Closer 281 O EB SA 1 Armor Plate K1050 42" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US10BE RO 3 Silencer 609 RO 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C series as required (Door) MK 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C series as required (Frame to J-box) MK 1 Position Switch DPS-M-BK SU 1 Power Supply BPS-24-1 SU Notes: Operation: 1. Doors electrically unlocked or locked during established time zones as programmed by the access control system. When outside lever is locked the card reader grants access upon presentation of a valid credential. Locksets mechanically lock during power failure with a mechanical key override entry. 2. Egress always free from inside by depressing inside lever. 3. Request to exit switch in lever to signal authorized egress to the access control system. 4. Door position switch to signal door open/closed to the access control system. Set: 2-5.0 Doors: 4C31A-1, 4C31A-2 Description: Single Pocket Door 1 Sliding Door Hdwe PF28200A x PF134 KIT PE 1 Sliding Door Lock 2002CPDL-4 US10B AT 1 Flush Pull Set S2002B x S2002T US10B AT Set: 2-6.0 Doors: 4C36B-1 Description: Single Food Service 3 Hinge (heavy weight) T4A3786 5" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Mortise Deadlock 48H7K Patented 626 BE 1 Pull RM3110-11 US32D RO 1 Push Plate 73F CFC US32D RO 1 Surface Overhead Holder 9ADJ-X26 652 RF 1 Door Closer 281 O EN SA 1 Armor Plate K1050 42" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 406 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO Set: 2-7.0 Doors: 4C36A-2 Description: Single Food Service 3 Hinge (heavy weight) T4A3786 54-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Mortise Deadlock 48H7K Patented 626 BE 1 Pull RM3110-11 US32D RO 1 Push Plate 73F CFC US32D RO 1 Door Closer 281 PSH EN SA 1 Armor Plate K1050 42" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 406 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO



END OF SECTION


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016

©Populous Group, LLC 2016 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 65 13 - 1

SECTION 09 65 13 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient base. 2. Resilient molding accessories. 3. Resilient stair accessories.

B. Related Sections: 1. See Division 09 “Tile” for nosings associated with stairs.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12 inches long.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated and for each color, texture, and pattern required in manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches long.

D. Product Schedule: For resilient base and accessory products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each

type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.


A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Coordinate mockups in this Section with mockups specified in other Sections.


A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016



A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.2 THERMOPLASTIC-RUBBER BASE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Allstate Rubber Corp. 2. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 3. Burke Mercer Flooring Products, Division of Burke Industries Inc. 4. Flexco. 5. Johnsonite; A Tarkett Company. 6. Mondo Rubber International, Inc. 7. Nora Systems, Inc. 8. Roppe Corporation, USA. 9. VPI, LLC, Floor Products Division..

B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic). 1. Group: I (solid, homogeneous). 2. Style and Location:

a. Style A, Straight: Provide in areas with carpet. b. Style B, Cove: Provide in areas with resilient flooring. c. Style C, Butt to: Provide in areas indicated.

C. Thickness: 0.125 inch.

D. Height: As indicated on Drawings.

E. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long or coils in manufacturer's standard length.

F. Outside Corners: Job formed.

G. Inside Corners: Job formed.

H. Colors: Match Architect's sample.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


2.3 RUBBER MOLDING ACCESSORY

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Roppe Corporation, USA. 2. VPI, LLC, Floor Products Division. 3. Johnsonite. 4. Burke Mercer Flooring Products, Division of Burke Industries Inc..

B. Description: Rubber cap for carpet bar for tackless installations, carpet edge for glue-down applications, reducer strip for resilient flooring, joiner for tile and carpet transition strips or sealed concrete.

C. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated.

D. Locations: Provide rubber molding accessories in areas indicated.

E. Colors and Patterns: Match Architect's sample.

2.4 RUBBER MOLDING ACCESSORY – STAIR NOSING

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Burke Mercer Flooring Products, Division of Burke Industries Inc. 2. Flexco. 3. Johnsonite; A Tarkett Company 4. Roppe Corporation, USA. 5. VPI, LLC, Floor Products Division..

B. Description: Rubber stair-tread nosing.

C. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated.

D. Locations: Provide stair nosings at wood subfloor areas or as indicated in Drawings.

E. Colors and Patterns: Match Architect's sample. 1. Unless indicated otherwise, match resilient accessory to adjacent higher surface

material.

2.5 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

C. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edges of flooring, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.

D. Stair-Tread Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient stair-tread manufacturer to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified

in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives

and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

C. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation

materials into spaces where they will be installed.

D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products.

3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


H. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns

not less than 4 inches in length. a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.

2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 4 inches in length. a. Miter corners to minimize open joints.

3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed.

C. Resilient Stair Accessories: 1. Use stair-tread-nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread

contours. 2. Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. 3. For treads installed as separate, equal-length units, install to produce a flush joint

between units.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016

SHEET CARPETING 09 68 16 - 1

SECTION 09 68 16 - SHEET CARPETING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Tufted carpet.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 02 41 19 "Selective Demolition" for removing existing floor coverings. 2. Section 09 65 13 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and

accessories installed with carpet.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to carpet installation including, but not limited to,

the following: a. Review delivery, storage, and handling procedures. b. Review ambient conditions and ventilation procedures. c. Review subfloor preparation procedures. d. Review installation procedures.


A. Product Data: For the following, including installation recommendations for each type of substrate: 1. Carpet: For each type indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical

characteristics, durability, and fade resistance.

B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where

cutouts are required in carpet. 2. Carpet type, color, and dye lot. 3. Locations where dye lot changes occur. 4. Seam locations, types, and methods. 5. Type of subfloor. 6. Type of installation. 7. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point. 8. Pile direction. 9. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 10. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 11. Transition details to other flooring materials.

C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet: 18-inch- square Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- long Samples.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


3. Carpet Seam: 6-inch Sample. 4. Mitered Carpet Border Seam: 12-inch- square Sample. Show carpet pattern alignment.

D. Product Schedule: For carpet. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Product Test Reports: For carpet, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and

procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet: Full-width rolls equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but

not less than 10 sq. yd.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced Installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level.

B. Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Where indicated, provide carpet identical to those of assemblies tested for fire response per NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.


A. Comply with CRI 104.


A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

C. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured, are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, and have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, install carpet before installing these items.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure

of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge

raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, and delamination. 3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Refer to the Finish Legend in the Drawings. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Finish Legend or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Atlas Carpet Mills, Inc. 2. Beaulieu Group LLC. 3. Bentley Prince Street, Inc. 4. Interface, LLC. 5. J&J Invision; J&J Industries, Inc. 6. Julie Industries. 7. Mannington Mills, Inc. 8. Milliken & Company. 9. Mohawk Group (The); Mohawk Carpet, LLC. 10. Patcraft; a division of Shaw Industries, Inc. 11. PhillyQueen; a division of Shaw Industries, Inc. 12. Shaw Contract Group; a Berkshire Hathaway company. 13. Tandus; a Tarkett company.

2.2 SHEET CARPET

A. Carpets CA1 through CA__ : 1. Refer to the Finish Legend for each Basis of Design product selection details.

2.3 TUFTED CARPET <Insert designation>

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 1. Aqua Hospitality. 2. Clayton Miller Hospitality. 3. Signature Hosptiality Carpets.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's or carpet supplier's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following: 1. <Insert manufacturers' names>.

C. Color: [Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>.

D. Pattern: [Match Architect's samples] <Insert pattern>.

E. Fiber Content: [100 percent nylon 6, 6] [100 percent nylon 6] [100 percent polypropylene] <Insert fiber and content by percentage>.

F. Fiber Type: <Insert proprietary fiber type>.

G. Pile Characteristic: [Level-loop] [Cut] [Cut-and-loop] [Multilevel-loop] [Level tip shear] [Random shear] [Frieze] [Sculptured] <Insert characteristic> pile.

H. Yarn Twist: <Insert twist in TPI>.

I. Yarn Count: <Insert yarn count>.

J. Density: <Insert oz./cu. yd.>.

K. Pile Thickness: <Insert inches> for finished carpet[ per ASTM D 6859].

L. Stitches: <Insert stitches per inch>.

M. Gage: <Insert gage in ends per inch>.

N. Face Weight: <Insert oz./sq. yd.>.

O. Total Weight: <Insert oz./sq. yd.> for finished carpet.

P. Primary Backing: [Manufacturer's standard material] [Woven polypropylene] [Nonwoven, polypropylene or polyester] <Insert specific primary backing material>.

Q. Secondary Backing: [Manufacturer's standard material] [Woven polypropylene] [Nonwoven, polypropylene or polyester] [Woven jute] [Fiberglass] <Insert specific secondary backing material>.

R. Backcoating: [Manufacturer's standard material] [SBR latex] [PVC] [Thermoplastic copolymer] <Insert backcoating; consult manufacturers>.

S. Backing System: <Insert proprietary name>.

T. Width: [12 feet] [6 feet] [13.5 feet] [15 feet] <Insert dimension>.

U. Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: [Manufacturer's standard material] <Insert treatment>.

V. Antimicrobial Treatment: [Manufacturer's standard material] <Insert treatment>.

W. Performance Characteristics: As follows: 1. Appearance Retention Rating: [Moderate traffic, 2.5] [Heavy traffic, 3.0] [Severe

traffic, 3.5] <Insert number> minimum per ASTM D 7330.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


2. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than [0.45 W/sq. cm] [0.22 W/sq. cm]. 3. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 lbf per ASTM D 2646. 4. Tuft Bind: Not less than [3 lbf] [5 lbf] [6.2 lbf] [8 lbf] [10 lbf] <Insert value> per

ASTM D 1335. 5. Delamination: Not less than [2.5 lbf/in.] [3.5 lbf/in.] [4 lbf/in.] <Insert value> per

ASTM D 3936. 6. Resistance to Insects: Comply with AATCC 24. 7. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): <Insert NRC> per ASTM C 423. 8. Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, per AATCC 165. 9. Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after [40] [60] <Insert number> AFU (AATCC

fading units) per AATCC 16, Option E. 10. Antimicrobial Activity: Not less than 2-mm halo of inhibition for gram-positive bacteria; not

less than 1-mm halo of inhibition for gram-negative bacteria; no fungal growth; per AATCC 174.

11. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than [3.5] [2] <Insert number> kV per AATCC 134. 12. Emissions: Provide carpet that complies with testing and product requirements of CRI's

"Green Label Plus" program.

2.4 SHEET CARPET

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Atlas. 2. Bentley. 3. Mohawk Group.

B. Color: Match Architect's samples.

C. Pattern: Match Architect's samples.

D. Fiber Content: Nylon.

E. Face Construction: Multi-level pattern.

F. Pile Characteristic: Cut-and-loop pile.

G. Width: 12 feet.

H. Gauge: 1/11.

I. Stitches per Inch: 11.0.

J. Density: 6261.

K. Tufted Weight: 40 oz./sq. yd.

L. Total thickness: 0.346 inches.

M. Finished pile thickness: 0.230 inches.

N. Backing: Manufacturer's standard. 1. Secondary Backing: Ultraloc.

O. Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


P. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material.

Q. Performance Characteristics: As follows: 1. Appearance Retention Rating: Severe traffic, 3.5 minimum per ASTM D 7330. 2. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 lbf per ASTM D 2646. 3. Resistance to Insects: Comply with AATCC 24. 4. Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, per AATCC 165. 5. Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after 40 AFU (AATCC fading units) per

AATCC 16, Option E. 6. Emissions: Provide carpet that complies with testing and product requirements of CRI's

"Green Label Plus" program.

2.5 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet manufacturer.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is recommended or provided by carpet manufacturer. 1. Use adhesives with VOC content not more than 50 g/L when calculated according to

40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Seam Adhesive: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams.

D. Metal Edge/Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of profile and width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Examine carpet for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.

B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other

materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet manufacturer.

2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet.

3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.

C. For wood subfloors, verify the following: 1. Underlayment over subfloor complies with requirements specified in

Section 06 16 00 "Sheathing."


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


2. Underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that may interfere with adhesive bond or show through surface.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates.

B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch, unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer.

D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with CRI 104 and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for the following: 1. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, "Direct Glue-Down

Installation." 2. Stair Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 13, "Carpet on Stairs" for glue-down

installation.

B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position.

C. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet.

D. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer.

E. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Patterned Carpet Installations" and with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet:


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer.

2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.

B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations."

END OF SECTION


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016

©Populous Group, LLC 2016 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS 12 36 61 - 1

SECTION 12 36 61 - SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Quartz agglomerate countertops and splashes. 2. Countertop brackets, grommets and miscellaneous accessories.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 22 for nonintegral sinks and plumbing fittings.


A. Product Data: For countertop materials and sinks.

B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and splash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products. Samples are not required if Basis-of-Design Product is submitted. 1. Countertop material, 6 inches square. 2. One full-size solid-surface-material countertop, with front edge and splash, 8 by 10

inches, of construction and in configuration specified. 3. One full-size quartz agglomerate countertop, with front edge and splash, 8 by 10 inches,

of construction and in configuration specified.

1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or splashes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOPS

A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top. 2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner. 3. Endsplash: Matching backsplash.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


B. Countertops: 3/4-inch- thick quartz agglomerate with front edge built up with same material, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Splashes: 3/4-inch- thick quartz agglomerate, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide endsplash at all locations where countertop is butted up against a side wall.

D. Fabrication: Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied edges and backsplashes unless otherwise indicated. Comply with quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 1. Make cutouts for fixtures in the shop using templates furnished by fixture manufacturer.

a. For undercounter fixtures, fabricate vertical cut edges straight, slightly eased at top.

2. Drill holes for plumbing fittings and soap dispensers in the shop.

2.2 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS

A. Plywood: Exterior grade hardwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded.

B. Quartz Agglomerate: Solid sheets consisting of quartz aggregates bound together with a matrix of filled plastic resin and complying with the "Physical Characteristics of Materials" Article of ANSI SS1. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

indicated on Finish Legend: a. Cambria.

2. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Countertop Brackets: 1/8” thick metal wall brackets to be painted to match adjacent wall unless noted otherwise on Drawings or Finish Schedule. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Rakks, EH 1824 1) Counters up to 25” deep to have 24” side mounted against wall. 2) Counters between 25 ½” and 30” to have 18” side mounted against wall.

b. Gambas, Workstation Brackets, 18” x 24” with cleat mount. 2. Spacing: 36” o.c. between brackets with first bracket placed 18” from side wall or cabinet.

B. Cleats: continuously painted wood or aluminum angle. 1. Basis of Design: Rakks: 2” x 2” x 1/8” Cleat Stock.

C. Grommets: Provide grommets by Doug Mockett or equal. Metal finishes as selected from manufacturer’s standard range. 1. Metal Grommet with cover: BRV2/SQ. 2. Metal Grommet without cover: MM5A for portable POS station, interior cabinet location. 3. Trash Managers: TM1B-Steel. 4. Locate (1) grommet per POS station and where indicated on drawings. Hidden grommets

for electrical wires are (1) per cabinet. Final locations determined in Shop Drawings.

D. Undercounter Purse Hooks: Double hook with mounting screwed into underside of countertop. 1. National Hardware: #V165 or similar. Finishes to be selected from manufacturer’s

standard finishes.


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet.

B. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Pre-drill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. 1. Install backsplashes and endsplashes to comply with manufacturer's written instructions

for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 2. Seal edges of cutouts in subtops by saturating with varnish.

END OF SECTION


POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 18, 2016


THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK


BID PACKAGE #2 – SUITE CONSOLIDATION

POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 8, 2016

Henderson Engineers, Inc Audio Video Systems 27 41 00 - 1

SECTION 27 41 00 - AUDIO VIDEO SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

SUMMARY

A. These specifications and the associated TA-series drawings describe the sound and audio-visual (AV) system (hereafter referred to as the “Technical System”) to be furnished and installed in Bankers Life Fieldhouse, Indianapolis, Indiana.

B. System is intended for hospitality events. Audio system is for background music and event support only.

C. Work includes all such work indicated in all of the Contract Documents, including, but not limited to: Instructions to Bidders; Proposal Form; General Conditions; Supplementary General Conditions; Architectural, Structural, Communications, Fire Alarm and Electronic Safety and Security Drawings and Specifications; and Addenda.

D. Work under this section of the specifications includes all labor, equipment, and installation as required to provide a complete technical system in compliance with the contract documents.

E. Employ the services of a qualified structural engineer to review all overhead mounting, suspension, and rigging details of the technical system equipment. All mounting and rigging schemes indicated on the drawings are shown for concept only. Submit shop drawings stamped by a structural engineer of all details and weights for review by the project’s Architect, Structural Engineer, and Design Consultant.

F. The work in this section shall be coordinated with other work to determine installation scope for conduit, outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, terminal cabinets, 120-volt AC power circuits, and insulated ground cables required for the technical system. 1. Provide related low-voltage “on/off" AC power control system wiring, low-voltage "on/off"

control switches, and certain AC power/ground requirements internal to the equipment racks as specifically noted herein and/or on the drawings.

RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section, as do the following: 1. Division 27 Section “General Communications”. 2. Division 27 Section “Common Work Results for Communications”.

B. All Category 5e/6 and fiber optic cabling and terminations shall adhere to the Division 27 Section “Telecommunications Requirements for Audio Video Systems”.

C. This section is a parent section to all sections numbered 274101 thru 274199. Requirements found in this section shall apply to all child sections unless otherwise noted. 1. Exception: Division 27 “Television Distribution Systems” is a stand-alone section.



POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 8, 2016


EXAMINATION OF SITE

A. This project is an existing facility undergoing renovation.

B. Prior to submitting a bid personally examine the site of the proposed work and verify the conditions which involve his work.

C. By the act of submitting a bid, the contractor will be deemed to have made reasonable allowances for site examinations, site conditions, and included all costs in his proposal. Failure to verify these conditions will not be considered a basis for the granting of additional compensation.

MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP

A. All equipment shall be new and in proper operating condition. All workmanship shall be of the finest quality by experienced installation technicians.

B. Contact the Architect, in writing, regarding the selection of colors for all exposed equipment.

C. In addition to a complete set of the system project drawings and specifications, maintain at the job site a complete set of manufacturer's original operation, instruction, installation, and service manuals for each equipment item, for reference.

ORDINANCE AND CODES

A. Comply with all applicable national and local codes and ordinances, and obtain all required permits. Assume responsibility for any violations of the law within the scope of his work.

DEFINITIONS

A. Structured Cabling System – the physical infrastructure installed to support information technology/transport for voice and data applications, commonly referred to as a Telecommunications System. This includes, but is not limited to: Category 3/5e/6/6A copper cabling, terminations/blocks, modules, faceplates, etc., and optical fiber cabling, terminations, modules, etc.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Contractor General Qualifications: 1. Compliance with the requirements of Division 1. 2. Licensed to perform work of this type in the project jurisdiction. 3. At least five (5) years of verifiable direct experience with the devices, equipment and systems

of the type and scope specified herein. 4. Prior successful experience of projects of similar size, scope and type as outlined in the

Construction Documents. 5. Active membership in the National Systems Contractors Association (NSCA). 6. Active membership in InfoComm. 7. Fully staffed and equipped maintenance and repair facility. 8. Factory-authorized dealer for the major components specified. 9. Crestron certified programmer and Lighting Controls programmer.

B. Contractor Personnel Qualifications:



POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 8, 2016


1. Skilled workers thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work in this section. The workers shall have at least three (3) years direct experience in similar work, evidence of which shall be verified in writing with appropriate references.

2. Supervisor with at least five (5) years direct experience in similar work. The supervisor shall be present for and in responsible charge of all work in the fabrication shop and on the project site during all phases of the installation and testing of the system(s). To assure continuity, this supervisor shall be the same individual throughout the execution of the work unless illness, loss of personnel, or other reasonable circumstances intervene. This personal shall act as the Technical System Project manager, and shall attend all scheduled project meetings.

C. Provide additional information as required for review by the Owner’s Representative, Architect, and Design Consultant to aid in proving acceptability.

SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions of equipment/materials will be considered for approval. The contractor shall bear the “burden of proof” for demonstrating substitute equipment/materials’ equivalency and suitability.

B. Requests for substitution of equipment/materials shall comply with Division 01 regarding the proposed substitute item(s), specifications, and front/rear views (if applicable).

C. In the absence of Division 01 specifications on substitutions, information regarding substitution of equipment/materials shall be presented in writing to the Owner’s Representative, Architect, and Design Consultant for review. This written request shall contain copies of complete manufacturer's literature regarding the proposed substitute item(s), specifications, and front/rear views (if applicable).

D. Submission of substitute equipment/materials (including any associated software) may be required for evaluation by the Design Consultant, at his discretion, prior to acceptance, and subject to evaluation fees. Contractor shall be responsible for the substituted equipment/materials and for all related shipping costs and evaluation fees.

E. Replace any and all approved, installed substitute equipment/materials if an unforeseen defect appears, or if operational characteristics do not fulfill the design intent of the system.

SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to requirements in Division 27 Section “General Communications Requirements”.

B. Include the following items: 1. Bid

a. Contractor Qualifications b. Personnel Qualifications

2. Pre-Construction a. Equipment List b. Product substitutions, in accordance with Division 1 for discontinued products only c. Manufacturers’ Cut-sheets

1) Minor pieces of equipment that are not visible and inconsequential to system operation may be included on Equipment List and no cut-sheet is required.

d. Schedule



POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 8, 2016


1) Include quiet time on-site for system Commissioning. e. AV Pathways and Cabling – Follow requirements of Division 27 Section “Common Work

Results for Communications”. f. Structural Details – For hung equipment, provide details showing mounting,

suspension, and rigging, including weights of supported equipment and mounting/suspension materials, approved and stamped by a licensed structural engineer.

g. Equipment Rack Shop Drawings - Equipment rack front elevation showing equipment and panel layout.

h. Panel, Patch Panel, and Plate Shop Drawings - All panel, patch panel, and plate layouts indicating locations of connectors, engraving, nomenclature, panel material, and finish. Include Structured Cabling Work required by the technical system.

i. Refer to child sections for additional requirements. 3. Project Completion

a. Refer to Division 27 Section “General Communications Requirements” and the Record Drawings and Operation and Maintenance Data sub-sections in Part 3 of this section for requirements.

b. Preliminary Testing Documentation Package – Provide preliminary results of system testing as described in Part 3 of this section for review prior to Commissioning. Include final results with Closeout Documentation.

c. Refer to child sections for additional requirements.

ELECTRONIC FILE SHARING

A. Refer to Division 27 Section “General Communications Requirements” for information on obtaining electronic versions of the construction drawings.

BASE BID AND ALTERNATES

A. In addition to the Base Bid, provide prices for designated Alternates, as defined below and as further described in the specifications and on the drawings. Alternates shall be Add (additive) Alternates as described herein and on the drawings. Any work not designated as an Alternate shall be provided in the Base Bid.

B. Any and all Alternates that are not accepted (i.e., not installed) shall include provisions for future installation of these Alternates. Typical provisions include engraving and installation for all panel-mounted receptacles reflecting the complete system, all wiring installed in conduit (except where conduit remains empty) with suitable identification (noted on the working drawings for inclusion with the record drawings), patch panel wiring and labeling, and appropriate rack space (including blank panels for Alternate equipment not installed).

C. The Owner’s Representative reserves the right to: reject all bids; reject all Alternates; accept any Alternates in any order or combination; and determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and accepted Alternates.

D. Alternates No. 2-5: Modify Lighting system programming based on alternate light fixture solutions. Refer to Electrical drawings for requirements.

PROTECTION OF WORK

A. Protect all work, materials and equipment from damage due to any cause. Provide for the safety and new condition of the equipment and materials until final acceptance by the Owner’s



POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 8, 2016


Representative. Replace all damaged or defective materials and/or equipment as directed by the Architect or Design Consultant.

B. Equipment racks, cabling racks, junction boxes, termination boxes, and other exposed equipment shall be kept covered and protected from airborne contaminates. Clean all debris from the equipment room(s)/location(s) and control areas, and clean all equipment and the interior rack floor, prior to system commissioning activities.

EXISTING AND/ OR OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT

A. Certain existing technical system equipment is to be re-used with the new technical system as indicated on the drawings and in these specifications. Any equipment not specifically noted as “existing” shall be new, and shall be provided.

B. Owner’s existing portable equipment (or other Owner-furnished equipment), may be used by the Owner’s Representative with the new technical systems. Proper operation and maintenance of such existing equipment remains the responsibility of the Owner’s Representative.

EXISTING WIRING

A. Comply with NEC (National Electrical Code) requirements regarding removal of all existing wiring that is not re-used with the system(s) defined herein.

TEMPORARY TECHNICAL SYSTEM

A. Provide and operate a temporary technical system of reasonably equivalent function as determined by the Design Consultant if the work in this section, as a failure of the contractor, is incomplete or found not in conformance with the contract documents. The temporary system shall remain in use until acceptance of the permanent system.

WARRANTY

A. Warrant all work executed under this contract, including all in-shop and onsite material, parts and labor, for a period of twelve months after the date of final acceptance. 1. Existing or any other Owner-furnished equipment shall not be included in this warranty. 2. For equipment that has an advertised manufacturer’s warranty longer than 12 months,

include end date of warranty period.

B. The warranty services are limited to normal business hours, unless additional agreements are made between the Owner’s Representative and the contractor.

C. Warranty work relating to technically complex equipment and/or programming such as for codecs, digital signal processing, control systems, and video projectors shall be performed by a factory authorized technician.

D. Damage to the system resultant from improper use or adjustment by others, negligence, acts of nature, or other causes which are beyond the contractor’s control shall be excluded from the warranty.

E. Refer to General Conditions for additional requirements.



POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 8, 2016


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

GENERAL

A. Unless otherwise designated, provide all of one type of equipment from one manufacturer; for example, microphones of one type by one manufacturer, data switches of one type by one manufacturer, cabling of one type by one manufacturer, or loudspeakers of one type by one manufacturer.

B. Equipment and wiring shown on the drawings represents the basis of design. Ensure similar or better performance is achieved by the use of equipment other than that shown.

C. All major components of technical system equipment shall be provided and installed by a qualified contractor as outlined in Part 1 of this section.

D. All equipment shall be new and of professional quality.

E. Some items listed in these specifications are custom-made products. Ensure when pricing and ordering equipment that the exact part number called out is used. If there is a discrepancy, contact the Design Consultant for clarification.

F. Each software programmable device furnished (i.e. Digital Signal Processor, control system, etc.) shall include most recent software and appropriate computer interface cable - minimum 25' (device to PC). Cable, software, source (uncompiled) code and all related aspects of all software-controlled equipment shall become the property of the Owner and will be furnished as a portion of the Operation & Maintenance (O&M) manuals (see Operation & Maintenance Manuals near the end of Part 3).

G. The quantities of each item of portable or mobile equipment (and other portable or loose accessories), as well as those items associated with Alternates, are indicated in parenthesis. Such equipment is intended to be shared between rooms having technical systems, except where noted for use in one specific room.

ETHERNET SWITCHES & ACCESSORIES

A. Ethernet switches shall be as recommended by the manufacturer(s) of the connected technical system equipment. These devices shall also be coordinated with the Owner’s Representatives IT department to maintain common products. Each shall be labeled as shown on the technical system drawings and as required to match the Owner’s Representatives IT labeling standard. Products listed in this portion of the specifications are representative – furnish the most recent product.

B. Ethernet switches shall have IPv4 and IPv6 routing, multicast routing, advanced quality of service (QoS), and security features in hardware. Disabling of power saving features and other blocking features shall be available for proper signal traffic.

C. Ethernet switches shall be provided with all licensing requirements, product activation requirements, etc. for proper operation.

D. Ethernet switches shall be configured for proper operation of the system. Configuration shall comply with Owner’s network standards.



POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 8, 2016


E. Ethernet Switch – (##)(M)(P)(G)(R)(-L3)(-AVB): Ethernet switch with SFP uplink capabilities and the following characteristics required as shown on the signal flows: 1. Cisco 2960 Series; or HP 2530 Series; or Extreme Networks Summit Series; or approved

equal. a. ##, minimum number of ports b. M, managed (minimum unmanaged if not included) c. P, PoE (non-PoE if not included) d. G, gigabit 10/100/1000baseT (minimum 10/100baseT if not included) e. R, rack mount (rack mounting optional if not included)

2. Cisco 3560 Series; or HP 5120 Series; or Extreme Networks Summit Series; or approved equal. a. ##, minimum number of ports b. M, managed (minimum unmanaged if not included) c. P, PoE (non-PoE if not included) d. G, gigabit 10/100/1000baseT (minimum 10/100baseT if not included) e. R, rack mount (rack mounting optional if not included) f. –L3, layer 3 required (minimum layer 2 if not included)

3. Extreme Networks Summit X430 or X440 Series (AVB requires AVB feature pack). a. ##, minimum number of ports b. M, managed (minimum unmanaged if not included) c. P, PoE (non-PoE if not included) d. G, gigabit 10/100/1000baseT (minimum 10/100baseT if not included) e. R, rack mount (rack mounting optional if not included) f. –AVB, AVB capable switch (no AVB capabilities required if not included) g. –L3, layer 3 required (minimum layer 2 if not included)

DATA PATCH PANELS & ACCESSORIES

A. Data Patch Panels are acceptable for use in Ethernet, audio network, AVLAN, and digital multimedia network applications as required to provide a complete technical system.

B. All Category copper and fiber optic cabling (of the acceptable applications listed above) entering a technical system rack shall be terminated to a Data Patch Panel. Rack inter- and intra-connect cabling utilizing factory-terminated cable assemblies are not required to pass thru a Data Patch Panel unless shown otherwise.

C. Data Patch Panels shall be labeled per specification part 3 of this section.

D. Category 6 Patch Panels – 1. Refer to Division 27 Section “Telecommunications Requirements for Audio Video Systems”

for product information and additional installation requirements.

E. Fiber Optic Patch Panels & Enclosures – 1. Refer to Division 27 Section “Telecommunications Requirements for Audio Video Systems”

for product information and additional installation requirements.

F. Horizontal Cable Management – 19” wide horizontal patch cable management system, 1 rack unit, with pass-through opening to allow patch cables access to rear of rack (one required per 24 port patch panel / switch): 1. Chatsworth Velocity 13930-701 2. Cooper B-Line RCM+ SB87019S1 3. Panduit NetManager NMF1 4. Or approved equal



POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 8, 2016


FLAT PANEL DISPLAY/TELEVISION MOUNTS

A. Unless noted otherwise, provide the appropriate mount for each display furnished. Mount color as selected by Architect. Match mount to the display and the mounting surface.

B. Full assembly (display, mount, and all associated connections/equipment) shall be adequately supported with the appropriate safety factor to building structure. Appropriate structural backing/support shall be provided. No mounts shall fasten directly to the roof deck. Refer to submittal requirements.

C. Furnish all components to provide a complete installation, including fastening systems suitable for the mounting surface.

D. All recessed or built-in displays/televisions require shop drawings showing the surrounding architecture to ensure proper fit and ventilation requirements.

E. Fixed Flat Panel Wall Mount: fixed mount, fully adjustable, lockable, sized for display as required: 1. Chief FUSION *SM Series; or 2. Peerless SF Series; or 3. Premier Mounts P****F Series.

F. Articulating Flat Panel Wall Mount - Thin Depth: articulating arm mount that pulls out, rotates, and tilts down, fully adjustable, lockable, thin mounting depth, sized for display as required: 1. Chief TS***T Series; or 2. Approved equal.

G. Fixed Computer Monitor Desk Mount: articulating arm mount that permanently mounts to a desk or lectern, full rotation, sized for computer monitor display as required: 1. Chief Kontour Series.

A/V CONTROL SYSTEM – GENERAL PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS

A. Touch screen control interfaces shall follow the guidelines outlined in the “Dashboard for Controls” documents created on behalf of InfoComm International. Reference the Design Guide, Design Reference, and Integrators Guide for this project. Documents are available for download on the InfoComm web site.

B. Participate in planning meeting (web/phone) with Design Consultant and Owner’s Representative to review programming concepts and requirements before commencement of work.

C. Panel layout and navigational flow concepts shall be developed during planning meeting(s) with Design Consultant and Owner’s Representative.

D. Refer to submittal requirements for additional information.

E. This specification describes the initial touch screen programming concepts and requirements. Account for 16 man hours over 3 months for revisions requested by the Owner’s Representative after the system is substantially complete.

F. Touch screen and keypad overall user interfaces shall comply with the following minimum requirements:



POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 8, 2016


1. A common theme shall be employed and used with consistency throughout the layouts. Theme shall be discussed with the Client and the Client’s standard theme template shall be used if available.

2. Where client logos or colors are used, client branding guidelines shall be followed. Trademarks shall be used appropriately. Official graphical representations (logos, word marks, logotypes, etc.) may not be altered. Client colors shall utilize official and exact color (Pantone, CMYK, RGB, hex, etc.) as provided by the client, visual matching is not allowed. Content shall be obtained from an official and authorized source, e.g., the use of content from Google images is not appropriate. Client branding is encouraged where appropriate; however, proper use and compliance remains the responsibility of the contractor.

3. The use of a password shall be employed as directed by the Client as they deem appropriate. 4. Power ON/OFF sequence shall control all applicable devices. Sequence time shall be the

required time for all controlled devices to cycle. Projector lamp warm-up and cool-down period shall be taken into account. Shutdown shall utilize two-step verification.

5. Animated activity indicators (spinning ring, progress bar, etc.) shall be utilized to provide visual feedback for background processing and tasks. This will prohibit multiple button presses by the user and show feedback that the control system is processing the request. Relevant text shall be utilized where appropriate, e.g., “Please wait while the system shuts down.”

6. Source selection shall be available for all devices. Sources shall be laid out and grouped in a logical manner. A ‘blank source’ or ‘projector blanking’ feature shall be utilized where relevant.

7. Button presses shall show instant visual feedback that they have been engaged. 8. Current system status shall be visible at all times and be consistent across all adjoined

screens. Buttons shall show current status (engaged or disengaged) via color, illumination, outline, greyscale, etc. as relevant. Sliders and level indicators shall show current and true system status (i.e. show true level based on system feedback, not status based on last touch screen input) via color, knob location, percentage, etc. as relevant.

9. All program source devices (Blu-ray players, CD players, codecs, etc.) shall have the control screens emulate the appearance and functionality of all operational controls of the handheld remote control or user interface furnished with each device. The furnished handheld remote control and control system shall be interoperable allowing either to be used simultaneously without causing any lockups, inconsistencies, or false control system visual status. The use of (properly vetted) manufacturer control system modules is recommended.

10. Volume control of wired microphones, wireless microphones, and/or AV system program volume levels shall be discrete and shall be properly interfaced with the DSP (where applicable). The use of a master volume control or the like is prohibited.

11. Where applicable, show the current operation mode. For example, in the case where two rooms combine/separate, the word “Combined” or “Separated” would be displayed on each applicable screen.

12. Control of other building systems shall be coordinated with appropriate parties. Refer to specific programming requirements for lighting and environmental control requirements.

A/V CONTROL SYSTEM – SPECIFIC PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS

A. Lighting system integration and control 1. A/V control system shall interface with Lutron Quantum Control lighting system (by others)

via RS-232. Control all fixture zone dimming levels and/or power states, scene states, and initiation of show sequences. Programming of the Lutron system is not a portion of this specification section.

2. Contractor shall include allowance for on-site commissioning and programming services of dynamic light fixture(s) as provided by light fixture manufacturer, lighting controls manufacturer, and/or programmer. Provide a second on-site scene and level tuning visit with lighting controls manufacturer and/or programmer to make adjustments to the lighting



POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 8, 2016


control scenes per the direction of the owner/lighting designer. This visit shall be conducted after commissioning/standard startup of the lighting controls system.

3. Integration and control of Club lighting system shall be provided via separate programming module from the AV system. Lighting touch screen pages shall match layout and scheme of all other pages.

4. Reference sheet E5-1 for lighting system information, including system configuration, zone quantity, and scene information.

5. The following features and functionalities are required: a. Startup

1) System shall poll current/previous state and display current status b. Individual zone control page(s)

1) Individual dimming and/or power state control of each lighting zone via an independent slider. Current status shall be indicated adjacent/within the control buttons.

2) Where more zones are provided than will fit on one screen page, the use of multiple sub-pages shall be provided. A consistent and intuitive description method shall be provided.

c. Scene control page 1) Recall of eight preset scenes, as previously programmed within the Lutron system,

shall be provided. Current status shall be indicated. 2) Two custom created scenes shall be provided. Scene setup shall be via user

manipulation of zone controls from the AV control system panel and shall be accomplished by storing the current status of the zone parameters.

3) Limited dynamic scene adjustment shall be provided, and shall include overall brightness level adjustment for the currently active scene. This adjustment shall not be stored, the selection of a new scene shall recall the default scene settings.

6. Control Panel C401 shall include all control as described.

B. Audio Control 1. Provide source selection of all available audio sources on a whole club basis.

C. Video Control 1. Provide television control by the use of a floor plan with selection potential of an individual

television. Provide the ability to directly tune to a channel or select from eight quick select channel buttons for commonly utilized channels (to be coordinated with Owner).

2. Wireless hand held controller shall utilize the touch screen for selection of the television intended to be controlled. Selection shall be based on location within the Club and tiered to get to the individual display.

CABLE - BULK

A. The products in this section have been approved for use in the project as necessary to facilitate a complete and working system. Inclusion in this section does not indicate a requirement for use.

B. Product must be procured from the original cable manufacturer.

C. AWG wire sizes indicated herein or on the drawings are the minimum size conductors required. Larger size conductors (i.e., smaller AWG number) are permitted assuming no impact on the project will occur (such as the resulting need for larger or additional conduit, cable trays, chases, etc.) to accommodate such cable.

D. Where cable is run exposed (such as in ceiling plenums, cable trays, chases, or below accessible floors): 1. Verify which locations do and do not require plenum-rated cable.



POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 8, 2016


2. Furnish the appropriate cable type. 3. Obtain written authorization from the Architect (or the Architect’s designated Engineer) in

this regard.

E. Category cabling:

1. Refer to Division 27 Section “Telecommunications Requirements for Audio Video Systems” for product information and additional installation requirements.

F. Fiber Optic cabling:


G. 22 AWG/NP, microphone, intercom, or line-level circuits installed in conduit or equipment racks, 22 AWG, 2-conductor shielded, PVC jacket – not plenum rated: 1. Belden 8451 or Gepco SAHS122R; or 2. Belden 9451 or Gepco 61801EZ; or 3. Belden 5500FE or Gepco SSS222R; or 4. Belden 9451D (dual) or Gepco D61801EZGF (dual); or 5. Belden 8422 or 8412 (20AWG); or 6. West Penn 291 or Gepco SSS222R; or 7. West Penn 452; or 8. West Penn 454 or Gepco SAPS122R.

H. 22 AWG/P, microphone, intercom, or line-level circuits installed in a return-air plenum without conduit, 22 AWG, 2-conductor shielded, plenum rated: 1. Belden 9451P or Gepco 61801HS; or 2. Belden 6500FC; or 3. Belden 9451DP (dual); or 4. West Penn 25291B or Gepco SSS222P.

I. 10 AWG/NP, loudspeaker cable installed in conduit or other non-plenum interior locations: 1. Belden 1313A or; 2. Belden 5T00UP or Gepco SSU102R; or 3. West Penn HA210.

J. 12 AWG/NP, loudspeaker cable installed in conduit or other non-plenum interior locations: 1. Belden 1311A or 8477; or 2. Belden 5000UE or Gepco SSU122R; or 3. West Penn 227 or C207.

K. 14 AWG/NP, loudspeaker cable installed in conduit or other non-plenum interior locations: 1. Belden 1309A or 8473; or 2. Belden 5100UE or Gepco SSU14R; or 3. West Penn 226.

L. 16 AWG/NP, loudspeaker cable installed in conduit or other non-plenum interior locations: 1. Belden 1307A or 8471; or 2. Belden 5200UE or Gepco SSU162R; or 3. West Penn 225.

M. 18 AWG/NP, loudspeaker cable installed in conduit or other non-plenum interior locations: 1. Belden 9740 or 5300U1; or



POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 8, 2016


2. Belden 5300UE or 8461 or Gepco SSU182R; or 3. West Penn 224.

N. 8 AWG/P, loudspeaker cable installed in a return-air plenum without conduit, plenum rated: 1. Gepco SSU082P.

O. 10 AWG/P, loudspeaker cable installed in a return-air plenum without conduit, plenum rated: 1. Belden 6T00UP or Gepco SSU102P; or 2. West Penn 25272B.

P. 12 AWG/P, loudspeaker cable installed in a return-air plenum without conduit, plenum rated: 1. Belden 1860A; or 2. Belden 6000UE or Gepco SSU122P; or 3. West Penn 25227B.

Q. 14 AWG/P, loudspeaker cable installed in a return-air plenum without conduit, plenum rated: 1. Belden 1861A; or 2. Belden 6100UE or Gepco SSU142P; or 3. West Penn 25226B.

R. 16 AWG/P, loudspeaker cable installed in a return-air plenum without conduit, plenum rated: 1. Belden 1862A; or 2. Belden 6200UE or Gepco SSU162P; or 3. West Penn 25225B.

S. 18 AWG/P, loudspeaker cable installed in a return-air plenum without conduit, plenum rated: 1. Belden 1863A or 6300UE; or 2. Belden 82740 or Gepco SSU182P; or 3. West Penn 25224B.

T. RG-59/NP, single 75-ohm coax cable, RG-59U, precision video cable installed in conduit, equipment racks, or other non-plenum spaces, not plenum rated: 1. Belden 1505A; or 2. Gepco VPM2000; or 3. West Penn 819.

U. RG-59/P, single 75-ohm coax cable, RG-59U, precision installed in return-air plenum without conduit, plenum rated: 1. Belden 1506A; or 2. Gepco VPM2000TS; or 3. West Penn 25819.

V. RG-59/Flex, single 75-ohm coax cable, RG-59U, flexible, for digital video for use with portable cables, exposed, or other locations where cable movement can or does occur: 1. Belden 1505F; or 2. Gepco VHD2000M.

W. RG-6/NP, single 75-ohm precision coax cable, RG-6/U, installed in conduit, equipment racks, or other non-plenum spaces, not plenum rated: 1. Belden 1694A or Gepco VSD2001; or 2. Belden 1694wb (outdoor water block); or 3. West Penn 6350.



POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 8, 2016


X. RG-6/P, single 75-ohm precision coax cable, RG-6/U, installed in return-air plenum without conduit, plenum rated: 1. Belden 1695A; or 2. Gepco VSD2001TS; or 3. West Penn 256350.

Y. RG-11/NP, single 75-ohm precision coax cable, RG-11/U, installed in conduit, equipment racks, or other non-plenum spaces, not plenum rated: 1. Belden 7731A; or 2. Gepco VHD1100; or 3. West Penn 1135.

Z. RG-11/P, single 75-ohm precision coax cable, RG-11/U, installed in return-air plenum without conduit, plenum rated: 1. Belden 7732A; or 2. Gepco VHD1100TK.

AA. RG-59/TV-NP, TV distribution branch cable installed in conduit, equipment racks, or other non-plenum spaces, RG-59, not plenum rated: 1. Belden 1505A; or 2. Gepco VPM2000; or 3. West Penn 819.

BB. RG-59/TV-P, TV distribution branch cable installed in return-air plenum, RG-59, plenum rated: 1. Belden 1506A; or 2. Gepco VPM2000TS; or 3. West Penn 25819.

CC. RG-6/TV-NP, TV distribution branch cable installed in conduit, equipment racks, or other non-plenum spaces, RG-6, not plenum rated: 1. Belden 7915A; or 2. Belden 5399B5; or 3. West Penn 841.

DD. RG-6/TV-P, TV distribution branch cable installed in return-air plenum, RG-6, plenum rated: 1. Belden 6339Q8 (quad shield); or 2. Carol C3525 (quad shield); or 3. West Penn 25841 (dual shield); or 4. Carol C3525 (dual shield).

EE. RG-11/TV-NP, TV distribution branch cable installed in conduit, equipment racks, or other non-plenum spaces, RG-11, not plenum rated: 1. Belden 1523A; or 2. Carol 495027; or 3. West Penn 821.

FF. RG-11/TV-P, TV distribution branch cable installed in return-air plenum, RG-11, plenum rated: 1. Belden 1153A; or 2. Carol 395029; or 3. West Penn 25821.

GG. RG-11/TV-DB, TV distribution cable for direct burial, RG-11/U: 1. Belden 1525A or 9764; or 2. West Penn 1110.



POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 8, 2016


HH. Control cable - NP, power and control in one jacket, one unshielded 18 AWG pair, one shielded 22 AWG pair, not plenum rated: 1. Belden 1502R or Gepco 18/22AXL; or 2. Crestron CRESNET-NP; or 3. West Penn 77350.

II. Control cable - P, power and control in one jacket, one unshielded 18 AWG pair, one shielded 22 AWG pair, plenum rated: 1. Belden 1502P or Gepco 18/22AXLP; or 2. Crestron CRESNET-P; or 3. West Penn D25350.

JJ. RG-58/NP, single 50-ohm coax, installed in conduit or other non-plenum interior locations, not plenum rated: 1. Belden 7806R; or 2. West Penn 812.

KK. RG-58/P, single 50-ohm coax, installed in return-air plenum, plenum rated: 1. Belden 82240 or 88240; or 2. West Penn 25812.

LL. RG-8X/NP, single 50-ohm coax, installed in conduit or other non-plenum interior locations, not plenum rated. 1. Belden 7808R or 9258; or 2. Gepco V5020; or 3. West Penn 807.

MM. RG-8X/P, single 50-ohm coax, install in return-air plenum, plenum rated: 1. West Penn 25810.

NN. RG-8/U/NP, single 50-ohm coax, installed in conduit or other non-plenum interior locations, not plenum rated: 1. Belden 9913; or 2. West Penn 810.

OO. RG-8/U/P, single 50-ohm coax, installed in return-air plenum, plenum rated: 1. Belden 89913; or 2. West Penn 25812.

PP. RG-213/NP, single 50-ohm coax, installed in conduit or other non-plenum interior locations, not plenum rated: 1. Belden 8267.

QQ. RS-232, non-plenum, low capacitance computer cable for EIA RS-232/422, 24 AWG, 4-conductor, shielded, minimum conductor-to-conductor capacitance: 22pF/ft, PVC jacket: 1. Belden 8102.

RR. RS-232, plenum, low capacitance computer cable for EIA RS-232/422, 24 AWG, 4-conductor, shielded, minimum conductor-to-conductor capacitance: 22pF/ft, PVC jacket: 1. Belden 88102.



POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 8, 2016


CABLES – FACTORY TERMINATED – IN RACK


B. Factory terminated cable assemblies specified in this subsection are only permitted for use within racks or between devices external to racks. Not permitted for use in conduit unless specifically noted as such. Permitted for rack inter-connect when racks are in close proximity (same room) and may pass thru conduit if necessary in this situation. Required for rack intra-connect where applicable.

C. Factory terminated cable assemblies shall be the minimum length needed to accomplish the connection. Portable cable assemblies are specified elsewhere in this section and are required to be furnished in addition to those required for system installation.

D. All cable assemblies must be factory tested and certified.

E. Category cabling:


F. Fiber Optic cabling:


CONNECTORS


B. All XLR receptacles located outdoors, in boxes that are located outdoors, in natatoriums, or in areas where moisture or other corrosive materials are present shall have gold plated contact pins.

C. XLR Cable Connector, cable mounted connector for line-level, microphone level, and intercom circuits: 1. Neutrik X-series; or 2. Switchcraft E Series Q-G.

D. XLR Panel Connector, panel mounted audio connector for line-level, microphone level, and intercom circuits, color shall match plate color where possible: 1. Neutrik D-Series; or 2. Switchcraft standard AAA Series Q-G with metal handle.

E. XLR Combo Connector, female XLR and 1/4" TRS receptacle in one chassis-mount connector: 1. Neutrik NCJ6FI-S.

F. 1/4" TRS Cable Connector, three-conductor (Tip Ring Sleeve) connector with a metal barrel and solder lugs: 1. Canare F-16; or 2. Neutrik NP3C; or 3. Switchcraft 267.



POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 8, 2016


G. 1/4" TS Cable Connector, two-conductor (Tip Sleeve) connector with a metal barrel and solder lugs: 1. Canare F-15 plug; or 2. Neutrik NP2C plugs; or 3. Switchcraft 250.

H. 1/4" TRS Panel Connector, three-conductor (Tip Ring Sleeve) connector with the sleeve contact isolated from the panel or plate to which it is mounted: 1. Neutrik NJ3FP6C; or 2. Switchcraft E112BL.

I. 1/8” TRS Cable Connector, 1/8” (3.5mm) three-conductor mini-plugs which have a metal barrel and solder lugs: 1. Canare F-12; or 2. Neutrik NTP3RC; or 3. Switchcraft 35HDNN plug.

J. Locking LS Cable Connector, twist-lock cable mount male loudspeaker connector, minimum 2-two conductors. Coordinate connector with associated intended panel mount connector, including those on loudspeakers: 1. Neutrik speakON NL2FC (two conductor); or 2. Neutrik speakON NL4FC (four conductor); or 3. Neutrik speakON NL8FC (eight conductor).

K. Locking LS Panel Receptacle, twist-lock chassis mount female loudspeaker connector, minimum two conductors. Coordinate receptacle with associated intended cable connector: 1. Neutrik speakON NL2MP (two conductor); or 2. Neutrik speakON NL4MP. Male connector (four conductor); or 3. Neutrik speakON NL8MPR-BAG (eight conductor)

L. RJ45 Panel (Faceplate) Connector-6, data connector rated for shielded Category 6 cable: 1. Neutrik etherCON NE8FDY-C6* with SCDX cover

*Division 27 “Telecommunications Requirements for Audio Video Systems” Contractor shall terminate horizontal cable onto etherCON connector installed in custom faceplate.

M. BNC Cable Connector, 75-ohm BNC, compression fitting for coaxial cable furnished: 1. Liberty CM-RG-BNC series; or 2. West Penn CN-CS-BNC and CN-FS-BNC series.

N. BNC Panel Connector, 75-ohm BNC, pass-through, D-style mounting: 1. Neutrik NBB75DFI; or 2. Approved Equal.

O. Terminator, RF or SDI terminator plug: 1. Extron T-BNC series; or 2. Pomonoa 3840 series; or 3. Trompeter TNA series.

P. Captive Screw Terminal Block, modular terminal blocks for mounting on DIN rails: 1. Entrelec Screw Clamp series; or 2. Approved Equal.



POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 8, 2016


EQUIPMENT RACKS

A. Furnish complete equipment racks including all top, bottom, and sides as necessary.

B. Furnish all necessary accessories including ganging hardware, blank plates (to fill all unoccupied space), vent panels (as applicable), shelves, security covers, mounting screws, trim kits, lacing bars, cable management, leveling feet, casters, etc. to provide a complete solution which complies with “best practice” guidelines. 1. Full-solution accessories are not detailed in this specification. They shall be provided as

needed and shall be approved by the manufacturer for use with the intended rack series (i.e. Middle Atlantic casters must be used with a Middle Atlantic rack).

C. Furnish all required components for a complete thermal management solution. 1. Rack fans shall achieve a quiet operating condition, such as the Middle Atlantic QFAN. 2. Thermostatic fan control shall be utilized where appropriate.

D. Furnish all required components for a complete rack ground isolation solution. 1. Racks shall be isolated from the floor by the use of isolated leveling feet (such as Middle

Atlantic LF-ISO) or an isolation pad/system (such as Middle Atlantic ISO-1).

E. Equipment racks and all associated blank panels located in equipment rooms shall be factory finished semi-gloss black. Equipment racks and associated blank panels located in control booths or other visible locations shall be factory-finished color as selected by the Architect.

F. Furnish locking storage drawers, hinged security covers, and racks with locking doors all keyed alike. Furnish four keys total.

G. Equipment rack specification indicates the system basis of design. Verify equipment layout, rack size, and number of equipment racks required for equipment furnished.

H. Wall Rack – Sectional, wall-mount rack with separate back plane and rack sections, height as required (xx denotes rack height in part number), minimum 26” depth: 1. Lowell LWR-xx28 series; or 2. Middle Atlantic Products DWR-xx-26 series.

EQUIPMENT RACK ACCESSORIES

A. The following equipment rack accessories shall be provided as indicated on the rack elevations or within this section.

B. Logo rack panel, single vertical rack space, labeled with contact information for the contractor and Design Consultant. Panel specified is custom and already has the information for the Design Consultant; the contractor shall coordinate their logo/information with the panel manufacturer (shop drawing required). One required to be installed at the top of each bank of equipment racks: 1. Liberty Wire and Cable model HEI-RHIM-TEMPLATE.

C. Storage Drawer – 3, rack drawer, 5.25" high (3RU), approximately 16" deep, color to match adjacent rack-mounting panels: 1. Atlas Sound SD3-14; or 2. Middle Atlantic D3; or 3. Chief SDR-3.



POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 8, 2016


D. Storage Drawer – 2, rack drawer, 3.5" high (2RU), approximately 16" deep, color to match adjacent rack-mounting panels: 1. Atlas Sound SD2-14; or 2. Middle Atlantic D2; or 3. Chief SDR-2.

STANDBY EQUIPMENT

A. The following equipment shall be on-hand at the time of system commissioning and system first-use for possible replacement of defective equipment or for field conditions noted. Maintain ownership of this standby equipment. However, if any item of this standby equipment is used to replace defective equipment, the installed item of standby equipment becomes Owner’s property. Assume ownership of the defective equipment: 1. Backup software for programmable devices. 2. Laptop computer for all programmable devices.

B. Allowances for overnight shipping of critical components should be included and utilized if component failure is essential to Owner’s initial operation or first-use requirements.

AC POWER

A. Furnish a multi-receptacle power strip for each AC circuit within the equipment rack(s). Furnish a minimum of 4 spare receptacles (beyond that required for connected equipment, rack fan, etc.) within each equipment rack. Each equipment rack shall contain a minimum of 2 un-switched AC power receptacles. All power strips shall maintain integrity of technical system grounding requirements. All power strips shall comply with power sequencing requirements as described elsewhere.

B. All equipment shall be connected so that maximum rated performance can be obtained without exceeding the AC circuit capability.

C. UPS – 1RU: uninterruptable power supply, single rack space, 750 VA power rating, 15A input, minimum of four output receptacles: 1. APC Smart-UPS 750VA part number SUA750RM1U (?” min, 25” max); or 2. Eaton (Powerware) 5115 RM part number 103003269-6591 (22.8”); or 3. Middle Atlantic UPS-1000R (20” min, 32” max); or 4. TrippLite SmartPro part number SMART750RM1U (16.8”).

D. UPS – 2RU, uninterruptable power supply, dual rack space, 1650 VA power rating, web control, individually switched outputs: 1. Middle Atlantic UPS-2200R-8IP.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

PREPARATION

A. Coordinate locations and sizes of junction boxes, outlets, and conduit with the work of other trades. Field verify compliance with the construction documents.

B. Carefully inspect areas where equipment will be installed. Notify the Architect of any conditions that would adversely affect the installation and subsequent operation of the system.



POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 8, 2016


PHYSICAL INSTALLATION

A. In addition to any spare cabling shown on drawings, utilize industry best practice to pull additional spare cabling in conduit where logical. Neatly bundle a usable length of cable at each end of each spare circuit. All spare circuits shall be labeled and noted on the field drawings for inclusion into the record drawings.

B. Install any floor-mounted receptacles so that release buttons (for both receptacles and cable connectors) are easily accessible when cable connectors are installed.

C. Blank panels and/or vent panels shall be installed in unused rack spaces. Ensure that air flow within the rack is maintained (i.e. cool air can enter the rack and hot air can exit the rack).

D. Equipment racks and other exposed equipment shall be kept covered and protected from airborne contaminates. Clean all equipment racks and the interior rack floor, prior to system commissioning activities.

E. For racks installed in credenzas, fasten carpet tiles or low friction sliders to the bottom of the rack to protect the finish of the furniture.

F. Where the design location requires that products, materials, or equipment are visible to the public, no manufacturer's logos shall be visible. Unless otherwise directed, neatly remove or permanently paint out such logos.

G. Furnish all equipment with factory finish where possible using the standard available factory color(s) as selected by the Architect. Notify the Architect regarding color options of relevant equipment prior to ordering equipment from each manufacturer.

CABLE MANAGEMENT AND TERMINATION

A. Install all rack-mounted equipment without IEC removable power cords so that the power cords are dressed using removable fasteners such as Velcro and there are no obstructions to the item being pulled out from the front of the rack.

B. When dressing cables within the rack, do not tighten tie wraps so that the cable is deformed.

C. Use Velcro tie wraps for all laced or bound UTP cables, hand tightened and spaced at various inconsistent distance intervals. Do not use zip ties for UTP cables or any in-rack cables.

D. Refer to Division 27 Section “Telecommunications Requirements for Audio Video Systems” for all work associated with data-related cabling such as CAT5e, CAT6, and/or fiber.

E. All data-related cabling entering a rack shall be terminated to a Data Patch Panel. Rack inter- and intra-connect cabling utilizing factory-terminated cable assemblies are not required to pass thru a Data Patch Panel.

F. Factory terminated cable assemblies are only permitted for use within racks, between devices external to racks, or as portable equipment. Not permitted for use in conduit unless specifically noted as such. Permitted for rack inter-connect when racks are in close proximity (same room) and may pass thru conduit if necessary in this situation. Required for rack intra-connect where applicable. Cable assemblies shall be the minimum length needed to accomplish the connection.



POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 8, 2016


G. Dress cables so that terminations are free from stress due to gravity acting on the cabling. Use cable supports as required depending on the size and stiffness of the cable.

H. Do not violate the minimum cable bend radius as specified by the cable manufacturer.

I. Terminate cables with sufficient service loop to allow for at least one re-termination without having to open a cable bundle or pathway.

J. Terminate all unused RF and SDI outputs with impedance matching terminators.

K. All audio circuits shall be separated according to function. Where audio and video circuits are installed in conduit or other raceway, separate conduits are required for the various circuit functions.

L. Refer to “Conduit/Circuit Group Divisions” and “Conduit Routing and Separation” schedules for additional information.

M. Where circuits are exposed in the equipment racks or large junction or pull boxes, the circuits shall be bundled according to function.

N. All solder connections shall be made with soldering iron and rosin core solder. All solder connections shall be checked for "cold" solder joints.

O. All audio circuits terminating to screw-type connectors shall be installed with non-insulated brazed seam spade lugs of the proper size for wire and screw connection.

P. Circuits shall not be spliced.

Q. Circuits requiring parallel connection as indicated on signal flows shall be extended via approved termination in an appropriately sized junction box and shall conform to the following guidelines: 1. Approved connections include DIN mounted terminal blocks as specified in Part 2. 2. Field splicing techniques such as wire nuts, “twist and solder”, etc. are not allowed. 3. Any circuit requiring parallel connection shall be permanently labelled on every cable as

defined herein. 4. Care must be taken to maintain appropriate protection and shielding of circuits in order to

maintain a fully functional system.

R. Circuits requiring extension (non-data) due to field conditions such as excessive conduit bends, etc., shall be extended via approved termination in an appropriately sixed junction box and shall conform to the following guidelines: 1. Extension of circuits is to be avoided if at all possible. 2. Contact the Design Consultant via documented project communication. Inform the Design

Consultant of the circumstances regarding the desired extension. Contractor and Design Consultant will coordinate to determine the most appropriate course of action.

3. Approved connections include DIN mounted terminal blocks as specified in Part 2. 4. Field splicing techniques such as wire nuts, “twist and solder”, etc. are not allowed. 5. Any circuit requiring extension shall be permanently labelled on every cable as defined

herein. 6. Care must be taken to maintain appropriate protection and shielding of circuits in order to

maintain a fully functional system.

S. Install rack equipment so that it can be pulled out for repair or replacement without hindrance. If there are obstructions prohibiting the disconnection of terminations on the back side of the



POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 8, 2016


technical equipment, there must be sufficient cabling to permit the equipment to be pulled from the front allowing for easy disconnection.

T. If equipment is removed or replaced for service, ensure that the proper cable termination points are apparent when the equipment is re-installed.

LABELING

A. All labeling of equipment shall be via permanent asset tag. Approved labelling systems include: 1. Brother P-touch EDGE with HGeS2***PK labels; or 2. Brady Equipment Identification Labels.

B. All labeling of cables within equipment racks shall be clearly legible with unambiguous identifying labels. Identify all cables clearly with permanent labels wrapped about the full circumference within one (1) inch of each connection. Assign wire or cable designations consistently throughout a given system. Each wire or cable shall carry the same labeled designation over its entire run, regardless of intermediate terminations. Document all cable labels for record drawings.

C. Cable labels shall be located near both ends of the termination and shall be visible without system disassembly (i.e. not hidden within a cable bundle). Labels shall be permanent and non-slipping. Use clear heat shrink tubing if needed to protect cable labels.

D. All labeling of exposed cables, such as those found at the rear of a mixing console, shall be printed to match the labels shown on the drawings. The label shall be covered with clear heat shrink tubing near the termination.

E. All equipment in equipment racks shall be labeled front and rear for ease of identification. Equipment shall be labeled as indicated on drawings. Labels shall be of a contrasting color with that of equipment color to promote visibility.

F. Install permanent labeling on the front of each equipment rack in a row of racks identifying the rack designation (number).

G. Refer to Division 27 Section “Telecommunications Requirements for Audio Video Systems” for all labeling requirements associated with data-related cabling such as CAT6, and/or fiber.

H. All labels for input/output plates, touch panels, and other control panels shall be consistent with the final room numbering for the facility.

I. Label each end of each AC power cable for each device. Label shall be clearly visible at both ends.

J. Within each rack and at other remote locations for technical system equipment, label all associated AC power receptacles reflecting the appropriate circuit breaker. Ensure that the circuit breakers are labeled as to the rack or remote equipment location.

POWER AND GROUNDING

A. Equipment rack ground shall be only via the insulated technical ground system provided per Division 26 for technical system ground. Equipment racks shall be isolated from other ground paths such as building steel, floor, and from ground via conduit.



POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 8, 2016


B. Each equipment rack within a row of racks and each row of racks within a room shall be electrically bonded to each other. Bonding shall be via copper ground bus. Any bolts shall fasten to unpainted sheet metal.

C. All technical system equipment shall be connected to the appropriate circuits of the technical power system.

D. AC power switches located on the front panel of equipment mounted in the racks shall be covered by a security covers or utilize front panel lockout features. Exclusions from this list are items requiring user interface such as compact disc players, DVD players, tuners, and wireless microphone receivers.

LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL OF AC POWER VIA CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Low-voltage "ON/OFF" control of AC power shall be via control system.

B. Operation of the following components is required, at a minimum: 1. Power amplifiers as indicated in Part 2 requirements 2. UPS devices where components do not require power under system shutdown 3. Components equipped with power state control

C. Make all low-voltage connections as required to provide a complete and working control system.

D. Refer to electrical drawings for AC power information.

E. Coordinate with Electrical Contractor as necessary to verify proper circuit assignment.

AUDIO EQUIPMENT TERMINATION

A. Audio circuit termination shall observe the methods set forth in “Sound System Interconnection” RaneNote 110, © 2011 by Rane Corporation. This reference document may be obtained at: http://www.rane.com/pdf/ranenotes/Sound_System_Interconnection.pdf

B. Key methods include, but are not limited to the following: 1. All audio circuits shall be balanced two-wire circuits, with a separate grounding shield

conductor, unless noted otherwise. All circuits shall have either the red or white wires as the "high" or “+” side of the line and connect to pin 2 of microphone-type XLR audio connectors and the tip of 3-conductor phone connectors. The black wire of the two-wire circuit shall be the "low" or “-“ side of the line and connect to pin 3 of microphone connectors and the ring of 3-conductor phone connectors. The shield conductor shall connect to pin 1 of microphone connectors or to the sleeve of phone connectors.

2. Shield conductors shall be connected at each end of each wire to the pin 1 of each XLR, shield connection for each electronic device, etc. No shield wires shall be left unconnected except where noted on the drawings, nor shall any shield come in contact with conduit, pull boxes, or other building steel. Audio line-level circuit shield wires shall be grounded to rack sheet metal only via rack-mounted equipment. Shields shall be electrically isolated in multi-conductor cables. Shields for audio line-level circuits connected to audio transformers shall be connected to transformer electro-static shields and case ground.

3. In the case of an unbalanced source feeding into a balanced input and the cable run is short (i.e. less than fifteen feet), connect the signal connection of the unbalanced connector to the “high” side of the balanced input. Connect the “ground” connection of the unbalanced line to the “low” side of the balanced connector. Connect the cable shield to the shield connection of the balanced input but do not connect it to the unbalanced connector. If the cable run is

http://www.rane.com/pdf/ranenotes/Sound_System_Interconnection.pdf



POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 8, 2016


longer than fifteen feet, balance the line at the unbalanced source using specified balancing devices.

4. In the case of a balanced source feeding into an unbalanced input and the cable run is short (i.e. less than fifteen feet), connect the “high” side of the balanced output to the signal input of the unbalanced connection. Connect the “shield” of the balanced connection to the “ground” of the unbalanced connection. Leave the “low” side of the balanced output floating.

LOUDSPEAKER TERMINATION

A. Loudspeakers in the same acoustic space shall all be wired to produce consistent polarity with a mono input signal. They shall also be polarized such that a positive acoustic pressure on a microphone results in a positive acoustic pressure at all loudspeakers.

B. Loudspeakers shall be installed such that they do not produce or cause mechanical rattles in the surrounding structure. There shall be no audible vibration or noise caused by improper mechanical installation or defective components.

VIDEO EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Compression fittings shall be used for all BNC and F connector terminations.

B. Coordinate structural backing required for wall mounted flat panel displays prior to the installation of drywall or other wall materials.

C. Neatly dress all cables behind a flat panel display. Cables and connections should not be visible from the viewing locations. Power cables for displays shall not be bundled with signal cables.

D. For fixed projector or pole mounted flat panel display installations, signal cables shall be routed within the mounted pipe. Signal cables shall not be tied to the outside of the pipe. Bundle excess cable above the ceiling, not at the device. Ensure that the minimum bend radius for the cables is observed.

SOFTWARE, FIRMWARE, AND OPERATING SYSTEMS

A. Furnish, install, and configure the most recent approved, non-beta, software for each device or system. This includes software identified in other areas of these specifications or on the drawings. This also includes software not specifically identified but is required to allow for system operation and/or to allow for more efficient system configuration and setup.

B. Ensure the firmware for each device is the most recent, installed, and operational.

C. Ensure the operating system for each device is the most recent, installed, and fully operational.

D. The software, firmware, and operating system must be approved by the associated equipment manufacturer(s). The operating system must be approved by the Owner’s IT representative. Coordinate and take responsibility for these approvals.

NETWORK CABLING, TESTING, AND DOCUMENTATION

A. Coordinate all aspects of the technical system network, including configuration and connection with the Owner’s LAN. Utilize Owner’s designated configuration style.



POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 8, 2016


B. All technical system devices with an Ethernet port shall be connected to the associated network.

C. Document the IP and MAC addresses of all IP capable equipment for inclusion with the Operation & Maintenance Manuals.

D. Secure the entire network, documenting all passwords. Coordinate this with the Owner’s Representative.

E. Refer to Division 27 Section “Telecommunications Requirements for Audio Video Systems” for testing requirements of data-related cabling such as Category 6 and/or fiber. Include test results in Operation and Maintenance Data submittal.

CONTRACTOR'S TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT

A. At the completion of the installation, perform the following tests on the system to ensure proper installation and operation. The technical system shall be fully tested with all equipment on site, installed, connected, and fully operational.

B. The completed Preliminary Testing Documentation package shall include: 1. Results of the tests detailed herein; and 2. Digital photographs of primary systems, sub-systems and components; and 3. Written notice to the Design Consultant that the systems(s) are ready for commissioning.

C. The Testing Documentation package shall be transmitted to the Consultant in a timely fashion to allow the Consultant appropriate time for review and comment prior to final commissioning. The Consultant cannot visit the site or begin the commissioning phase until the package has been transmitted and reviewed.

D. All test equipment used for these tests shall be on site during the system commissioning activities should verification of submitted measurements be required.

E. Utilize the technical support services offered by the manufacturers of the various technical system components to ensure optimum performance.

F. Tests shall include the following: 1. Measure and record the impedance of all loudspeaker circuits at the output of each amplifier.

During this process, also check each loudspeaker circuit for shorts to ground. 2. Recommended impedance measuring equipment includes the following:

a. Dayton Audio DATS b. NTI Minirator MR-PRO c. Sennheiser ZP-3 d. Terrasonde/Sencore Audio Toolbox

3. Unacceptable measurement devices for loudspeaker impedance include the following: 1) Digital Multimeter (DMM) 2) TOA ZM-104 3) TOA ZM-104A

4. Verify each loudspeaker is connected to the respective power amplifier and test each loudspeaker throughout its usable frequency range using 1/3-octave bands of pink noise to ensure loudspeaker does not rattle. Recommended 1/3-octave band pink noise sources include: a. Terrasonde/Sencore Audio-Toolbox b. Japan Audio Society CD-1 test compact disc c. NTI Minirator MR-PRO.



POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 8, 2016


5. Ensure all inputs and outputs are wired to the appropriate devices per construction documents.

6. Test all system audio electronic components for uniform frequency response from input to power amplifier output.

7. Verify subjectively that each loudspeaker is issuing full spectrum signal (both woofer and tweeter/horn are operating) using full spectrum pink noise at sufficient level.

8. Perform audio system equalization per ANSI/InfoComm 1M-2009 for all ancillary audio systems, e.g., lobby, restroom, concourse, club, board/meeting rooms, etc. Provide documentation to Design Consultant with preliminary test results.

9. Verify that all microphone and line level cabling is installed with Pins 1, 2, and 3 wired properly and there are no shorts to ground. Recommended test equipment includes: a. Αlphaton ACT-100 Remote Tester b. NTI Minirator MR-PRO with Cable Test Adapter c. A microphone is NOT an acceptable measurement device for cable tests.

10. Verify that all intercom level cabling is installed with pins 1, 2, and 3 wired properly and there are no shorts to ground. Ensure production system intercom power supply is disconnected for these tests.

11. Verify that all coax video cables pass a DC continuity cable test and contain no electrical shorts. Recommended test equipment includes: a. Fluke MicroScanner2 b. Test-Um CX200 c. Triplett 8-Way WireMaster Coax

12. Verify that all coax video cables pass a frequency sweep test for the bandwidth of intended use. Recommended test equipment includes: a. Tektronix 2247A

13. Video cabling intended for use in SDI signals shall be tested to allow system conformance with SMPTE 424M. Recommended test equipment includes: a. Phabrix SxE

14. Setup and calibrate each visual display using current edition of Spears & Munsil High Definition Benchmark Disc. Perform calibration with environmental lighting set to level representative of the system while in use. Verify the each source and variety of resolutions. For projector/screen combinations, the screen drop shall be set to maximize observation from all seats and the image shall fill the available space on the screen.

15. Verify performance of the Control System including the operation of all control features. 16. Setup and configure each wireless microphone system using the software provided by the

manufacturer of the wireless microphone system. The following tasks are required: a. Utilize wireless microphone management system if applicable, e.g., Shure Wireless

Workbench, to perform an RF spectrum sweep. b. Perform frequency coordination with Owner. Take into account existing wireless

microphone system(s). c. Perform frequency assignment of all transmitters/receivers per the results of the

frequency coordination and RF spectrum sweep. d. Verify all receivers are set to maximum line level audio output. e. Set all handheld wireless transmitter microphone sensitivity settings to allow high level

voice output without AF over modulation. All transmitters should be set the same. f. Set all body pack wireless transmitter microphone sensitivity settings to allow high level

voice output without AF over modulation. All transmitters should be set the same. g. Using subjective listening, adjust the body pack settings to match the audio level of the

handheld transmitters. h. Walk the entire performance coverage area using speech as the program material to

verify signal performance. Utilize wireless microphone management system if applicable, e.g., Shure Wireless Workbench, to perform a QOS test.

17. Setup and configure the assistive listening system. Verify proper input signal level. Walk the entire coverage area using speech as the program material to verify signal performance.



POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 8, 2016


18. Functional tests of all equipment and software. The functional tests shall include operational tests of all program source equipment (record and playback), wireless microphone system, mixing console, system inputs and outputs, all patch panel receptacles, intercom system, video routing, video distribution, operational controls, AC power sequencing, operation of software, and all system electronics. Functional tests include examination for hum, buzz, hiss, ghosts, hum bars, oscillation, thumps, unintended reception of other signals such as AM or FM radio, TV, CB, ham radio, cell phones, or any other unwanted signals through the system.

19. Verify that all microphone connectors, extension cables, and microphones are wired properly and in polarity.

20. Ensure that all equipment is on the job-site and fully operational. This includes portable (not installed) items and other loose equipment. Remove all devices from shipping or packaging containers, ready for use, and place in equipment storage cabinet.

21. Where a system computer is furnished, load and configure all necessary control software. Examples include but are not limited to the following as applicable: wireless microphone management, amplification management, projector/display management, audio console configuration/control, DSP configuration/management, and active loudspeaker management.

22. Repair or replace any defects or malfunctions found prior to the commencement of commissioning activities by the Design Consultant.

23. Contact the Design Consultant should problems or concerns arise during the testing activities.

G. Record all products used, wire numbers, connection numbers, and any changes to the systems accurately mapping the system installation, including the data network components. This information shall be used for inclusion with the system record drawings as described later in the specifications.

H. Should the Design Consultant be required to invest time performing some or all of the tests, the Contractor will compensate the Design Consultant for all associated costs.

COMMISSIONING AND SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE

A. After completion of the system installation and after the preliminary tests and adjustments are complete, the contractor in conjunction with the Design Consultant shall perform on-site acceptance of the technical system. This process will consist of random verification of contractor tests, system check-out, and modest modifications of the technical system's frequency response to the facility's acoustical environment (after initial contractor commissioning activities). The video system will be observed for proper image display. Functionality of the control system will be observed.

B. Provide the services of the designated supervisor and any other technicians who are familiar with the system, for approximately two ten-hour days. Additional time may be required due to Alternates accepted by the Owner’s Representative, or due to Addenda or Change Orders (if any) which modify the scope of work. The supervisor shall provide personal assistance during these activities. This time period does not include time for correcting wiring errors, equipment malfunctions, or problems related to the installation of the technical system. This work could occur at any time day, night, weekends, or holidays without additional claims for expense.

C. At the discretion of the Design Consultant, the Contractor shall participate in the control and adjustment of computer controlled systems including but not limited to the following systems: Main control (Crestron/AMX), DSP, wireless microphone, amplifier, active loudspeaker, etc.



POPULOUS 16.4224.10 APRIL 8, 2016


D. At the completion of the final commissioning period, the Contractor shall compile all system configuration settings (files) with copies as required for inclusion in the O&M manuals described later in these specifications.

E. In addition, provide the following: hand and power tools appropriate for the type of installation, ladders, lifts, and/or scaffolding as required to reach all high-mounted devices, spare wire and cable of the types used in the installation, selection of wiring fasteners used in the installation, complete set of the most recent reviewed shop drawings, complete set of all manufacturers’ original installation/operation/maintenance manuals, and specific test equipment used during the preliminary testing activities.

F. After the technical system is operational, the contractor shall provide verbal instruction to designated Owner’s Representative as to proper methods of system operation. Video record the instruction class and provide the recording in a usable digital format to the Owner’s Representative.

G. Provide operational assistance for the first major use of the completed system as directed by the Owner’s Representative, including being present for: one prior rehearsal associated with the event (if applicable); a technical-check immediately prior to the event; and the event itself.

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. At the completion of the project, compile thorough copies of the Operation and Maintenance Data per Division 27 Section “General Communications Requirements”.

B. As applicable, save full digital version to the system computer.

WARRANTY CHECK

A. Visit the job two weeks prior to the end of the warranty period to check all equipment for proper system operation. Any defective equipment found shall be replaced or repaired under the terms of the system warranty.

B. Refer to General Conditions for additional requirements.

C. Update Record Drawings and Operation and Maintenance Data to reflect work done during Warranty period.

END OF SECTION

POPULOUS 16.4224.10BANKERS LIFE FIELDHOUSE - PHASE 1

BID PACKAGE #2 - SUITE CONSOLIDATION APRIL 14, 2016

Page 1

ADDENDUM 1 NARRATIVEDate Sheet(s) affected Narrative Reason for Change Direction given by

SPECIFICATIONS4/18/2016 BP2 274100 ADDED: Additional verbiage to clarify Alternate 1

requirements.00 01 10 Table of Contents Clarify sections being issued. Sections being issued.

03 54 16 Hydraulic Cement Underlayment

Underlayments for patching and filling concrete surfaces. New Section.

04 20 00 Unit Masonry Masonry being used in Food Service areas. New Section.05 73 13 Glazed Decorative Metal Railings


06 16 00 Sheathing Plywood subfloor. New Section.06 41 13 Wood Veneer Faced Architectural Cabinets


06 41 16 Plastic Laminate Faced Architectural Cabinets


08 71 00 Door Hardware Clarifications to section. Reissued.08 80 00 Glazing Clarified laminate glazing. Reissued.09 65 13 Resilient Base and Accessories

Clarified nosings. Reissued.

09 68 16 Sheet Carpeting Clarifications to section. Reissued.12 36 91 Simulated Stone Countertops


Volume 2 Table of Contents Coordinated Table of Contents to sections issued on 4/8/16. No additional Division 21 or 22 sections are issued with this Addendum.

Reissued.

STRUCTURAL

MEP4/18/2016 BP2 M2-4C REVISED: Architectural slot diffuser (ASD1) locations within

Suite Club due to architectural coordination. REVISED: Linear slot diffuser LSD1 within Suite Club to have light shield for all unused portions of the slot in lieu of blank off plates due reduction in ASD1 return slot length as a result of architectural coordination.REVISED: Grease exhaust duct routing in Food Service 4C36B due to revised food service information.REVISED: Supply ductwork and diffuser layout in Food Service 4C36B to coordinate with revised grease duct routing.



Page 2


4/18/2016 BP2 M2-4D REVISED: Architectural slot diffuser (ASD1) locations within Suite Club due to architectural coordination. REVISED: Linear slot diffuser LSD1 within Suite Club to have light shield for all unused portions of the slot in lieu of blank off plates due reduction in ASD1 return slot length as a result of architectural coordination.REVISED: Grease exhaust duct routing in Food Service 4C36B due to revised food service information.REVISED: Supply ductwork and diffuser layout in Food Service 4C36B to coordinate with revised grease duct routing.REVISED: Supply diffuser airflows associated with unit FR54 3 due to revised food service information.

4/18/2016 BP2 M5-1 REVISED: Kitchen exhaust fan (E) KE 12 due to revised food service information.REVISED: Fan-powered terminal unit FR54 3 due to revised food service information.

4/18/2016 BP2 TN2-4C REVISED: Locations of data outlets to match POS stations.DELETED: (2) data outlets to POS stations.

4/18/2016 BP2 P2-3D REVISED: Revised underfloor piping to relocated hand sink and oven-steamerADDED: Underfloor waste piping to disposer to match foodservice schedule.

4/18/2016 BP2 P3-1 DELETED: TMV’s and bar dump sinks.REVISED: Gas piping from 2” to 1-1/2” diameter.

4/18/2016 BP2 P3-2 REVISED: Gas piping from 2” to 1-1/2” diameter.REVISED: Revised piping to relocated hand sink and oven-steamer.ADDED: Detail callout to disposer.

4/18/2016 BP2 P4-1 DELETED: Detail #12.REVISED: Detail # 6.

4/18/2016 BP2 E3 – 4C REVISED: Light Fixture layout at Bar Area Task; Light Fixture Types: SF1, SF6, SF4 and remote transformer locations.REVISED: Light Fixture ceiling layout at bar area and coffer ceiling; Light Fixture Types: SD4/SD4E, SF2, SD1/SD1E, and SP1.REVISED: Light Fixture ceiling layout at Theatre Boxes; Light Fixture Types: SR2, SF3-1, and SF3-4ADDED: Zoning plan notes.



Page 3


4/18/2016 BP2 E3 – 4D REVISED: Light Fixture layout at Bar Area Task; Light Fixture Types: SF1, SF6, SF4 and remote transformer locations.REVISED: Light Fixture ceiling layout at bar area and coffer ceiling; Light Fixture Types: SD4/SD4E, SF2, SD1/SD1E, and SP1.REVISED: Light Fixture ceiling layout at Theatre Boxes; Light Fixture Types: SR2, SF3-1, and SF3-4.ADDED: Zoning plan notes.

4/18/2016 BP2 E4 – 2 REVISED: Receptacle locations and associated circuiting in base of millwork for drop in freezer (7.038) in Suite Club 4C31 for revised food service information.REVISED: Receptacle locations and associated circuiting for mobile warning cart (16.045) to north wall of Food Service 4C36B for revised food service information.DELETED: Receptacle and associated circuiting for mobile warning cart (16.045) along west wall of Food Service 4C36B for revised food service information.REVISED: Junction box location and associated circuiting for oven (4.031) to east end of center wall of Food Service 4C36B.DELETED: Deleted junction box and associated circuiting for oven/steamer (4.038) under hood in Food Service 4C36B for revised food service information.REVISED: Connections for hood in Food Service 4C36B.

4/18/2016 BP2 E5 - 1 ADDED: Dimming Panelboard RD1-4NED1.4/18/2016 BP2 E6 - 1 REVISED: Panelboard RP-4SW4D and RP-4SW6.4/18/2016 BP2 E6 - 2 ADDED: The following to the Light Fixture and Notes:

SD1-ALT004, SD1-ALT005, SD2-ALT004, SD2-ALT005, SD3-ALT004, SD3-ALT005, SD4-ALT004, SD4-ALT005, General Note #8.REVISED: The following in the Light Fixture Schedule::SD2 - Description ClarificationSD4 - Model Number, Equivalents, Description ClarificationSR2 - Model, Lamp, Description ClarificationSP1 - Lamp Specification ClarificationSW1 - Lamp Specification ClarificationSW2 - Lamp Specification Clarification

FOOD SERVICE4/18/2016 BP2 FS3-1.01 Corrected qty. #2.012 beer towers4/18/2016 BP2 FS3-1.01 Added "existing" in hood description4/18/2016 BP2 FS3-1.01 Corrected Revit family for item #4.103, cook station

ARCHTIECTURAL

ADDENDUM

TO:

Populous

ADDENDUM NUMBER:

Addendum #1

ISSUE DATE:

April 18, 2016

PROJECT NAME:

Bankers Life Fieldhouse – Phase 1 Bid Package #2 Suite Consolidation

COPIES:

PROJECT NUMBER:

16.4224.10

This is addendum #X for the Bid Package #X. The work shall be carried out in accordance with the following addendum issued in accordance with the contract documents. Prior to proceeding in accordance with these instructions, indicate your acceptance of these instructions for change to the work as consistent with the contract documents and return a copy to the architect.

NARRATIVE CHANGES

LINE # CODE DOCUMENT DESCRIPTION

SPECIFICATION CHANGES


01 BP2 274100 ADDED: Additional verbiage to clarify Alternate 1 requirements.

SKETCHES


LARGE SHEETS


04

BP2 M2-4C REVISED: Architectural slot diffuser (ASD1) locations within Suite Club due to architectural coordination. REVISED: Linear slot diffuser LSD1 within Suite Club to have light shield for all unused portions of the slot in lieu of blank off plates due reduction in ASD1 return slot length as a result of architectural coordination. REVISED: Grease exhaust duct routing in Food Service 4C36B due to revised food service information. REVISED: Supply ductwork and diffuser layout in Food Service 4C36B to coordinate with revised grease duct routing.

04

BP2 M2-4D REVISED: Architectural slot diffuser (ASD1) locations within Suite Club due to architectural coordination. REVISED: Linear slot diffuser LSD1 within Suite Club to have light shield for all unused portions of the slot in lieu of blank off plates due reduction in ASD1 return slot length as a result of architectural coordination. REVISED: Grease exhaust duct routing in Food Service 4C36B due to revised food service information. REVISED: Supply ductwork and diffuser layout in Food Service 4C36B to coordinate with revised grease duct routing. REVISED: Supply diffuser airflows associated with unit FR54 3 due to revised food service information.

ADDENDUM

PROJECT NAME Locker Room Restaurant Renovation – Bankers Life Fieldhouse

April 18, 2016 Page 2 of 3


04

BP2 M5-1 REVISED: Kitchen exhaust fan (E) KE 12 due to revised food service information. REVISED: Fan-powered terminal unit FR54 3 due to revised food service information.

04 BP2 TN2-4C REVISED: Locations of data outlets to match POS stations.

DELETED: (2) data outlets to POS stations.

04 BP2 P2-3D REVISED: Revised underfloor piping to relocated hand sink and oven-

steamer ADDED: Underfloor waste piping to disposer to match foodservice schedule.

04 BP2 P3-1 DELETED: TMV’s and bar dump sinks.

REVISED: Gas piping from 2” to 1-1/2” diameter.

04 BP2 P3-2 REVISED: Gas piping from 2” to 1-1/2” diameter.

REVISED: Revised piping to relocated hand sink and oven-steamer. ADDED: Detail callout to disposer.

04 BP2 P4-1 DELETED: Detail #12.

REVISED: Detail # 6.

04

BP2 E3 – 4C REVISED: Light Fixture layout at Bar Area Task; Light Fixture Types: SF1, SF6, SF4 and remote transformer locations. REVISED: Light Fixture ceiling layout at bar area and coffer ceiling; Light Fixture Types: SD4/SD4E, SF2, SD1/SD1E, and SP1. REVISED: Light Fixture ceiling layout at Theatre Boxes; Light Fixture Types: SR2, SF3-1, and SF3-4 ADDED: Zoning plan notes.

04

BP2 E3 – 4D REVISED: Light Fixture layout at Bar Area Task; Light Fixture Types: SF1, SF6, SF4 and remote transformer locations. REVISED: Light Fixture ceiling layout at bar area and coffer ceiling; Light Fixture Types: SD4/SD4E, SF2, SD1/SD1E, and SP1. REVISED: Light Fixture ceiling layout at Theatre Boxes; Light Fixture Types: SR2, SF3-1, and SF3-4. ADDED: Zoning plan notes.

04

BP2 E4 – 2

REVISED: Receptacle locations and associated circuiting in base of millwork for drop in freezer (7.038) in Suite Club 4C31 for revised food service information. REVISED: Receptacle locations and associated circuiting for mobile warning cart (16.045) to north wall of Food Service 4C36B for revised food service information. DELETED: Receptacle and associated circuiting for mobile warning cart (16.045) along west wall of Food Service 4C36B for revised food service information. REVISED: Junction box location and associated circuiting for oven (4.031) to east end of center wall of Food Service 4C36B. DELETED: Deleted junction box and associated circuiting for oven/steamer (4.038) under hood in Food Service 4C36B for revised food service information. REVISED: Connections for hood in Food Service 4C36B.

04 BP2 E5 - 1 ADDED: Dimming Panelboard RD1-4NED1.

04 BP2 E6 - 1 REVISED: Panelboard RP-4SW4D and RP-4SW6.

01,04,15

BP2 E6 - 2 ADDED: The following to the Light Fixture and Notes: SD1-ALT004, SD1-ALT005, SD2-ALT004, SD2-ALT005, SD3-ALT004, SD3-ALT005, SD4-ALT004, SD4-ALT005, General Note #8. REVISED: The following in the Light Fixture Schedule:: SD2 - Description Clarification SD4 - Model Number, Equivalents, Description Clarification SR2 - Model, Lamp, Description Clarification SP1 - Lamp Specification Clarification SW1 - Lamp Specification Clarification SW2 - Lamp Specification Clarification

ADDENDUM

PROJECT NAME Locker Room Restaurant Renovation – Bankers Life Fieldhouse

April 18, 2016 Page 3 of 3


ATTACHMENTS: Small Sheets: Large Sheets: Change code key; 01=Clarification of Documents, 02=Construction Repair / Correction; 03=Contractor Convenience / Proposed Deviation, 04=Document Modification, 05=Owner Changes, 06=Jurisdiction Changes, 07=Unforeseen Conditions, 15=Value Engineering. The following is based on information provided by the Contractor.

ISSUED BY:

ACCEPTED BY:

ARCHITECT:

CONTRACTOR:

DATE:

DATE:



Page 1


SPECIFICATIONS4/18/2016 BP2 274100 ADDED: Additional verbiage to clarify Alternate 1

requirements.00 01 10 Table of Contents Clarify sections being issued. Sections being issued.

03 54 16 Hydraulic Cement Underlayment

Underlayments for patching and filling concrete surfaces. New Section.

04 20 00 Unit Masonry Masonry being used in Food Service areas. New Section.05 73 13 Glazed Decorative Metal Railings


06 16 00 Sheathing Plywood subfloor. New Section.06 41 13 Wood Veneer Faced Architectural Cabinets


06 41 16 Plastic Laminate Faced Architectural Cabinets


08 71 00 Door Hardware Clarifications to section. Reissued.08 80 00 Glazing Clarified laminate glazing. Reissued.09 65 13 Resilient Base and Accessories

Clarified nosings. Reissued.

09 68 16 Sheet Carpeting Clarifications to section. Reissued.12 36 91 Simulated Stone Countertops


Volume 2 Table of Contents Coordinated Table of Contents to sections issued on 4/8/16. No additional Division 21 or 22 sections are issued with this Addendum.

Reissued.

STRUCTURAL

MEP4/18/2016 BP2 M2-4C REVISED: Architectural slot diffuser (ASD1) locations within

Suite Club due to architectural coordination. REVISED: Linear slot diffuser LSD1 within Suite Club to have light shield for all unused portions of the slot in lieu of blank off plates due reduction in ASD1 return slot length as a result of architectural coordination.REVISED: Grease exhaust duct routing in Food Service 4C36B due to revised food service information.REVISED: Supply ductwork and diffuser layout in Food Service 4C36B to coordinate with revised grease duct routing.



Page 2


4/18/2016 BP2 M2-4D REVISED: Architectural slot diffuser (ASD1) locations within Suite Club due to architectural coordination. REVISED: Linear slot diffuser LSD1 within Suite Club to have light shield for all unused portions of the slot in lieu of blank off plates due reduction in ASD1 return slot length as a result of architectural coordination.REVISED: Grease exhaust duct routing in Food Service 4C36B due to revised food service information.REVISED: Supply ductwork and diffuser layout in Food Service 4C36B to coordinate with revised grease duct routing.REVISED: Supply diffuser airflows associated with unit FR54 3 due to revised food service information.

4/18/2016 BP2 M5-1 REVISED: Kitchen exhaust fan (E) KE 12 due to revised food service information.REVISED: Fan-powered terminal unit FR54 3 due to revised food service information.

4/18/2016 BP2 TN2-4C REVISED: Locations of data outlets to match POS stations.DELETED: (2) data outlets to POS stations.

4/18/2016 BP2 P2-3D REVISED: Revised underfloor piping to relocated hand sink and oven-steamerADDED: Underfloor waste piping to disposer to match foodservice schedule.

4/18/2016 BP2 P3-1 DELETED: TMV’s and bar dump sinks.REVISED: Gas piping from 2” to 1-1/2” diameter.

4/18/2016 BP2 P3-2 REVISED: Gas piping from 2” to 1-1/2” diameter.REVISED: Revised piping to relocated hand sink and oven-steamer.ADDED: Detail callout to disposer.

4/18/2016 BP2 P4-1 DELETED: Detail #12.REVISED: Detail # 6.

4/18/2016 BP2 E3 – 4C REVISED: Light Fixture layout at Bar Area Task; Light Fixture Types: SF1, SF6, SF4 and remote transformer locations.REVISED: Light Fixture ceiling layout at bar area and coffer ceiling; Light Fixture Types: SD4/SD4E, SF2, SD1/SD1E, and SP1.REVISED: Light Fixture ceiling layout at Theatre Boxes; Light Fixture Types: SR2, SF3-1, and SF3-4ADDED: Zoning plan notes.



Page 3


4/18/2016 BP2 E3 – 4D REVISED: Light Fixture layout at Bar Area Task; Light Fixture Types: SF1, SF6, SF4 and remote transformer locations.REVISED: Light Fixture ceiling layout at bar area and coffer ceiling; Light Fixture Types: SD4/SD4E, SF2, SD1/SD1E, and SP1.REVISED: Light Fixture ceiling layout at Theatre Boxes; Light Fixture Types: SR2, SF3-1, and SF3-4.ADDED: Zoning plan notes.

4/18/2016 BP2 E4 – 2 REVISED: Receptacle locations and associated circuiting in base of millwork for drop in freezer (7.038) in Suite Club 4C31 for revised food service information.REVISED: Receptacle locations and associated circuiting for mobile warning cart (16.045) to north wall of Food Service 4C36B for revised food service information.DELETED: Receptacle and associated circuiting for mobile warning cart (16.045) along west wall of Food Service 4C36B for revised food service information.REVISED: Junction box location and associated circuiting for oven (4.031) to east end of center wall of Food Service 4C36B.DELETED: Deleted junction box and associated circuiting for oven/steamer (4.038) under hood in Food Service 4C36B for revised food service information.REVISED: Connections for hood in Food Service 4C36B.

4/18/2016 BP2 E5 - 1 ADDED: Dimming Panelboard RD1-4NED1.4/18/2016 BP2 E6 - 1 REVISED: Panelboard RP-4SW4D and RP-4SW6.4/18/2016 BP2 E6 - 2 ADDED: The following to the Light Fixture and Notes:

SD1-ALT004, SD1-ALT005, SD2-ALT004, SD2-ALT005, SD3-ALT004, SD3-ALT005, SD4-ALT004, SD4-ALT005, General Note #8.REVISED: The following in the Light Fixture Schedule::SD2 - Description ClarificationSD4 - Model Number, Equivalents, Description ClarificationSR2 - Model, Lamp, Description ClarificationSP1 - Lamp Specification ClarificationSW1 - Lamp Specification ClarificationSW2 - Lamp Specification Clarification

FOOD SERVICE4/18/2016 BP2 FS3-1.01 Corrected qty. #2.012 beer towers4/18/2016 BP2 FS3-1.01 Added "existing" in hood description4/18/2016 BP2 FS3-1.01 Corrected Revit family for item #4.103, cook station

ARCHTIECTURAL

CBA D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:

DISCIPLINE - CATEGORY - SUB CATEGORY - SHEET

REVISIONS

Architecture, Planning,Interiors, Programming4800 Main Street, Suite 300Kansas City, Missouri 64112816-221-1500

PROJECT NORTH

®

TM

®

®

Suite 300Lenexa, Kansas 66214913-742-5000

9449 Priority Way West DriveSuite 200Indianapolis, Indiana 46240

8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400

13 Winding Branch Rd.

Hawthorn Woods, IL 60047

1-224-717-1555

BID PACKAGE #2

4/18/20 16 1:06:16 PM

Ban

kers

Life

Fie

ldho

use

1 25

S. P

enns

ylv a

nia

St.,

Indi

anap

olis

, IN

462

40

STRUCTURAL CONSULTANT

MEPT, AV & FIRE CONSULTANT

FOOD SERVICE CONSULTANT

CONSTRUCTIONDOCUMENTS

04.08.2016

COVER SHEET

BP2 X1-1

16.4224.00

04.08.16

2016

BANKERS LIFE FIELDHOUSEINDIANAPOLIS, INDIANA 46204PROJECT # - 002POPULOUS PROJECT # - 16.4224.00

CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS - BID PACKAGE #2 - ADDENDUM #1SUITE CONSOLIDATIONDATE ISSUED: APRIL 18TH, 2016

BANKER'S LIFE FIELD HOUSE125 S. PENNSYLVANIA STREETINDIANAPOLIS, INDIANA 46240

Architecture, Planning, Interiors, Programming4800 Main Street, Suite 300Kansas City, Missouri 64112

816-221-1500

Structural Consultant9449 Priority Way West Drive, Suite 200

Indianapolis, Indiana 462401-317-872-8400

MEPT, AV & FIRE Consultant8345 Lenexa Drive, Suite 300

Lenexa, Kansas 66214913-742-5000

Food Service Consultant13 Winding Branch Road

Hawthorn Woods, Illinios 600471-224-717-1555

SITE MAP

GENERAL NOTES

HIGHLIGHTED GRAY REGION ON SHEETIDENTIFIES AN AREA NOT CURRENTLY INSCOPE OF WORK.

1. RE: X3-1 FOR GRID GEOMETRY PLANAND DIMENSIONS.

2. RE: A0-01 FOR WALL TYPEDESIGNATIONS, DIMENSIONING CRITERIA,GRAPHIC SYMBOLS AND RATEDCONSTRUCTION TYPES.

3. RE: A8-1-01, A8-1-02 FOR TYPICALINTERIOR DETAILS.

4. RE: A8-2-01 FOR CASEWORK SCHEDULEAND DETAILS.

5. RE: A8-3-01 FOR DOOR AND FRAMEELEVATIONS.

6. RE: A8-6-01 FOR RAIL TYPES ANDDETAILS.

7. RE: A9-0-01 FOR FINISH LEGEND.

NO. DATE DESCRIPTION

BP1 02 04.18.16 ADDENDUM #1

Q

R20.4

NNN

OOO

PPP

R18.2

R17

R18

R16.5

R16.3

P.9

R16

R15.9 R16.2R16.1R15.7R15R14 R14.4 R15.1R13.9R13.5

R20.5

R20

R19.1

R19

R18.8

R16.8

EE.7

A

B

D

C DEMOLISH EXISTING CONCESSIONACCESSORIES & MILLWORK

EXISTING SUITE 47TYPE C-2RM #4C31

EXISTING SUITE 48TYPE B-1RM #43C2


EXISTING PANTRYRM # 4C35

EXISTINGPREP AREARM # 4C36A

EXISTINGCONCESSION

RM # 4C36

EXISTING SOUTHSPONSOR'S PAVILION

RM #4C34

EXISTINGUNISEX RRRM #4C29

OFFICERM #4C23

EXISTING SUITE 50TYPE B-1RM #4D01

EE.9

EE.2CC

BB

AA

FF

CC.1BB.1AA.1

DD

EE

REPLACE DOOR FRAME & HARDWARERE: DOOR SCHEDULE

EXTENT OF DEMOLISHED AREA,EXISTING WALLS TO BE DEMOLISHEDHIGHLIGHTED BY BLACK DASH LINES

EXISTING BOWL STAIRS TO BEDEMOLISHED

NEW BOWL STAIRSTO BE CONSTRUCTED

REMOVE TOP OF WALLRE: STRUCTURE

NEW GLASS RAIL TO BE ADDED AT FRONTOF BOWL EDGE, CUT WALL SHOULD BEFLUSH WITH REMAINING FLOOR SLAB

EXISTING CERAMICTILE (FLOOR FINISH)TO BE REMOVED

EXISTING CARPET ATCORRIDOR TO BE REMOVEDPRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION.

REMOVED AND SALVAGEDCARPET TO BE REVIEWED BY

OWNER PRIOR TO RE-INSTALLATION

EXISTING MILLWORK ANDFURNITURE TO BE REMOVEDPRIOR TO DEMOLITION. G.C. TOPLACE REQUESTED ITEMS INSTORAGE AT OWNER DISCRETION.TYP. CONDITION AT ALL SUITES

PATCH EXISTING TO REMAINAFTER DEMOLITION

REMOVE EXISTING CONCRETE BLOCKAND SEATS AT ADJACENT SECTION TONEW BOWL STAIR.

CBA D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


PROJECT NORTH

®

TM

®

®



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400



1-224-717-1555

FO

R R

EF

ER

EN

CE

ON

LY -

NO

T F

OR

CO

NS

TR

UC

TIO

N

BID PACKAGE #2

4/18/20 16 1:05:36 PM

Ban

kers

Life

Fie

ldho

use

1 25

S. P

enns

ylv a

nia

St.,

Indi

anap

olis

, IN

462

40





04.08.2016

DEMO PLAN - SUITELEVEL AREA C

BP2 AD2-2 C

16.4224.00

04.08.16

2016

1/8" = 1'-0"1

CLUB / SUITE LEVEL DEMO - AREA C PLAN

GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTES:

1. PRIOR TO THE COMMENCEMENT OF ANY WORK, THE OWNER SHALL BE OBLIGATED TO INFORM ALLPARTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE ARCHITECT AND CONTRACTOR, OF THE ACTUAL PRESENCEOF OR REASONABLY INFERABLE OR KNOWABLE PRESENCE OF ASBESTOS, LEAD, POLYCHLORINATEDBIPHENYL (PCB), OR OTHER TOXIC SUBSTANCE, HAZARDOUS WASTE OR HAZARDOUS MATERIALS.

2. IN THE EVENT OF THE DISCOVERY OF AND / OR EXPOSURE TO AND / OR SUSTAINIAL RISK OF EXPOSURE OFASBESTOS, LEAD, POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYL (PCB), OR OTHER TOXIC SUBSTANCE, HAZARDOUS WASTEOR HAZARDOUS MATERIAL BY THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROMPTLY NOTIFY THE OWNER IN WRITING OFSAME. THE OWNER SHALL THEN HAVE THE DUTY TO INFORM THE ARCHITECT OF SAME.

3. THE OWNER SHALL HAVE THE DUTY TO PROMPTLY RETAIN AN INDEPENDENT QUALIFIED EXPERT TOREMOVE AND / OR SUPERVISE THE REMOVAL OF SUCH ASBESTOS, LEAD, POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYL(PCB), OR OTHER TOXIC SUBSTANCE, HAZARDOUS WASTE OR HAZARDOUS MATERIAL AS MAY BE PRESENTIN A SAFE AND LEGAL MANNER.

4. THE OWNER SHALL IDENTIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS THE ARCHITECT, ENGINEERS, HIS AFFLIATES ANDSUBCONTRACTORS, AND THEIR OFFICERS, AGENTS AND EMPLOYERS FROM ANY AND ALL LIABILITY ON THEPART OF OR DAMAGE TO SUCH ENTITIES OR PERSONS, INCLUDING THE COST OF LEGAL FEES ANDEXPENSES, AS SUCH FEES AND EXPENSES POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYL (PCB), OR OTHER TOXICSUBSTANCE, HAZARDOUS WASTE OR HAZARDOUS MATERIAL ON THIS PROJECT.

5. THE INTENT OF DEMOLITION IS TO PROVIDE A CLEAN SPACE FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION.

6. THE SCOPE OF WORK SHALL INCLUDE THE DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL FROM PREMISES OF ALLUNNECESSARY LIGHT FIXTURES, PARTITIONS, DOORS, BUCKS, FLOOR COVERING, ETC. AS WELL ASELECTRICAL, H.V.A.C. AND PLUMBING LINES AND EQUIPMENT AND ALL CAPPING. ALL WORK TO BEPERFORMED BY LICENSED TECHNICIANS TO ACCOMPLISH THE WORK AS OUTLINED IN THIS SET OFDRAWINGS.

7. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY SPACE PRIOR TO DEMOLITION. G.C. SHOULD NOTIFYPOPULOUS OF ANY DISCREPANCIES AND / OR CONCERNS IN REGARDS TO THE SCOPE OF WORK AND ITEMSTHAT MAY CONFLICT WITH THIS PLAN.

8. REMOVE RUBBER BASE IN ALL SCHEDULED DEMO AREAS.

9. REMOVE AND DISCARD ALL DEMOLISHED ITEMS IN A MANNER APPROVED BY THE CITY OF INDIANAPOLISAND ANY OTHER GOVERNMENT AGENCY.

10. ALL WORK SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH BUILDINGS STANDARD OPERATION PROCEDURES.

11. EXISTING CLASS E WIRING SHALL BE PROTECTED DURING DEMOLITION AND EXISTING DEVICESRECONNECTED FOR A FULLY OPERATIONAL SYSTESM AT THE END OF EACH WORK DAY. EXISTING WIRINGTHAT HAS BEEN DAMAGED DURING DEMOLITION SHALL BE REPLACED.

12. CONTRACTOR SHALL INFORM BUILDING OWNER AND POPULOUS OF HAZARDOUS MATERIAL FOUND INTHE AREA OF NEW WORK AS SOON AS POSSIBLE.

13. ALL ITEMS SPECIFIED FOR REUSE (COORD. W/ BLDG. MGR.) AREA ASSUMED TO BE IN GOOD OPERATINGCONDITION. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY CONDITIONS OF ALL ITEMS FOR REUSE AND SHALLNOTIFY POPULOUS OF ANY DISCREPANCIES. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL STORE ALL REUSABLE ITEMSSO AS TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THEM. SHOULD DAMAGE OCCUR, GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL REPLACEOR REPAINT SUCH ITEMS, AS REQUIRED, AT HIS SOLE COST AND EXPENSE.

14. REMOVE ALL FINISH FLOORING DOWN TO BARE CONCRETE SLAB, PATCH SLAB AND SMOOTH TO WITHIN1/8" VARIANCE OVER 10' - 0" DIAMETER.

15. ALL PENETRATIONS IN FLOOR SLAB, DECK ABOVE OR ATED WALLS ARE TO BE REPAIRED AND FIRESTOPPED.

16. UPON REMOVAL OF INTERIOR PARTITIONS, PATCH ALL HOLES OR DEFECTS ON EXISTING PLASTER ATCOLUMNS, MASONRY WALLS, FLOORS, PERIMETER AND DEMISING PARTITIONS. TAPE, SAND, AND SPACKLEREADY TO RECEIVE NEW FINISH. CONTRACTOR TO PATCH ALL WALLS UP TO 10 FEET.

17. AFTER REMOVAL OF HOLES OR DEFECTIVE PLASTER AT COLUMNS, FLOORS, PERIMETER AND INTERIORPARTITIONS SHALL BE PATCHED FREE AND LEFT FREE OF ALL ROUGHNESS AND IRREGULARITIES.

18. REMOVE ALL ELECTRICAL PANELS NOT IN ELECTRICAL CLOSETS AND ALL SURFACE MOUNTEDELECTRICAL MOLDING, WIRES AND CONDUITS. REMOVE ALL EXISTING TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT, CABLINGAND PANELS BACK TO THE MAIN ELECTRICAL ROOM.

19. REMOVE UNUSED TELEPHONE SWITCHES / EQUIPMENT AND RELATED TELEPHONE CABLING IN ALLTELEPHONE CLOSESTS.

20. GENERAL CONCTRACTOR TO WALK SPACE PRIOR TO DEMOLITION. G.C. SHOULD NOTIFY POPULOUS.

21. CONTRACTOR TO STRIP ALL COLUMNS OF ANY FINISHES AND REPAIR AS NECESSARY.

22. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGE TO ADJACENT WORK NOT SHCEUDLED FORDEMOLITION.

23. REQUIRED EXITS, EXISTING STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS, FIRE PROTECTION DEVICES AND SANITARYSAFEGUARDS SHALL BE MAINTAINED AT ALL TIMES DURING DEMOLITION.

24. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE MEANS TO PROTECT ELEVATOR CABS DURING REMOVAL OF WASTEMATERIAL AND THROUGHOUT DEMOLITION.

25. BUILDING UTILITIES SHALL NOT BE DISRUPTED DURING DEMOLITION WITHOUT THE CONSENT OF THEBUILDING MANAGER / OWNER.

26. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE A TEMPORARY SIGN AT THE GROUND FLOOR ENTRY TO THE STAIRS ANDELEVATOR THAT ACCESS IS FORBIDDEN BY THE PUBLIC AS DEMOLITION IS IN PROGRESS.

27. PROVIDE (1) PORTABLE #10 CLASS B FIRE EXTINGUISHER FOR ALL AREAS DECLARED FORCONSTRUCTION DURING EXTENT OF DEMOLITION SCHEDULE.

28. WHERE NEW CEILINGS ARE SCHEDULED, REMOVE EXISTING CEILING TILES AND GRID INCLUDING ALLASSOCIATED SUPPORT WIRES AND PERIMETER ANGLES.

29. ALL EXISTING WALLS, NOTED TO BE DEMOLISHED, ARE TO BE REMOVED UP TO STRUCTURE ABOVEUNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.

FIRE PROTECTION NOTES:

1. REFER TO SHEETS BP1 FPD2-1A AND BP1 FPD2-1B FOR EXTENT OF DEMOLITION. FIRE PROTECTION WORKSHALL BE REPLACED IF DAMAGED IN THE COURSE OF THE WORK DONE BY THIS CONTRACT.

2. EXISTING CLASS E WIRING SHALL BE PROTECTED DURING DEMOLITION. EXISTING DEVICESRECONNECTED FOR A FULLY OPERATIONAL SYSTEAM AT THE END OF EACH WORK DAY. EXISTING WIRINGTHAT HAS BEEN DAMAGED DURING DEMOLITION SHALL BE REPLACED.

3. ALL SMOKE DETECTORS TO REMAIN ACTIVE - COIL WIRES TO CEILING & TEMPORARILY MOUNT TOUNDERSIDE OF STRUCTURAL DECK ABOVE.

4. EXISTING FIRE ALARM PANEL AND FIRE ALARM DEVICES SHALL REMAIN ACTIVE DURING DEMOLITION ANDCONSTRUCTION. MAINTAIN, PROTECT AND PROVIDE TEMPORARY SUPPORTS AS REQUIRED.

ELECTRICAL, PHONE, & DATA NOTES:

1. REFER TO SHEETS BP1 ED2-1A , BP1 ED2-1B, TND2-1B, AND TAD2-1B FOR EXTENT OF DEMOLITION.

2. DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING DOOR SECURITY DEVICES AND ASSOCIATED WIRE AND CONDUITBACK TO POINT OF ORIGIN.

3. EXISTING CLASS E WIRING WHALL BE MAINTAINED AND PROTECTED DURING DEMOLITION. EXISTINGWIRING THAT HAS BEEN DAMAGED DURING DEMOLITION SHALL BE REPLACED.

4. PROVIDE TEMPORARY LIGHTING IN AREAS DEMOLISHED BY LANDLORD AND LABEL ELECTRICAL PANLEACCORDINGLY, THE LOCATION OF PANELS IS TO BE SHOWN ON FLOOR PLAN POSTED AT ENTRANCE OFWORK AREA.

5. REMOVE ALL ELECTRICAL OUTLETS AND SWITCH WIRING DEVICES AND FACE PLATES FROM WALLS,INTERIOR AND PERIMETER COLUMNS. COIL AND AFFIX TO EXPOSED STRUCTURAL DECK ABOVE AND LABEL,PATCH SURFACES AS REQUIRED.

H.V.A.C NOTES:

1. REFER TO SHEETS BP1 MD2-1A, BP1 MD2-1B, AND BP1 MD2-2B FOR REMOVAL OF ALL EQUIPMENT INSCHEDULED DEMO AREAS.

PLUMBING NOTES:

1. REFER TO SHEET BP1 PD2-1B FOR EXTENT OF DEMOLITION. REMOVE FIXTURES AND ALL UNUSED PIPINGAS REQUIRED.

SECURITY NOTES:

1. ENGAGE (THRU THE BLDG. MGR OR OWNER) THE CURRENT SECURITY COMPANY PROVIDER TORELOCATE ALL MOTION DETECTORS.

2. DISABLE EXISTING DOOR MONITORS AND CONTACTS.

1 HR

2 HR

3 HR

4 HR

SMOKE

EXTENT OFWORK

LINE WORK KEY

DEMOLITION (TYP.) LINE WORK KEY

DOOR &FRAME

CMU WALL

GYP BD.PARTITION

BP2_01

GENERAL NOTES










BP2_01 04/18/2016 BP2_Addendum 01

BP2_01

A

R27.5R27

R27.1 R26.6R26 R25.9

R25.3 R25.1R24.8R24.9

R25R24.7

R24.5

R24

R23

R22.2

R22

R20.6

OOO

R3

A.1

24.2

R22.8

R21.9

R21

R20.5

R20.7

A

B

D

C DEMOLISH EXISTING CONCESSIONACCESSORIES & MILLWORK



EXISTINGCONCESSION

RM # 4C36




EXISTING TRASHRM #4D07

EXISTING PANTRYRM #4D06

EXISTING OFFICERM #4D08


RM #4C34

EE.9

EE.2

CC

BBAA FF

CC.1

BB.1

AA.1

DD

EE

EXTENT OF DEMOLISHED AREA,EXISTING WALLS TO BE DEMOLISHEDHIGHLIGHTED BY BLACK DASH LINES

REMOVE DOORFRAME &HARDWARERE: DOORSCHEDULE

EXISTING BOWL STAIRS TO BEDEMOLISHED


EXISTING CERAMICTILE (FLOOR FINISH)TO BE REMOVED

EXISTING CARPET ATCORRIDOR TO BE REMOVEDPRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION.

REMOVED AND SALVAGEDCARPET TO BE REVIEWED BY

OWNER PRIOR TO RE-INSTALLATION

REMOVE TOP OF WALLRE: STRUCTURE

NEW GLASS RAIL TO BE ADDED AT FRONTOF BOWL EDGE, CUT WALL SHOULD BEFLUSH WITH REMAINING FLOOR SLAB

EXISTING MILLWORK ANDFURNITURE TO BE REMOVEDPRIOR TO DEMOLITION. G.C. TOPLACE REQUESTED ITEMS INSTORAGE AT OWNER DISCRETION.TYP. CONDITION AT ALL SUITES

PATCH EXISTING TO REMAINAFTER DEMOLITION

REMOVE EXISTING CONCRETE BLOCKAND SEATS AT ADJACENT SECTION TO

NEW BOWL STAIR.

BP2_01

CBA D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


PROJECT NORTH

®

TM

®

®



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400



1-224-717-1555

FO

R R

EF

ER

EN

CE

ON

LY -

NO

T F

OR

CO

NS

TR

UC

TIO

N

BID PACKAGE #2

4/18/20 16 1:05:40 PM

Ban

kers

Life

Fie

ldho

use

1 25

S. P

enns

ylv a

nia

St.,

Indi

anap

olis

, IN

462

40





04.08.2016

DEMO PLAN - SUITELEVEL AREA D

BP2 AD2-2 D

16.4224.00

04.08.16

2016

1/8" = 1'-0"1

CLUB / SUITE LEVEL DEMO - AREA D PLAN


1. PRIOR TO THE COMMENCEMENT OF ANY WORK, THE OWNER SHALL BE OBLIGATED TO INFORM ALL PARTIES,INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE ARCHITECT AND CONTRACTOR, OF THE ACTUAL PRESENCE OF ORREASONABLY INFERABLE OR KNOWABLE PRESENCE OF ASBESTOS, LEAD, POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYL (PCB),OR OTHER TOXIC SUBSTANCE, HAZARDOUS WASTE OR HAZARDOUS MATERIALS.

2. IN THE EVENT OF THE DISCOVERY OF AND / OR EXPOSURE TO AND / OR SUSTAINIAL RISK OF EXPOSURE OFASBESTOS, LEAD, POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYL (PCB), OR OTHER TOXIC SUBSTANCE, HAZARDOUS WASTE ORHAZARDOUS MATERIAL BY THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROMPTLY NOTIFY THE OWNER IN WRITING OF SAME. THEOWNER SHALL THEN HAVE THE DUTY TO INFORM THE ARCHITECT OF SAME.

3. THE OWNER SHALL HAVE THE DUTY TO PROMPTLY RETAIN AN INDEPENDENT QUALIFIED EXPERT TO REMOVEAND / OR SUPERVISE THE REMOVAL OF SUCH ASBESTOS, LEAD, POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYL (PCB), OR OTHERTOXIC SUBSTANCE, HAZARDOUS WASTE OR HAZARDOUS MATERIAL AS MAY BE PRESENT IN A SAFE AND LEGALMANNER.

4. THE OWNER SHALL IDENTIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS THE ARCHITECT, ENGINEERS, HIS AFFLIATES ANDSUBCONTRACTORS, AND THEIR OFFICERS, AGENTS AND EMPLOYERS FROM ANY AND ALL LIABILITY ON THEPART OF OR DAMAGE TO SUCH ENTITIES OR PERSONS, INCLUDING THE COST OF LEGAL FEES AND EXPENSES,AS SUCH FEES AND EXPENSES POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYL (PCB), OR OTHER TOXIC SUBSTANCE,HAZARDOUS WASTE OR HAZARDOUS MATERIAL ON THIS PROJECT.


6. THE SCOPE OF WORK SHALL INCLUDE THE DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL FROM PREMISES OF ALLUNNECESSARY LIGHT FIXTURES, PARTITIONS, DOORS, BUCKS, FLOOR COVERING, ETC. AS WELL ASELECTRICAL, H.V.A.C. AND PLUMBING LINES AND EQUIPMENT AND ALL CAPPING. ALL WORK TO BE PERFORMEDBY LICENSED TECHNICIANS TO ACCOMPLISH THE WORK AS OUTLINED IN THIS SET OF DRAWINGS.

7. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY SPACE PRIOR TO DEMOLITION. G.C. SHOULD NOTIFY POPULOUSOF ANY DISCREPANCIES AND / OR CONCERNS IN REGARDS TO THE SCOPE OF WORK AND ITEMS THAT MAYCONFLICT WITH THIS PLAN.


9. REMOVE AND DISCARD ALL DEMOLISHED ITEMS IN A MANNER APPROVED BY THE CITY OF INDIANAPOLIS ANDANY OTHER GOVERNMENT AGENCY.


11. EXISTING CLASS E WIRING SHALL BE PROTECTED DURING DEMOLITION AND EXISTING DEVICESRECONNECTED FOR A FULLY OPERATIONAL SYSTESM AT THE END OF EACH WORK DAY. EXISTING WIRING THATHAS BEEN DAMAGED DURING DEMOLITION SHALL BE REPLACED.

12. CONTRACTOR SHALL INFORM BUILDING OWNER AND POPULOUS OF HAZARDOUS MATERIAL FOUND IN THEAREA OF NEW WORK AS SOON AS POSSIBLE.

13. ALL ITEMS SPECIFIED FOR REUSE (COORD. W/ BLDG. MGR.) AREA ASSUMED TO BE IN GOOD OPERATINGCONDITION. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY CONDITIONS OF ALL ITEMS FOR REUSE AND SHALL NOTIFYPOPULOUS OF ANY DISCREPANCIES. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL STORE ALL REUSABLE ITEMS SO AS TOPREVENT DAMAGE TO THEM. SHOULD DAMAGE OCCUR, GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL REPLACE OR REPAINTSUCH ITEMS, AS REQUIRED, AT HIS SOLE COST AND EXPENSE.

14. REMOVE ALL FINISH FLOORING DOWN TO BARE CONCRETE SLAB, PATCH SLAB AND SMOOTH TO WITHIN 1/8"VARIANCE OVER 10' - 0" DIAMETER.

15. ALL PENETRATIONS IN FLOOR SLAB, DECK ABOVE OR ATED WALLS ARE TO BE REPAIRED AND FIRESTOPPED.



18. REMOVE ALL ELECTRICAL PANELS NOT IN ELECTRICAL CLOSETS AND ALL SURFACE MOUNTED ELECTRICALMOLDING, WIRES AND CONDUITS. REMOVE ALL EXISTING TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT, CABLING AND PANELS BACKTO THE MAIN ELECTRICAL ROOM.




22. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGE TO ADJACENT WORK NOT SHCEUDLED FOR DEMOLITION.


24. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE MEANS TO PROTECT ELEVATOR CABS DURING REMOVAL OF WASTEMATERIAL AND THROUGHOUT DEMOLITION.



27. PROVIDE (1) PORTABLE #10 CLASS B FIRE EXTINGUISHER FOR ALL AREAS DECLARED FOR CONSTRUCTIONDURING EXTENT OF DEMOLITION SCHEDULE.


29. ALL EXISTING WALLS, NOTED TO BE DEMOLISHED, ARE TO BE REMOVED UP TO STRUCTURE ABOVE UNLESSNOTED OTHERWISE.



2. EXISTING CLASS E WIRING SHALL BE PROTECTED DURING DEMOLITION. EXISTING DEVICES RECONNECTEDFOR A FULLY OPERATIONAL SYSTEAM AT THE END OF EACH WORK DAY. EXISTING WIRING THAT HAS BEENDAMAGED DURING DEMOLITION SHALL BE REPLACED.

3. ALL SMOKE DETECTORS TO REMAIN ACTIVE - COIL WIRES TO CEILING & TEMPORARILY MOUNT TOUNDERSIDE OF STRUCTURAL DECK ABOVE.




2. DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING DOOR SECURITY DEVICES AND ASSOCIATED WIRE AND CONDUIT BACKTO POINT OF ORIGIN.

3. EXISTING CLASS E WIRING WHALL BE MAINTAINED AND PROTECTED DURING DEMOLITION. EXISTING WIRINGTHAT HAS BEEN DAMAGED DURING DEMOLITION SHALL BE REPLACED.

4. PROVIDE TEMPORARY LIGHTING IN AREAS DEMOLISHED BY LANDLORD AND LABEL ELECTRICAL PANLEACCORDINGLY, THE LOCATION OF PANELS IS TO BE SHOWN ON FLOOR PLAN POSTED AT ENTRANCE OF WORKAREA.

5. REMOVE ALL ELECTRICAL OUTLETS AND SWITCH WIRING DEVICES AND FACE PLATES FROM WALLS, INTERIORAND PERIMETER COLUMNS. COIL AND AFFIX TO EXPOSED STRUCTURAL DECK ABOVE AND LABEL, PATCHSURFACES AS REQUIRED.

H.V.A.C NOTES:


PLUMBING NOTES:

1. REFER TO SHEET BP1 PD2-1B FOR EXTENT OF DEMOLITION. REMOVE FIXTURES AND ALL UNUSED PIPING ASREQUIRED.

SECURITY NOTES:

1. ENGAGE (THRU THE BLDG. MGR OR OWNER) THE CURRENT SECURITY COMPANY PROVIDER TO RELOCATE ALLMOTION DETECTORS.


1 HR

2 HR

3 HR

4 HR

SMOKE

EXTENT OFWORK

LINE WORK KEY


DOOR &FRAME

CMU WALL

GYP BD.PARTITION

BP2_01

BP2_01

GENERAL NOTES










BP2_01 04/18/2016 BP2_Addendum 01

Q

R20.4

NNN

OOO

PPP

R18.2

R17

R18

R16.5

R16.3

P.9

R16

R15.9 R16.2R16.1R15.7R15R14 R14.4 R15.1R13.9R13.5

R20.5

R20

R19.1

R19

R18.8

R16.8

EE.7

A

B

D

C

EXTENT OF DEMOLISHED AREA,EXISTING CEILNGS TO BE DEMOLISHEDHIGHLIGHTED IN BLACK DASHED LINES

EXISTING SUITE 47TYPE C-2RM #4C31



EXISTING PANTRYRM # 4C35


EXISTINGCONCESSION

RM # 4C36


RM #4C34

EXISTINGUNISEX RRRM #4C29

OFFICERM #4C23

EXISTINGWALK-IN

REFRIGERATOR


EE.9

EE.2CC

BB

AA

FF

BB.1AA.1

DD

EE

REMOVE EXISTING ACT

REMOVE EXISTING ACT

REMOVEEXISTING ACT

REMOVE EXISTING ACT

REMOVE EXISTING ACT

REMOVE EXISTING ACT

REMOVE EXISTING ACT

REMOVE EXISTINGGYP CLG.


REMOVE EXISTING ACT

REMOVE EXISTINGGYP. CLG


CBA D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


PROJECT NORTH

®

TM

®

®



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400



1-224-717-1555

FO

R R

EF

ER

EN

CE

ON

LY -

NO

T F

OR

CO

NS

TR

UC

TIO

N

BID PACKAGE #2

4/18/20 16 1:05:44 PM

Ban

kers

Life

Fie

ldho

use

1 25

S. P

enns

ylv a

nia

St.,

Indi

anap

olis

, IN

462

40





04.08.2016

DEMO RCP - SUITELEVEL AREA C

BP2 AD4-2 C

16.4224.00

04.08.16

2016

1/8" = 1'-0"1

CLUB / SUITE LEVEL DEMO - AREA C RCP


1. PRIOR TO THE COMMENCEMENT OF ANY WORK, THE OWNER SHALL BE OBLIGATED TO INFORM ALL PARTIES,INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE ARCHITECT AND CONTRACTOR, OF THE ACTUAL PRESENCE OF OR REASONABLYINFERABLE OR KNOWABLE PRESENCE OF ASBESTOS, LEAD, POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYL (PCB), OR OTHER TOXICSUBSTANCE, HAZARDOUS WASTE OR HAZARDOUS MATERIALS.


3. THE OWNER SHALL HAVE THE DUTY TO PROMPTLY RETAIN AN INDEPENDENT QUALIFIED EXPERT TO REMOVE AND /OR SUPERVISE THE REMOVAL OF SUCH ASBESTOS, LEAD, POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYL (PCB), OR OTHER TOXICSUBSTANCE, HAZARDOUS WASTE OR HAZARDOUS MATERIAL AS MAY BE PRESENT IN A SAFE AND LEGAL MANNER.

4. THE OWNER SHALL IDENTIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS THE ARCHITECT, ENGINEERS, HIS AFFLIATES ANDSUBCONTRACTORS, AND THEIR OFFICERS, AGENTS AND EMPLOYERS FROM ANY AND ALL LIABILITY ON THE PART OFOR DAMAGE TO SUCH ENTITIES OR PERSONS, INCLUDING THE COST OF LEGAL FEES AND EXPENSES, AS SUCH FEESAND EXPENSES POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYL (PCB), OR OTHER TOXIC SUBSTANCE, HAZARDOUS WASTE ORHAZARDOUS MATERIAL ON THIS PROJECT.


6. THE SCOPE OF WORK SHALL INCLUDE THE DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL FROM PREMISES OF ALL UNNECESSARYLIGHT FIXTURES, PARTITIONS, DOORS, BUCKS, FLOOR COVERING, ETC. AS WELL AS ELECTRICAL, H.V.A.C. ANDPLUMBING LINES AND EQUIPMENT AND ALL CAPPING. ALL WORK TO BE PERFORMED BY LICENSED TECHNICIANS TOACCOMPLISH THE WORK AS OUTLINED IN THIS SET OF DRAWINGS.

7. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY SPACE PRIOR TO DEMOLITION. G.C. SHOULD NOTIFY POPULOUS OFANY DISCREPANCIES AND / OR CONCERNS IN REGARDS TO THE SCOPE OF WORK AND ITEMS THAT MAY CONFLICTWITH THIS PLAN.


9. REMOVE AND DISCARD ALL DEMOLISHED ITEMS IN A MANNER APPROVED BY THE CITY OF INDIANAPOLIS AND ANYOTHER GOVERNMENT AGENCY.


11. EXISTING CLASS E WIRING SHALL BE PROTECTED DURING DEMOLITION AND EXISTING DEVICES RECONNECTEDFOR A FULLY OPERATIONAL SYSTESM AT THE END OF EACH WORK DAY. EXISTING WIRING THAT HAS BEEN DAMAGEDDURING DEMOLITION SHALL BE REPLACED.

12. CONTRACTOR SHALL INFORM BUILDING OWNER AND POPULOUS OF HAZARDOUS MATERIAL FOUND IN THE AREA OFNEW WORK AS SOON AS POSSIBLE.

13. ALL ITEMS SPECIFIED FOR REUSE (COORD. W/ BLDG. MGR.) AREA ASSUMED TO BE IN GOOD OPERATINGCONDITION. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY CONDITIONS OF ALL ITEMS FOR REUSE AND SHALL NOTIFYPOPULOUS OF ANY DISCREPANCIES. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL STORE ALL REUSABLE ITEMS SO AS TO PREVENTDAMAGE TO THEM. SHOULD DAMAGE OCCUR, GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL REPLACE OR REPAINT SUCH ITEMS, ASREQUIRED, AT HIS SOLE COST AND EXPENSE.


15. ALL PENETRATIONS IN FLOOR SLAB, DECK ABOVE OR ATED WALLS ARE TO BE REPAIRED AND FIRE STOPPED.

16. UPON REMOVAL OF INTERIOR PARTITIONS, PATCH ALL HOLES OR DEFECTS ON EXISTING PLASTER AT COLUMNS,MASONRY WALLS, FLOORS, PERIMETER AND DEMISING PARTITIONS. TAPE, SAND, AND SPACKLE READY TO RECEIVENEW FINISH. CONTRACTOR TO PATCH ALL WALLS UP TO 10 FEET.


18. REMOVE ALL ELECTRICAL PANELS NOT IN ELECTRICAL CLOSETS AND ALL SURFACE MOUNTED ELECTRICALMOLDING, WIRES AND CONDUITS. REMOVE ALL EXISTING TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT, CABLING AND PANELS BACK TOTHE MAIN ELECTRICAL ROOM.

19. REMOVE UNUSED TELEPHONE SWITCHES / EQUIPMENT AND RELATED TELEPHONE CABLING IN ALL TELEPHONECLOSESTS.




23. REQUIRED EXITS, EXISTING STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS, FIRE PROTECTION DEVICES AND SANITARY SAFEGUARDSSHALL BE MAINTAINED AT ALL TIMES DURING DEMOLITION.

24. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE MEANS TO PROTECT ELEVATOR CABS DURING REMOVAL OF WASTE MATERIAL ANDTHROUGHOUT DEMOLITION.

25. BUILDING UTILITIES SHALL NOT BE DISRUPTED DURING DEMOLITION WITHOUT THE CONSENT OF THE BUILDINGMANAGER / OWNER.

26. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE A TEMPORARY SIGN AT THE GROUND FLOOR ENTRY TO THE STAIRS AND ELEVATORTHAT ACCESS IS FORBIDDEN BY THE PUBLIC AS DEMOLITION IS IN PROGRESS.

27. PROVIDE (1) PORTABLE #10 CLASS B FIRE EXTINGUISHER FOR ALL AREAS DECLARED FOR CONSTRUCTION DURINGEXTENT OF DEMOLITION SCHEDULE.

28. WHERE NEW CEILINGS ARE SCHEDULED, REMOVE EXISTING CEILING TILES AND GRID INCLUDING ALL ASSOCIATEDSUPPORT WIRES AND PERIMETER ANGLES.



1. REFER TO SHEETS BP1 FPD2-1A AND BP1 FPD2-1B FOR EXTENT OF DEMOLITION. FIRE PROTECTION WORK SHALLBE REPLACED IF DAMAGED IN THE COURSE OF THE WORK DONE BY THIS CONTRACT.

2. EXISTING CLASS E WIRING SHALL BE PROTECTED DURING DEMOLITION. EXISTING DEVICES RECONNECTED FOR AFULLY OPERATIONAL SYSTEAM AT THE END OF EACH WORK DAY. EXISTING WIRING THAT HAS BEEN DAMAGEDDURING DEMOLITION SHALL BE REPLACED.

3. ALL SMOKE DETECTORS TO REMAIN ACTIVE - COIL WIRES TO CEILING & TEMPORARILY MOUNT TO UNDERSIDE OFSTRUCTURAL DECK ABOVE.




2. DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING DOOR SECURITY DEVICES AND ASSOCIATED WIRE AND CONDUIT BACK TOPOINT OF ORIGIN.

3. EXISTING CLASS E WIRING WHALL BE MAINTAINED AND PROTECTED DURING DEMOLITION. EXISTING WIRING THATHAS BEEN DAMAGED DURING DEMOLITION SHALL BE REPLACED.

4. PROVIDE TEMPORARY LIGHTING IN AREAS DEMOLISHED BY LANDLORD AND LABEL ELECTRICAL PANLEACCORDINGLY, THE LOCATION OF PANELS IS TO BE SHOWN ON FLOOR PLAN POSTED AT ENTRANCE OF WORK AREA.

5. REMOVE ALL ELECTRICAL OUTLETS AND SWITCH WIRING DEVICES AND FACE PLATES FROM WALLS, INTERIOR ANDPERIMETER COLUMNS. COIL AND AFFIX TO EXPOSED STRUCTURAL DECK ABOVE AND LABEL, PATCH SURFACES ASREQUIRED.

H.V.A.C NOTES:

1. REFER TO SHEETS BP1 MD2-1A, BP1 MD2-1B, AND BP1 MD2-2B FOR REMOVAL OF ALL EQUIPMENT IN SCHEDULEDDEMO AREAS.

PLUMBING NOTES:


SECURITY NOTES:

1. ENGAGE (THRU THE BLDG. MGR OR OWNER) THE CURRENT SECURITY COMPANY PROVIDER TO RELOCATE ALLMOTION DETECTORS.


1 HR

2 HR

3 HR

4 HR

SMOKE

EXTENT OFWORK

LINE WORK KEY


DOOR &FRAME

CMU WALL

GYP BD.PARTITION

BP2_01

BP2_01

GENERAL NOTES










BP2_01 04/18/2016 BP2_Addendum 01

A

R27.5R27

R27.1 R26.6R26 R25.9

R25.3 R25.1R24.8R24.9

R25R24.7

R24.5

R24

R23

R22.2

R22

R20.6

OOO

R3

A.1

24.2

R22.8

R21.9

R21

R20.5

R20.7

A

B

D

CEXISTING SUITE 50

TYPE B-1RM #4D01


EXISTINGCONCESSION

RM # 4C36




EXISTING TRASHRM #4D07

EXISTING PANTRYRM #4D06

EXISTING OFFICERM #4D08


RM #4C34

EE.9

EE.2

CC

BBAA FF

CC.1

BB.1

AA.1

DD

EE

EXTENT OF DEMOLISHED AREA,EXISTING RCPS TO BE DEMOLISHED

HIGHLIGHTED IN BLACK DASHED LINES

REMOVE EXISTING ACT


REMOVE EXISTING ACT

REMOVE EXISTING ACT

REMOVE EXISTING ACT

REMOVE EXISTING ACT

REMOVE EXISTING ACT

REMOVEEXISTING ACT



CBA D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


PROJECT NORTH

®

TM

®

®



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400



1-224-717-1555

FO

R R

EF

ER

EN

CE

ON

LY -

NO

T F

OR

CO

NS

TR

UC

TIO

N

BID PACKAGE #2

4/18/20 16 1:05:48 PM

Ban

kers

Life

Fie

ldho

use

1 25

S. P

enns

ylv a

nia

St.,

Indi

anap

olis

, IN

462

40





04.08.2016

DEMO RCP - SUITELEVEL AREA D

BP2 AD4-2 D

16.4224.00

04.08.16

2016

1/8" = 1'-0"1

CLUB / SUITE LEVEL DEMO - AREA D RCP


1. PRIOR TO THE COMMENCEMENT OF ANY WORK, THE OWNER SHALL BE OBLIGATED TO INFORM ALL PARTIES,INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE ARCHITECT AND CONTRACTOR, OF THE ACTUAL PRESENCE OF ORREASONABLY INFERABLE OR KNOWABLE PRESENCE OF ASBESTOS, LEAD, POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYL (PCB),OR OTHER TOXIC SUBSTANCE, HAZARDOUS WASTE OR HAZARDOUS MATERIALS.


3. THE OWNER SHALL HAVE THE DUTY TO PROMPTLY RETAIN AN INDEPENDENT QUALIFIED EXPERT TO REMOVEAND / OR SUPERVISE THE REMOVAL OF SUCH ASBESTOS, LEAD, POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYL (PCB), OR OTHERTOXIC SUBSTANCE, HAZARDOUS WASTE OR HAZARDOUS MATERIAL AS MAY BE PRESENT IN A SAFE AND LEGALMANNER.

4. THE OWNER SHALL IDENTIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS THE ARCHITECT, ENGINEERS, HIS AFFLIATES ANDSUBCONTRACTORS, AND THEIR OFFICERS, AGENTS AND EMPLOYERS FROM ANY AND ALL LIABILITY ON THE PARTOF OR DAMAGE TO SUCH ENTITIES OR PERSONS, INCLUDING THE COST OF LEGAL FEES AND EXPENSES, AS SUCHFEES AND EXPENSES POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYL (PCB), OR OTHER TOXIC SUBSTANCE, HAZARDOUS WASTEOR HAZARDOUS MATERIAL ON THIS PROJECT.


6. THE SCOPE OF WORK SHALL INCLUDE THE DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL FROM PREMISES OF ALLUNNECESSARY LIGHT FIXTURES, PARTITIONS, DOORS, BUCKS, FLOOR COVERING, ETC. AS WELL AS ELECTRICAL,H.V.A.C. AND PLUMBING LINES AND EQUIPMENT AND ALL CAPPING. ALL WORK TO BE PERFORMED BY LICENSEDTECHNICIANS TO ACCOMPLISH THE WORK AS OUTLINED IN THIS SET OF DRAWINGS.

7. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY SPACE PRIOR TO DEMOLITION. G.C. SHOULD NOTIFY POPULOUSOF ANY DISCREPANCIES AND / OR CONCERNS IN REGARDS TO THE SCOPE OF WORK AND ITEMS THAT MAYCONFLICT WITH THIS PLAN.


9. REMOVE AND DISCARD ALL DEMOLISHED ITEMS IN A MANNER APPROVED BY THE CITY OF INDIANAPOLIS ANDANY OTHER GOVERNMENT AGENCY.


11. EXISTING CLASS E WIRING SHALL BE PROTECTED DURING DEMOLITION AND EXISTING DEVICESRECONNECTED FOR A FULLY OPERATIONAL SYSTESM AT THE END OF EACH WORK DAY. EXISTING WIRING THATHAS BEEN DAMAGED DURING DEMOLITION SHALL BE REPLACED.

12. CONTRACTOR SHALL INFORM BUILDING OWNER AND POPULOUS OF HAZARDOUS MATERIAL FOUND IN THEAREA OF NEW WORK AS SOON AS POSSIBLE.

13. ALL ITEMS SPECIFIED FOR REUSE (COORD. W/ BLDG. MGR.) AREA ASSUMED TO BE IN GOOD OPERATINGCONDITION. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY CONDITIONS OF ALL ITEMS FOR REUSE AND SHALL NOTIFYPOPULOUS OF ANY DISCREPANCIES. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL STORE ALL REUSABLE ITEMS SO AS TOPREVENT DAMAGE TO THEM. SHOULD DAMAGE OCCUR, GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL REPLACE OR REPAINTSUCH ITEMS, AS REQUIRED, AT HIS SOLE COST AND EXPENSE.


15. ALL PENETRATIONS IN FLOOR SLAB, DECK ABOVE OR ATED WALLS ARE TO BE REPAIRED AND FIRE STOPPED.



18. REMOVE ALL ELECTRICAL PANELS NOT IN ELECTRICAL CLOSETS AND ALL SURFACE MOUNTED ELECTRICALMOLDING, WIRES AND CONDUITS. REMOVE ALL EXISTING TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT, CABLING AND PANELS BACKTO THE MAIN ELECTRICAL ROOM.






24. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE MEANS TO PROTECT ELEVATOR CABS DURING REMOVAL OF WASTE MATERIALAND THROUGHOUT DEMOLITION.



27. PROVIDE (1) PORTABLE #10 CLASS B FIRE EXTINGUISHER FOR ALL AREAS DECLARED FOR CONSTRUCTIONDURING EXTENT OF DEMOLITION SCHEDULE.





2. EXISTING CLASS E WIRING SHALL BE PROTECTED DURING DEMOLITION. EXISTING DEVICES RECONNECTEDFOR A FULLY OPERATIONAL SYSTEAM AT THE END OF EACH WORK DAY. EXISTING WIRING THAT HAS BEENDAMAGED DURING DEMOLITION SHALL BE REPLACED.

3. ALL SMOKE DETECTORS TO REMAIN ACTIVE - COIL WIRES TO CEILING & TEMPORARILY MOUNT TO UNDERSIDEOF STRUCTURAL DECK ABOVE.




2. DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING DOOR SECURITY DEVICES AND ASSOCIATED WIRE AND CONDUIT BACKTO POINT OF ORIGIN.

3. EXISTING CLASS E WIRING WHALL BE MAINTAINED AND PROTECTED DURING DEMOLITION. EXISTING WIRINGTHAT HAS BEEN DAMAGED DURING DEMOLITION SHALL BE REPLACED.

4. PROVIDE TEMPORARY LIGHTING IN AREAS DEMOLISHED BY LANDLORD AND LABEL ELECTRICAL PANLEACCORDINGLY, THE LOCATION OF PANELS IS TO BE SHOWN ON FLOOR PLAN POSTED AT ENTRANCE OF WORKAREA.

5. REMOVE ALL ELECTRICAL OUTLETS AND SWITCH WIRING DEVICES AND FACE PLATES FROM WALLS, INTERIORAND PERIMETER COLUMNS. COIL AND AFFIX TO EXPOSED STRUCTURAL DECK ABOVE AND LABEL, PATCHSURFACES AS REQUIRED.

H.V.A.C NOTES:


PLUMBING NOTES:


SECURITY NOTES:

1. ENGAGE (THRU THE BLDG. MGR OR OWNER) THE CURRENT SECURITY COMPANY PROVIDER TO RELOCATEALL MOTION DETECTORS.


1 HR

2 HR

3 HR

4 HR

SMOKE

EXTENT OFWORK

LINE WORK KEY


DOOR &FRAME

CMU WALL

GYP BD.PARTITION

BP2_01

BP2_01

GENERAL NOTES










BP2_01 04/18/2016 BP2_Addendum 01

& ANDANGLE

@ ATCENTERLINECHANNEL

Ø DIAMETER OR ROUND# NUMBER OR POUND

PLATESF SQUARE FOOT (FEET)

ACOUST ACOUSTICALAD AREA DRAINADJ ADJUSTABLEAFF ABOVE FINISH FLOORAHU AIR HANDLING UNIT (RE: MECH)ALUM ALUMINUMAP ACCESS PANELAPPROX APPROXIMATEARCH ARCHITECTURALAV AUDIO/VISUAL

BD BOARDBLDG BUILDINGBLKG BLOCKINGBM BEAMBRG BEARING

CJ CONTROL JOINTCG CORNER GUARDCIP CAST-IN-PLACECLG CEILINGCLO CLOSETCMU CONCRETE MASONRY UNITCOL COLUMNCONC CONCRETECONN CONNECTIONCONSTR CONSTRUCTIONCONT CONTINUOUSCONTR CONTRACTORCOOR CORRIDORCOPY COPIERCTR CENTER

DBL DOUBLEDEPT DEPARTMENTDF DRINKING FOUNTAINDIA DIAMETERDIM DIMENSIONDN DOWNDR DOORDS DOWN SPOUTDTL DETAILDW DISH WASHERDWG(S) DRAWING(S)

E EASTEA EACHE ELEVATIONEJ EXPANSION JOINTELEC ELECTRICALELEV ELEVATOREMS ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM PCEOS EDGE OF SLABEQ EQUALEQUIP EQUIPMENTESP ELEVATOR STATUS PANELEWC ELECTRIC WATER COOLEREXP EXPANSIONEXIST EXISTINGEXT EXTERIOR

FAP FIRE ALARM PANELFD FLOOR DRAINFDN FOUNDATIONFE FIRE EXTINGUISHERFEC FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETFFE FURNISHINGS, FIXTURES,EQUIPMENTFFD FUNNEL FLOOR DRAINFHC FIRE HOSE CABINETFIN FINISHFL FLOORFOC FACE OF CONCRETEFOF FACE OF FINISHFOS FACE OF STUDFR (FRM) FRAMEFS FLOOR SINKFT FOOT OR FEETFTG FOOTINGFURR FURRINGFV FIELD VERIFYFVC FIRE VALVE CABINET

GA GAUGEGALV GALVANIZEDGC GENERAL CONTRACTORGL GLASSGYP BD GYPSUM BOARD

HB HOSE BIBBHC HOLLOW COREHD HEADHDW HARDWAREHDWD HARDWOODHM HOLLOW METALHORIZ HORIZONTALHT HEIGHT

ICE ICE MAKERID INSIDE DIAMETER / DIMENSIONIN INCHINFO INFORMATIONINSUL INSULATIONINT INTERIOR

JAN JANITORJT JOINTJST JOIST

KIT KITCHENKO KNOCKOUT

L LONG / LENGTHLT (LTG) LIGHT (LIGHTING)LWC LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE

M METERMAS MASONRYMAX MAXIMUMMECH MECHANICALMFG MANUFACTURINGMFR MANUFACTURERMH MANHOLEMIN MINIMUMMISC MISCELLANEOUSMO MASONRY OPENINGMTD MOUNTEDMTL METAL

N NORTHN / A NOT APPLICABLENIC NOT IN CONTRACTNO NUMBERNOM NOMINALNPS NATIONAL PIPE STANDARDNTS NOT TO SCALE

OC ON CENTEROD OUTSIDE DIAMETER / DIMENSIONOFF OFFICEOH OPPOSITE HANDOPNG OPENINGORD OVERFLOW ROOF DRAINOVHD OVERHEADOZ OUNCE

PA PUBLIC ADDRESSPC PRECAST CONCRETEPL PLATEPLAS PLASTERPLBG PLUMBINGPLYWD PLYWOODPOL POLISHEDPR PAIRPT POINTPTD PAINTED

QTY QUANTITY

∠

[

COLUMN AND / OR GRID LINES

FLOOR PLAN MATCHLINE SYMBOL

CENTERLINE SYBMOL / GRID LINE

EXPANSION JOINT LOCATION LINES

GRAPHIC SCALE SYMBOL

NORTH ARROW SYMBOL

MATERIAL KEYNOTE SYMBOL

SPOT ELEVATION SYMBOL

FLOOR ELEVATION LEVEL SYMBOL

DETAIL REFERENCE SYMBOLS

EXTERIOR BUILDING SECTION SYMBOL

BUILDING/WALL SECTION SYMBOL

DETAIL SECTION SYMBOL

BUILDING ELEVATION SYMBOL

INTERIOR ELEVATION/DETAIL SYMBOL

A

B

16'0 32'8'

NORTH

10 23 01

0' - 0"

Level 1

0' - 0"

DETAIL

SHEET NUMBER

R

EARTH

AGGREGATE FILL

CONCRETE

PRECAST CONCRETE (AR-CONS)

BRICK IN PLAN

CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (AR-CONC)

CUT/CAST STONE

STEEL

MORTAR NET

DISCONTINUOUS ROUGH LUMBER

CONTINUOUS LUMBER

RIGID INSULATION

BLANKET INSULATION

FIRE SAFING INSULATION

INSULATED METAL PANEL

GROUT

LATH & PLASTER

GYPSUM BOARD

MARBLE / GRANITE

ACOUSITCAL TILE / BOARD

WOOD GRAIN

PLYWOOD

FINISH LUMBER

DRYWALL CEILING OR SOFFIT

4"

4" TYPICAL - FOR STUD PARTITIONS (UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE)

8" TYPICAL - FOR MASONRYPARTITONS & CONCRETE(UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE)

COLUMN

PARTITION

WHEN ONE JAMB IS LOCATED BY A COLUMN, THE FOLLOWING DIAGRAM APPLIES:

INSECTING PARTITION

DOOR AS SCHEDULED

4" TYPICAL(UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE)

3. FOR OPENINGS IN PARTITIONS OR WALLS:-When one occurs at gridline, no dimensions will be shown and width willbe established by either criteria or schedules-When neither jamb occurs at a partition intersection, at a column or at agridline: one jamb will be located dimensionally by the detail.-When one jamb is located by a partition intersection, the followingdiagram applies:

1. DIMENSIONS WILL NOT BE SHOWN FOR THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:-When partition is centered on grid line.-When partition is shown flush with column face.-When partition is shown flush with grid line.When face of partition is centered on glazing mullion.2. MASONRY / METAL STUD WALLS ARE DIMENSIONED FROM FINISHED FACE.

PARTITION

All drawings are intended to be complementary. Notify the architect of anydimensioning discrepancy prior to proceeding.

Dimensions are to face of concrete and CMU walls (nominal dimensions).

Dimensions are to outside face of gypsum board / stud walls.

Dimensions are as identified on the documents or as established by criteriaas follows:

PARTITION TYPE LEGEND

BASIC MATERIAL:C Concrete (non-structural walls only)M Masonry (CMU)S Stud

BASIC SIZE:0 7/8" furring channel1 1 5/8" stud2 2 1/2" stud3 3 5/8" stud4 4" concrete, masonry or stud6 6" concrete, masonry or stud10 10" concrete or masonry12 12" concrete or masonry

APPLIED LAYERS:A 1 layer 5/8" drywallB 2 layers 5/8" drywallC 1 layer 5/8" drywall on 7/8" metal furring channelD 1 layer 5/8" drywall on 1 5/8" stud furringE 1 layer 5/8" drywall on 1 1/2" stud furringF 1 layer 5/8" cementitious backer boardG 1 layer 5/8" cementitious backer board on 7/8" metal furring

channelH 1 layer 5/8" cementitious backer board on 1 5/8" stud furringJ 1 layer 5/8" cementitous backer board on 2 1/2" stud furringK Shaftwall Construction (list UL Design # in "Conditions")

partition extends to underside of structure above? Other letters as required for each project

MODIFYING CONDITIONS:1. Complete wall assembly is continuous to underside of structure above2. 1 layer of gypsum board / cementitous board on one side & stud wall assembly extends to underside of structure above.3. Gypsum board / cementitious board extends to 4" above adjoining ceiling. Studs / CMU extends to underside of structure above.4. Complete wall assembly extends to 4" above adjoining ceiling. Brace wall as required.5. Wall type is part of double stud wall assembly. Total partition thickness 9".6. Provide acoustic batt insulation. Full cavity width. Full wall height. Where double stud wall noted provide sound attenuation blankets in both walls.7. CMU ground face. Both faces except in chase wall assembly.

PARTITION TYPE SYMBOLBASIC MATERIALBASIC SIZEAPPLIED LAYERS CODEMODIFYING CONDITIONS CODE

FIRE & SMOKE RATED PARTITION INDICATIONONE HOUR FIRE RATED PARTITIONTWO HOUR FIRE RATED PARTITIONTHREE HOUR FIRE RATED PARTITIONFOUR HOUR FIRE RATED PARTITIONPARTITON TO RESIST PASSAGE OF SMOKE

RAILING SYMBOLRail Type DesignationRail Type Number

REVISIONS SYMBOL

Area / Item Revised

Revision Number

CASEWORK SYMBOL

TELEVISION SYMBOL

C = Ceiling MountedW = Wall MountedM = Millwork Mounted

ROOM / SPACE IDENIFICATION SYMBOL

Room Name

Room NumberColumn Grid Reference NumberFloor Level

DOOR NUMBER AND TYPE SYMBOL Each door number indicates the room / space and is alphabetized when more than one door exists for one room / space.

Room/ Space Number

Door Idenifcation (B = Second Door)

3B

.02.01.05

.02.01.05B

TV-C

M8C.1

RC

SRC

SMC

SMB

ABBREVIATIONS GRAPHIC SYMBOLS DIMENSIONING CRITERIA

FIRE EXTINGUISHER & RECESSED CABINET

FIRE EXTINGUISHER & SEMI-RECESSED CABINET

FIRE EXTINGUISHER & SURFACE MOUNTED CABINET

FIRE EXTINGUISHER & SURFACE MOUNTED BRACKET

FIRE EXTINGUISHER SYMBOLS

D1

S1A2

L1L1 F1

VL1LS1 S1

Casework DesignationNumber (Refer To Schedule)

R RISER OR RADIUSRCP REFLECTED CEILING PLANRD ROOF DRAINRE REFERENCE REINFORCEDREFER REFRIGERATORREINF REINFORCEDREQ'D REQUIREDREV REVISIONRM ROOMRO ROUGH OPENINGRTU ROOF TOP UNIT (RE: MECH)

S SOUTHSAN SANITARYSC SOLID CORESCHED SCHEDULESD SCUPPER DRAINSECT SECTIONSF SQUARE FOOT (FEET)SH SHOWERSHT SHEETSP SPACINGSPEC SPECIFICATIONSPHD SPRINKLER HEADSPKR SPEAKERSQ SQUARESS STAINLESS STEELSSE SECURITY SYSTEM EQUIPMENTSTD STANDARDSTL STEELSTOR STORAGESTRUCT STRUCTURE / STRUCTURALSY (SQ YD) SQUARE YARD(S)SHT SHEET

T TREADTEL TELEPHONETEMP TEMPEREDT&G TONGUE AND GROOVETOC TOP OF CONCRETETOD TOP OF DECKTOP TOP OF PARAPETTOS TOP OF SLAB OR TOP OF STEELTOW TOP OF WALLTV TELEVISIONTYP TYPICAL

UNO UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED

VB (VPR BR) VAPOR BARRIERVEND VENDING MACHINESVERT VERTICALVEST VESTIBULE

W WEST OR WIDE OR WIDTHW / WITHW / I WITHINW / O WITHOUTW / D WASHER / DRYERWD WOODWDW WINDOWWND WINDOWWP WATERPROOFWT WEIGHTWTCS WALKIE TALKIE CHANGING STATION

1

2' x 4' LAY-IN-GRID

2' X 2' LAY-IN-GRID


2' x 4' FLUORESCENT FIXTUREIN GRID

2' x 2' FLUORESCENT FIXTUREIN GRID

RECESSED CAN LIGHT FIXTURE

RECESSED WALL WASHING LIGHT FIXTURE

RECESSED DOWNLIGHT FIXTURE

DOWNLIGHT FIXTURE

WALL MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURE

PENDANT MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURE

LINEAR LIGHT FIXTURE

LINEAR SLOT DIFFUSER

SUPPLY DIFFUSER

RETURN AIR GRILLE OR EXHAUST

REFLECTED CEILING PLAN SYMBOLS

CBA D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


®

TM

®

®



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400



1-224-717-1555

FO

R R

EF

ER

EN

CE

ON

LY -

NO

T F

OR

CO

NS

TR

UC

TIO

N

BID PACKAGE #2

4/18/20 16 1:02:56 PM

Ban

kers

Life

Fie

ldho

use

1 25

S. P

enns

ylv a

nia

St.,

Indi

anap

olis

, IN

462

40





04.08.2016

ARCH LEGENDS,WALL TYPES &KEYNOTE LIST

BP2 A0-01

16.4224.00

04.08.16

2016

1/2" = 1'-0"1

BP2 Abbreviations, Legends, and General Notes

GENERAL NOTES










BP2_01 04/18/2016 BP2_Addendum 01

BP2_01

(5)

(5)

(5)

(5)

(5)

(5)

(5)

G

4414W

J

J

J

J

J

J

J

JJ

DC

J

(5)

TO PERMIT SERVICE &

& WORKING SPACE MUST

CONTACT MFR. FOR DETAILS

BE PROVIDED & MAINTAINED

MAINTENANCE.

18" RECOMMENDED,

SUFFICIENT ACCESS

R23

R22.2 R22

R20.6

R20.4

NNN

OOO

PPP

R18

R21.9

R21

R20.5

R20

R19.1

R19

R18.8

BP2A6-1-012 1

BP2 A3-4-01

2

3

4

SUITE CLUB

4C31

LOGE

4C32

FOOD SERVICE

4C36B

4C31

-1

S. SPONSORS PAVILION

4C34

4C31-2

4C31A-1

4C31A-2

4C31

-3

FOOD SERVICE

4C31A

4C31A-3

S3A.1S3A.1S3A.1S3A.1

S6AA

S6AA

S6AA.1

S6AA.1S

6AA

S6AA

S6A

A

S6A

AS

6AA

S6A

AS

6AA

S6A

A

S6A

A

S6A

A

S6A

A

S6A

A

S6A

A

S6A

A

S6A

A

S6A

A

S6A

A

S6A

A

S6A

A

S6A

A

S6A

A

S6A

A

S6AA.1

S6AA.1S6AA.1

S3AA

EE.9

EE.2

CC

FF

BP2A6-1-01

6

S3A.1S3A.1S3A.1S3A.1

ALIGN

4C36A-1

FULL HEIGHTWOOD PANNELING(TYP. CORRIDORWALL & FOODSERVICE WALLS)

RECESSEDFEC

RECESSEDFEC

RECESSEDFEC

FEC

FEC

BP2A6-1-01

13

CC.1

DD

EE

S6AA

S6AA

S6AA

4C36B-1

FOOD SERVICE

4C36A

1

BP2 A7-1-01

S6A

A

BP2 A8-1-03

1

BP2 A8-1-03

4

BP2 A8-1-03

1Sim

FURR-OUT, COORDINATEDEPTH WITH RECESSREQUIRED FOR AVEQUIPMENT

FURR-OUT,COORDINATEDEPTH WITHRECESSREQUIRED FORAV EQUIPMENT

BP2 A8-1-03

2

BP2 A3-4-01

3

S4AA.1

S4AA.1S4AA.1

S4AA.1

S2A.1S2A.1

S4AA.1

S4AA.1

S4AA.1S4AA.1S4AA.1

S4AA.1S4AA.1

S4AA.1

S4AA.1

25' -

2 1

/4"

3' -

9 5

/8"

5' -

1"

2' -

3 1

/8"

4' -

10 1

/4"

3' -

0 5

/8"

10' - 6 1/4" 5' - 5 7/8"

1' - 10 1/2"

1' - 11"

4' - 10 1/2" 7' - 7"

2' - 11 1/4"

1' - 8 5/8"

S6AA.1

S6AA.1

8' - 6 3/4" 11' - 10 7/8" 8' - 0"

4' -

11 5

/8"

HO

LD

7 1

/4"

11' -

6 7

/8"

7' -

8 3

/8"

10' -

5"

3 1

/8"

3' -

0 5

/8"

3' -

7 1

/8"

4' - 2 1/2"

2' - 4" 9' - 2 3/8" 7' - 11" 5 3/8"

8' -

10 5

/8"

6' -

6"

20' -

4 3

/4"

4' -

3 1

/8"2' -

4"

5' -

11 3

/8"

6' -

7 1

/4"

1' -

2 5

/8"

5' -

3 3

/4"

12' -

0"

TY

P.

3' -

0"

TY

P.

8' - 10 1/2" 3' - 11 1/2"

4' - 4 1/2"

6' - 6 1/2"

6' - 3 7/8"

11' - 3"

R R7

R R7

R R7

R R6

R R7

R R7

R R6

4C36A-2

4C36

A-2

1

BP2 A8-6-01

TYP.

3' - 2 1/4" 7' - 8 1/2"

S2A.1S2A.1

S6AA.1

15' -

0 1

/2"

4' -

5 3

/4"

3' -

6 1

/8"

12' -

6 3

/4"

2' -

6"

10' -

10"

15' -

0 3

/8"

3' -

0 3

/8"

11' -

11 1

/4"

4' -

1 5

/8"

PRE-FAB.WALK INCOOLER

S2A.1

STEP LIGHTS RE:ELECTRICAL , TYP.



R R7

1

BP2 A8-2-01

TYP.

4' - 1

0 1

/4"

BP2 A8-1-03

8

R R1

R R1

R R1

R R1

R R1

BP2 A8-5-01

3

CUSTOMMILLWORK

12 E

Q S

PA

CE

S F

RO

M E

XIS

TIN

G W

ALLS

: F

V

R R9R R9

R R9R R9

R R9R R9

R R9R R9

R R9R R9

R R9R R9

R R9R R9

R R9R R9

R R1

R R1

THEATRE BOX 1

4C31B

THEATRE BOX 2

4C31C

THEATRE BOX 3

4C31D

THEATRE BOX 4

4C31E

THEATRE BOX 5

4C31F

THEATRE BOX 6

4C31G

THEATRE BOX 7

4C31H

THEATRE BOX 8

4C31I

THEATRE BOX 9

4C31J

THEATRE BOX 10

4C31K

THEATRE BOX 11

4C31L

THEATRE BOX 12

4C31M

R10

R10

R10

R10

R10

R10

R10

R10

R10

R10

R10

R10

R R9R R9

R R9R R9

7' -

10 1

/2"

1' -

5 3

/4"

8' - 1

1 7

/8"

4' -

10 1

/2"

4' - 10 3/8"

153.0

0°

2' - 5 3/8"

4' - 11 3/4" HOLD

3' - 3 3/8"

3' -

0 3

/8"

2' - 6 3/8"

R20.6

R20.4

BP2A6-1-01

5

8' - 3 1/8"

2' -

5 5

/8"

18' -

5 1

/4"

5' -

3"

1' - 8"4"

5' - 5 1/8"

BAR EQUIPMENTRE: FOOD SERVICE

RECESSED FEC S6AA.1

S6AA

S6AA

S6AA

S6AA

S6AA DOOR AS SCHEDULED

BP2A6-1-01

10

2' - 6"

1' - 8"5' -

6"

S6AA.1

S6AA

AD

A C

OU

NT

ER

3

BP2 A8-2-01

2

BP2 A8-2-01

BP2A6-1-01

1

1' -

8"

4"

4"

6

BP2 A8-2-01

5

BP2 A8-2-01

4' - 7 5/8" 3' - 6" 3' - 1 3/8"

4' -

0 3

/4"

2' -

6 1

/2"

BP2A6-1-01

12

7

BP2 A8-1-03

STEP LIGHTSRE: ELECTRICAL

THEATER BOXBP2 A8-2-01

13

BP2A8-6-01

17

BP2A6-1-01

12

BP2 A8-2-01

13Sim

FIXED

RAILING

PATCH TO MATCH ADJACENT

3' - 10" TYP. 5' - 1 3/4" TYP.

2' -

6"

2' -

11 1

/4"

TYPICAL DIMENSIONFROM WALL OPPOSITESTAIR

BP2A8-6-01

15

BP2A8-6-01

16

CBA D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


PROJECT NORTH

®

TM

®

®



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400



1-224-717-1555

FO

R R

EF

ER

EN

CE

ON

LY -

NO

T F

OR

CO

NS

TR

UC

TIO

N

BID PACKAGE #2

4/18/20 16 1:03:37 PM

Ban

kers

Life

Fie

ldho

use

1 25

S. P

enns

ylv a

nia

St.,

Indi

anap

olis

, IN

462

40





04.08.2016

ENLARGED SUITELEVEL PLANS

BP2 A3-4-01

16.4224.00

04.08.16

2016

1/8" = 1'-0"1

SUITE CLUB ENLARGED PLAN 1/2" = 1'-0"

2ENLARGED SUITE BAR PLAN

1/2" = 1'-0"3

THEATER BOX ENLARGED PLAN BP2

PLAN NOTES:

1. REFERENCE BP2 A3-4-03 FORTV PLAN & MATRIX

2. REFERENCE BP2 A3-4-04FOR FINISH FLOOR PLAN

3. REFERENCE BP2 A3-4-05 FORFFE PLAN

BP2_01 BP2_01BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

GENERAL NOTES










BP2_01 04/18/2016 BP2_Addendum 01

R22.2

R22

R20.6 R20.6

R20.4

NNN

OOO

PPP

R21.9

R21

R20.5

R20 R20

R19.1

R19

R18.8

8' - 0"

EE.9

EE.2

FF

4' - 1 3/4" 11' - 4" 2' - 9 3/4" 3' - 4"

3' - 8" 4' - 0" 3' - 8"

28' -

8 3

/4"

4' -

0"

4' -

0"

1' -

7 3

/4"

28' -

8 3

/4"

CL4

CL4

CL4

GWB,PAINTED WHITE

CL2

CL3

CL2

3' - 8" 4' - 0" 3' - 8"

EQ

.4' -

0"

4' -

0"

4' -

0"

EQ

.

35' -

9 1

/4"

10' -

4 3

/4"

4' -

0"

4' -

0"

10' -

4 3

/4"

28' -

9 1

/4"

3' - 8" 4' - 0" 3' - 8"

8' - 0"

8' - 6"

8' - 0"

8' - 6"

8' - 6"

8' - 0"

7' - 0"

6' - 8"

EXISTING CEILINGSTO REMAIN

EXISTING CEILINGSTO REMAIN

DD

EE

1

BP2 A7-1-01

3

BP2 A8-4-01

4

BP2 A8-4-01

LIGHT FIXTUREHOUSINGS,SPEAKERS, ANDCEILING MOUNTEDDEVICES TO MATCHCEILING FINISH

DRAPERYTRACK, TYP.

1

BP2 A8-4-01

10 1/8"

1' -

0"

2' -

0"

1' -

0"

1' - 0"

2' - 0"

1' - 0"

2' -

4"

2' -

4"

EQ

EQ

EQ

EQ

EQ

2' -

4"

2' -

4"

EQ

EQ

EQ

EQ

EQ

EQ

EQ

LIGHTDIMS TYP.

1' - 7 3/8" 1' - 8 5/8"

16

BP2 A8-1-02

1

BP2 A8-4-01

1

BP2 A8-4-01

9' -

0"

9' -

0"

5' -

0"

EQ EQ EQ

8' - 8"

TY

P.

2' -

3"

TY

P.

1' -

9 1

/2"

TY

P.

2' -

6 1

/4"

3' - 10" 4' - 10"

8' - 6 3/4"

SUITE CLUB

4C31

S. SPONSORS PAVILION

4C34

FOOD SERVICE

4C31A

FOOD SERVICE

4C36A

FOOD SERVICE

4C36B

SUITE CLUB

4C31

EXISTING OFFICE

4C23

EXISTING OFFICE

4D08

1' - 0"

A.F.F.8' - 0"

A.F.F.8' - 0"

A.F

.F.

8' -

0"

A.F.F.8' - 0"

R 7"

R 7

"

11' - 4"

28' -

9 1

/4"

35' -

9 1

/4"

28' -

9 1

/4"

8' - 0"

7' - 0"

7' - 0"

1. REFERENCE FINISH LEGEND ANDSPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONALNOTES REGARDING CEILING FINISHES

2. ALL CEILING GRIDS SHALL BECENTERED IN ROOMS UNLESSNOTED OTHERWISE (U.N.O.)

3. REFER TO MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL,AUDIO AND FIRE PROTECTIONDRAWINGS FOR LIGHTS, DIFFUSERS,SPEAKERS, ETC. TO BE INSTALLED INFINISHED CEILINGS. THESE ITEMS ARETO BE CENTERED IN ACOUSTICALCEILING TILES UNLESS NOTEDOTHERWISE (U.N.O.)

4. REFER TO M/E/P DRAWINGS FOR ALLACCESS PANEL LOCATIONS INCEILINGS.

5. IN SUSPENDED ACOUSTICALCEILINGS, PROVIDE BLOCKING ASREQUIRED; AND TEES AROUND ALLMECHANICAL GRILLES, ELECTRICALFIXTURES, DIFFUSERS, ETC.

6. IN AREAS OF EXPOSED STRUCTURECEILINGS, COORDINATE EXACTLOCATIONS OF MECHANICAL GRILLES,DIFFUSERS, DUCTWORK, ANDELECTRICAL FIXTURES WITH EACHRESPECTIVE CONTRACTOR.

7. PROVIDE BLOCKING ABOVE ALLCEILING LOCATIONS SHOWN TORECEIVE TV/MONITOR SUPPORTBRACKET MOUNTING. REFERENCEELECTRICAL FOR LOCATIONS ANDFOR ADDITIONAL NOTES ONSPEAKERS AND OTHER CEILINGMOUNTED DEVICES.

GENERAL RCP NOTES

2' x 4' LAY-IN-GRID

2' X 2' LAY-IN-GRID

H.H. DENOTES HIGH HUMIDITYGRID SYSTEM IS REQUIREDIN SPACE

SECURITY SYSTEM DEVICE

CEILING-MOUNTED FIREALARM DEVICE

FIRE SPRINKLER HEAD

SPEAKER

CABLE TELEVISON DEVICE

2' x 4' LED FIXTUREIN GRID



STRIP LED LIGHT FIXTURE

RECESSED CAN LIGHT FIXTURE

WALL MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURE

PENDANT MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURE

SURFACE MOUNTED CANLIGHT FIXTURE

SUPPLY DIFFUSER

RETURN AIR GRILLE OR EXHAUST


H.H.

REFLECTED CEILING PLAN SYMBOLS

CBA D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:

BID PACKAGE - DISCIPLINE - CATEGORY - SUB CATEGORY - SHEET

REVISIONS


PROJECT NORTH

®

TM

®

®



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400



1-224-717-1555

FO

R R

EF

ER

EN

CE

ON

LY -

NO

T F

OR

CO

NS

TR

UC

TIO

N

BID PACKAGE #1

4/18/20 16 1:03:43 PM

Ban

kers

Life

Fie

ldho

use

1 25

S. P

enns

ylv a

nia

St.,

Indi

anap

olis

, IN

462

40





04.08.2016

ENLARGED SUITELEVEL RCPS

BP2 A3-4-02

16.4224.00

04.08.16

2016

GENERAL NOTES


1. RE: X3-1 FOR GRID GEOMETRY PLAN ANDDIMENSIONS.

2. RE: A0-01 FOR WALL TYPE DESIGNATIONS,DIMENSIONING CRITERIA, GRAPHIC SYMBOLSAND RATED CONSTRUCTION TYPES.

3. RE: A0-02 FOR TYPICAL TOILET LAYOUTSAND ACCESSORIES.

4. RE: A8-1-01, A8-1-02 FOR TYPICAL INTERIORDETAILS.



7. RE: A8-6-01, A8-6-02 FOR RAIL TYPES ANDDETAILS.


1/8" = 1'-0"1

SUITE CLUB ENLARGED RCP


BP1_01 04/18/2016 BP1_Addendum 01

BP2_01 04/18/2016 BP2_Addendum 01

BP

1_01

BP1_01

BP1_01

BP1_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

R22.2

R22

R22

R20.6

R20.4

NNN

OOO

PPP

R18

R7

R21.9

R21

R20.5

R20

R19.1 R19.1

R19

R19

R18.8

EE.9

EE.2

CC

FF

TILES

3 FULL

ALI

GN

TILES

3 FULL

7' -

10 5

/8"

7' -

10 3

/4"

WD

4/W

C2

WD

4/W

C2

WIN1, CURTAINS TORUN INSIDE OFOPERABLE PARTITIONFROM RECESSED TRACKIN THE CEILING, TYP

CARPET &WOOD

BASE TOMATCH

EXISTING

P4

P4

CC.1

DD

EE

CA3

CA3

CA3

T7

T7

CA4

CA4

CA4

CA4

CA4

CA4

CA4

CA4

CA4

CA4

CA4

CA4

CA4

SUITE CLUB

4C31

P4 / WD3

P4 / WD3

P4

P4

WC

1

P4

T7

T6

P4

P4

P4

T6

WC

1

P4

T6

P4

P4

T6

M6

WD

3

WD

3

P4

P4/WD3

GL2

P4/WD3

CA4

P4/WD3

GL2

P4/WD3

P4/WD3

GL2

P4/WD3

P4/WD3

GL2

P4/WD3

P4/WD3

GL2

P4/WD3

P4/WD3

GL2

P4/WD3

P4/WD3

GL2

P4/WD3

P4/WD3

GL2

P4/WD3

P4/WD3

GL2

P4/WD3

P4/WD3

GL2

P4/WD3

P4/WD3

GL2

P4/WD3

P4/WD3

GL2

P4/WD3

P4

P4

P4

P4

P6

P6

P6

P6

P6

P6

P6

CA4

WC

1

BP2 A8-6-01

18

7' -

0"

8' -

0"

7' -

0"

3' -

0 3

/8"

ALT: P4PAINTONLY

ALT: P4PAINTONLY

ALT: P4PAINTONLY

ALT: NOWAINSCOTWC1 ONLY

STAIR TREADS AND RISERSTO BE TILE, T7

STAIR TREADS AND RISERSTO BE TILE, T7

ALIGN

WC

1

WC

1P

4

CBA D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


PROJECT NORTH

®

TM

®

®



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400



1-224-717-1555

FO

R R

EF

ER

EN

CE

ON

LY -

NO

T F

OR

CO

NS

TR

UC

TIO

N

BID PACKAGE #2

4/18/20 16 1:03:52 PM

Ban

kers

Life

Fie

ldho

use

1 25

S. P

enns

ylv a

nia

St.,

Indi

anap

olis

, IN

462

40





04.08.2016

FLOOR FINISH PLAN- SUITE LEVEL

BP2 A3-4-04

16.4224.00

04.08.16

2016

1/8" = 1'-0"1

SUITE CLUB FINISH PLAN

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

GENERAL NOTES










BP2_01 04/18/2016 BP2_Addendum 01

200 - CLUB / SUITE LEVEL741' - 2"

TV'S RE: SCHEDULE

TV'S RE: SCHEDULE

4

BP2 A8-2-01

5

BP2 A8-2-01

ADA MIN.

5' - 0" CLEAR

6

BP2 A8-2-01

4

BP2 A8-2-01

TYP3/4"

12 EQUALTYP3/4"16 EQUAL

2' -

10"

2' -

10"

TV'S: RESCHEDULE

7/8"

9

BP2 A8-1-02

9

BP2 A8-1-02

9

BP2 A8-2-01

T6WD6

7

BP2 A8-2-01

7

BP2 A8-2-01

WD6P4WC1

WD5

WD3

SS5

P4T6

T5

SS4

WC1WD6WD3

WD5

WD3

SS5

T6WD6 P4

WD5 WD5

WD6

6"

6 EQUAL

20

BP2 A8-1-02

6"TYP3"

EQ EQ

EQ EQ

EQ EQ

M4

WC18

BP2 A8-2-01

TYP8

BP2 A8-2-01

TYP

5' -

10"

5' -

10"

COUNTERTOP TO RETURN

ALT: NOWAINSCOTWC1 ONLY

FEC

9

BP2 A8-1-02

4C31A

4C31B4C31A4C31F 4C31G

4C31J 4C31K 4C31L

CUSTOM WAINSCOTING

OPEN TOBEYOND, TYP

DRAPERY,WIN1,TYP.

P4/WD3P4/WD3 P4/WD3P4/WD3

DRAPERY TRACK HARDWARE DRAPERY TRACK HARDWARE

OPEN TOBEYOND, TYP

OPEN TOBEYOND, TYP


PAINT, P4

BRANDING,LASER CUTW/ M4 INFILL

METAL TRIM, M4

WD6

P4

WD3WD5

15

BP2 A8-1-02

3' - 11"EQ EQ

2' -

10"

TYP1"

13

BP2 A8-1-02

9

BP2 A8-1-02


BRANDING,LASER CUTW/ M4 INFILL

METAL TRIM, M4

P4

WD3WD5

WD6P4 P4P4

3' - 11"EQ EQ

TYP1"

2' -

10"

15

BP2 A8-1-02

13

BP2 A8-1-02

P4

BEYOND

CAP, WD39

BP2 A8-1-02


1" METAL DOORFRAME, M4

METAL MESHDOOR SCREEN, M5

TV'S RE: SCHEDULE

3 EQUAL

2

BP2 A8-2-01

3 EQUAL

W/ TV SPEC

VERIFY2"

RE: FOODSERVICE DWGS

3 EQUAL

3

BP2 A8-2-01

FILLER PANEL

SS4

WD3

ALL EXPOSED CABINETSIDES TO BE WD3

PER EQUIPMENT

T6

TYP3/4"

3 EQUAL

ALI

GN

ALI

GN

RE: FOODSERVICE DWGS

3' -

6"

2"

9

BP2 A8-1-02

4C31F 4C31G


2' -

6"

4' -

0"

WC1

SIGNAGE PROVIDED BYOWNER

WOOD, WD5

19

BP2 A8-1-02

8' - 0"

P4WC1

WD3

WD6

9

BP2 A8-1-02


18

BP2 A8-1-02

OPENOPEN

EQ EQ

WD5

P4

WD6

TV RE: SCHEDULE

9

BP2 A8-1-02


OPENOPEN

16

BP2 A8-1-02

MITERED CORNERS

T6

M4

WD3

8' -

0"

4"

6"6"

6"


FRAMED METALMESH PANELS, M6

PINNED METALGRAPHIC, M4

16

BP2 A8-1-02

MITERED CORNERS

4 EQUAL

WD3

M4

4' -

8 1

/4"


TYP3/4"

TYP3/4"PER EQUIPMENT

BACK BAR BEYOND

2' -

10"

12

BP2 A8-2-01

11

BP2 A8-2-01

TYP

10

BP2 A8-2-01SS4

SS4

SS4

WD3

COUNTERTOPWATERFALL RETURN

WD3


P4

WOOD CAP,WD3

OPEN TOBEYOND

CLUB BOWL

DRAPERY

3' -

6"

3' -

8 1

/2"

BP2 A8-6-01

17CUSTOMMILLWORK


WC1

WD5

WD4 WD4 WD4

SIGNAGE PROVIDEDBY OWNER

WD5

WD6

WC1 WD5

WD6P4

20

BP2 A8-1-02

WC2 WC2 WC2

13 EQUAL

TYP.6"

TYP.6"

TYP.6"

23 EQUAL

TYP.6"

ALT: NOWAINSCOTTING,P4 PAINT ONLY

ALT: P4 PAINTONLY

ALT: NOWAINSCOTTING,P4 PAINT ONLY

9

BP2 A8-1-02

WD6

CBA D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:

BID PACKAGE - DISCIPLINE - CATEGORY - SUB CATEGORY - SHEET

REVISIONS


®

TM

®

®



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400



1-224-717-1555

FO

R R

EF

ER

EN

CE

ON

LY -

NO

T F

OR

CO

NS

TR

UC

TIO

N

BID PACKAGE #1

4/18/20 16 1:04:20 PM

Ban

kers

Life

Fie

ldho

use

1 25

S. P

enns

ylv a

nia

St.,

Indi

anap

olis

, IN

462

40





04.08.2016

INTERIORELEVATIONS

BP2 A6-1-01

16.4224.00

04.08.16

2016

GENERAL NOTES


1. RE: X3-1 FOR GRID GEOMETRY PLAN ANDDIMENSIONS.

2. RE: A0-01 FOR WALL TYPE DESIGNATIONS,DIMENSIONING CRITERIA, GRAPHIC SYMBOLSAND RATED CONSTRUCTION TYPES.

3. RE: A0-02 FOR TYPICAL TOILET LAYOUTSAND ACCESSORIES.

4. RE: A8-1-01, A8-1-02 FOR TYPICAL INTERIORDETAILS.



7. RE: A8-6-01, A8-6-02 FOR RAIL TYPES ANDDETAILS.


1/4" = 1'-0"1

SUITE LEVEL_ BAR/ FOOD SERVICE

1/4" = 1'-0"2

SUITE LEVEL_ PARTITIONS

1/4" = 1'-0"3

SUITE LEVEL_ EAST 1/4" = 1'-0"

4SUITE LEVEL_ WEST

1/4" = 1'-0"5

SUITE LEVEL_ BACK OF BAR

1/4" = 1'-0"6

SUITE LEVEL_ ENTRY BRANDING 1/4" = 1'-0"

7SUITE LEVEL_ COLUMN BP2

1/4" = 1'-0"8

SUITE LEVEL_ ENTRY CASEWORK BACKSIDE 1/4" = 1'-0"

9SUITE LEVEL_ ENTRY CASEWORK

1/4" = 1'-0"10

SUITE LEVEL_SERVICE STATION

1/4" = 1'-0"12

SUITES LEVEL_ THEATER BOXES 1/4" = 1'-0"

13SUITE LEVEL_ CORRIDOR


BP2_01 04/18/2016 BP2_Addendum 01

BP2_01BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01BP2_01

BP2_01BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

WALL TYPE PER PLAN

SCHLUTER TOP TRIM,'JOLLY'

TILE, PER SCHEDULE

WALL TILE PER SCHEDULE

SCHLUTER EDGE TRIM,'JOLLY'

WALL TILE PER SCHEDULE

WALL TYPE PER PLAN

SEALANT JOINT

SEALANT JOINT

FLUSH MOUNTEDSTAINLESS STEEL

FLATHEAD SCREWS @ 12"O.C.

STAINLESS STEELCORNER GUARD

WALL PROTECTION (WHEREOCCURS)

RE: AREA PLANS

GYP. BD. OR FRP W/SUBSTRATE ON

MTL. FRAMING

TO 8'-0" A.F.F.1 1/2"

1 1

/2"

WALL AS SCHEDULED

3/4" MDF PANEL W/ L1 FACE& SELF EDGES

Z-CLIPS, TYP.

1/8" TYP.

4"1"

TOP OF STUD

FINISH CEILINGAS SCHEDULED

PARTITIONAS SCHEDULED

ACOUSTIC INSUL.2' EACH SIDE OFPARTITION IF NOTCONTINUOUS TOSTRUCTURE

ACOUSTIC INSUL.WHERE OCCURS

STRUC FLOORVARIES

2" X 1" 8 GA. STL.STRAPS @ 16" 0.C.

SPANS 2 FLUTES MIN.ATTACH W/ 2-3/16"

DIA. EXP. ANCHORSEACH END.

METAL FRAMINGAS SCHEDULEDFINISH VARIES

STL. 'U' RUNNER W/2 1/2" SLOTTED LEGS

ELASTOMER BEARINGSTRIP FOR VIBRATIONISOLATION

MIN

.1/

4"

3"

PROFORM QUICK-SETFS-90 COMPOUND

MINERAL WOOL INSULATION

CUT GWB PANELS TO FITDECK CONFIGURATION

FIRE TRAK SHADOWLINEMECHANICALLY FASTEN24" O.C. MAX.

TOP ROW OF FASTENERS3" FROM TOP OF GWB

2 LAYERS 5/8" TYPE 'X' GWB

CT, CH, OR I STUDS 24" O.C.

STEEL J TRACK - MECHANICALLYFASTEN 24" O.C. MAX.

FLEXIBLE SEALANT.

HEAD OF WALL - 2HRUL DESIGN: HW-D-0119

PARTITION - 2HRUL DESIGN: U 497

FIRESTOP SEALANT

SLOTTED CEILING TRACK,MECHANICALLY FASTEN24" O.C. MAX.

HEAD OF WALL - 2HRUL DESIGN: HW-D-0194

1" M

IN.

5/8"

6"

5 3

/8"

R 15/32"

R 1/2"

1/8"

1/4"

2 1/4"

2 1

/4"

1/4

"5 3

/4"

2' -

10"

SOLID SURFACE TOP,EASED EDGE CORNERS

TOUCH LATCH HARDWARE

METAL MESH PANELS, M5

METAL BASE, M4

BLACK MELAMINE INTERIOR

ADJUSTABLE SHELVES

1 1

/2"

CEILING AS SCHEDULED

WOOD FRAME BEYOND

HORIZONTAL LED STRIPLIGHTING & VALANCE,

RE: ELECTRICAL

WOOD VENEER

TILE, T6

2"

VERTICAL LINEAR LEDLIGHT, BEYOND

4"FLOOR AS SCHEDULED

BASE AS SCHEDULED

WALL AS SCHEDULED

PE

R E

LE

VA

TIO

N


VE

RIF

Y W

ITH

EQ

UIP

ME

NT

SPECIFIED TV ANDMOUNTING BRACKETCENTERED IN RECESS -RECESS SIDES AND BACKPAINTED BLACK

FINISH AS SCHEDULED

SHEET METAL BACKING FORMOUNTING BRACKET -COORDINATE GAUGE ANDLOCATIONS WITH AV SPECS

ALIG

N

REQUIRED OUTLETSRECESSED IN PARTITION

ALIG

N

FURR-OUT, COORDINATEDEPTH WITH RECESSREQUIRED FOR AV EQUIPMENT

TRIM AS SCHEDULED

2"

2"

FLOOR AS SCHEDULED

BASE AS SCHEDULED

WALL AS SCHEDULED

PE

R E

LE

VA

TIO

N


SIGNAGE PROVIDED BYOWNER

WALLCOVERING ASSCHEDULED

WALLCOVERING ASSCHEDULED

ALIG

N

WOOD AS SCHEDULED

PE

R E

LE

VA

TIO

N

WOOD FRAMEAS SCHEDULED

METAL, M4

4"

TYP1/8"

WOOD FRAMEBEYOND

ALIG

N

4"

METAL, M4

WOOD FRAMEBEYOND

BLOCKING ASREQUIRED

TYP1/8"

FLOOR AS SCHEDULED

WALL AS SCHEDULED


WOOD PANEL ASSCHEDULED ON Z-CLIPS

6"

6"

WOOD PANEL ASSCHEDULED ON Z-CLIPS

WOOD TRIM FILLERAS SCHEDULED

WOOD BASE FILLERAS SCHEDULED

METAL TRIM, M4

TYP1/8"

METAL TRIM, M4

PAINT ASSCHEDULED

WOOD ASSCHEDULED

1/2

"

6"

1/8"PAINT AS SCHEDULED

WALL AS SCHEDULED

1/8"

PANELING PROFILERE: ELEVATION

CONCRETE TO CARPET

CARPET

RUBBER TRANSITIONREDUCER STRIP

CONCRETEFLOOR

NOTE: TRANSITION FINISH TBD - PROVIDE STANDARD OPTIONS TO ARCHITECT

CARPET TO TILE

SCHLUTER RENO-TKCONTINUOUSTRANSITION ANGLE

TILE

CARPET

WALL RE: PLAN

HARDWOOD CHAIR RAIL

BLOCKING

HARDWOOD TRIM MOULD

SHIM, TYP.

HARDWOOD EDGE

WAINSCOT HARDWOOD STILE ANDRAIL W/ VENEERED PANELS

HARDWOOD BASE, AS SCHEDULED

2' -

10"

PE

R E

LE

VA

TIO

N

FLOOR AS SCHEDULED

WALL AS SCHEDULED


WOOD BASE AS SCHEDULED

PAINT AS SCHEDULED

PAINT AS SCHEDULED

MOULDING AS SCHEDULED

CBA D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


®

TM

®

®



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400



1-224-717-1555

FO

R R

EF

ER

EN

CE

ON

LY -

NO

T F

OR

CO

NS

TR

UC

TIO

N

BID PACKAGE #2

4/18/20 16 1:04:40 PM

Ban

kers

Life

Fie

ldho

use

1 25

S. P

enns

ylv a

nia

St.,

Indi

anap

olis

, IN

462

40





04.08.2016

INTERIOR DETAILS

BP2 A8-1-02

16.4224.00

04.08.16

2016

6" = 1'-0"7

DETAIL @ SCHLUTER STRIP @ TOP EDGE OFTILE

6" = 1'-0"6

DETAIL @ SCHLUTER STRIP @ OUTSIDE CORNER

6" = 1'-0"8

CORNER GUARD DETAIL BP2

3" = 1'-0"10

DETAIL @ MILLWORK PANEL OUTSIDE CORNERBP2

3" = 1'-0"11

ACOUSTIC ISOLATION @ PARTITION BP2

3" = 1'-0"14

2 HR SHAFT WALL DETAIL BP2

6" = 1'-0"9

SUITE CLUB WD BASE & TRIM PROFILE, TYP. BP2

1 1/2" = 1'-0"16

SUITE ENTRY WALL BP2 1 1/2" = 1'-0"

18RECESSED TV @ GYP. BD. WALL BP2

1 1/2" = 1'-0"19

RECESSED CORRIDOR SIGNAGE

1 1/2" = 1'-0"15

WOOD WALL PANELS BP2

6" = 1'-0"13

WOOD PANEL CORNER PLAN DETAIL BP2

6" = 1'-0"20

WALL PANEL PROFILE PLAN SECTION

NO SCALE2

FLOOR TRANSITION TYPES BP2

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

3" = 1'-0"1

WALL PANEL PROFILE SECTION @ CORRIDOR

GENERAL NOTES










BP2_01 04/18/2016 BP2_Addendum 01

BP2_01

6" = 1'-0"3

WALL PANEL PROFILE SECTION ELEVATION

EASE EDGE OFCOUNTERTOP,RE: FINISH SCHEDULE

STAINLESS STEELINTERIOR PANEL.RE: FS DWGS

FLOOR ASSCHEDULED

BAR FRONT ASSCHEDULED

U.N

.O.

2' -

10"

PAINTED SUBSTRATE

2' - 6"

3"

LED STRIP LIGHT W/DIFFUSED LENS &VALANCE, RE: ELEC.

ADA MIN.

1' - 8"

RETURNEDCOUNTERTOPBEYOND


1' - 8"4"

3"

2' - 0"

FOOD SERVICE EQUIP-RE: FS DWGS

BAR FLOOR ASSCHEDULED

FLOOR ASSCHEDULED

PAINTED SUBSTRATE

BAR FRONTAS SCHEDULED

3' -

6"

1 1/2" DIA. BRASSFOOTRAIL, M4 - MITEREDSMOOTH CORNERS,WELDED CONNECTIONS,NO SLEEVES, TYP.

LED STRIP LIGHT W/DIFFUSED LENS &VALANCE, RE: ELEC.

7 5/8"

STAINLESS STEEL INTERIORPANEL - RE: FS DWGS

SOLID SURFACEFORMED RECESS

1/2"

FOOD SERVICE EQUIP.RE: FS DWGS


BLACK FRPINTERIOR PANEL


BLACK RESILIENT COVEBASE (TYP @ INTERIOR)

PAINTED SUBSTRATE

WALL AS SCHEDULED

S.S. SUPPORT LEGS.RE: FS DWGS FORSPACING

PER PLAN

1 1

/2"

3' -

6"

TILE AS SCHEDULED

CEILING ASSCHEDULED

RECESS FOR LIGHTINGWHERE NOTED,RE: ELECTRICAL

2"

1' -

6"

2"

2"

2"

VE

RIF

Y W

ITH

EQ

UIP

ME

NT

W/ EQUIP.VERIFY

1' - 3"

RECESSED TV, RE:EQUIPMENTSPECIFICATION

APRON, RE: INTERIORELEVATION & LEGEND

W/ E

QU

IP.

CO

OR

D.

3"

3"



WALL AS SCHEDULED

1 1

/2"

3' -

6"

MIRROR, MI1


FIXED SHELVES

2"

RECESSED CABINETLIGHTING,RE: ELECTRICAL

1' - 3"

HARDWARE AS SCHEDULED

BLACK MELAMINEINTERIOR, U.N.O.

1' -

4 3

/4"

1' -

4 3

/4"

1" METAL DOOR FRAME, M4

METAL MESHDOOR SCREEN, M5

2"

PER PLAN

4"

PULL & CAM LOCKS

DOOR FACE,RE: ELEVATION

BASE FINISH TOMATCH CABINET

3"

BLACK MELAMINEINTERIOR

ADJUSTABLE SHELF

FULL LENGTHVENTILATION SLOT

FULL LENGTH VENTILATIONSLOT W/ METAL COVER

2"

2"

ALIG

N

FLOOR AS SCHEDULED

WALL AS SCHEDULED

PE

R E

LE

VA

TIO

N


VE

RIF

Y W

ITH

EQ

UIP

ME

NT

SPECIFIED TV ANDMOUNTING BRACKETCENTERED IN RECESS -RECESS SIDES AND BACKPAINTED BLACK

TILE AS SCHEDULED

SHEET METAL BACKING FORMOUNTING BRACKET -COORDINATE GAUGE ANDLOCATIONS WITH AV SPECS

ALIG

N

REQUIRED OUTLETSRECESSED IN PARTITION

ALIG

N

FURR-OUT, COORDINATEDEPTH WITH RECESSREQUIRED FOR AV EQUIPMENT

TILE AS SCHEDULED

2"

PE

R E

LE

VA

TIO

N

6"

SOLID SURFACE TOP,EASED EDGE CORNERSRE: INTERIOR ELEVATION& LEGEND

PULL & CAM LOCKS



3"


ADJUSTABLE SHELF

FOOD SHIELD, RE: FS DWGS

WOOD TRIM

1 1

/2"

PER PLAN

2"

ALIG

N

FLOOR AS SCHEDULED

WALL AS SCHEDULED

TILE AS SCHEDULED

PE

R E

LE

VA

TIO

N

6"


PULL & CAM LOCKS


VENTILATION SLOT



EQUIPMENT, RE: FOODSERVICE DRAWINGS

2 1/2"

VENTILATION SLOT

3"

4"

PER PLAN

1 1

/2"

CUT OUT FORELECTRICAL

FOOD SHIELD,RE: FS DWGS


ADJUSTABLE SHELF

ALIG

N

1' - 8"4"

3"

2' - 0"

FOOD SERVICEEQUIPMENT &STAINLESS STEEL DIEWALL- RE: FS DWGS


BLACK RESILIENTCOVE BASE(TYP @ INTERIOR)

3' -

6"

7 1/4"

FLOOR ASSCHEDULED

SOLID SURFACE TOP,EASED EDGE CORNERSRE: INTERIORELEVATION & LEGEND

PULL



3"

1 1

/2"

6"

2' -

10"

TRASH CAN,RE: FS DWGS

1/2

"


TOE KICK ATTACHEDTO DOOR

OPENING FOR TRASH,RE: FS DWGS

9 7/8"

2' - 6"


1/2"

ALIG

N

1' - 8"4"

3"

2' - 0"

3' -

6"

8"

FLOOR AS SCHEDULED


PULL & CAM LOCKS



3"

1 1

/2"

6"

2' -

10"



EQUIPMENT,RE: FS DWGS

VENTILATION SLOT

BLACK MELAMINE

2' - 6"


1/2"

ALIG

N

1' - 8"4"

3"

2' - 0"

3' -

6"

8"

FLOOR AS SCHEDULED

EASE EDGE OF COUNTERTOP,RE: FINISH SCHEDULE

BLACK MELAMINE INTERIOR

1 1

/2"

2' -

10"



6"

3"

EQUIPMENT, RE: FS DWGSSECURE FROM BELOW SHELF

W/

EQ

UIP

.

CO

OR

D.

PROVIDE 2" DIA. GROMMET@ POS LOCATIONS

6"

CUT OUT FOR ELECTRICAL

BLACK MELAMINE

PULL & CAM LOCKS

DOOR FACE, RE: ELEVATION

2' - 6 7/8"

ADJUSTABLE SHELF


1/2"

ALIG

N

PLYWOOD DECKING ON METALFLOOR DECKINGRE: STRUCTURAL

BASE AS SCHEDULED

WALL AS SCHEDULED

METAL STUDRE: STRUCTURAL

SS COUNTERTOP &BACK SPLASH, EASEDEDGE CORNERS

L3X3X3/16" @ 4'-0" O.C., PTD

L2X2X1/4" @ 4'-0" O.C.BEVEL FRONT CORNERBEHIND DIAG. STRUT.

BLACK MELAMINE

BAG HOOK

1' - 2 1/2"

2"

2" 1"

2' -

6"

2' -

2 3

/4"

EXISTING STEEL AND CONCRETE STRUCTURE

BASE AS SCHEDULED

BAG HOOK

WALL AS SCHEDULED

SS COUNTERTOP & BACK SPLASH,EASED EDGE CORNERS

METAL STUDRE: STRUCTURAL

BLACK MELAMINE

L3X3X3/16" @ 4'-0" O.C., PTD

L2X2X1/4" @ 4'-0" O.C. BEVELFRONT CORNER BEHIND DIAG. STRUT.

2' -

6"

3' -

8 3

/4"

BRACINGRE: STRUCTURAL

BRACINGRE: STRUCTURAL

1' - 2 1/2"

1"

2"

2"

R1 - HANDRAILRE: 1 - BP2 - A8-6-01

RE: AV DRAWINGS FOR TV,MOUNTING HARDWARE &GROMMET SPECIFICATIONS

RE: AV DRAWINGS FOR TV,MOUNTING HARDWARE &GROMMET SPECIFICATIONS

6"


BASE FINISH TO MATCH CABINET

3"


ADJUSTABLE SHELF

FLOOR AS SCHEDULED

WALL AS SCHEDULED

TILE AS SCHEDULED

PULL & CAM LOCKS



FOOD SHIELD, RE: FS DWGS

ALIG

N

PE

R E

LE

VA

TIO

N

PROVIDE CONTINOUSBLOCKING IN WALL

EASE EDGE OFCOUNTERTOP ANDAPPLIED BACKSPLASH,RE: FINISH SCHEDULEAND ELEVATIONS

CABINET BEYOND,EXPOSED SIDESTOMATCH CABINET FACE.RE: FINISH SCHEDULE

BASE AS SCHEDULED,RE: FINISH SCHEDULE

WALL AS SCHEDULED

FIXED PANEL,RE: FINISH SCHEDULE

UNDERMOUNT SINK ANDFAUCET, PER SPECS.

4"

MIN

2' -

3"

ADA TOE & KNEECLEARANCE

REMOVABLEACCESS PANEL

1 1

/2"

PER PLAN

5 1

/2"


BP2A8-2-01

14

CONVENIENCE POWER/USB OUTLET

NOTE: COORDINATELOCATION WITH POWER

1' -

8 5

/8"

3/4

" SS5

WD3

ACCESS PANEL,COORDINATELOCATION ANDSIZE WITH POWER

CONVENIENCE POWER/USB OUTLET

2"

STRAIGHT WOODBASE TO MATCH

6"

RE

VE

AL

1/4

" T

YP

.R

EV

EA

L1/4

" T

YP

.

1/4"

SS5: ONLY ONUPPER ROW OFTABLES

CBA D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


®

TM

®

®



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400



1-224-717-1555

FO

R R

EF

ER

EN

CE

ON

LY -

NO

T F

OR

CO

NS

TR

UC

TIO

N

BID PACKAGE #2

4/18/20 16 1:04:51 PM

Ban

kers

Life

Fie

ldho

use

1 25

S. P

enns

ylv a

nia

St.,

Indi

anap

olis

, IN

462

40





04.08.2016

MILLWORK DETAILS

BP2 A8-2-01

16.4224.00

04.08.16

2016

1 1/2" = 1'-0"5

BAR ADA COUNTER BP2 1 1/2" = 1'-0"

6BAR COUNTER BP2

1 1/2" = 1'-0"2

BACK BAR @ TV BP2 1 1/2" = 1'-0"

3BACK BAR @ UPPER & BASE CABINETS BP2

1 1/2" = 1'-0"4

RECESSED TV @ TILE WALL BP2

1 1/2" = 1'-0"7

BASE CABINET @ EQUIPMENT BP2

1 1/2" = 1'-0"10

SERVICE STATION @ TRASH CABINET BP2 1 1/2" = 1'-0"

11SERVICE STATION @ ICE CHEST BP2

1 1/2" = 1'-0"12

SERVICE STATION @ POS BP2

1 1/2" = 1'-0"1

SECTION AT LOGE

1 1/2" = 1'-0"8

BASE CABINET BP2 1 1/2" = 1'-0"

9BASE CABINET WITH ACCESSIBLE SINK BP2

1 1/2" = 1'-0"13

THEATER BOX SIDE TABLE BP2

1 1/2" = 1'-0"14

THEATER BOX SIDE TABLE BP2

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

GENERAL NOTES










BP2_01 04/18/2016 BP2_Addendum 01

SINGLE DOORFRAME

DOUBLE DOORFRAME

3-PIECE 3-PIECE

DO

OR

HE

IGH

T

DO

OR

HE

IGH

T

2" DOOR WIDTH 2"

2"

2"

2" DOOR WIDTH 2"

ALL GLAZING TYPE A - SAFTEY GLASSRE: 08 81 00 FOR GLAZING TYPES

SCHEDULE

1 2

DOOR MATERIAL DESCRIPTION

ALHM

STL

WDAL/GL

HM/GLRBR

ALUMINUMHOLLOW METAL

PAINTED STEEL(GALVANIZED @ EXTERIOR LOCATIONS& WHERE INDICATED

WOODALUMINUM & GLASS

HOLLOW METAL W/ GLASSRUBBER

REMARKS

GENERAL

COORDINATE FRAME & DOOR PREP FOR ELECTRICAL DEVICESDENOTED IN DOOR SCHEDULE

PROVIDE FIRE RATED DOOR ASSEMBLIES WHERE APPLICABLE.

1.

2.

WD/GL WOOD/GLASS

FLUSH DOOR NARROW LITEDOOR

FULL GLASSINSERT DOOR

NF FG

ALL GLAZING TYPE A - SAFETY GLASSRE: 08 81 00 FOR GLAZING TYPES SCHEDULE

3' -

6"

2' -

10"

5"

10"

1"

10"

5"

CBA D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


®

TM

®

®



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400



1-224-717-1555

FO

R R

EF

ER

EN

CE

ON

LY -

NO

T F

OR

CO

NS

TR

UC

TIO

N

BID PACKAGE #2

4/18/20 16 1:04:55 PM

Ban

kers

Life

Fie

ldho

use

1 25

S. P

enns

ylv a

nia

St.,

Indi

anap

olis

, IN

462

40





04.08.2016

DOOR, FRAME &WINDOW

ELEVATIONS

BP2 A8-3-01

16.4224.00

04.08.16

2016

1/4" = 1'-0"1

DOOR FRAME TYPES BP2

1/4" = 1'-0"2

DOOR TYPES BP2

DOOR SCHEDULE - SUITE LEVEL CLUB BP2

Door Number Level Width Height Dr-Fire Rating Dr-Matl Dr-Finish Dr-Type Dr-Frame-Matl Dr-Frame-Finish Dr-Frame-Type Dr-Hdwr Head Jamb Sill Dr-Remarks Dr-Revision

4C31-1 200 - CLUB / SUITE LEVEL 6' - 0" 7' - 0" WD/GL WD3/GL2 FG WD WD3 2 2-2.0 03/BP2 A8-3-02 03/BP2 A8-3-02 01/BP2 A8-3-02

4C31-2 200 - CLUB / SUITE LEVEL 3' - 0" 7' - 0" WD WD3 F WD WD3 1 2-3.0 03/BP2 A8-3-02 03/BP2 A8-3-02 01/BP2 A8-3-02

4C31-3 200 - CLUB / SUITE LEVEL 3' - 0" 7' - 0" WD WD3 F WD WD3 1 2-3.0 03/BP2 A8-3-02 03/BP2 A8-3-02 01/BP2 A8-3-02

4C31A-1 200 - CLUB / SUITE LEVEL 3' - 6" 6' - 8" WD WD3 F WD WD3 - 2-5.0 05/BP2 A8-3-02 04/BP2 A8-3-02 05/BP2 A8-3-02 SLIDING WOOD POCKET DOOR

4C31A-2 200 - CLUB / SUITE LEVEL 3' - 6" 6' - 8" WD WD3 F WD WD3 - 2-5.0 05/BP2 A8-3-02 04/BP2 A8-3-02 05/BP2 A8-3-02 SLIDING WOOD POCKET DOOR

4C31A-3 200 - CLUB / SUITE LEVEL 3' - 6" 7' - 0" WD WD4 F WD WD4 1 2-4.0 03/BP2 A8-3-02 03/BP2 A8-3-02 01/BP2 A8-3-02

4C36A-1 200 - CLUB / SUITE LEVEL 4' - 0" 7' - 0" HM P4/GL2 N HM P4 1 2-1.0 02/BP2 A8-3-02 02/BP2 A8-3-02 01/BP2 A8-3-02

4C36A-2 200 - CLUB / SUITE LEVEL 4' - 0" 7' - 0" HM P3/GL2 N HM P3 1 2-7.0 02/BP2 A8-3-02 02/BP2 A8-3-02 01/BP2 A8-3-02

4C36B-1 200 - CLUB / SUITE LEVEL 4' - 0" 7' - 0" HM P4/GL2 N HM P4 1 2-6.0 02/BP2 A8-3-02 02/BP2 A8-3-02 01/BP2 A8-3-02

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01 BP2_01

BP2_01

GENERAL NOTES










BP2_01 04/18/2016 BP2_Addendum 01

BP2_01

5/8" GYPSUM BOARD

2 1/2" CEILING RUNNERS

7/8" FURRING CHANNELS

5/8" GYPSUM BOARD

4" METAL STUDS

1' -

4"

9"

METAL CEILING GRID

SOLID WOOD "DEEP PROFILE" COFFER

T-BAR GRID COVER

LAY-IN, ACCESSIBLE WOOD VENEER PANEL

EXISTING PRECAST STADIA

GYP. BOARD CEILINGS RE: RCP

LIGHT FIXTURE (RE: ELEC.) INUPLIGHT COVE

10"

6"

6"

ALIGN

THEATER BOX

CURTAIN ASSCHEDULED

CLUB

4"

COFFERED PROFILE T-GRID COVERRE: BP2 A8-4-01/4

ACCESSIBLE WOOD VENEER PANEL

BP2 A8-4-015

CBA D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


®

TM

®

®



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400

13 Winding Branch Rd.Hawthorn Woods, IL 600471-224-717-1555

BID PACKAGE #2

4/18/2016 2 :55:19 P M

Bank

ers L

ife F

ieldh

ouse

125 S

. Pe n

n sy lv

a nia

S t., I

ndian

apol i

s, IN

4624

0





04.08.2016

CEILING DETAILS

BP2 A8-4-01

16.4224.00

04.08.16

2016

1 1/2" = 1'-0"2 SUSPENDED GWB CEILING CLOUD

3" = 1'-0"5 Suite Ceiling Coffered Ceiling Detail - Callout 1

1 1/2" = 1'-0"3 UPLIGHT AT THEATER BOX

3" = 1'-0"1 DRAPERY TRACK DETAIL

1 1/2" = 1'-0"4 Suite Coffered Ceiling Lighting Detail

BP2_01

GENERAL NOTES









NO. DATE DESCRIPTIONBP2_01 04/18/2016 BP2_Addendum 01

BP2_01?

3"

1 1/2" SS STL RAIL1

BP2 A8-6-01

7' - 0" - TYPE

2' -

10"

A.F

.F.

BP2 A8-6-01

18

BP2 A8-6-01

18

OPEN

6'-8" 2"

UNDERSIDE OF STAIR OROVERHEAD PROJECTION

1 1/4" DIA. N.P.S. STAINLESS STEEL RAIL

PROVIDE RAILS ON BOTHSIDES WHERE STAIR IS OPEN.OTHERWISE RETURN RAIL TOWALL.

1' -

8"

EQUALLY SPACED

5'-0" O.C. MAX.TYP. CORE DRILL RAIL DTL.RE:12/A8-6-01

1 1/4" DIA. N.P.S. SS. STL PIPE RAIL TYP

1' -

8"2' -

10"

EQUALLY SPACED

5'-0" O.C. MAX. TYP. CORE DRILL RAIL DTL.RE:12/A8-6-01

PLANTYP.

2'-1

0"A

.F.F

.

EQUAL SPACING

1'-0" HORIZ. GRIPPING SURFACE EXTENSION, MIN.

EQUAL SPACING

NOTE1. ALL CONNECTIONS ARE CONTINUOUS WELDS AND GROUND SMOOTH.

2. ALL NON STAINLESS RAIL COMPONENTS TO BE PAINTED.

(5'-0" MAX. SPAN)

1 1/4" DIA. N.P.S. STEEL PIPEHANDRAIL PAINTED (STAINLESSSTEEL)

2'-1

0" A

.F.F

.

RETURN RAILTO WALL (TYP.)

(5'-0" MAX. SPAN)

14

BP2 A8-6-01

ELEV.PLANTYP.

11" GRIPPING SURFACE PROJECTION FROM LINE OF NOSING, MIN.

EQUAL SPACING

1'-0"

EQUAL SPACING

2'-10"A

.F.F

.

AB

OV

E N

OS

E O

FT

RE

AD

S (

TY

P)

NOTE

1. ALL CONNECTIONS ARE CONTINUOUS WELDS AND GROUND SMOOTH.


LINE OF NOSING AT BOTTOM OF RISER

(5'-0" M

AX. SPAN)

1 1/4" DIA. N.P.S. NOM. STEELPIPE HANDRAIL PAINTED(STAINLESS STEEL) U.N.O.

2'-10"

A.F

.F.

LINE OF NOSINGAT TOP OF RISER

RETURN RAILTO WALL (TYP.)

(5'-0" M

AX. SPAN)

BP2 A8-6-01

13

12" MIN. PROJECTION OFGRIPPING SURFACE, MIN. FROM

LINE OF NOSING

6"

R1"

R21_

2"

1_

8"

11_

2"

11_

2"

1 1/4" DIA. N.P.S. STEEL PIPEHANDRAIL-PAINTED

RE: PLANS FORPARTITION

CONSTRUCTION

1 1/4" DIA. N.P.S. STEEL PIPEHANDRAIL W/ ELBOWSUPPORT BRACKET

NOTE: 1. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE FIRE RESISTANT WOOD BLOCKING IN GYPSUM BOARD TYPE PARTITIONS. 2. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE CORROSION PROTECTION PER SPECIFICATIONS AT PRECAST OR MASONRY PARTITIONS.

(2) 3/8" X 2 1/2" LONGEXP. BOLTS SET INTO WALLCOUNTERSINK FLUSH-TYP.

SUPPORTS @5'-0" O.C. MAX

3/8" X 4" DIA. STL.PLATE

PLAN AT ENDS ELEV. AT SUPPORT

ELEV.

PLANTYP.

2'-1

0"A

.F.F

.

AB

OV

E N

OS

E O

FT

RE

AD

S (

TY

P)



FROM LINE OF NOSING AT BOTTOM OF RISER

1 1/4" DIA. NOM. STEEL PIPEHANDRAIL STAINLESS STEEL(GALV. ATEXTERIOR LOCATIONS)

2'-1

0" A

.F.F

.

LINE OF NOSINGAT TOP OF RISER

CL

11" PROJECTION OF GRIPPING SURFACE, MIN.

CORE DRILL TO ACCEPT RAIL -GROUT RAIL SOLID.RE: 12/A8-6-01

BP2 A8-6-01

18

1 1/2" SS STL RAIL

2' -

10"

A.F

.F.

EQEQ

EQ

EQ

EQ EQ

EQ

EQ

2'-10"

1'-0"

R 6

CORE DRILL TOACCEPT RAIL -GROUT RAIL SOLID.RE: 12/A8-6-01

PRECAST SEATINGTREADS & RISERS

AISLE STEPRE: 3/A8-5-01

6" RADIUS (TYP.)

1 1/4" DIA. N.P.S.STAINLESS STEELPIPE RAIL

6" R. (TYP.)

AT TOP OFAISLECONDITION

NOTE


2. ALL NON STAINLESS RAIL COMPONENTS TO BE PAINTED.3. VERTICAL INTERMEDIATE POLES TO BE INSTALLED AT CENTER OF TREAD

ELEV.

4/A8-5-01

4/A8-5-01

EQ

EQ

EQ EQ

EQ

EQ

2'-10" 1'-0"

2'-10"

1'-0" 4"

1'-0"

EQEQ

R 7

CORE DRILL TO ACCEPT RAIL -GROUT RAIL SOLID.RE: 12/A8-6-01

PRECAST SEATINGTREADS & RISERS

C.I.P. AISLE STEPRE: 3/A8-5-01

6" RADIUS (TYP.)

1 1/4" DIA. N.P.S.STAINLESS STEELPIPE RAIL

6" R. (TYP.)

AT TOP OF AISLECONDITION

NOTE


2. ALL NON STAINLESS RAIL COMPONENTS TO BE PAINTED.3. VERTICAL INTERMEDIATE POLES TO BE INSTALLED AT CENTER OF TREAD

ELEV.

EQ EQ

SEALANT

CORE DRILL ANDFILL W/ NON SHRINKEPOXY GROUT

3/4" CHAMFER

PRECAST HEADER

DASHED LINESINDICATETOP OF SIDE WALL OFVOMITORY

* NOTE:6" PREFERRED,5" IF REQUIRED

LC

5" *

VA

RIE

S

WOOD STAIR TREAD

STAIR STRINGER

OSB SUBFLOOR

1" DIA. NOM. STAINLESS STEELPIPE RAIL FRAME

EXISTING PRECAST TREADS & RISER

TREAD SPACING PER PLANCONTINUOUS 1-1/4" N.P.S.STAINLESS STEEL HANDRAIL

2' -

10"

15/A8-6-01

CONTINUOUS 1-1/4" N.P.S.STAINLESS STEEL HANDRAIL

15/A8-6-01

2' -

10"

1 1/2"

2 3/4"2 1/2"

6"

1"4 1/2"1"

4"

1"

1"

1 1

/2"

1"

1"2 1/2"1 1/2"

CL

3/16" X 1 1/2"MUSHROOM CAPSPIKE, SET FIRST TOHOLD RAIL DURINGCHEMICAL CURE,ALTERNATE SIDES OFRAIL

1 1/2" N.P.S. STEELPIPE PAINTED

1 1/2" N.P.S. STEELPIPE PAINTED

1" X 2 1/2" STEELBAR PAINTED

3/8" STL. PLATEGRIND SMOOTH &EASE EDGES

THREADED CHEMICALANCHORS DEPTH ODHOLE 3" MAX

CL

PLAN @ BAR SUPPORTSPLAN @ PIPE RAILS

SECTION @ BAR SUPPORTSSECTION @ PIPE RAILSNOTE: ADJUST BASE PLATEDIMENSION & ANCHORAGE TOCOORDINATE WITH WIDTH OFWALL TO WHICH IT IS ATTACHED

PROVIDE CAP OVERANCHOR BOLT

HARDWARE &LOCATION PERMANUFACTURER'SRECOMMENDATION

PANEL ASSCHEDULED, GL3

ALUM. FLASHINGAT TOP OF GYP BOARD

PRECAST TREADSAND RISERS

42" MIN

.

STEEL PLATE SUPPORTRE: STRUCTURAL

5/8" GYP. BD.PAINT TO MATCH EXISTINGBOWL FASCIA, FIELDVERIFY COLOR

1/4" CHAMFERED EDGE ATTOP OF GLASS RAIL

C.I.P. STAIRSRE: STRUCTURAL

EQ EQ

EQ

EQ

1/4"

1/4"

CAULKING

3' -

7"

GLASS RAILING SHOERE: MANUFACTURER

WOOD CAP, WD3

ALIGN


4 Suite Level 252' - 8"

4' -

3 1

/4"

3' -

7 1

/4"

2' - 1 1/4"

1' - 2 7/8"

145.00°

WD3 CAP

PANEL ASSCHEDULED, GL3

1 1/2" DIAMETERDECORATIVEHANDRAIL

9 5

/8"

145.00°

9 5

/8"


4 Suite Level 252' - 8"

5' - 1 3/4"

3' -

1 5

/8"

3' -

8 5

/8"

1 1/2" DIAMETERDECORATIVE HANDRAIL

WD3 CAP

PANEL ASSCHEDULED,GL3

2' - 0 5/8"

3"

4"

145.00°

145.00°

6"

** NOTE:ADJUST CORE DRILL DEPTH WHERESLAB/ STEP IS LESS THAN 7" THICK.

2" DIA. CORE DRILL W/ NON SHRINK EPOXY GROUT FILL

CAST IN PLACE CONCRETEOR PRECAST SLAB

SEALANT ALL AROUND

LC

6"

CONCRETE SLAB

LC1/2" THICK STEEL

MOUNTING PLATE WITHPREDRILLED HOLES

SS STEEL RAIL WELDEDTO MOUNTING PLATE

3/4" GALV. STEEL TEE-HEADBOLT WITH GALV. STEEL NUT

CBA D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


®

TM

®

®



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400



1-224-717-1555

FO

R R

EF

ER

EN

CE

ON

LY -

NO

T F

OR

CO

NS

TR

UC

TIO

N

BID PACKAGE #2

4/18/20 16 1:05:14 PM

Ban

kers

Life

Fie

ldho

use

1 25

S. P

enns

ylv a

nia

St.,

Indi

anap

olis

, IN

462

40





04.08.2016

METALWORKDETAILS

BP2 A8-6-01

16.4224.00

04.08.16

2016

3/4" = 1'-0"2

R1 - HANDRAIL ELEVATION (BP2)

1/2" = 1'-0"3

R2 - BARRIER RAIL (BP2)

1/2" = 1'-0"4

R3 - BARRIER RAIL (BP2)

1/2" = 1'-0"5

R4 - TYP. WALL MOUNTED HANDRAIL RETURN(BP2)

1/2" = 1'-0"6

R5 - TYP. WALL MOUNTED HANDRAIL @ BOWLAISLE STAIR (BP2)

3" = 1'-0"13

TYP. WALL MOUNTED HANDRAIL ATTACHMENT@ STAIR (BP2)

1/2" = 1'-0"9

R8 - HANDRAIL @ STAIRS (BP2)

1" = 1'-0"1

R1 - HANDRAIL DETAIL (BP2) 1/2" = 1'-0"

7

R6 - AISLE HANDRAIL @ SUITE LEVEL BOWL(BP2)

1/2" = 1'-0"8

R7 - AISLE HANDRAIL @ SUITE LEVEL BOWL(BP2)

3" = 1'-0"11

TYP. CORE DRILLED RAIL @ EDGE CONDITION(BP2)

1/2" = 1'-0"10

R9 - LOGE BOX RAILING @ STAIR (BP2)

3" = 1'-0"14

TYP. BOLTED RAIL CONNECTION (BP2)

1" = 1'-0"17

R-10 - THEATER BOX FRONT RAIL (BP2)

BP2_01

3/4" = 1'-0"15

THEATRE BOX - END WALL CONDITION

BP2_01

BP2_01

3/4" = 1'-0"16

TYPICAL THEATRE BOX RAILING CONDITIONBP2_01

BP2_01

GENERAL NOTES










BP2_01 04/18/2016 BP2_Addendum 01

3" = 1'-0"12

CORE DRILLED RAIL DETAIL - SLAB/STAIR

3" = 1'-0"18

RAIL ATTACHMENT DETAIL - SLAB (BP2)

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

CA CARPET

CA1 - 2 NOT USED IN BP2

CA3 Manufacturer: Shaw Contract Group Pattern: Fault 5A221 Color: Forge Platinum 20518Size: Broadloom Location: Suites Dining Area Contact: Ginger Carr 913-208-2592

CA4 Manufacturer: Shaw Contract Group Pattern: Strata 5A2002Color: Forge 20518Size: BroadloomLocation: Suites Theatre & Loge BoxesContact: Ginger Garr 913-208-2592

CL CEILING SYSTEMS

CL1 NOT USED IN BP2

CL2 Manufacturer: ArmstrongProduct: Georgian - #793Size: 24" x 24"Grid Style: Prelude XL 15/16" Exposed TeeLocation: Food Service, First Aid Contact: Elizabeth Moon 913-209-9434

CL3 Manufacturer:Product: Match ExistingSize: 24" x 24"Grid Style: Match ExistingLocation: Suite CorridorContact:

CL4 Manufacturer: Hunter DouglasProduct: Woodwright Hook-On

Size: 48" x 96"Grid Style: Location: Suite Level ClubContact: Victoria Anderson 816-305-0325Note: No perforation

GL GLASS

GL1 - 2 NOT USED IN BP2

GL3 Product: Monolithic Tempered GlassColor: Transparent- No leadLocation: Suites Theatre BoxesNotes: 3M Fasara Glass Film (Gradation TBD), applied

to court side of the glass

L LAMINATE

L1 Manufacturer: FormicaProduct: Color Core 2Color: Black Matte 909C-58Location: Courtside Club CorridorContact: Richele Smith 816-377-6235

L2 - 3 NOT USED IN BP2

L4 Product: Fiber Reinforced LaminateColor: WhiteLocation: KitchensContact:

M METAL

M1 - 3 NOT USED IN BP2

M4 Manufacturer: Rimex MetalsProduct: 304 Stainless Steel

Color: T22 Platinum Nickel Suide FPRLocation: Suite ClubContact Bobby Koslowsky 732-549-3800

M5 Manufacturer: Banker Wire

Product: M22-37Color: BZ Bronze Wire MeshFormat: Wire MeshLocation: Suite Club Back of BarContact: Harrison Horan 262-362-6126

M6 Manufacturer: Banker WireColor: BZ Bronze Wire MeshFormat: Wire MeshLocation: Suite Club Entry PartitionContact Harrison Horan 262-362-6126

MI MIRROR

MI1 Manufacturer: Pulp Studio, Inc.Product: Modern ReflectionColor: AM 400 AM BEN 02Size: 47" x 93"Location: Suites Back of BarContact Greg Kelly 913-488-9801

P PAINT

P1 - 2 NOT USED IN BP2

P3 Manufacturer: Sherwin Williams Color: SW EpoxyLocation: Food Service, First AidFinish: Refer to Specification

P4 Manufacturer: Sherwin WilliamsColor: SW 9168 Elephant Ear Location: Suite ClubFinish: Refer to Specification

P5 Manufacturer: Sherwin WilliamsColor: SW 7019 Gauntlet GreyLocation: Suite ClubFinish: Refer to Specification

P6 Manufacturer: Sherwin WilliamsColor: SW 6258 Tricorn BlackLocation: Courtside Club TV SoffitFinish: Refer to Specification

RB RESILIANT BASE

RB1 Manufacturer: Burke Profile: 4.25" Simple Color: 701 Black Location: Courtside, Kitchens

RB2 Manufacturer: BurkeProfile: 4.25" SimpleColor: 660 RockyLocation: First Aid

SS SOLID SURFACE MATERIAL

SS1 - 3 NOT USED IN BP2

SS4 Manufacturer: CambriaCollection: MarbleColor: BrittaniccaSize: 55" x 120"Thickness: 3 cmLocation: Suite Club Bar

Contact: Hilary Lenzen 314-750-6759

SS5 Manufacturer: Cambria Color: New QuaySize: 55" x 120" Thickness: 3 cm Location: Suite Club F.S. Contact: Hilary Lenzen 314-750-6759

SS6 Manufacturer: CambriaCollection: JewelColor: CharstonSize: 55" x 120Thickness: 3 cm Location: Loge Box Drink RailsContact: Hilary Lenzen 314-750-6759

T TILE

T1 - 4 NOT USED IN BP2

T5 Manufacturer: Ann SacksProduct: Coldagh PJ StripeColor: M2016 New Bronze LusterSize: 4" x 6" x .35"SO#: 1013852411-10Location: Suites Bar FrontContact: Travis Daugherty 303-282-9300

T6 Manufacturer: Fire Clay TileProduct: White clayColor: Ultra Crème (V3)Size: 2" x 4"Location: Suites F.S. BacksplashContact: Bill Palmer 415-999-6656

T7 Manufacturer: Caesar Contract SolutionsProduct: WideColor: FogSize: 12" x 24"Location: Suite Club FloorContact: Brooke Corcoran 913-541-8453Notes: Running Bond

WC WALLCOVERING

WC1Manufacturer: DesigntexPattern: CorrugateColor: OakWidth: 52"Contact: Kathy Anderson 913-707-3839

WC2Manufacturer: MDC Studio

Pattern: Custom Digital SolutionLocation: Suites CorridorContact: Pam Reynolds 913-638-7544

WD WOOD (or WOOD VENEER)

WD1 - 2 NOT USED IN BP2

WD3 Manufacturer: Dooge Veneers Inc.Species: WalnutFormat: QuarteredLocation: Suite Club, F.S. Counter,

Front and Back of BarContact: Bob Kutzli 616-698-6450

WD4 Manufacturer: Dooge Veneers Inc

Species: Qtd WalnutFormat Random Match W/ 3 FlitchesLocation: Suites Theatre Box PartitionsContact: Bob Kutzli 616-698-6450

WD5 Product: Hardwood Wall BaseSpecies: WalnutSize: 6" HLocation: Suites

WD6 Product: Hardwood Crown MoldingSpecies: WalnutSize: 6" HLocation: Suites

WIN WINDOW COVERING (DRAPERY)

WIN1Manufacturer: ArchitexProduct: EnamoredColor: GreyishWidth: 59"Location: Suite Club Theatre BoxesContact: Suzan Sutcu 314-398-0072

WIN1 ALTManufacturer: Kvadrat MaharamProduct: CasaColor: 132Width: 118"Location: Suite Club Contact: Leslie Juckla 913-387-9668

GENERAL NOTES

1 Stop all paint color and finish changes at inside corners unless otherwise noted on plans. 2 Refer to the door schedule for door and frame finishes.3 All exposed ductwork, mechanical units, conduit and plumbing at exposed ceiling shall be free of tape, writing, or markings of any

kind, unless required by code or specifications, or is necessary for operation.4 No product names of any finish material shall be visible.5 Do not paint over UL rated tags on hollow metal doors and frames.6 All exposed ductwork, electrical conduit, plumbing supply, waste or venting and all other piping shall be painted to match adjacent

wall or ceiling finish; architect to approve.7 All floor finishes transitioning at doorways shall be centered on the door.8 For clarification of finish locations, refer to enlarged finish plans and interior elevations.9 Paint all mechanical grilles, access panels, recessed speakers (if approved by manufacturer), and other mechanical panels to

match adjacent material unless factory finish and color is specified. Concealed sprinkler heads to be provided with factory-appliedfinish to match adjacent material, except at areas with no ceiling.

10 Where no base in indicated (--), match wall finish.11 Tile edges to be rectified, unless otherwise noted12 All grommets for cable passage through countertops to be field located with Architect, Food Service provider, and Owner prior

to cutting and installation.13 All cabinets to be lockable. 14 All painted surfaces as noted in the finish schedule at toilet rooms, concessions, pantries, commisaries, janitor closets are to be

epoxy paint.

CBA D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


®

TM

®

®



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400



1-224-717-1555

FO

R R

EF

ER

EN

CE

ON

LY -

NO

T F

OR

CO

NS

TR

UC

TIO

N

BID PACKAGE #2

4/18/20 16 1:05:17 PM

Ban

kers

Life

Fie

ldho

use

1 25

S. P

enns

ylv a

nia

St.,

Indi

anap

olis

, IN

462

40





04.08.2016

FINISH LEGEND

BP2 A9-0-01

16.4224.00

04.08.16

2016

BP2_01

GENERAL NOTES










BP2_01 04/18/2016 BP2_Addendum 01

CBA D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


PROJECT NORTH

®

TM

®

®



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400



1-224-717-1555

FO

R R

EF

ER

EN

CE

ON

LY -

NO

T F

OR

CO

NS

TR

UC

TIO

N

BID PACKAGE #2

4/18/20 16 1:05:21 PM

Ban

kers

Life

Fie

ldho

use

1 25

S. P

enns

ylv a

nia

St.,

Indi

anap

olis

, IN

462

40





04.08.2016

FINISH SCHEDULE

BP2 A9-0-02

16.4224.00

04.08.16

2016

Populous Room Finish Schedule (CD's) BP2

FLOOR FINISH BASE FINISH

WALLS

CEILING FINISH

MILLWORK

REMARKS REVISIONSNUMBER NAME NORTH EAST SOUTH WEST FACE COUNTER

4C31 SUITE CLUB T7, CA3, CA4 WD3 WD4 P4/WD3 T6, WC1,P4, M5, MI1

P4/WD3 P, CL4 WD3 SS4, SS5

4C31A FOOD SERVICE CA4 WD3 P4 P4 P4 P4 CL2 -- --

4C31B THEATRE BOX 1 CA4 WD3 GL2 P4/WD3 -- P4/WD3 P4 WD3 SS5

4C31C THEATRE BOX 2 CA4 WD3 GL2 P4/WD3 -- P4/WD3 P4 WD3 SS5

4C31D THEATRE BOX 3 CA4 WD3 GL2 P4/WD3 -- P4/WD3 P4 WD3 SS5

4C31E THEATRE BOX 4 CA4 WD3 GL2 P4/WD3 -- P4/WD3 P4 WD3 SS5

4C31F THEATRE BOX 5 CA4 WD3 GL2 P4/WD3 -- P4/WD3 P4 WD3 SS5

4C31G THEATRE BOX 6 CA4 WD3 GL2 P4/WD3 -- P4/WD3 P4 WD3 SS5

4C31H THEATRE BOX 7 CA4 WD3 GL2 P4/WD3 -- P4/WD3 P4 WD3 SS5

4C31I THEATRE BOX 8 CA4 WD3 GL2 P4/WD3 -- P4/WD3 P4 WD3 SS5

4C31J THEATRE BOX 9 CA4 WD3 GL2 P4/WD3 -- P4/WD3 P4 WD3 SS5

4C31K THEATRE BOX 10 CA4 WD3 GL2 P4/WD3 -- P4/WD3 P4 WD3 SS5

4C31L THEATRE BOX 11 CA4 WD3 GL2 P4/WD3 -- P4/WD3 P4 WD3 SS5

4C31M THEATRE BOX 12 CA4 WD3 GL2 P4/WD3 -- P4/WD3 P4 WD3 SS5

4C32 LOGE CA4 WD3 -- -- P6 -- -- -- SS6

4C34 S. SPONSORS PAVILION -- -- WD4/WC2

-- P4 CL3 -- --

4C36A FOOD SERVICE SC RB1 P3 P3 P3 P3 CL2

4C36B FOOD SERVICE SC RB1 P3 P3 P3 P3

Note: All mockups required per mock-up schedule are in addition to the requirements outlined in the specifications.

4C32 Loge BP2 A8-2-01 TV mount at loge drinkrail

Provide mock-up of one completeTV mount and disconnect assemblyfor review by Owner and Operator...

4C31B-4C31M Theatre Box BP2 A8-6-01/16 Theatre box front railProvide mock-up of full height by2'-0" wide section of glass with...

Room No. Room Name Reference Description Quantity Required

INTERIOR MOCK-UP LIST MOCK-UP SCHEDULE

GENERAL NOTES










STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS ARE PART OF A SINGLE DOCUMENT ISSUEINCLUDING MULTIPLE DISCIPLINES ALL OF WHICH ARE PART OFMULTIPLE PRIME BID PACKAGES. STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS ANDSPECIFICATIONS ARE FULLY COMPLIMENTARY AND SUPPLEMENTAL TOEACH OTHER AND SHALL BE TAKEN AS A WHOLE. WHERE CONFLICTSOCCUR, STRICTER REQUIREMENTS APPLY. STRUCTURAL WORKPERFORMED UNDER THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS SHALL BECOORDINATED WITH EACH INDIVIDUAL CONTRACTOR. SEE SUMMARY OFWORK IN DIVISION 1 OF THE PROJECT MANUAL FOR SCOPE OF BIDPACKAGES.

TYPICAL DETAIL SECTION CUTS ARE NOT NECESSARILY SHOWN ATEACH AND EVERY APPLICABLE LOCATION ON THE PLANS. TYPICALDETAIL TITLES IMPLY THE INTENT OF APPLICABILITY.

1.0 GENERAL PROJECT INFORMATION

1.

2.

THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH ALL LABOR AND MATERIALS FORSUCCESSFUL COMPLETION OF THIS PROJECT INCLUDING ANYADDITIONAL LABOR AND MATERIAL NOT SHOWN ON THE DOCUMENTSTHAT IS REQUIRED FOR TEMPORARY STABILITY PRIOR TO COMPLETIONOF THE STRUCTURE.

THE SPECIFICATIONS AND STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS REPRESENT THEFINISHED STRUCTURE AND DO NOT INDICATE THE METHOD OFCONSTRUCTION, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. THE CONTRACTOR ISSOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR THE MEANS, METHODS, TECHNIQUES,SEQUENCES, AND OPERATION OF CONSTRUCTION AND SAFETYPRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS INCIDENTAL THERETO.

THE CONTRACTOR IS SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR THE DESIGN,INSTALLATION, AND REMOVAL OF ALL TEMPORARY BRACING ANDCONSTRUCTION SUPPORTS, FOR NEW AND EXISTING STRUCTURES, ASNECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE PROJECT. NO PORTION OF THEPROJECT, WHILE UNDER CONSTRUCTION, IS INTENDED TO BE STABLE INTHE ABSENCE OF THE CONTRACTOR'S TEMPORARY BRACES ANDSUPPORTS. CONTRACTOR SHALL RETAIN A LICENSED PROFESSIONALENGINEER TO DESIGN ALL TEMPORARY BRACING AND CONSTRUCTIONSUPPORTS.

THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND ELEVATIONS,NEW AND EXISTING, BY MEASUREMENTS AND SURVEYS AT THE JOB SITE,PRIOR TO SUBMITTAL OF SHOP DRAWINGS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALLTAKE ANY AND ALL OTHER MEASUREMENTS NECESSARY TO VERIFYCONFORMANCE WITH THE DRAWINGS AND TO PERFORM THE WORKPROPERLY. NOTIFY THE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AND DESIGNER OFANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH WORK IN THE AREAOF QUESTION.

IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATETHE STRUCTURAL WORK WITH THE ARCHITECTURAL, MECHANICAL ANDELECTRICAL DRAWINGS, AS WELL AS ANY OTHER APPLICABLE TRADES.IN CASE OF CONFLICT BETWEEN STRUCTURAL WORK AND DRAWINGSRELATED TO OTHER TRADES, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKEALLOWANCES IN THEIR BID FOR THE MORE SEVERE REQUIREMENTS.CONFLICTS BETWEEN THE STRUCTURAL WORK AND THE DRAWINGS OFOTHER TRADES SHALL NOT BE REASON FOR EXTRA COST OR DELAY INTHE EXECUTION OF THE WORK.

ALL FIELDWORK SHALL BE COORDINATED AND CONTINUOUSLYSUPERVISED BY THE CONTRACTOR.

MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT SHALL BE STORED AND TRANSPORTED IN AMANNER SO AS NOT TO EXCEED THE ALLOWABLE FLOOR LOADINGSINDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS.

THE CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE NO DEVIATION FROM THE DESIGNDRAWINGS WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL FROM THE ARCHITECT ANDSTRUCTURAL ENGINEER.

THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER,ARCHITECT AND STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIESBETWEEN THE STRUCTURAL DOCUMENTS AND ANY OTHER DOCUMENTSOR EXISTING CONDITIONS FOR RESOLUTION PRIOR TO PROCEEDINGWITH THE WORK.

SEE ARCHITECTURAL, MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, FOOD SERVICE ANDVERTICAL TRANSPORTATION, DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONRELATING TO THE COORDINATION OF STRUCTURAL COMPONENTSINCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO:

ARCHITECTURAL:· PLAN DIMENSIONS AND PROJECT DATUM· FINISH ELEVATIONS· WATERPROOFING, DAMP PROOFING, AND INSULATION DETAILS· RAMP GEOMETRY, PITS, SLAB SLOPES AND DEPRESSIONS· EMBEDMENTS, INSERTS, BLOCK OUTS, ETC.· CONCRETE FINISHES· CONCRETE CURBS AND HOUSEKEEPING PADS· INTERIOR NON-STRUCTURAL MASONRY PARTITIONS· FIRE RATINGS· METAL PAN STAIRS AND SUPPORTS· OPERABLE PARTITIONS

MECHANICAL:· PIPE AND DUCT SIZES FOR OPENING AND SLEEVE

COORDINATION· FLOOR DRAINS, ROOF DRAINS· HOUSEKEEPING PADS FOR EQUIPMENT

ELECTRICAL:· CONDUITS PENETRATIONS IN WALLS AND SLABS

FOOD SERVICE:· EXTENT OF RECESSES FOR COOLERS/FREEZERS· EXTENT OF FLOOR TOPPING SLABS FOR COOLERS/FREEZERS

VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION:· INSERTS, HANGERS, TRENCHES, PITS, CONDUITS IN WALLS AND

SLABS· EQUIPMENT SUPPORT, EMBEDMENTS, AND ANCHOR BOLTS

PRINCIPAL OPENING SIZES AND LOCATIONS ARE INDICATED ON THESTRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. ADDITIONAL SMALLER OPENINGS, BLOCK OUTSAND SLEEVES MAY BE REQUIRED BY OTHER TRADES AND SHALL BECONSTRUCTED USING THE CRITERIA INDICATED IN THE STRUCTURALDOCUMENTS. IF NO DETAILS ARE APPLICABLE, SUBMIT PROPOSEDMETHOD TO THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER FOR APPROVAL.

THERE SHALL BE NO VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL SLEEVES SET, OR HOLESCUT OR DRILLED IN ANY BEAM OR COLUMN UNLESS IT IS SHOWN ON THESTRUCTURAL DRAWINGS OR APPROVED BY THE ARCHITECT ANDSTRUCTURAL ENGINEER.

1.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES AND COORDINATION

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL OPENINGS THROUGH CONCRETE SLABSAND WALL LARGER THAN 12 INCHES IN DIAMETER, NOT SHOWN ON THESTRUCTURAL DRAWINGS, MUST BE APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER.OPENINGS 12 INCHES IN DIAMETER OR LESS SHALL HAVE AT LEAST 1'-0”CLEAR BETWEEN OPENINGS UNLESS APPROVED BY THE STRUCTURALENGINEER.

VERIFY DIMENSIONS AND LOCATIONS WITH THE MECHANICAL ANDELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICALOPENINGS THROUGH CONCRETE SLABS SHOWN ON THE STRUCTURALDRAWINGS. PROVIDE ONE SINGLE PENETRATION SUBMITTALINCORPORATING ALL TRADES IN ONE SUBMITTAL FOR REVIEW.

WELDS OR CONNECTIONS FOR ANCHORING PIPE RAILING IN DESIGN TOEMBEDDED PLATES OR STEEL ARE TO BE DESIGNED BY THE PIPERAILING CONTRACTOR.

13.

14.

15.

EMPLOY OR RETAIN A LICENSED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER IN THESTATE OF WHICH THIS PROJECT IS LOCATED TO DESIGN AND DETAILTHE FOLLOWING STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS:

DIVISION 5· STRUCTURAL STEEL ERECTION· STRUCTURAL STEEL CONNECTIONS· LIGHT GAUGE METAL STUDS FOR INTERIOR WALLS· LIGHT GAUGE METAL STUD WALL ATTACHMENTS TO

STRUCTURAL FRAME· STAIRS AND HANDRAIL SYSTEMS

DIVISION 8· CURTAIN WALL BACK UP SYSTEMS· CURTAIN WALL AND STRUCTURAL GLAZING SYSTEMS· STRUCTURAL SKYLIGHT SYSTEMS

DRAWING SUBMITTALS FOR PERFORMANCE SPECIFIED COMPONENTSSHALL BE REVIEWED BY THE COMPONENT ENGINEER PRIOR TO THELIMITED CURSORY REVIEW BY THE PROJECT'S ENGINEER OF RECORDFOR LOADS IMPOSED ON THE PRIMARY STRUCTURE AND FORCONFORMANCE TO THE SPECIFIED DESIGN CRITERIA.

THE COMPONENT ENGINEER IS RESPONSIBLE FOR CODECONFORMANCE FOR ALL INDIVIDUAL PARTS AND INTERNALCONNECTIONS OF THE SPECIFIED COMPONENT EXCEPT STEELCONNECTIONS.

SHOP DRAWINGS SHALL INDICATE MAGNITUDE AND DIRECTION OF ALLLOADS IMPOSED ON PRIMARY AND SECONDARY STRUCTURALELEMENTS IN ENGLISH UNITS ALONG WITH STRUCTURAL DEFLECTIONSTHE COMPONENTS ARE ABLE TO ACCOMMODATE.

CALCULATIONS SUBMITTED SHALL CLEARLY CROSS REFERENCE THESHOP DRAWINGS WITH SPECIFIC DETAIL REFERENCES.

WHERE NOTED, TYPICAL DETAILS INDICATE GENERAL CRITERIA FORDESIGN AND DETAILING OF STRUCTURAL STEEL CONNECTIONS.TYPICAL DETAILS ARE NOT INTENDED TO CONVEY COMPLETECONNECTOR SIZES, PLATE SIZES, WELD SIZES, NUMBER OF BOLTS, ORANY OTHER SPECIFIC INFORMATION THAT IS OBTAINED THROUGHDESIGNING OF AN INDIVIDUAL CONNECTION FOR A GIVEN SET OFLOADS. SEE DIVISION 5 SPECIFICATIONS.

1.2 PERFORMANCE SPECIFIED COMPONENTS

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT FOR STRUCTURAL ENGINEER'S REVIEW ASCHEDULE WHICH DETAILS THE ESTIMATED QUANTITY OF SHOP DRAWINGSFOR EACH SUBMITTAL AND THE DATE SHOP DRAWINGS WILL BE RECEIVEDBY THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER SHALL HAVETHE OPPORTUNITY TO REVIEW THE PROPOSED SCHEDULE AND SUBMITCOMMENTS TO THE CONTRACTOR. THE FINAL SHOP DRAWING SCHEDULESHALL BE SUBMITTED TO AND APPROVED BY THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER.

THE CONTRACTOR IS TO REVIEW EACH SUBMITTAL PRIOR TO FORWARDINGTO ARCHITECT AND STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. THE CONTRACTOR IS TOSTAMP EACH SUBMITTAL VERIFYING THAT THE FOLLOWING IS ADDRESSED:

A. THE SHOP DRAWING IS REQUESTED.

B. THE SHOP DRAWING IS BASED ON THE LATEST DESIGN.

C. THE ARCHITECT'S AND STRUCTURAL ENGINEER'S COMMENTSFROM ANY PREVIOUS SUBMITTALS ARE ADDRESSED.

D. THE WORK IS COORDINATED AMONG ALL CONSTRUCTIONTRADES.

E. REVISIONS FROM PREVIOUS SUBMITTAL ARE CLEARLY IDENTIFIED.

F. SUBMITTAL IS COMPLETE.

THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER MAY RETURN, WITHOUT COMMENT,SUBMITTALS WHICH THE CONTRACTOR HAS NOT STAMPED OR WHICH DONOT MEET THE ABOVE REQUIREMENTS. THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER'SREVIEW OF SUBMITTALS SHALL BE FOR GENERAL CONFORMANCE WITH THEDESIGN INTENT. NO WORK SHALL BE STARTED WITHOUT SUCH REVIEW.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

1.

2.

3.

THE FOLLOWING ITEMS REQUIRE SUBMITTALS TO BE SUBMITTED BYCONTRACTOR WHOSE SCOPE INCLUDES LISTED ITEM FOR STRUCTURALREVIEW AS OUTLINED IN THE SPECIFICATIONS:

DIVISION SUBMIT DESCRIPTION03 11 00S FORMWORK LAYOUT AND PRODUCTS03 20 00S CONCRETE REINFORCING LAYOUT03 30 00S CONCRETE MIX DESIGNS03 30 00S COORDINATION DRAWINGS FOR SLEEVES03 30 00S CONCRETE CONSTR JOINT LAYOUT05 12 00S STRUCTURAL STEEL05 12 00S,C STRUCTURAL STEEL CONNECTIONS05 12 00S COORD DWGS FOR EMBEDS IN CONCRETE05 33 00S SHEAR STUD LAYOUT05 36 00S STEEL COMPOSITE DECK05 31 00S STEEL ROOF DECK05 40 00S,C LIGHT GAGE METAL STUDS05 50 01S MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURAL STEEL

S = SHOP DRAWINGS OR PRODUCT DATA REQUIRED.C = SUPPORTING CALCULATIONS REQUIRED, SIGNED AND

SEALED BY A LICENSED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER.

THE FOLLOWING ITEMS REQUIRE SHOP DRAWINGS TO BE SUBMITTED BYCONTRACTOR SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW OF ATTACHMENTS TO THESTRUCTURE:

SUBMIT DESCRIPTIONSD ARCHITECTURAL ORNAMENTATION (FLAGPOLES, BANNERS,

MASTS, ETC.)SD,SS ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE AND CONNECTIONSSD,SS COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMINGSD,SS CURTAINWALL SYSTEMSSD ELEVATOR REACTIONSSD ESCALATOR REACTIONSSD,SS METAL STAIRSSD,SS SKYLIGHTSSD,SS WINDOW WASHING DAVIT SYSTEMS

SD = SHOP DRAWINGS SHALL SHOW THE MAGNITUDES, DIRECTIONS, AND CONNECTION CONDITIONS OF ALL LOADS IMPOSED ON THE SUPPORTING STRUCTURE.

SS = THE SUBMITTAL SHALL LIST THE DESIGN LOADS USED AND BESIGNED AND SEALED BY A LICENSED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER IN THE STATE IN WHICH THE PROJECT IS LOCATED.

OMISSION OF ANY MATERIALS REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTSFROM SHOP DRAWINGS SHALL NOT RELIEVE THE CONTRACTOR OF THERESPONSIBILITY FOR FURNISHING THESE MATERIALS REGARDLESS OFWHETHER THE SUBMITTALS HAVE BEEN REVIEWED.

THE USE OF ELECTRONIC FILES OF REPRODUCTIONS OF THE CONTRACTDOCUMENTS BY THE CONTRACTOR SIGNIFIES CONTRACTOR'S ACCEPTANCEOF ALL THE INFORMATION SHOWN “AS IS”. CONTRACTOR WILL BERESPONSIBLE FOR VERIFYING THE ACCURACY AND COMPLETENESS OF THEINFORMATION PROVIDED. ISSUED DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS TAKEPRECEDENCE OVER ANY ELECTRONIC INFORMATION PROVIDED. ADDENDA,CHANGE ORDERS, SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS ARE NOT NECESSARILYINCLUDED IN THE ELECTRONIC FILES.

IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO OBTAIN ALL CONTRACTDOCUMENTS, INCLUDING LATEST ADDENDA, AND TO DISTRIBUTE TO ALLSUBCONTRACTORS PRIOR TO THE SUBMITTAL OF SHOP DRAWINGS.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

SEE DIVISION 1 OF THE SPECIFICATIONS AND EACH TECHNICALSPECIFICATION SECTION FOR OWNER'S TESTING AND INSPECTIONPROGRAM. CONTRACTOR IS TO COORDINATE AS REQUIRED WITH THEOWNER'S INDEPENDENT TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES.

SITE OBSERVATION BY THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER FOR GENERALCONFORMANCE DOES NOT INCLUDE OR REPLACE THE SPECIALINSPECTIONS SPECIFIED FOR STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS. SUCH VISITSAND OBSERVATIONS ARE NOT INTENDED TO BE AN EXHAUSTIVE CHECKOR DETAILED INSPECTION OF THE CONTRACTOR'S WORK, AND DO NOTRELIEVE THE CONTRACTOR OF THEIR RESPONSIBILITY.

1.4 CONSTRUCTION QUALITY ASSURANCE AND STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION

1.

2.

3.2 DRILLED-IN DOWELS/ADHESIVE ANCHORS

PROVIDE DRILLED-IN DOWELS WITH SIZE, LENGTH, EMBEDMENT AND SPACING ASINDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS.

ANCHOR DRILLED-IN DOWELS TO EXISTING CONCRETE WITH AN ADHESIVEANCHOR SYSTEM. SEE SECTION 033000, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE, OF THEPROJECT MANUAL, FOR PRODUCT STANDARDS.

DRILLED HOLE SIZE AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURE SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCEWITH THE PRODUCT MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS.

USE CARBIDE BIT DRILL TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO REINFORCING STEEL.

CLEAN DRILLED HOLES BEFORE INSTALLING DOWELS.

2.

1.

3.

4.

5.

5.0 STRUCTURAL STEEL

STRUCTURAL STEEL CONSTRUCTION SHALL CONFORM TO ANSI/AISC 360-05, THEAMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION "SPECIFICATION FOR STRUCTURALSTEEL BUILDINGS, (AISC 13TH EDITION).

SHOP CONNECTIONS, UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN, MAY BE EITHER BOLTED OR WELDED.FIELD CONNECTIONS SHALL BE BOLTED UNLESS OTHERWISE DETAILED ON THE DRAWINGS.

BOLTED CONNECTIONS SHALL BE BEARING-TYPE CONNECTIONS USING 3/4 INCH DIAMETERASTM A325 BOLTS WITH STANDARD 13/16 INCH DIAMETER HOLES, OR ONE INCH DIAMETERASTM A490 BOLTS WITH STANDARD 1 1/16 INCH DIAMETER HOLES UNLESS OTHERWISENOTED OR DETAILED ON THE DRAWINGS, OR APPROVED BY THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER.

SLIP CRITCAL BOLTS (S.C.) SHALL BE USED WHERE INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS.

PREPARATION OF FAYING SURFACES AND TENSIONING OF SLIP CRITICAL BOLTSSHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE "RCSC SPECIFICATION FOR STRUCTURALJOINTS USING ASTM A325 OR A490 BOLTS."

CONNECTIONS WHICH ARE NOT DETAILED ON THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS SHALL BEDESIGNED BY THE STEEL FABRICATOR IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE AISC "MANUAL OFSTEEL CONSTRUCTION".

2.

1.

3.

4.

5.

6.

BEAM END CONNECTIONS SHALL BE DESIGNED FOR THE VERTICAL SHEARREACTIONS INDICATED ON THE FRAMING PLANS. REACTIONS PROVIDED AREBASED ON ULTIMATE FACTORED LOADS.

WHERE SUCH REACTIONS HAVE NOT BEEN INDICATED, NON-COMPOSITE BEAMCONNECTIONS (BEAMS WITHOUT SHEAR STUDS) SHALL BE DESIGNED FOR ONE-HALF THE BEAM LOAD CAPACITY AS GIVEN IN THE AISC “ALLOWABLE LOADS ONBEAMS” TABLES.

BEAM WEB SHEAR CONNECTIONS SHALL TYPICALLY BE DOUBLE ANGLES, 5/16 INCHMINIMUM THICKNESS, UNLESS DETAILED OTHERWISE, OR WHERE OTHERWISEPERMITTED BY TYPICAL BEAM CONNECTION DETAILS.

PROVIDE SHORT SLOTTED HORIZONTAL HOLES IN SHEAR CONNECTION PLATES OF RIGIDFRAME MOMENT CONNECTIONS TO MINIMIZE WELD SHRINKAGE STRESSES.

SEQUENCE THE WELDING OF CONNECTION PLATES AND STIFFENER PLATES TO MINIMIZEWELD SHRINKAGE STRESSES.

BACKUP BARS REQUIRED FOR WELDED CONNECTIONS SHALL BE CONTINUOUS.

USE LOW HYDROGEN ELECTRODES WHEN WELDING A992 STEEL OR A572 GRADE 50.

FOR BEAMS FRAMING OVER THE TOP OF A COLUMN, PROVIDE 3/8 INCH STIFFENER PLATESEACH SIDE OF THE BEAM WEB UNLESS DETAILED OTHERWISE.

CONNECT BRACING MEMBERS FOR TWO COMPONENTS OF STRESS.

LOCATE CENTERLINES OF VERTICAL BRACING MEMBERS ON COLUMN CENTERLINES UNLESSOTHERWISE INDICATED.

CAMBER BEAMS, AS REQUIRED, TO PROVIDE THE CAMBERS INDICATED ON THE FRAMINGPLANS, COMPENSATING FOR ANY RELEASE OF STRESS INDUCED DURING THE CAMBERINGOPERATION.

SIMPLE SPAN BEAMS WITHOUT SPECIFIED CAMBERS SHALL BE FABRICATED SUCH THAT,AFTER ERECTION, ANY MINOR CAMBER DUE TO ROLLING OR SHOP ASSEMBLY SHALL BEUPWARD.

SUB-BASE (LEVELING) PLATES WILL NOT BE ALLOWED UNDER COLUMN BASE PLATES.

BURNING OF HOLES IN STRUCTURAL STEEL SHALL NOT BE ALLOWED WITHOUTAPPROVAL OF THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER.

SEE DIVISION 1 OF THE PROJECT MANUAL, FOR OWNER'S STRUCTURAL STEEL TESTINGAND INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS. COORDINATE AS REQUIRED WITH THE OWNER'STESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCY.

SEE SECTION 05 12 00, STRUCTURAL STEEL, OF THE PROJECT MANUAL AND SURFACEPREP AND PRIMER SCHEDULE ON STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR STRUCTURAL STEELSHOP PAINTING REQUIREMENTS.

PROJECT IS CONSIDERED AS A NON-SELF-SUPPORTING STRUCTURE UNTILCOMPLETION OF ERECTION OF ALL THE STRUCTURAL STEEL AND DECK WHICH ISREQUIRED FOR FRAMING STABILITY. THE LATERAL SYSTEM CONSISTS OF ALL BRACING,BEAM-TO-COLUMN MOMENT CONNECTIONS (EXCEPT AT SIMPLE BEAM CANTILEVERCONDITIONS), STEEL ROOF DECKING, ELEVATED CONCRETE SLABS, AND SLAB ONGRADE. ANY TEMPORARY ERECTION AND STABILITY ELEMENTS REQUIRED BY THESTEEL ERECTOR SHALL REMAIN IN PLACE UNTIL ALL COMPONENTS OF THE PERMANENTLATERAL SYSTEM ARE INSTALLED AND UNTIL CONCRETE WHICH IS PART OF THELATERAL SYSTEM HAS REACHED 75% OF DESIGN STRENGTH.

6.1

6.2

6.3

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

20.

5.3 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS, STAIRS, GRATINGS AND RAILS

SEE SECTIONS 055000, 055001, 055213 AND 055300 OF THE PROJECT MANUAL FORSUMMARY OF SCOPE.

1.

2.SEE ARCHITECTURAL AS WELL AS STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONALMISCELLANEOUS STEEL CONSIDERED A PART OF THE MISCELLANEOUS STEELPACKAGE.

EXISTING CONDITIONS:

1. VERIFY ALL EXISTING DIMENSIONS, ELEVATIONS AND CONDITIONS BEFOREPROCEEDING WITH NEW CONSTRUCTION. NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEEROF AN DISCREPANCIES BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH WORK IN THE AREAUNDER QUESTION.

3.3 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

THE MIXING, HANDLING, PLACING, AND CURING OF CONCRETE SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCEWITH THE ACI "BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE" (ACI 318).

PROVIDE 3/4" CHAMFERS ON EXPOSED CORNERS OF CONCRETE EXCEPT THOSEABUTTING MASONRY.

SEE SECTION 033000, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE, OF THE PROJECT MANUAL, FORCONCRETE MIX PROPORTIONING REQUIREMENTS.

SEE SECTION 031000, CONCRETE FORMWORK, OF THE PROJECT MANUAL, FORFORM REMOVAL AND RESHORING REQUIREMENTS.

SEE SECTION 033000, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OF THE PROJECT, FOR HOTWEATHER CONCRETING REUIREMENTS.

SEE SECTION 033000, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OF THE PROJECT MANUAL, FORCOLD WEATHER CONCRETING REQUIREMENTS.

FINISHING OF SLABS: AFTER SCREEDING, BULL FLOATING AND FLOATING OPERATIONSHAVE BEEN COMPLETED, APPLY FINAL FINISH AS INDICATED BELOW, AND AS DESCRIBEDIN SECTION 033000, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OF THE PROJECT MANUAL.

FINISHING OF FORMED SURFACES: FINISH FORMED SURFACES AS INDICATED BELOW,AND AS DESCRIBED IN SECTION 033000, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE OF THE PROJECT MANUAL.

CURING OF SLABS: CURE SLABS WITH CURING COMPOUND OR MOISTURE RETENTIONCOVERS AS DESCRIBED IN SECTION 033000, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE, OF THE PROJECTMANUAL. (MOIST CURE MUST BE USED ON ALL PARKING LEVEL SLABS)

A. FLOOR SLABS: TROWEL FINISH

A. SIDES OF FOOTINGS: NONE

2.

1.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10. SEE SECTIONS 033000 AND DIVISION 1 OF THE PROJECT MANUAL FOR OWNER'S TESTING ANDINSPECTION PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS. COORDINATE AS REQUIRED WITH THE OWNER'STESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCY.

6.0 DESIGN LOADS

SEATING TREAD LIVE LOAD.................60 PSF

SEISMIC LOADS IN ACCORDANCE WITH IBC 2012.

CB

A D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


®

TM

®

®

Suite 300Lenexa, Kansas 66214

913-742-5000

9449 Priority Way West DriveSuite 200

Indianapolis, Indiana 46240

8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400



1-224-717-1555

FO

R R

EF

ER

EN

CE

ON

LY

- N

OT

FO

R C

ON

ST

RU

CT

ION

4/14/2016 1:46 :47 PM

Ban

kers Life

Fieldho

use

125 S. P

enns

ylva

n ia St., In

dian

apolis, IN 462

40


04.08.2016

GENERAL NOTES

BP2 S0-01

16.4224.00

04.08.16

BID PACKAGE #2


R22

R19EE.9

R20

R21

EE.2

FF

2

BP2 S5-00

1

BP2 S5-00

A

A

4' - 3 1/8"4' - 5 3/4"

32' -

7 3

/4"

45' -

5 3

/4"

32' -

7 3

/4"

30' - 4 7/8" (VIF) 31' - 7 3/4" (VIF)

PROPOSED SLABOPENINGS, SEE MEP FORSIZE AND LOCATION

PROPOSED SLABOPENINGS, SEE MEP FORSIZE AND LOCATION

3' -

0"

12' -

4 1

/2"

3' -

0"

12' -

0"

6 7

/16"

2' -

5 9

/16"

12' -

0"

3' -

0"

12' -

0"

3' -

0"

12' -

0"

1' -

0 3

/16"

1' -

11 1

3/1

6"

11' -

11 7

/8"

3' -

0"

12' -

4 1

/8"

3' -

0"

PLAN NOTES:

1. FOR GENERAL NOTES SEE S0-01.

2. EXISTING CONDITIONS: VERIFY ALL EXISTING DIMENSIONS, ELEVATIONS ANDCONDITIONS BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH NEW CONSTRUCTION. NOTIFY THEARCHITECT/ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH WORKIN THE AREA UNDER QUESTION.

3. T.B. INDICATES TOP OF BEAM ELEVATION.

4. PRIOR TO DRILLING HOLES FOR ANCHORS, EXISTING CONCRETE COLUMNS ANDBEAMS SHALL BE SCANNED IN ORDER TO REVEAL THE LOCATION OF THEREINFORCING.

5. VERIFY LOCATION OF ALL STRUCTURAL MEMBERS WITH ARCHITECTURALDRAWINGS PRIOR TO FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION.

A INDICATES 1" PLYWOOD DECKING ON 18 GAGE METAL FLOOR DECKING6.

CB

A D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


PROJECT NORTH

®

TM

®

®


913-742-5000



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400



1-224-717-1555

FO

R R

EF

ER

EN

CE

ON

LY

- N

OT

FO

R C

ON

ST

RU

CT

ION

4/14/2016 1:46 :48 PM

Ban

kers Life

Fieldho

use

125 S. P

enns

ylva

n ia St., In

dian

apolis, IN 462

40


04.08.2016

ENLARGED SUITELEVEL PLAN

BP2 S2-3 CD

16.4224.00

04.08.16

BID PACKAGE #2

1/8" = 1'-0"

ENLARGED SUITE LEVEL PLAN1


1" PLYWOOD DECKING ON 2", 18GA METAL FLOOR DECKING

1" PLYWOOD DECKINGON 2", 18 GA METALFLOOR DECKING

362S162-43 METALSTUDS AT 16" O.C.



EXISTING PRECASTCONCRETE STRUCTURE

362S162-43 BRACINGAT 48" O.C., TYP

2' -

2 3

/4"

4' - 6 3/8"3' - 11 1/2"

2' -

2 3

/4"

6' -

1 1

/4"

STAINLESS STEELHANDRAIL, SEE ARCHDWGS FOR DETAILS

3

BP2 S5-00

1" PLYWOOD DECKING ON 2",18 GA METAL FLOOR DECKING

1" PLYWOOD DECKINGON 2", 18 GA METALFLOOR DECKING




EXISTING STEEL ANDCONCRETE STRUCTURE

362S162-43 BRACINGAT 48" O.C., TYP

EXISTING PRECASTCONCRETE STRUCTURE

2' -

2 3

/4"

4' - 6 3/8"3' - 11 1/2"

0"

2' -

2 3

/4"

6' -

1 1

/4"

4

BP2 S5-00

STAINLESS STEELHANDRAIL, SEE ARCHDWGS FOR DETAILS

6"

6"

6"

STAINLESS STEEL HANDRAIL,SEE ARCH DWGS FOR DETAILS

PLATE 1/2"x10"x1'-10"

3/4" Ø HILTI HIT RE 500WITH 3 1/2" EMBED

STAINLESS STEEL HANDRAIL,SEE ARCH DWGS FOR DETAILS

EXISTINGSTRUCTURE

CB

A D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


®

TM

®

®


913-742-5000



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400



1-224-717-1555

FO

R R

EF

ER

EN

CE

ON

LY

- N

OT

FO

R C

ON

ST

RU

CT

ION

4/14/2016 1:46 :48 PM

Ban

kers Life

Fieldho

use

125 S. P

enns

ylva

n ia St., In

dian

apolis, IN 462

40


04.08.2016

DETAILS

BP2 S5-00

16.4224.00

04.08.16

BID PACKAGE #2

3/4" = 1'-0"

SECTION2

3/4" = 1'-0"

SECTION1

1 1/2" = 1'-0"

DETAIL3

1 1/2" = 1'-0"

DETAIL4


Q

R20.4

NNN

OOO

PPP

R18.2

R17

R18

R16.5

R16.3

P.9

R16

R15.9

R16.2

R16.1

R15.7

R15

R14 R14.4

R15.1R13.9

R13.5

R7

R20.5

R20

R19.1

R19

R18.8

R16.8

EE.7

7

6"ø

8"x10"

30"x12"

34"x10"

VR917

1

1

2

1

FD

FD

SUITECLUB4C31

LOGE4C32

S.SPONSORSPAVILION

4C34

EXISTINGUNISEXTOILET4C29

EXISTINGOFFICE

4C23

FR513

18"x

12"

18"x

10"

FR523

130"x8"

30"x8"

24"x

12"

3

3

4

4

(TYP)

5

PSD1200 CFM

8"Ø

PSD1200 CFM

(TYP 4)8"Ø

PSD1210 CFM

(TYP 5)8"Ø

ASD1

LSD1

LSD1

12"x

12"

12"ø

12"ø

FR333

FR323

ASD1

PSD2125 CFM

(TYP 4)8"Ø

10"x

10"

12"x

12"

6

6

(TYP)

7

10"x

10"

FR533

26"x12"

22"x22"CRG1

(TYP 2)10"ØCSD1

400 CFM

(TYP 5)

12"x12"

FOODSERVICE

4C36A

14"ø

34"x10"

8

8

22"x22"CRG1

22"x22"CRG1

(TYP 2)

9

1

10

LSD110

11

11

(TYP)

12

13

13

13

14

CRG2

(TYP 8)15"Ø

48"x10"

151515

48"x10"

30"x10"

1515

15

24"x16"

24"x

12"

(TYP)

16

(TYP)

16

PSD2125 CFM

8"Ø

(E)TF5

A

B

D

C

(TYP)

3

BP2 M4 - 2

(TYP)

1

BP2 M4 - 2

(TYP)

4

BP2 M4 - 2

(TYP)

2

BP2 M4 - 2

(TYP)

6

BP2 M4 - 2

(TYP)

7

BP2 M4 - 2

(TYP)

8

BP2 M4 - 2

(TYP)

7

BP2 M4 - 1

(TYP)

5

BP2 M4 - 1

(TYP)

16

BP2 M4 - 1

(TYP)

13

BP2 M4 - 1

(TYP)

11

BP2 M4 - 2

(TYP)

14

BP2 M4 - 1

(TYP)

15

BP2 M4 - 1

BP2_01

32"x8"

16"x

8"10"ØCSD1

400 CFM

16"x8"

BP2_01

BP2_01

ASD1 ASD1 ASD111

BP2_01

ASD1

17

17

17

18

FAXTEL

CB

A D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


PROJECT NORTH

®

TM

®

®


913-742-5000



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400



1-224-717-1555

BID PACKAGE #2

THIS DOCUMENT IS RELEASEDFOR THE PURPOSE OFPRELIMINARY SUBMITTAL

IT IS NOT TO BE USED FORCONSTRUCTIONPURPOSES

913 742 5000 913 742 5001LENEXA, KS 66214

8345 LENEXA DRIVE, SUITE 300

www.hei-eng.com

FO

R R

EF

ER

EN

CE

ON

LY

- N

OT

FO

R C

ON

ST

RU

CT

I ON

4/15/20 16 2:21:43 PM

Ban

kers

Life

Fie

ldho

use

1 25

S. P

enns

ylv a

nia

St.,

Indi

anap

olis

, IN

462

40





04.18.2016

SUITE LEVEL - HVACPLAN - AREA C

BP2 M2 - 4C

16.4224.00

04.08.2016

2016

M. D

RE

W .

RIM

ME

R

LICENSE # PE11300511M. DREW . RIMMER

1550002436

1/8" = 1'-0"1 200 - SUITE LEVEL - HVAC PLAN - AREA C

MECHANICAL PLAN NOTES

1 DUCT DOWN.2 DUCT UP.3 TYPE I GREASE HOOD EXHAUST

DUCTWORK SHALL BE MINIMUM 16GAUGE BLACK STEEL WITH LIQUIDTIGHT WELDS (IMC 506.3). REFERTO GENERAL NEW NOTE 30 ONSHEET M0-0 FOR ADDITIONALINFORMATION.

4 TRANSITION DUCTWORK ASREQUIRED AT HOODCONNECTIONS. REFER TO FOODSERVICE DRAWINGS FORADDITIONAL INFORMATION,INCLUDING HOOD AIRFLOW ANDCONNECTION SIZES.

5 PROVIDE DUCT LINER IN ALLDUCTWORK LOCATED ABOVECLUB SPACE.

6 UNIT TO BE MOUNTED ABOVEACCESSIBLE CEILING WITHINBEAM POCKET. ENSURE ALLCLEARANCES ARE MAINTAINED.COORDINATE FOR EQUIPMENT TOBE LOCATED ABOVE THE COFFERCEILING TILE WITHOUT LIGHTFIXTURES. REFER TOARCHITECTURAL AND LIGHTINGCEILING PLANS FOR ADDITIONALINFORMATION.

7 FLOOR FIRE DAMPER TO BEACCESSED FROM FLOOR BELOW.

8 ENSURE EQUIPMENTCLEARANCES ARE MAINTAINED.

9 DUCTWORK ROUTED ABOVEPLENUM BOX.

10 PROVIDE SLOT BLANK OFF FORENTIRETY OF LINEAR SLOTDIFFUSER NOT CONNECTED TO ASUPPLY PLENUM.

11 PROVIDE RETURN AIR LIGHTSHIELD FOR ENTIRETY OFARCHITECTURAL SLOT DIFFUSER.REFERENCE 16/M-401 FORADDITIONAL INFORMATION.

12 DIFFUSERS INSTALLED IN LOGECLUB CEILINGS SHALL HAVECABLE OPERATED DAMPERS FORAIR BALANCING. PROVIDE CABLEOPERATED VOLUME DAMPER BYMETROPOLITAN AIRTECHNOLOGIES MODEL RT-250(ROUND DUCTS) OR RT-200(RECTANGULAR DUCT) WITHEXTERNAL WORM GEAR ORYOUNG REGULATOR EQUIVALENTBUTTERFLY DAMPER WITH 270-275CONTROLLER. DAMPER CABLEACTUATOR SHALL BE ACCESSIBLEFOR BALANCING FROM THEPLENUM OF A SLOT DIFFUSER,THE TOP OF A SQUARE OR ROUNDFACE DIFFUSER OR AT THE FACEOF A GRILLE AS APPLICABLE.INSTALL VOLUME DAMPER ATLOCATION INDICATED ON PLAN.SECURELY ATTACH ADJUSTABLEMOUNTING CLAMP TO CEILINGFRAMING MEMBERS.

13 SUPPLY SECTIONS OF THE SLOTDIFFUSER SHALL HAVE AIRFLOWDIRECTED AS SHOWN BY AIRFLOWARROWS.

14 EXISTING GREASE EXHAUSTDUCTWORK SYSTEM TO REMAIN.

15 TRANSFER AIR DUCT OPEN TOPLENUM.

16 DUCTWORK WITHIN FOODSERVICE SPACES SHALL BECOORDINATED TO ROUTE AROUNDLIGHT FIXTURE LOCATIONS.

17 CONTRACTOR SHALL ENSURERETURN AIR PATH WITHIN PLENUMIS MAINTAINED FROMARCHITECTURAL SLOT DIFFUSERSTO TERMINAL UNIT LOCATIONS.

18 PROVIDE RETURN AIR LIGHTSHIELD FOR ENTIRETY OF LINEARSLOT DIFFUSER NOT CONNECTEDTO A SUPPLY PLENUM.REFERENCE 16/M-401 FORADDITIONAL INFORMATION.

BP2_01

BP2_01


BP2_01 04/18/2016 BP2_Addendum 01

A

R27.5 R27

R27.1

R26.6

R26

R25.9

R25.3

R25.1

R24.8R24.9

R25

R24.7

R24.5

R24

R23

R22.2

R22

R20.6

OOO

R3

A.1

24.2

R22.8

R21.9

R21

R20.5

R20.7

10"x8"

VR1025

1

1

FD

FD

FD

FR313

FR303

FR483

10"x8"

FOODSERVICE

4C31A

LOGE4C32

FOODSERVICE

4C36B

18"x

10"

1

1

1

30"x8"

30"x8"

12"x12"

24"x

12"

16"x

12"

24"x12"

2

3

(TYP)

4

PSD1200 CFM

8"Ø

8"ØCSD1

200 CFM

PSD1210 CFM

(TYP 5)8"Ø

PSD1200 CFM

(TYP 4)8"Ø

22"x22"CRG1

(TYP 2)

LSD1

18"x

12"

12"x

12"

12"ø

ASD1

ASD1

10"x

10"

5

5

(TYP)

6

10"ØCSD1

400 CFM

(TYP 3)

8"ØCSD1

200 CFM

8"ØCSD1

200 CFM

22"x22"CRG1

(TYP 2)

10"ØCSD1

400 CFM

(TYP 4)

10"ØCSD1

350 CFM

(TYP 4)

22"x22"CRG1

(TYP 2)

20"x

12"

12"x

12"

FR543 (TYP)

7

LSD1

PSD375 CFM

6"Ø

22"x22"CRG1

8

12"ø

LSD19

9

10

10

10

(TYP)

11

12

12

CRG2

(TYP 5)15"Ø

48"x10"

131313

13

48"x10"

13

12"ø

14

24"x

12"

(TYP)

15

(TYP)

15

16"x

8"

12"ø 16

PSD2125 CFM

8"Ø

A

B

D

C(TYP)

11

BP2 M4 - 2

(TYP)

15

BP2 M4 - 1

(TYP)

13

BP2 M4 - 1

(TYP)

4

BP2 M4 - 2

(TYP)

2

BP2 M4 - 2

(TYP)

3

BP2 M4 - 2

(TYP)

1

BP2 M4 - 2

(TYP)

16

BP2 M4 - 1

(TYP)

5

BP2 M4 - 1

(TYP)

7

BP2 M4 - 1

(TYP)

14

BP2 M4 - 1

BP2_01

16"x

8"

18"x

12"

10"ØCSD1

400 CFM

16"x8"

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

ASD1

ASD1 ASD1

ASD1

17

17

17

18

FAXTEL

CB

A D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


PROJECT NORTH

®

TM

®

®


913-742-5000



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400



1-224-717-1555

BID PACKAGE #2



913 742 5000 913 742 5001LENEXA, KS 66214


www.hei-eng.com

FO

R R

EF

ER

EN

CE

ON

LY

- N

OT

FO

R C

ON

ST

RU

CT

I ON

4/15/20 16 2:21:50 PM

Ban

kers

Life

Fie

ldho

use

1 25

S. P

enns

ylv a

nia

St.,

Indi

anap

olis

, IN

462

40





04.18.2016

SUITE LEVEL - HVACPLAN - AREA D

BP2 M2 - 4D

16.4224.00

04.08.2016

2016

M. D

RE

W .

RIM

ME

R


1550002436

1/8" = 1'-0"1 200 - SUITE LEVEL - HVAC PLAN - AREA D

MECHANICAL PLAN NOTES

1 DUCT DOWN.2 TYPE I GREASE HOOD EXHAUST

DUCTWORK SHALL BE MINIMUM 16GAUGE BLACK STEEL WITH LIQUIDTIGHT WELDS (IMC 506.3). REFERTO GENERAL NEW NOTE 30 ONSHEET M0-0 FOR ADDITIONALINFORMATION.

3 TRANSITION DUCTWORK ASREQUIRED AT HOODCONNECTIONS. REFER TO FOODSERVICE DRAWINGS FORADDITIONAL INFORMATION,INCLUDING HOOD AIRFLOW ANDCONNECTION SIZES.

4 PROVIDE DUCT LINER IN ALLDUCTWORK LOCATED ABOVECLUB SPACE.

5 UNIT TO BE MOUNTED ABOVEACCESSIBLE CEILING WITHINBEAM POCKET. ENSURE ALLCLEARANCES ARE MAINTAINED.COORDINATE FOR EQUIPMENT TOBE LOCATED ABOVE THE COFFERCEILING TILE WITHOUT LIGHTFIXTURES. REFER TOARCHITECTURAL AND LIGHTINGCEILING PLANS FOR ADDITIONALINFORMATION.

6 FLOOR FIRE DAMPER TO BEACCESSED FROM FLOOR BELOW.

7 DO NOT ROUTE DUCTWORK OVERELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT.COORDINATE DUCT AND PIPEROUTING WITH ALL TRADES.

8 DUCTWORK ROUTED ABOVEPLENUM BOX.

9 PROVIDE SLOT BLANK OFF FORENTIRETY OF LINEAR SLOTDIFFUSER NOT CONNECTED TO ASUPPLY PLENUM.

10 PROVIDE RETURN AIR LIGHTSHIELD FOR ENTIRETY OFARCHITECTURAL SLOT DIFFUSER.REFERENCE 16/M-401 FORADDITIONAL INFORMATION.

11 DIFFUSERS INSTALLED IN LOGECLUB CEILINGS SHALL HAVECABLE OPERATED DAMPERS FORAIR BALANCING. PROVIDE CABLEOPERATED VOLUME DAMPER BYMETROPOLITAN AIRTECHNOLOGIES MODEL RT-250(ROUND DUCTS) OR RT-200(RECTANGULAR DUCT) WITHEXTERNAL WORM GEAR ORYOUNG REGULATOR EQUIVALENTBUTTERFLY DAMPER WITH 270-275CONTROLLER. DAMPER CABLEACTUATOR SHALL BE ACCESSIBLEFOR BALANCING FROM THEPLENUM OF A SLOT DIFFUSER,THE TOP OF A SQUARE OR ROUNDFACE DIFFUSER OR AT THE FACEOF A GRILLE AS APPLICABLE.INSTALL VOLUME DAMPER ATLOCATION INDICATED ON PLAN.SECURELY ATTACH ADJUSTABLEMOUNTING CLAMP TO CEILINGFRAMING MEMBERS.

12 SUPPLY SECTIONS OF THE SLOTDIFFUSER SHALL HAVE AIRFLOWDIRECTED AS SHOWN BY AIRFLOWARROWS.

13 TRANSFER AIR DUCT OPEN TOPLENUM.

14 ENSURE EQUIPMENTCLEARANCES ARE MAINTAINED.

15 DUCTWORK WITHIN FOODSERVICE SPACES SHALL BECOORDINATED TO ROUTE AROUNDLIGHT FIXTURE LOCATIONS.

16 TRANSITION DUCTWORK INVERTICAL.

17 CONTRACTOR SHALL ENSURERETURN AIR PATH WITHIN PLENUMIS MAINTAINED FROMARCHITECTURAL SLOT DIFFUSERSTO TERMINAL UNIT LOCATIONS.

18 PROVIDE RETURN AIR LIGHTSHIELD FOR ENTIRETY OF LINEARSLOT DIFFUSER NOT CONNECTEDTO A SUPPLY PLENUM.REFERENCE 16/M-401 FORADDITIONAL INFORMATION.

BP2_01

BP2_01


BP2_01 04/18/2016 BP2_Addendum 01

FAXTEL

CB

A D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


PROJECT NORTH

®

TM

®

®


913-742-5000



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400



1-224-717-1555

BID PACKAGE #2



913 742 5000 913 742 5001LENEXA, KS 66214


www.hei-eng.com

FO

R R

EF

ER

EN

CE

ON

LY

- N

OT

FO

R C

ON

ST

RU

CT

I ON

4/15/20 16 2:21:56 PM

Ban

kers

Life

Fie

ldho

use

1 25

S. P

enns

ylv a

nia

St.,

Indi

anap

olis

, IN

462

40





04.18.2016

MECHANICALSCHEDULES

BP2 M5 - 1

16.4224.00

04.08.2016

2016

M. D

RE

W .

RIM

ME

R


1550002436

BP2 NEW FAN-POWERED VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINAL SCHEDULE (ELECTRIC HEAT)MARK UNIT SERVED AREA SERVED MANUFACTURER MODEL UNIT SIZE INLET SIZE (IN)

PRIMARYCFM

MIN PRIMCFM

HEATING COIL FANNOTESKW VOLTS PH CFM HP VOLTS PH

FR30 3 (E)AHU 3 SUITE CLUB - WEST PRICE FDCLP 40 12" 1100 330 5.0 277 1 1250 0.50 277 1 A-KFR48 3 (E)AHU 3 SUITE CLUB - BAR/FOOD SERVICE PRICE FDCLP 30 10" 800 240 3.0 277 1 900 0.50 277 1 A-F,H-KFR31 3 (E)AHU 3 SUITE CLUB - CENTER PRICE FDCLP 40 12" 720 215 4.0 277 1 800 0.50 277 1 A-KFR32 3 (E)AHU 3 SUITE CLUB - CENTER PRICE FDCLP 40 12" 720 215 4.0 277 1 800 0.50 277 1 A-KFR33 3 (E)AHU 3 SUITE CLUB - EAST PRICE FDCLP 40 12" 1100 330 5.0 277 1 1250 0.50 277 1 A-K

BP2 NEW FAN-POWERED VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINAL SCHEDULE (HYDRONIC HEAT)

MARK UNIT SERVED AREA SERVED MANUFACTURER MODEL UNIT SIZEINLET SIZE

(IN)PRIMARY

CFMMIN PRIM

CFM

HEATING COIL FAN

NOTESEAT (ºF)HTG CAP

(MBH) GPM ROW WPD (FT) CFM HP VOLTS PHFR51 3 AHU 3 LEVEL 4 - LOGE CLUB KITCHEN PRICE FDC 50 14" 1800 540 62.5 38.9 2.8 1 2.0 1800 1.00 277 1 A-HFR52 3 AHU 3 LEVEL 4 - LOGE CLUB KITCHEN PRICE FDC 50 14" 1800 540 62.5 38.9 2.8 1 2.0 1800 1.00 277 1 A-HFR53 3 AHU 3 LEVEL 4 - AREA C PANTRY PRICE FDC 50 14" 2000 600 62.5 43.2 2.9 1 2.0 2000 1.00 277 1 A-HFR54 3 AHU 3 LEVEL 4 - AREA D PANTRY PRICE FDC 40 12" 1400 420 62.5 30.2 2.0 1 2.0 1400 0.50 277 1 A-H

NOTES:

A. SCHEDULE INFORMATION PROVIDED FOR REFERENCE ONLY.

MODEL NUMBERS SHALL NOT BE CONSIDERED COMPLETE AND MATERIAL SHALL NOT BE ORDERED BY MANUFACTURER AND MODEL NUMBERS ONLY. REVIEW THE COMPLETE DESCRIPTION, NOTES AND SPECIFICATIONS TO DETERMINE THE EXACT MATERIAL AND ACCESSORIES TO BE ORDERED. THE MANUFACTURERS LISTED ARE THE BASIS FOR THE DESIGN.

NOTES:A. HEATING COIL CAPACITY BASED ON 180°F E.W.T. AND 85°F DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE.B. INSTALL FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTOR AT INLET CONNECTION.C. DIVISION 26 TO PROVIDE REMOTE MOUNTED CONTROL TRANSFORMER AND DIVISION 23 TO PROVIDE 24VAC CONTROL WIRING TO UNIT CONTROLLER.

COORDINATE PRIMARY POWER WITH ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS.D. BOX NOT TO EXCEED SCHEDULED DISCHARGE OR RADIATED SOUND NC LEVEL USING 0.5" PRESSURE DROP.E. PROVIDE FACTORY-INSTALLED, PRESSURE INDEPENDENT, DDC CONTROL PACKAGE.F. REFERENCE DETAILS 10/M4-2 AND 10/M4-3 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.G. PROVIDE ECM MOTOR.H. PROVIDE INTEGRAL DISCONNECT SWITCH.

MODEL NUMBERS SHALL NOT BE CONSIDERED COMPLETE AND MATERIAL SHALL NOT BE ORDERED BY MANUFACTURER AND MODEL NUMBERS ONLY. REVIEW THE COMPLETE DESCRIPTION, NOTES AND SPECIFICATIONS TO DETERMINE THE EXACT MATERIAL AND ACCESSORIES TO BE ORDERED. THE MANUFACTURERS LISTED ARE THE BASIS FOR THE DESIGN.

NOTES:A. HEATING COIL CAPACITY BASED ON 80°F DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE.B. INSTALL FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTOR AT INLET CONNECTION.C. DIVISION 26 TO PROVIDE REMOTE MOUNTED CONTROL TRANSFORMER AND DIVISION 23 TO PROVIDE 24VAC CONTROL WIRING TO UNIT CONTROLLER.

COORDINATE PRIMARY POWER WITH ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS.D. BOX NOT TO EXCEED SCHEDULED DISCHARGE OR RADIATED SOUND NC LEVEL USING 0.5" PRESSURE DROP.E. PROVIDE FACTORY-INSTALLED, PRESSURE INDEPENDENT, DDC CONTROL PACKAGE.F. REFERENCE DETAIL 10/M4-2 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.G. PROVIDE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INLET ATTENUATOR SECTION.H. PROVIDE ECM MOTOR.J. PROVIDE INTEGRAL DISCONNECT SWITCH.K. PROVIDE HEATER WITH SCR CONTROL.

NOTES:

A. INTERLOCK FAN OPERATION WITH HOOD CONTROL PANEL AND HEAT SENSOR IN HOOD COLLAR. FAN SHALL BE ENABLED WHEN HOOD SWITCH IS IN ON POSITION OR HEAT SENSOR IS ACTIVATED.COORDINATE WITH DIVISION 26 CONTRACTOR.

B. REBALANCE EXISTING FAN TO NEW HOOD AIRFLOW OF 4,470 CFM.C. SCHEDULE INFORMATION PROVIDED FOR REFERENCE ONLY. BLANK VALUES INDICATE NO CHANGE TO UNIT PARAMETER.

MODEL NUMBERS SHALL NOT BE CONSIDERED COMPLETE AND MATERIAL SHALL NOT BE ORDERED BY MANUFACTURER AND MODEL NUMBERS ONLY. REVIEW THE COMPLETEDESCRIPTION, NOTES AND SPECIFICATIONS TO DETERMINE THE EXACT MATERIAL AND ACCESSORIES TO BE ORDERED. THE MANUFACTURERS LISTED ARE THE BASIS FOR THE DESIGN.

NOTES:

A. NECK SIZE SHOWN ON DRAWINGS.B. 4-WAY THROW PATTERN UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN ON DRAWINGS.C. BRANCH DUCT SIZE SHALL BE SAME AS NECK SIZE UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN ON DRAWINGS.D. BAKED ENAMEL FINISH, WHITE TO MATCH CEILING COLOR UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.E. FRONT BLADES PARALLEL TO LONG DIMENSION.F. DOUBLE DEFLECTION BARS SHALL BE ADJUSTABLE.G. PROVIDE NECK FOR DUCT CONNECTION.H. FRAME TYPE TO MATCH CEILING CONSTRUCTION, COORDINATE WITH ARCHITECTURAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN.J. PROVIDE OPPOSED BLADE DAMPER (ADJUSTABLE FROM FACE OF DEVICE).K. ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTIONL. STEEL CONSTRUCTIONM. CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL REMOTE DAMPER OPERATOR METROPOLITAN MODEL # RT-250. WORM GEAR DRIVE SHALL HAVE A SQUARE DRIVE FOR

1/4" NUT DRIVER. MODEL # RT-250 ASSEMBLY INCLUDES GALVANIZED STEEL DUCT WITH ROLLED BREAD STIFFENERS. REINFORCED BLADE. SELF LUBRICATINGBEARING AND WORM GEAR MOUNTING PLATE. DAMPER SHALL BE INSTALLED IN BRANCH DUCT NOT INLET OF PLENUM DIFFUSER (METROPOLITAN AIR TECHNOLOGY INC. 1-800-585-7686).

N. AT CONTRACTORS OPTION SUPPLY PLENUM MAY BE FIELD FABRICATED BASED ON PROVIDED DETAILS, OR PURCHASED FROM THE SLOT DIFFUSER MANUFACTURER.PROVIDE 1/4" FIBERGLASS INSULATION ON THE INTERIOR OF THE SUPPLY PLENUM.

O. SUPPLIER SHALL FURNISH CONTINUOUS SLOT DIFFUSER WITH PATTERN CONTROLLER, MOUNTING CLIPS AND BORDER TYPE 22.P. PROVIDE 25% OF DIFFUSERS WITH SPARE BLANK-OFF PANELS FOR THE OWNER'S USE AND FOR COMFORT BALANCING.R. PAINT ALL INTERIOR SURFACES SLOTS, GRILLES AND PLENUMS FLAT BACK.S. INSTALL DIFFUSERS, SLOT AND GRILLES WITH NO EXPOSED MOUNTING SCREWS.T. PLENUM SHALL BE CUSTOM CONSTRUCTION. REFER TO DETAIL 11/M4 - 2.U. ASD INDICATES AN ARCHITECTURAL SLOT PROVIDED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. ARCHITECTURAL

SLOT DOES NOT REQUIRE A LINEAR SLOT DIFFUSER. COORDINATE SLOT WIDTH WITH PLENUM WIDTH SUCH THAT PLENUM OPEN AREA MATCHES SLOT WIDTH.

BP2 EXISTING AIR HANDLING UNIT SCHEDULE (HOT WATER HEAT)MARK AREA SERVED MANUFACTURER

SUPPLY FANMIN. O/A CFM NOTESCFM MIN HP

(E)AHU 3 ARENA SW YORK 89010 200.00 38500 A

BP2 EXISTING FAN SCHEDULEMARK AREA SERVED

SERVICE (GEA, EA,RA, SA, TRANSFER)

EXISTINGCFM

NEWCFM

EXISTINGESP (IN)

NEWESP (IN)

DRIVE(BELT/DIRECT) HP FAN RPM

VFD(Y/N)

ELECTRICALNOTESVOLTS PH

(E)KE 12 LEVEL 4 LOGE CLUB KITCHEN GEA 3745 4470 3.3 4.0 BELT 5.00 2087 No 460 3 A-B(E)TF 5 LEVEL 4 COMM/ELEC ROOM TRANSFER 1000 1000 0.3 BELT 0.25 Yes 120 1 C

BP2 GRILLE, REGISTER AND DIFFUSER SCHEDULEMARK MANUFACTURER MODEL FACE TYPE MOUNTING LOCATION FACE SIZE (IN) MAX NC

MAX PRESS DROP(IN W.C.) NOTES

ASD1 TITUS ARCHITECTURAL SLOT SLOT CEILING 1-1/2" 30 0.10 UCRG1 TITUS PAR PERFORATED CEILING 24''x24'' 30 0.10 A,C,D,G,H,LCRG2 TITUS OMNI PLAQUE CEILING 24''x24'' 30 0.10 A,C,D,H,L,SCSD1 TITUS OMNI PLAQUE CEILING 24''x24'' 30 0.10 A-D,G,H,L,P,SLSD1 TITUS FLOWBAR-HT SLOT CEILING 1-1/2" 30 0.10 D,K,O,RPSD1 TITUS CUSTOM PLENUM SLOT DIFFUSER 4'-0" (NOMINAL) 30 0.10 A,C,G,L,M,N,R,TPSD2 TITUS FBPI-15 PLENUM SLOT DIFFUSER 4'-0" (NOMINAL) 30 0.10 A,C,G,L,M,N,RPSD3 TITUS FBPI-15 PLENUM SLOT DIFFUSER 2'-0" (NOMINAL) 30 0.10 A,C,G,L,M,N,R

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01


BP2_01 04/18/2016 BP2_Addendum 01

A

A

AA

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

TT

T

T

T

L

T

T

Q

R20.4

NNN

OOO

PPP

R18.2

R17

R18

R16.5

R16.3

P.9

R16

R15.9

R16.2

R16.1

R15.7

R15

R14 R14.4

R15.1R13.9

R13.5

R7

R20.5

R20

R19.1

R19

R18.8

R16.8

EE.7

7

LV

SAL

SALE

SAL

SALE

SAL

PP1-4SE1(ETR)

RP-4SE1(ETR)

RP-4SE2(ETR)

CP-4SE1(ETR)

PP2-4SE1(ETR)

EPP2-4SE1(ETR)

ERP-4SE1(ETR)

RP-4SE4(ETR)

SUITECLUB4C31

FOODSERVICE

4C36B


EXISTINGOFFICE

4C23

SD2

SD2

SD2

SD2

SD2

SD2

SD1E

SP1

SP1

SP1

SD4

SD4E

SD4SD4E

SD4ESD4E

SD4 SD4

SF2 SF2

SF2 SF2

SF2 SF2

SF5R(TYP)

SF5L

SF5R

SF5L

SF5R

(TYP)

(TYP)

(TYP)

SF5L

SF5R

SF5R

SF5L

SD4

SD4E

SD4

SD4E

SD4E

SD4SD4E

SD4

SD4E

SD4

SD4E

SD4

SD4

SD4

SD4ESD4SD4

SD4E

SD4

SD4

SD4E

SD4

SD4

SD4E

SW1

SW1

SD1

SD2SD3E

SD3 SD3 SD3 SD3E

SD1

SD1E

SD1

SD1

SD1

SD1

SD1

SD1

SD1

SD1E

SD1

SD1E

SD1SD2

SW2

SW2

SD2E

SD3

SD3

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-1

SF3-1

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4 SDRE

SDR

SDR

SDRE

SDR

SDR

SDRSDRE

SDR SDR

SDR SDR

SDRE

SDR

SDR

SAL

SALE

SAL

SAL

SALSALE

SAL

(TYP)1

(TYP)2

SAL

SAL

SAL SAL

SAL

3

4

SXC1

LXC1

ZONE 3(PART)

ZONE 16(PART)

S1

ZONE15(PART)

ZONE 14(PART)

SD5

SD5

SD5

SD5

SR1

SR1

SR1

SR1

SR1

SR1

SR1

SR1

BP2 E3 - 4C2

SF1

SF1

SF1

LV

LV

(TYP)

(TYP)

(TYP)

SF5L(TYP)

4

(TYP)

4

(TYP)

SD1

SR2

(TYP)5

(TYP)5

(TYP)6

(TYP)6

(TYP)7

(TYP)8

(TYP)9

(TYP)10

11

A

B

D

C

15

S2

MS1

RD1-4NED1-1, ZONE 7

(PART)16

17

18

21

21 ZONE 1

21ZONE 5

21ZONE 12

22 ZONE 4

ZONE 3(PART)

22

ZONE 16(PART)

ZONE 17

22 ZONE 18(PART)

22 ZONE 6

22 ZONE 5

22 ZONE 11

22

S.SPONSORSPAVILION

4C34

ZONE 12

ZONE 2(PART)

23

23 ZONE 1

22 21

RD1-4NED1

RD1-4NED1-4

RD1-4NED1-5

RD1-4NED1-6

RD1-4NED1-7

SD1

SD1 SD1

SF3-1

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-1

24

25 25

25

26

25

27 27

27

27

27

27

27

27

SF1

SF6

SF6

SF6

SF1

SF4

SF4

SF4

SF4

SF4

SF4

SF1

(TYP)12

(TYP)13

13

(TYP)14

S2

ZONE 10

ZONE 9

19

20

RD1-4NED1-2

RD1-4NED1-3

RP-4SW6-2(PART)

FAXTEL

CB

A D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


PROJECT NORTH

®

TM

®

®


913-742-5000



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400



1-224-717-1555

BID PACKAGE #2



913 742 5000 913 742 5001LENEXA, KS 66214


www.hei-eng.com

FO

R R

EF

ER

EN

CE

ON

LY

- N

OT

FO

R C

ON

ST

RU

CT

I ON

4/15/20 16 2:21:02 PM

Ban

kers

Life

Fie

ldho

use

1 25

S. P

enns

ylv a

nia

St.,

Indi

anap

olis

, IN

462

40





04.18.2016

SUITE LEVEL -LIGHTING PLAN -

AREA C

BP2 E3 - 4C

16.4224.00

04.08.2016

2016

DA

VID

D. H

AA

KE

LICENSE # PE 10200029DAVID D. HAAKE

1550002436

1/8" = 1'-0"1 200 - SUITE LEVEL - LIGHTING PLAN - AREA C

1 EXISTING CORRIDOR LIGHT FIXTUREREINSTALLED IN NEW CEILING. LIGHTFIXTURE SHALL BE CLEANED ANDRELAMPED PRIOR TO INSTALLATION INNEW CEILING. ANY PART OF FIXTUREDAMAGED DURING REMOVAL ANDINSTALLATION SHALL BE REPLACED TOORIGINAL CONDITION. LIGHT FIXTURESHALL BE RECONNECTED TO EXISTINGNORMAL POWER CORRIDOR LIGHTFIXTURE CIRCUITING AND CONTROLS.

2 EXISTING CORRIDOR LIGHT FIXTUREREINSTALLED IN NEW CEILING. LIGHTFIXTURE SHALL BE CLEANED ANDRELAMPED PRIOR TO INSTALLATION INNEW CEILING. ANY PART OF FIXTUREDAMAGED DURING REMOVAL ANDINSTALLATION SHALL BE REPLACED TOORIGINAL CONDITION. LIGHT FIXTURESHALL BE RECONNECTED TO EXISTINGEMERGENCY POWER CORRIDOR LIGHTFIXTURE CIRCUITING AND CONTROLS.

3 CONNECT TO EXISTING EMERGENCYPOWER LIGHTING AND CONTROLCIRCUIT SERVING LIGHT FIXTURESREMOVED DURING DEMOLITION IN THISAREA.

4 CONNECT TO EXISTING SUITE THEATERSEATING STAIR TREAD LIGHTING ANDCONTROL CIRCUIT SERVING STAIRTREAD LIGHT FIXTURES REMOVEDDURING DEMOLITION.

5 WALL MOUNTED DECORATIVE SCONCE;REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL ELEVATIONFOR MOUNTING HEIGHT INFORMATION

6 PENDANT MOUNTED DECORATIVECHANDELIER; REFER TOARCHITECTURAL ELEVATIONS FORMOUNTING HEIGHT INFORMATION.

7 RECESSED CONTINUOUS COFFERCEILING LIGHT FIXTURE. LOCATEREMOTE TRANSFORMER AND LEDDIMMING INTERFACE ABOVEACCESSIBLE CEILING, SECURELYFASTENED TO STRUCTURE.COORDINATE LOCATION WITHMECHANICAL EQUIPMENT UTILIZINGSAME/SIMILAR PANEL NEEDED TOACCESS FILTER TO ALSO ACCESSREMOTE LIGHT FIXTURE EQUIPMENT.REFER TO MANUFACTURER'S REMOTEDISTANCE LIMITATIONS.

8 LOCATE LIGHT FIXTURE ALONG NOSEOF STAIR; REFER TO ARCHITECTURALDETAILS FOR ADDITIONAL MOUNTINGINFORMATION. LOCATE REMOTEDRIVER MOUNTED TO BOWLSTRUCTURE OF LEVEL BELOW, INCLOSE PROXIMITY TO THE LEVEL OFTHE THEATER BOX STAIRS, ANDFEEDING POWER THROUGH CONCRETEWALL TO BACKSIDE OF PRECASTSTAIRS. COORDINATE LEFT AND RIGHTPOWER FEEDS AS REQUIRED.

9 LOCATE LIGHT FIXTURE ALONG NOSEOF STAIR; REFER TO ARCHITECTURALDETAILS FOR ADDITIONAL MOUNTINGINFORMATION. LOCATE REMOTEDRIVER MOUNTED TO VERTICAL BACKFACE OF LOGE MILLWORK, NEARUNDERSIDE OF COUNTERTOP OUT OFTYPICAL REACH BY PATRONS. PULLWIRE THROUGH MILLWORK MINIMIZINGEXPOSED WIRING. COORDINATE LEFTAND RIGHT POWER FEEDS ASREQUIRED.

10 CONTINUOUS UPLIGHT LIGHT FIXTUREWITHIN ARCHITECTURAL CEILINGCOVE. LIGHT FIXTURE SHALL BEMOUNTED END-TO-END AND CENTEREDWITHIN COVE LENGTH; LIGHT FIXTURESHALL TERMINATE WITHIN 3" OF THEEND OF EACH COVE.

11 CONTINUOUS ACCENT LIGHT FIXTUREALONG TOP AND DOWN THE (2)VERTICAL SIDES OF THE METALSCREEN. LIGHT FIXTURE MOUNTED TOBACKSIDE OF WOOD FRAME ANDORIENTED TOWARD SCREEN TO GRAZEBACKSIDE OF MESH. PROVIDEVALANCE TO SIDE OF LIGHT FIXTUREEXPOSED TO MIRRORED SURFACE SOTHAT FIXTURE IS NOT REFLECTED INSAID SURFACE, PAINT VALANCE BLACK.REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DETAILSFOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.LOCATE REMOTE TRANSFORMER ANDDIMMING INTERFACE WITHIN ADJACENTLOWER CASEWORK, ACCESSIBLE ANDWELL VENTILATED, BUT NOT WITHINTYPICAL REACH OF STAFF.

12 CONTINUOUS TASK LIGHT FIXTUREMOUNTED TO UNDERSIDE OFCOUNTERTOP; PROVIDINGHORIZONTAL TASK LIGHTING FOR THEWORKING EQUIPMENT AREA. REFERTO ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS FORADDITIONAL INFORMATION. LOCATEREMOTE TRANSFORMER AND DIMMINGINTERFACE WITHIN ADJACENT LOWERCASEWORK, ACCESSIBLE AND WELLVENTILATED, BUT NOT WITHIN TYPICALREACH OF STAFF.

13 CONTINUOUS ACCENT LIGHT FIXTUREMOUNTED TO UNDERSIDE OFCOUNTERTOP/CASEWORK, GRAZINGFOCAL ARCHITECTURAL BAR MATERIALFINISH. REFER TO ARCHITECTURALDETAILS FOR ADDITIONALINFORMATION. LOCATE REMOTETRANSFORMER AND DIMMINGINTERFACE WITHIN ADJACENT LOWERCASEWORK, ACCESSIBLE AND WELLVENTILATED, BUT NOT WITHIN TYPICALREACH OF STAFF.

14 ACCENT LIGHT FIXTURES RECESSEDINTO TOP OF CASEWORK SHELVES,ORIENTED UPWARD TO GRAZE METALSCREEN AND ILLUMINATE BOTTLESTORAGE; (3) LOCATIONS PERDOOR-UNIT. RUN LOW-VOLTAGEWIRING THROUGH BUILT-OUT SHELFAND FEED DOWN THE BACKSIDE OFMIRRORED SURFACE TOTRANSFORMERS LOCATED BELOW.REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DETAILSFOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.LOCATE REMOTE TRANSFORMER ANDDIMMING INTERFACE WITHIN ADJACENTLOWER CASEWORK, ACCESSIBLE ANDWELL VENTILATED, BUT NOT WITHINTYPICAL REACH OF STAFF.

15 CONNECT TO EXISTING NORMALPOWER LIGHTING AND CONTROLCIRCUIT SERVING LIGHT FIXTURESREMOVED DURING DEMOLITION IN THISAREA.

16 CONNECT TO EXISTING NORMALPOWER LIGHTING PANEL RD1-5SE1SPARE CIRCUIT 21 IN EXISTING ELEC.RM. 5C22 ON UPPER CONCOURSELEVEL.


18 PROVIDE NEW KEYED SWITCH FORLOCAL ON/OFF CONTROL OF CLUBLIGHTING. REFER TO SHEET E5-1 FORADDITIONAL INFORMATION.

19 BAR TASK LIGHTING SWITCH FOR TYPESF6 FIXTURE LOCATION. REFER TOSHEET E5-1 FOR ADDITIONALINFORMATION.

20 CRESTRON CONTROL INTERFACE(PROVIDED BY OTHERS). COORDINATEPROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS WITHCRESTRON SYSTEMINSTALLER/PROGRAMMER PRIOR TOCOMMISSIONING LIGHTING CONTROLSSYSTEM. REFER TO AV DRAWINGS FORADDITIONAL INFORMATION ONINTERFACE AND SYSTEM CONNECTIONREQUIREMENTS.

21 CONNECT TO EXISTING EMERGENCYPOWER LIGHTING PANEL ERD2-5SE1SPARE CIRCUIT 22 IN EXISTING ELEC.RM. 5C22 ON UPPER CONCOURSELEVEL.



24 UNDER ALTERNATE BP2 ALT005CONNECT TO EXISTING EMERGENCYPOWER LIGHTING PANEL ERD1-5SE1SPARE CIRCUIT 3 IN EXISTING ELEC.RM. 5C22 ON UPPER CONCOURSELEVEL.

25 UNDER ALTERNATE BP2 ALT005CONNECT TO EXISTING EMERGENCYPOWER LIGHTING PANEL ERD1-5SE1SPARE CIRCUIT 4 IN EXISTING ELEC.RM. 5C22 ON UPPER CONCOURSELEVEL.

2627 UNDER ALTERNATE BP2 ALT005

CONNECT TO EXISTING NORMALPOWER LIGHTING PANEL RP-4SW6 INEXIST. ELEC. RM. VIA DIMMING PANELRD1-4NED1. SEE PANEL SCHEDULESFOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.

ELECTRICAL PLAN NOTES

1/4" = 1'-0"2 LIGHTING PLAN - TASK LIGHTING AT BAR

ALTERNATE BID ITEMS FOR SUITE CLUB:

BP2 ALT002: Remove SF2 continuous lens light fixture from coffer ceiling perimeter

BP2 ALT003: Remove SR1 linear wallwash recessed light fixtures from Existing S.Sponsor Pavilion corridor.

BP2 ALT004: Revise SD1, SD2, SD3, SD4 recessed downlights specification frompremium dimming range of 100%-<1% to the standard range of 100%-10% using 0-10V dimming.

BP2 ALT005: Revise SD1, SD2, SD3, SD4 recessed downlights specification fromLED modules to a similar light fixtures that uses Halogen Lamps.

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01BP2_01


BP2_01 04/18/2016 BP2_Addendum 01

A

AA

T

T

T

T

T

T

L

T

T

T

T

TT

T

A

R27.5 R27

R27.1

R26.6

R26

R25.9

R25.3

R25.1

R24.8R24.9

R25

R24.7

R24.5

R24

R23

R22.2

R22

R20.6

OOO

R3

A.1

24.2

R22.8

R21.9

R21

R20.5

R20.7

OS

LV

SAL1

SAL1

SAL

SALE

SAL

SAL

SAL

SALE

SALE

SAL

SALSAL

SAL

EPP2-4SW1(ETR)

ERP-4SW1(ETR)

PP2-4SW1(ETR)

T-4SW1(ETR)

PP1-4SW1(ETR)

RP-4SW2(ETR)

RP-4SW1(ETR)

CP-4SW1(ETR)

RP-4SW5

FOODSERVICE

4C31A

FOODSERVICE

4C36B

S.SPONSORSPAVILION

4C34

SD2

SD2

SD2

SD2

SD2

SD2

SD2E

SP1

SD4ESD4E

SD4 SD4

SF2 SF2

SF2 SF2

SF2 SF2

SF5R

SF5L

SF5R

SF5L

(TYP)

(TYP)

(TYP)

SD4ESD4SD4

SD4E

SD4

SD4

SD4

SD4E

SD4E

SD4

SD4

SD4E

SD4

SD4

SD4

SD4E

SD1

SD1

SD1E

SD1 SD1

SD1

SD1

SD1 SD1E

SD1

SD1

SD2 SD3SD3

SD3E

SD3SD3E SD2

SD4E

SD4

SD4

SD4E

SD4E

SD4

SD4

SD4E

SD4

SD4E

SD4

SD4E

SW1

SW1

SW2SW2

SD2E

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-1

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-4

SDR

SDRE SDR

SDRSDR

SDRE

SDR

SDR

SDRE

SDR

SDR

SDRE

(TYP)1

(TYP)2

SAL

SAL SAL

SAL

SAL

SXC1

ZONE 3(PART)

ZONE 16(PART)

ZONE 15(PART)ZONE 14(PART)

SR1

SR1

SR1

SR1

SR1

SR1

SR1

SR1

SR1

SR1

SD5

SD5

SD5

BP2 E3 - 4C2

3

3

3

SF5R

SF5L

(TYP)

(TYP)

SF5R

SF5L

(TYP)

(TYP)

SF5R

SF5L

(TYP)

(TYP)

(TYP)

SD1

SR2

(TYP)4

(TYP)4

(TYP)5

(TYP)6

(TYP)7

(TYP)8

(TYP)9

SD2

SD2

SD1E

A

B

D

C

LV

S2

MS1

(PART)10

11

12

13

14

14ZONE 8

ZONE 18(PART)

15

15 ZONE 12

15ZONE 16(PART)

1515

ZONE 8ZONE 3(PART)

ZONE 16(PART)

16 ZONE 2(PART)

16ZONE 2(PART)

ZONE 13

1415

RP-4SW6(ETR)

RD1-4NED1-4

RD1-4NED1-5RD1-4NED1-6

SD1

SF3-4

SF3-4

SF3-1

SF3-1

17

18 18

18

19

19 19 19

19

FAXTEL

CB

A D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


PROJECT NORTH

®

TM

®

®


913-742-5000



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400



1-224-717-1555

BID PACKAGE #2



913 742 5000 913 742 5001LENEXA, KS 66214


www.hei-eng.com

FO

R R

EF

ER

EN

CE

ON

LY

- N

OT

FO

R C

ON

ST

RU

CT

I ON

4/15/20 16 2:21:10 PM

Ban

kers

Life

Fie

ldho

use

1 25

S. P

enns

ylv a

nia

St.,

Indi

anap

olis

, IN

462

40





04.18.2016

SUITE LEVEL -LIGHTING PLAN -

AREA D

BP2 E3 - 4D

16.4224.00

04.08.2016

2016

DA

VID

D. H

AA

KE


1550002436

1/8" = 1'-0"1 200 - SUITE LEVEL - LIGHTING PLAN - AREA D

1 EXISTING CORRIDOR LIGHTFIXTURE REINSTALLED IN NEWCEILING. LIGHT FIXTURE SHALL BECLEANED AND RELAMPED PRIORTO INSTALLATION IN NEW CEILING.ANY PART OF FIXTURE DAMAGEDDURING REMOVAL ANDINSTALLATION SHALL BEREPLACED TO ORIGINALCONDITION. LIGHT FIXTURE SHALLBE RECONNECTED TO EXISTINGEMERGENCY POWER CORRIDORLIGHT FIXTURE CIRCUITING ANDCONTROLS.

2 EXISTING CORRIDOR LIGHTFIXTURE REINSTALLED IN NEWCEILING. LIGHT FIXTURE SHALL BECLEANED AND RELAMPED PRIORTO INSTALLATION IN NEW CEILING.ANY PART OF FIXTURE DAMAGEDDURING REMOVAL ANDINSTALLATION SHALL BEREPLACED TO ORIGINALCONDITION. LIGHT FIXTURE SHALLBE RECONNECTED TO EXISTINGNORMAL POWER CORRIDOR LIGHTFIXTURE CIRCUITING ANDCONTROLS.

3 CONNECT TO EXISTING SUITETHEATER SEATING STAIR TREADLIGHTING AND CONTROL CIRCUITSERVING STAIR TREAD LIGHTFIXTURES REMOVED DURINGDEMOLITION.

4 WALL MOUNTED DECORATIVESCONCE; REFER TOARCHITECTURAL ELEVATION FORMOUNTING HEIGHT INFORMATION

5 PENDANT MOUNTED DECORATIVECHANDELIER; REFER TOARCHITECTURAL ELEVATIONS FORMOUNTING HEIGHT INFORMATION.

6 RECESSED CONTINUOUS COFFERCEILING LIGHT FIXTURE. LOCATEREMOTE TRANSFORMER AND LEDDIMMING INTERFACE ABOVEACCESSIBLE CEILING, SECURELYFASTENED TO STRUCTURE.COORDINATE LOCATION WITHMECHANICAL EQUIPMENTUTILIZING SAME/SIMILAR PANELNEEDED TO ACCESS FILTER TOALSO ACCESS REMOTE LIGHTFIXTURE EQUIPMENT. REFER TOMANUFACTURER'S REMOTEDISTANCE LIMITATIONS.

7 LOCATE LIGHT FIXTURE ALONGNOSE OF STAIR; REFER TOARCHITECTURAL DETAILS FORADDITIONAL MOUNTINGINFORMATION. LOCATE REMOTEDRIVER MOUNTED TO BOWLSTRUCTURE OF LEVEL BELOW, INCLOSE PROXIMITY TO THE LEVELOF THE THEATER BOX STAIRS,AND FEEDING POWER THROUGHCONCRETE WALL TO BACKSIDE OFPRECAST STAIRS. COORDINATELEFT AND RIGHT POWER FEEDSAS REQUIRED.

8 LOCATE LIGHT FIXTURE ALONGNOSE OF STAIR; REFER TOARCHITECTURAL DETAILS FORADDITIONAL MOUNTINGINFORMATION. LOCATE REMOTEDRIVER MOUNTED TO VERTICALBACK FACE OF LOGE MILLWORK,NEAR UNDERSIDE OFCOUNTERTOP OUT OF TYPICALREACH BY PATRONS. PULL WIRETHROUGH MILLWORK MINIMIZINGEXPOSED WIRING. COORDINATELEFT AND RIGHT POWER FEEDSAS REQUIRED.

9 CONTINUOUS UPLIGHT LIGHTFIXTURE WITHIN ARCHITECTURALCEILING COVE. LIGHT FIXTURESHALL BE MOUNTED END-TO-ENDAND CENTERED WITHIN COVELENGTH; LIGHT FIXTURE SHALLTERMINATE WITHIN 3" OF THE ENDOF EACH COVE.

10 CONNECT TO EXISTING NORMALPOWER LIGHTING PANEL RD1-5SE1SPARE CIRCUIT 21 IN EXISTINGELEC. RM. 5C22 ON UPPERCONCOURSE LEVEL.

11 BAR TASK LIGHTING SWITCH FORTYPE SF6 FIXTURE LOCATION.REFER TO SHEET E5-1 FORADDITIONAL INFORMATION.

12 CRESTRON CONTROL INTERFACE(PROVIDED BY OTHERS).COORDINATE PROGRAMMINGREQUIREMENTS WITH CRESTRONSYSTEMINSTALLER/PROGRAMMER PRIORTO COMMISSIONING LIGHTINGCONTROLS SYSTEM. REFER TOAV DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONALINFORMATION ON INTERFACE ANDSYSTEM CONNECTIONREQUIREMENTS.

13 CLUB MASTER SWITCH LOCATION.REFER TO SHEET E5-1 FORADDITIONAL INFORMATION.

14 CONNECT TO EXISTINGEMERGENCY POWER LIGHTINGPANEL ERD2-5SE1 SPARE CIRCUIT22 IN EXISTING ELEC. RM. 5C22 ONUPPER CONCOURSE LEVEL.



1718 UNDER ALTERNATE BP2 ALT005

CONNECT TO EXISTINGEMERGENCY POWER LIGHTINGPANEL ERD1-5SE1 SPARE CIRCUIT4 IN EXISTING ELEC. RM. 5C22 ONUPPER CONCOURSE LEVEL.

19 UNDER ALTERNATE BP2 ALT005CONNECT TO EXISTING NORMALPOWER LIGHTING PANEL RP-4SW6IN EXIST. ELEC. RM. VIA DIMMINGPANEL RD1-4NED1. SEE PANELSCHEDULES FOR ADDITIONALINFORMATION.


ALTERNATE BID ITEMS FOR SUITE CLUB:

BP2 ALT002: Remove SF2 continuous lens light fixture from coffer ceiling perimeter

BP2 ALT003: Remove SR1 linear wallwash recessed light fixtures from Existing S.Sponsor Pavilion corridor.

BP2 ALT004: Revise SD1, SD2, SD3, SD4 recessed downlights specification frompremium dimming range of 100%-<1% to the standard range of 100%-10% using 0-10V dimming.

BP2 ALT005: Revise SD1, SD2, SD3, SD4 recessed downlights specification fromLED modules to a similar light fixtures that uses Halogen Lamps.

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01


BP2_01 04/18/2016 BP2_Addendum 01

(5)

(5)

(5)

(5)

(5)

(5)

(5)

G

4414W

DC

(5)

TO PERMIT SERVICE &




MAINTENANCE.

18" RECOMMENDED,

SUFFICIENT ACCESS

J

J

J

J

J

J

J

J

J

J

J

J

J

J

J

R20.6

R20.4

NNN

OOO

R7

R21

R20.5

R20

RP-4SW5

RP-4SW4A(ETR)

RP-4SW4C(ETR)

RP-4SW4B(ETR)

FOODSERVICE

4C31A

SUITECLUB4C31

FOODSERVICE

4C36B

S.SPONSORSPAVILION

4C34


11.014

3.013

18.084

4.099

4.099

12.181

16.045

1.115

1.115

3.009

2.038

3.009

6.003

2.038

17.011

3.009

6.003

2.038

3.009

7.038

4.099

4.030E

16.045

4.031

15.026

12.081E 12.084E

4.175E

12.695

4.095

4.085

4.021

17.013

17.065

15.026

RP-4SW4C-8,10,12

RP-4SW4A-36

17.013a

ETR

ETR

ETR

ETR

ETR

ETR

ETR

ETR

ETR

FOODSERVICE

4C36A

1

1

RP-4SW4A-40

RP-4SW4A-27

RP-4SW4B-3

RP-4SW4B-13

RP-4SW4B-7

RP-4SW4B-9

RP-4SW4B-11

RP-4SW4A-14,16

RP-4SW4A-34

8.002

11.032

4.099

4.103

12.141

2.002

RP-4SW4A-26,28,30

RP-4SW4A-38,40,42

RP-4SW4A-34,36

RP-4SW4B-23,25,27

RP-4SW4A-20

RP-4SW4A-22

12.081E

RP-4SW5-5

RP-4SW5-3

RP-4SW5-1

RP-4SW5-7

RP-4SW5-11

RP-4SW5-15

RP-4SW5-17

RP-4SW5-21RP-4SW5-23

RP-4SW5-26

RP-4SW5-30

RP-4SW5-28

RP-4SW5-22

RP-4SW5-8

RP-4SW5-12

RP-4SW5-10

RP-4SW5-4

RP-4SW5-6

RP-4SW5-2

RP-4SW5-20

RP-4SW5-18

RP-4SW5-24

RP-4SW5-25

RP-4SW5-13

RP-4SW5-9

(TYP)2

RP-4SW4A-7

RP-4SW4A-13

RP-4SW4A-9,11

3

3

44

44

RP-4SW5-27,29

14-50P

RP-4SW4D

RP-4SW4D-1,3,5

RP-4SW4D-9,11,13

RP-4SW4D-2,4,6

RP-4SW4D-8,10,12

RP-4SW5-14

30/2/NF

22.102B

22.102A

REFER TO FOOD SERVICE DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL ROUGH-INREQUIREMENTS NOT INDICATED ON DRAWING. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR

SHALL COORDINATE ALL FOOD SERVICE ROUGH-IN WITH EQUIPMENTINSTALLER PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN.

2

E5-1

16.045RP-4SW4B-1

4.031

20.102R

20.102L

BP2_01

RP-4SW4A-14,16

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

FAXTEL

CB

A D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


PROJECT NORTH

®

TM

®

®


913-742-5000



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400



1-224-717-1555

BID PACKAGE #1



913 742 5000 913 742 5001LENEXA, KS 66214


www.hei-eng.com

FO

R R

EF

ER

EN

CE

ON

LY

- N

OT

FO

R C

ON

ST

RU

CT

I ON

4/15/20 16 2:21:19 PM

Ban

kers

Life

Fie

ldho

use

1 25

S. P

enns

ylv a

nia

St.,

Indi

anap

olis

, IN

462

40





04.18.2016

ENLARGED POWERPLANS

BP2 E4 - 2

16.4224.00

04.08.2016

2016

DA

VID

D. H

AA

KE


1550002436

1/4" = 1'-0"1 400 - SUITE LEVEL - ENLARGED POWER PLAN

1 PROVIDE NEW RECEPTACLE ASINDICATED IN EXISTING OUTLETBOX AND RECONNECT TOEXISTING CIRCUITING.

2 FIRE RATED POKE-THROUGH FORCONNECTION OF RECEPTACLE INMILL WORK. COORDINATE FINALLOCATION OF POKE-THROUGHWITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TOROUGH-IN TO AVOID CONFLICTWITH BEAM BELOW FLOOR SLAB.ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TOPROVIDE AND INSTALLCOMBINATION USBCHARGER/RECEPTACLE INMILLWORK. COORDINATE FINALLOCATION WITH ARCHITECT PRIORTO ROUGH-IN. ALL WIRING SHALLBE CONCEALED IN MILLWORK.

3 MOUNT RECEPTACLEHORIZONTALLY IN BASE OFMILLWORK. COORDINATE FINALLOCATION WITH ARCHITECT PRIORTO ROUGH-IN.

4 SPACE ABOVE ACCESSIBLECEILING IS VERY LIMITED.COORDINATE INSTALLATION OFNEW ELECTRICAL CONDUITSABOVE FINISHED CEILINGS TOAVOID CONFLICT WITH NEW ANDEXISTING PIPING, DUCT WORK,CABLE TRAY, ETC.



BP2_01 04/18/2016 BP2_Addendum 01

EX

R

N

R

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

N

ST

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

BUS AMPS: 225A

MAIN SIZE/TYPE: 225A MCB

VOLTS/PHASE: 208Y/120V, 3PH, 4W

CKT

NO.

EX - DENOTES EXISTING CIRCUIT AND WIRING TO REMAIN.

R - EXISTING CIRCUIT BREAKER SERVING EQUIP. REMOVED DURING DEMOLITION TO BE REUSED TO SERVE LOAD INDICATED.

N - PROVIDE NEW CIRCUIT BREAKER IN PANELBOARD. NEW CIRCUIT BREAKER AIC RATING SHALL MEET

OR EXCEED AIC RATING OF EXISITNG CIRCUIT BREAKERS IN PANELBOARD.

DESCRIPTION

ICE CUBER

PWR.-WALK-IN LTS/HEATER

PWR.-WALK-IN COND UNIT

PWR.-WALK-IN EVAP.

REFRIGERATOR

SPARE MENU SCREEN

PASS THRU WARMER

PASS THRU WARMER

REFRIG. PIZZA TABLE

REFRIG. PIZZA TABLE

PWR.- BASE REFRIG 12.695

------

POPCORN

POPCORN

REFRIGERATOR

OVERHEAD DOOR

SUBTOTAL

TOTAL PHASE A - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PHASE B - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PHASE C - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PNLBD - VA

AMPS

6,624

55

8,539

71

3,911

33

19,074

53

VOLTAMPS/PHASE

A

1,200

240

1,440

LOAD

COOLING

HEATING

LIGHTING

RECEPTACLES

MOTORS

SUPP HEAT

MISC EQUIP

B

707

972

1,679

C

707

707

CONN. VA

2,160

8,742

WIRE

NO.

EX

12

12

12

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

12

--

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

FAULT CURRENT:

AIC RATING:

SERVES:

MOUNTING: RECESSED

LOCATION:

BKR

AMP

30

20

15

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

--

20

20

20

20

20

20

DF

1.00

0

1.25

1.0/.5

1.00

1.00

1.00

P

3

1

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

P

3

3

2

1

1

1

1

3

1

1

1

1

1

1

LOAD

REFRIGERATION

SIGN/DISPLAY

KITCHEN

EXISTING

LARGE MOTOR

SHOW WINDOW

LTG TRACK

FOOD SERVICE 4C36B

BKR

AMP

30

45

20

20

20

15

20

20

20

--

20

--

WIRE

NO.

EX

8

12

12

12

12

EX

12

12

--

12

--

VOLTAMPS/PHASE

A

3,600

864

720

5,184

B

3,600

864

720

500

1,176

6,860

CONN. VA

972

7,200

C

1,884

720

600

3,204

DF

1.00

1.25

0.65

1.00

1.25

1.25

1.00

DESCRIPTION

COFFEE BREWER

HOT CHOCOLATE DISPEN.

POPCORN WARMER

HOT BUTTER DISPENSER

PWR.- OVEN 4.031

SPACE

RCPT.-CARBONATOR 2.003

RCPT.-CARBONATOR 2.003

RCPT.-BEER SYSTEM 2.003

PWR.-DISPOSAL 17.065

KITCHEN HOOD

PWR.- FRYER 4.1705E

------

PWR.- GAS RANGE 4.085

------

SUBTOTAL

TOTALDEMAND

16,554 VA

46 A

CKT

NO.

LTG TRACK - TRACK LENGTH

SIGN/DISPLAY - SIGNAGE & DISPLAY CASE

EX

EX

EX

EX

N

R

R

R

N

E

N

N

ST

N

ST

PANELBOARD: RP-4SW4A (EXISTING)

SECTION: 1

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

31

33

35

37

39

41

PANELBOARD NOTES

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40

42

R

R

EX

R

R

R

R

ER

ER

ER

ER

N

EX

EX

EX

EX

BUS AMPS: 250A

MAIN SIZE/TYPE: MLO


CKT

NO.

ER - DENOTES EXISTING CIRCUIT TO BE REMOVED DURING DEMOLITION, CIRCUIT BREAKER TO BECOME SPARE




DESCRIPTION

RCPT.-WARMING CAB. 16.045

RCPT.-WARMING CAB. 16.045

REFRIGERATED CASE

RCPT.- REFRIG. 12.081E

RCPT.- REFRIG. 12.081E

RCPT.- FREEZER 12.084E

RCPT.-GENERAL 15.026

POS

REFRIGERATED CASE

POS

SODA/ICE DISPENSER

ICE CUBER

REACH-IN REFRIG/FREEZER

WAREWASHER

FREEZER EVAPORATOR

FREEZER CONDENSER

BLANK

BLANK

BLANK

BLANK

BLANK

SUBTOTAL

TOTAL PHASE A - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PHASE B - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PHASE C - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PNLBD - VA

AMPS

13,909

116

15,666

131

10,495

87

40,070

111


VOLTAMPS/PHASE

A

1,500

696

360

1,140

480

756

4,932

LOAD

COOLING

HEATING

LIGHTING

RECEPTACLES

MOTORS

SUPP HEAT

MISC EQUIP

B

1,500

696

1,140

756

4,092

C

1,320

1,140

756

3,216

CONN. VA

500

2,820

19,572

WIRE

NO.

12

12

EX

12

12

12

12

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

FAULT CURRENT:

AIC RATING:

SERVES:

MOUNTING: RECESSED

LOCATION:

BKR

AMP

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

30

20

20

20

DF

1.00

0

1.25

1.0/.5

1.00

1.00

1.00

P

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

3

3

1

1

3

1

1

1

1

1

P

1

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

1

1

3

1

3

1

1

1

1

1

LOAD

REFRIGERATION

SIGN/DISPLAY

KITCHEN

EXISTING

LARGE MOTOR

SHOW WINDOW

LTG TRACK

GFOOD SERVICE 4C36B

BKR

AMP

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

WIRE

NO.

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

VOLTAMPS/PHASE

A

500

1,404

1,260

905

2,508

2,400

8,977

B

1,466

2,000

1,200

2,000

2,508

2,400

11,574

CONN. VA

6,168

11,010

C

1,466

905

2,508

2,400

7,279

DF

1.00

1.25

0.65

1.00

1.25

1.25

1.00

DESCRIPTION

FREEZER LIGHTS

3 DOOR REFRIGERATOR

REACH-IN FREEZER

HEATED CABINET

FREEZER LIGHTS

REFRIGERATOR

POS

CONV. RECEPT. (SINK)

CONV. RECEPTACLES

HEATED CABINET

FOOD WARMER

HEAT LAMPS

COFFFEE URN

MICROWAVE

BLANK

BLANK

BLANK

BLANK

BLANK

SUBTOTAL

TOTALDEMAND

36,342 VA

101 A

CKT

NO.



EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

PANELBOARD: RP-4SW4B (EXISTING)

SECTION: 1

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

31

33

35

37

39

41

43

45

47

49

51

53

PANELBOARD NOTES

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40

42

44

46

48

50

52

54

ER

ER

ER

ER

ER

ER

BUS AMPS: 225A

MAIN SIZE/TYPE: 200A MCB


CKT

NO.




ST - DENOTES SHUNT TRIP WITH CONTROL FROM HOOD FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM

DESCRIPTION

GRIDDLE

FRYER

FRYER FILTER

FRYER WARMER

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SUBTOTAL

TOTAL PHASE A - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PHASE B - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PHASE C - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PNLBD - VA

AMPS

5,833

49

5,833

49

5,833

49

17,499

49


VOLTAMPS/PHASE

A

LOAD

COOLING

HEATING

LIGHTING

RECEPTACLES

MOTORS

SUPP HEAT

MISC EQUIP

B C

CONN. VA

WIRE

NO.

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

FAULT CURRENT:

AIC RATING:

SERVES:

MOUNTING: RECESSED

LOCATION:

BKR

AMP

20

20

20

20

20

20

DF

1.00

0

1.25

1.0/.5

1.00

1.00

1.00

P

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

P

1

1

1

3

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

LOAD

REFRIGERATION

SIGN/DISPLAY

KITCHEN

EXISTING

LARGE MOTOR

SHOW WINDOW

LTG TRACK

FOOD SERVICE 4C36B

BKR

AMP

20

20

20

60

WIRE

NO.

EX

EX

EX

EX

VOLTAMPS/PHASE

A

5,833

5,833

B

5,833

5,833

CONN. VA

17,499

C

5,833

5,833

DF

1.00

1.25

1.00

1.00

1.25

1.25

1.00

DESCRIPTION

CONVECTION OVEN

CONVECTION OVEN

STEAMER

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SUBTOTAL

TOTALDEMAND

17,499 VA

49 A

CKT

NO.



ER

ER

ER

EX

PANELBOARD: RP-4SW4C

SECTION: 1

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

31

33

35

37

39

41

PANELBOARD NOTES

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40

42

A

B

C

D

E

F

LUTRON QS

SEETOUCH

DIGITAL KEYPAD

(NON-INSERT)

MANUFACTURERS CONSIDERED EQUIVALENT FOR SUBMISSION ARE LISTED IN 'EQUIVALENT MANUFACTURER' COLUMN IN SCHEDULE. DURING SUBMITTALS, PROVIDE

PRODUCT CUTSHEETS AND SHOP DRAWINGS (AS FURTHER DEFINED IN GENERAL NOTES OF THIS SCHEDULE) FOR ENGINEER'S REVIEW.

SHOP DRAWINGS FOR LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES THAT ARE INTENDED FOR USE AS A LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM SHALL INCLUDE PROJECT SPECIFIC LIGHTING

CONTROL SCHEMATICS AND SCHEDULES. ALSO, AT ENGINEER'S REQUEST, PROVIDE A SCALED EQUIPMENT PLAN FOR REVIEW OF EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS

WITHIN PROJECT SPACE CONSTRAINTS.

VERIFY COLOR(S) FOR ALL WALL AND CEILING MOUNTED LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES WITH THE ARCHITECT.

PROVIDE COPIES OF OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR ALL DEVICES TO OWNER.

LIGHTING CONTROLS PRICING SHALL BE COMPLETELY SEPARATE OF ANY LIGHT FIXTURE PRICING. ANY LIGHTING CONTROLS PRICING THAT IS

SUBMITTED WITH LIGHT FIXTURE PRICING (UNIT OR MINI-LOT) WILL BE IMMEDIATELY REJECTED IN ITS ENTIRETY.

CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ENSURING COMPATIBILITY OF ALL LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES IN THIS SCHEDULE THAT ARE INTENDED TO OPERATE TOGETHER.

WATTSTOPPER

HUBBELL

LEVITON

DIGITAL MULTI-BUTTON KEYPAD FOR MANUAL ON/OFF AND SCENE CONTROL OF LIGHTING.

INTEGRAL LED AT EACH BUTTON IS ILLUMINATED WHEN LOAD IS ON. REFER TO BUTTON SCHEDULE FOR

QUANTITIES AND PROGRAMMING FOR INDIVIDUAL SWITCH BUTTONS.

24V

VERSION: 2.3

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICE SCHEDULE

WALL SWITCHES

SYMBOL

TYPE

GENERAL NOTES:

MANUFACTURER

MODEL/SERIES

EQUIVALENT

MANUFACTURER DEVICE DESCRIPTION VOLTAGE NOTES

(GLOBAL CONTROL OF ALL RELAY PANELS)

Channel

SUITE CLUB

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

S6

S7

S8

S9

S10

S11

S12

S13

S14

S15

S16

S17

NOTE 1: INCORPORATE BUILDING SWEEP INTO ZONE CONTROL, IF REQUIRED BY FACILITIES OPERATION STAFF.NOTE 2: INCORPORATE BOWL BLACK OUT CONTROL INTO ZONE CONTROL, IF REQUIRED BY FACILITIES OPERATION STAFF.

Group

Description

RECESSED

DOWNLIGHT 1

CONTINUOUS LINEAR

ACCENTS 1

RECESSED

WALLWASH

RECESSED ADJUSTABLEDOWNLIGHT 1


LINEAR ACCENTFIXTURE


CONTINUOUS LINEARACCENTS 2

CONTINUOUS LINEARACCENTS 3


PENDANT DECORATIVE

WALL SCONCE 1

WALL SCONCE 2

RECESSEDDOWNLIGHT 2

LINEAR COVE

STEPLIGHTS 1(SEE NOTE 2)

STEPLIGHTS 2(SEE NOTE 2)

Automation

Scenario

Schedule ON/OFF

Manual ON/Schedule OFF

Astronomic ON/OFF

Astro ON/Schedule OFF

Schedule ON/OFF


Astronomic ON/OFF

Astro ON/Schedule OFF

Schedule ON/OFF


Astronomic ON/OFF

Astro ON/Schedule OFFSchedule ON/OFFManual ON/Schedule OFFAstronomic ON/OFFAstro ON/Schedule OFFSchedule ON/OFFManual ON/Schedule OFFAstronomic ON/OFFAstro ON/Schedule OFFSchedule ON/OFFManual ON/Schedule OFFAstronomic ON/OFFAstro ON/Schedule OFFSchedule ON/OFFManual ON/Schedule OFFAstronomic ON/OFFAstro ON/Schedule OFFSchedule ON/OFFManual ON/Schedule OFFAstronomic ON/OFFAstro ON/Schedule OFFSchedule ON/OFFManual ON/Schedule OFFAstronomic ON/OFFAstro ON/Schedule OFFSchedule ON/OFFManual ON/Schedule OFFAstronomic ON/OFFAstro ON/Schedule OFFSchedule ON/OFFManual ON/Schedule OFFAstronomic ON/OFFAstro ON/Schedule OFFSchedule ON/OFFManual ON/Schedule OFFAstronomic ON/OFFAstro ON/Schedule OFFSchedule ON/OFFManual ON/Schedule OFFAstronomic ON/OFFAstro ON/Schedule OFFSchedule ON/OFFManual ON/Schedule OFFAstronomic ON/OFFAstro ON/Schedule OFFSchedule ON/OFFManual ON/Schedule OFFAstronomic ON/OFFAstro ON/Schedule OFFSchedule ON/OFFManual ON/Schedule OFFAstronomic ON/OFFAstro ON/Schedule OFFSchedule ON/OFFManual ON/Schedule OFFAstronomic ON/OFFAstro ON/Schedule OFF

VERSION 1.0

Data

Occupied Mon-Fri (time schedule per owner)

Saturday (time schedule per owner)

Sunday (time schedule per owner)

Flick Warn 5 minutes - 2 hour Override




Flick Warn 5 minutes - 2 hour Override




Flick Warn 5 minutes - 2 hour OverrideOccupied Mon-Fri (time schedule per owner)Saturday (time schedule per owner)Sunday (time schedule per owner)Flick Warn 5 minutes - 2 hour OverrideOccupied Mon-Fri (time schedule per owner)Saturday (time schedule per owner)Sunday (time schedule per owner)Flick Warn 5 minutes - 2 hour OverrideOccupied Mon-Fri (time schedule per owner)Saturday (time schedule per owner)Sunday (time schedule per owner)Flick Warn 5 minutes - 2 hour OverrideOccupied Mon-Fri (time schedule per owner)Saturday (time schedule per owner)Sunday (time schedule per owner)Flick Warn 5 minutes - 2 hour OverrideOccupied Mon-Fri (time schedule per owner)Saturday (time schedule per owner)Sunday (time schedule per owner)Flick Warn 5 minutes - 2 hour OverrideOccupied Mon-Fri (time schedule per owner)Saturday (time schedule per owner)Sunday (time schedule per owner)Flick Warn 5 minutes - 2 hour OverrideOccupied Mon-Fri (time schedule per owner)Saturday (time schedule per owner)Sunday (time schedule per owner)Flick Warn 5 minutes - 2 hour OverrideOccupied Mon-Fri (time schedule per owner)Saturday (time schedule per owner)Sunday (time schedule per owner)Flick Warn 5 minutes - 2 hour OverrideOccupied Mon-Fri (time schedule per owner)Saturday (time schedule per owner)Sunday (time schedule per owner)Flick Warn 5 minutes - 2 hour OverrideOccupied Mon-Fri (time schedule per owner)Saturday (time schedule per owner)Sunday (time schedule per owner)Flick Warn 5 minutes - 2 hour OverrideOccupied Mon-Fri (time schedule per owner)Saturday (time schedule per owner)Sunday (time schedule per owner)Flick Warn 5 minutes - 2 hour OverrideOccupied Mon-Fri (time schedule per owner)Saturday (time schedule per owner)Sunday (time schedule per owner)Flick Warn 5 minutes - 2 hour OverrideCoordinate schedule with existingaisle lighting.

Coordinate schedule with existingaisle lighting.

CASS: CLOCK AUTOMATION SCENARIOS SCHEDULE

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

12

12

ALL SUITE ZONES ONALL SUITE ZONES OFF

XXXXXXXXXXXXXX

ONOFF

VERSION 1.0

ONOFF

VERSION 1.0

2-Button Master Control Switch 'S1' ScheduleButton

2-Button Master Control Switch 'S2' ScheduleButton

Relays Controlled

Relays Controlled

Label

Label

BUS AMPS: 100A

MAIN SIZE/TYPE: MLO


CKT

NO.

DESCRIPTION

CLUB BAR LIN. WALL ACCENT

CLUB BAR LINEAR ACCENT

CLUB BAR LINEAR ACCENT

CLUB BAR DEC PENDANT

CLUB WALL SCONCE A

CLUB WALL SCONCE B

CLUB SEATING LINEAR COVE

DINING DOWNLIGHTS

DINING LINEAR ACCENT

AISLE WALLWASH

EAST SERV COUNT DNLGT

EAST ENTRY DOWNLIGHT

EAST ENTRY ADJUST. DNLGT

WEST ENTRY ADJUST. DNLGT

SERVER WALLWASH

BAR ADJUST. DOWNLIGHT

AISLE ADJUST. DOWNLIGHT

LINEAR DOWNLIGHT

DINING DOWNLIGHTS

AISLE WALLWASH

EAST SERV COUNT DNLGT

EAST ENTRY DOWNLIGHT

EAST ENTRY ADJUST. DNLGT

WEST ENTRY ADJUST. DNLGT

SERVER WALLWASH

BAR ADJUST. DOWNLIGHT

AISLE ADJUST. DOWNLIGHT

SUBTOTAL

TOTAL PHASE A - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PHASE B - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PHASE C - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PNLBD - VA

AMPS

3,467

29

1,154

10

1,974

16

6,595

18

VOLTAMPS/PHASE

A

96

1,440

1,076

300

37

518

3,467

LOAD

LIGHTING

RECEPTACLES

SIGN/DISPLAY

SHOW WINDOW

LTG TRACK

B

100

240

222

296

296

1,154

C

136

480

1,184

74

100

1,974

CONN. VA

6,595

WIRE

NO.

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

FAULT CURRENT:

AIC RATING:

SERVES:

MOUNTING: SURFACE

LOCATION: , ROOM #:100

BKR

AMP

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

DF

1.25

1.0/.5

1.25

1.25

1.00

P

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

DIMMER

MODULE

0-10V

0-10V

0-10V

ELV

ELV

INC

REV PHASE

MLV

MLV

MLV

MLV

MLV

MLV

MLV

MLV

MLV

REFER TO ONE-LINE DIAGRAM

REF 1-LINE

ZONE 7 - CIRCUIT 2 EXISTING PANEL RP-4SW6




ZONE 14 - CIRCUIT 8 EXISTING PAENL RP-4SW6



ZONE 1, 0-10V 277 VOLT






ZONE 8, 0-10V 277 VOLTZONE 1ZONE 11, 0-10V 277 VOLT

ZONE 12, 0-10V 277 VOLT

ZONE 16, 0-10V 277 VOLT

ZONE 18, 0-10V 277 VOLT

ZONE 1 - CIRC. 26 EXIST. PANEL RP-4SW6 ALT. BP2 ALT005ZONE 1ZONE 3 - CIRC. 30 EXIST. PANEL RP-4SW6 ALT. BP2 ALT005

ZONE 4 - CIRC. 28 EXIST. PANEL RP-4SW6 ALT. BP2 ALT005







COMMENTS

TOTAL DEMAND

8,244 VA

23 A

EQUIPMENT GROUND BUS

LTG TRACK - TRACK LENGTHSIGN/DISPLAY - SIGNAGE & DISPLAY CASE

DIMMING PANELBOARD: RD1-4NED1 (NEW)

SECTION: 1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

PANELBOARD NOTES

S#

3

4

1

2

1

2

5

3SUSPENDED DROP CORD (@LAY-IN CEILING)NO SCALE

EXISTINGLIGHTINGCONTROLPANELS

EXISTINGLUTRON

QUANTUMPROCESSOR

EXISTING277V

SWITCHINGPANEL

AUTO

OFF

LUTRONSEETOUCH5-BUTTON

'MS1' 'S1'

BARTASK LTG

SWITCHBANK ELEVATION GENERAL

NOTES:

1. ARRANGE SWITCHES AS INDICATED ABOVE. FIELD MODIFY ARRANGEMENT TO COMPLY WITHSPACE LIMITATIONS AND CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS.

2. PROVIDE FACTORY ENGRAVED FACE-PLATES AND LABELS WITH TEXT AS INDICATED.

3. PROVIDE SWITCHES WITH INDICATOR LIGHTS.

4. ALL MASTER SWITCHES TO SERVE AS MANUAL 2-HOUR OVERRIDE.

LIGHTING CONTROL DIAGRAM GENERAL

NOTES:

1. LIGHTING CONTROL DIAGRAM IS DIAGRAMMATIC AND REPRESENTS THE GENERAL SCOPE OFWORK AND THE LOCATION OF DEVICES IN RELATION TO EACH OTHER ALONG THE POWERCIRCUIT. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WITH SELECTED MANUFACTURER.PROVIDE ALL PARTS AND PIECES REQUIRED FOR A FULLY FUNCTIONAL SYSTEM.

2. LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO INTEGRAL TIME CLOCK, RELAYS,AND DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SWITCHES. PROVIDE SHOP DRAWINGS FOR APPROVAL PRIORTO PURCHASE.

3. UTILIZE EXISTING SYSTEM TIMECLOCK FOR NEW SCHEDULES. LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM SHALLCOMPLY WITH ALL LOCAL AND STATE ENERGY CODES. PROGRAM NEW ZONES INTO EXISTINGSYSTEM AS REQUIRED.

4. CIRCUITING SHOWN ON THE PLAN CORRESPONDS TO THE LIGHTING CONTROL SCHEME. IFCIRCUITING IS CHANGED IN THE FIELD, ENSURE THAT SYSTEM PROGRAMMING WITH REVISEDCIRCUITING MEETS THE ORIGINAL LIGHTING CONTROL SCHEME. UPDATE RELAY PANELSCHEDULES IN RECORD DRAWINGS.

5. COORDINATE WITH OWNER FOR PROGRAMMABLE TIME CLOCK SCHEDULES. PROVIDE THEGENERAL CONTRACTOR WITH OPERATIONS MANUAL AFTER JOB IS COMPLETE. A COPY OF THERECORD DRAWINGS AND RELAY SCHEDULE WITH ANY FIELD CONDITION CHANGES IDENTIFIEDSHALL BE LEFT IN THE DOOR OF THE PANEL.

LIGHTING CONTROL DIAGRAM KEYED

NOTES:

1

2

DIMMED LOADS

3

4

5

NEW FEEDTHRU GPLIGHTINGCONTROL

PANEL

NEW 0-10VINTERFACE

DEVICE

BRANCH CIRCUITS PERPANEL SCHEDULES(TYPICAL U.N.O.)

DIMMED LOADS

DIMMED LOAD

TO ADDITIONAL0-10V INTERFACEDEVICES

TO ADDITIONAL LIGHTINGCONTROL PANELS

CONTROL CIRCUIT

1

3

4

5

EXISTING120V

POWERPANEL

NEW 0-10VINTERFACE

DEVICE

NEWCONTROLLED

LOADS

DIMMED LOADS

120V

2

TO ADDITIONALLIGHTING ZONES

6

7

73

LUTRONSEETOUCH2-BUTTON

'S2'

2-POSITIONKEYED SWITCH

EXISTING LUTRON QUANTUM PROCESSOR. CONNECT NEW CONTROL DEVICES TO EXISTING QSLINK AS INDICATED ON MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION DIAGRAMS. CONNECT PANELBOARDS TOTHE EXISTING PANEL POWER LINK SYSTEM.

LIGHTING DIMMING PANEL INFORMATION:a. MANUFACTURER (BASIS OF DESIGN): LUTRON GP SERIESb. MAINS: MLOc. BRANCH BREAKERS: REFERENCE PANEL SCHEDULES.d. ENCLOSURE: SURFACE MOUNT, NEMA 1

DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SWITCH. REFER TO LIGHTING DEVICE SCHEDULE AND TO LIGHTINGPLANS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.

AV INTEGRATION DEVICE:a. MANUFACTURER (BASIS OF DESIGN): LUTRON GRX-CI-RS232b. ENCLOSURE: SURFACE MOUNT, NEMA 1c. PROVIDE LOW VOLTAGE CABLE TO INTERCONNECT SPACE AV SYSTEM WITH AV INTEGRATION

DEVICE. COORDINATE CABLE REQUIREMENTS AND AV CONTROL INTERFACE PROGRAMMINGWITH LIGHTING CONTROL MANUFACTURER AND AV SYSTEM INSTALLER PRIOR TO WORK.

PROVIDE INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN EXISTING LUTRON LIGHTING CONTROL PANELS AND NEWDIMMING PANELS.

AV INTEGRATION DEVICE:a. MANUFACTURER (BASIS OF DESIGN): LUTRON GRX-TVIb. ENCLOSURE: SURFACE MOUNT, NEMA 1c. PROVIDE LOW VOLTAGE CABLE TO INTERCONNECT SPACE AV SYSTEM WITH AV INTEGRATION

DEVICE. COORDINATE CABLE REQUIREMENTS AND AV CONTROL INTERFACE PROGRAMMINGWITH LIGHTING CONTROL MANUFACTURER AND AV SYSTEM INSTALLER PRIOR TO WORK.

2-POSITION KEYED ON/OFF CONTROL SWITCH. KEYED SWITCH SHALL OVERRIDE LIGHTING WITHINTHE SPACE, EXCEPT AISLE LIGHTING. REFER TO LIGHTING DEVICE SCHEDULE AND TO LIGHTINGPLANS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.

T-BARSTEEL COVERPLATE

KELLEMS GRIP

LAY-IN CEILING

PROVIDE TIE WIRES FORBOX HANGER (TYP)

JUNCTION BOX FLUSHMOUNTED IN LAY-IN CEILING.

DROP CORD TO BE TYPE SO,SIZE AS REQUIRED

WP TWISTLOCK OUTLET OR JUNCTIONBOX AS REQUIRED. PROVIDE KELLEMSGRIP IF JUNCTION BOX IS USED.

FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (SIZE ASREQUIRED) CLIP TO BOX HANGER ATMAXIMUM 4'-6" SPACING. ROUTE FLEXIBLECONDUIT UP TO JUNCTION BOX AT BAR JOIST.

ADJUSTABLE T-BAR BOX HANGER TOSPAN 24" LENGTH OF CEILING TILE. (BOX

SUPPORT PER NEC ARTICLE 370-23C)

FLEXIBLE CONDUIT SHALL BESUPPORTED WITHIN 12" OF BOX.

NEW 0-10VINTERFACE

DEVICECONTROLLED

LOADS

6

QS

DE

VIC

E L

INK

EVENT LEVEL

PANEL LINK

LAST EXISTING DEVICEON THE QS LINK

TO LOCKER CLUB AV SYSTEM

'S2'

0-10

V

PA

NE

L LI

NK

0-10V

'S1''MS1'

RD1-4NED1

FAXTEL

CB

A D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


PROJECT NORTH

®

TM

®

®


913-742-5000



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400



1-224-717-1555

BID PACKAGE #2



913 742 5000 913 742 5001LENEXA, KS 66214


www.hei-eng.com

FO

R R

EF

ER

EN

CE

ON

LY

- N

OT

FO

R C

ON

ST

RU

CT

I ON

4/15/20 16 2:21:25 PM

Ban

kers

Life

Fie

ldho

use

1 25

S. P

enns

ylv a

nia

St.,

Indi

anap

olis

, IN

462

40





04.18.2016

ELECTRICALDETAILS

BP2 E5-1

16.4224.00

04.08.2016

2016

DA

VID

D. H

AA

KE


1550002436

GENERAL NOTES

HIGHLIGHTED GRAY REGION ON SHEETIDENTIFIES AN AREA NOT CURRENTLY INSCOPE OF WORK

CONSTRUCTION TYPES LEGEND

FLOORSFLOOR NOTES: FLOOR FINISHES AREINDICATED ON THE FINISH SCHEDULE. REFERTO "AM" SERIES SHEETS FOR BELOW-GRADEWATERPROOFING AND SUBROOF LOCATIONS.ALL SUBROOF SYSTEMS TO RECEIVE R-30BATT INSULATION w/ STICK-PINS ATUNDERSIDE.

CONCRETE SLAB FINISH NOTES:UNPROTECTED CONCOURSES: BROOMPROTECTED CONCOURSES: LIGHT BROOMPRECAST SEATING RISERS: BROOMOVER BUILT BOWL SLABS: BROOMINTERIOR EXPOSED: STEEL TROWELINTERIOR TO RECEIVE FINISH: TBD PERFINISH REQUIREMENT

ROOFS

NOT APPLICABLE TO PROJECT SCOPE

SOFFITS & FASCIAS

WALLSWALL NOTES: INTERIOR WALL FINISHES AREINDICATED ON THE FINISH SCHEDULE.SUBSTITUTE TILE BACKER BOARD FORGYPSUM WALLBOARD WHERE REQUIRED FORFINISHES.

GLAZING SYSTEMS

12" = 1'-0"1 BP2 LIGHTING CONTROLS

BP2_01


BP2_01 04/18/2016 BP2_Addendum 01

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

BUS AMPS: 125A

MAIN SIZE/TYPE: MLO


CKT

NO.




DESCRIPTION

RECEPT. SUITE 37

ICE MAKER/REFRIG. SUITE 37

RECEPT. SUITE 37

COILING GRILLE SUITE 37

RECEPT. SUITE 38


RECEPT. SUITE 38


RECEPT. SUITE 39


RECEPT. SUITE 39


RECEPT. SUITE 40


RECEPT. SUITE 40


RECEPT. SUITE 41


RECEPT. SUITE 41


SUBTOTAL

TOTAL PHASE A - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PHASE B - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PHASE C - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PNLBD - VA

AMPS

4,520

38

3,540

30

3,140

26

11,200

31

VOLTAMPS/PHASE

A

LOAD

COOLING

HEATING

LIGHTING

RECEPTACLES

MOTORS

SUPP HEAT

MISC EQUIP

B C

CONN. VA

5,400

5,800

WIRE

NO.

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

FAULT CURRENT:

AIC RATING:

SERVES:

MOUNTING: SURFACE

LOCATION:

BKR

AMP

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

DF

1.00

0

1.25

1.0/.5

1.00

1.00

1.00

P

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

P

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

LOAD

REFRIGERATION

SIGN/DISPLAY

KITCHEN

EXISTING

LARGE MOTOR

SHOW WINDOW

LTG TRACK

EXIST. ELEC. RM. 4C28

BKR

AMP

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

WIRE

NO.

10

10

12

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

12

12

12

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

VOLTAMPS/PHASE

A

720

1,080

760

760

1,200

4,520

B

800

720

760

760

500

3,540

CONN. VA

C

400

720

760

760

500

3,140

DF

1.00

1.25

1.00

1.00

1.25

1.25

1.00

DESCRIPTION

RCPT. - SUITE CLUB GEN A

RCPT. - TV'S SUITE CLUB A

RCPT. - TV'S SUITE CLUB BAR

RCPT.-SUITE CLUB BOX A

RCPT.-SUITE CLUB BOX B

RCPT.-SUITE CLUB BOX C

RCPT.-SUITE CLUB LOGE A

RCPT.-SUITE CLUB LOGE B

RCPT.-SUITE CLUB LOGE C

RCPT.-SUITE CLUB LOGE D

RCPT.-SUITE CLUB LOGE E

RCPT.-SUITE CLUB LOGE F

RCPT.-A/V EQUIP

PWR.-MECH. CONTROLS

PWR.-MECH. CONTROLS


RECEPT. SUITE 46


RECEPT. SUITE 46


SUBTOTAL

TOTALDEMAND

11,200 VA

31 A

CKT

NO.



R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

ER

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

PANELBOARD: RP-4SE2 (EXISTING)

SECTION: 1

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

31

33

35

37

39

41

PANELBOARD NOTES

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40

42

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

BUS AMPS: 125A

MAIN SIZE/TYPE: MLO


CKT

NO.



N - PROVIDE NEW CIRCUIT BREAKER IN PANELBOARD SPACE. NEW CIRCUIT BREAKER AIC RATING SHALL MEET


DESCRIPTION

RECEPT. SUITE 37

RECEPT. SUITE 38

RECEPT. SUITE 39

RECEPT. SUITE 40

RECEPT. SUITE 41

RECEPT. SUITE 42

RECEPT. SUITE 43

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SUBTOTAL

TOTAL PHASE A - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PHASE B - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PHASE C - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PNLBD - VA

AMPS


VOLTAMPS/PHASE

A

LOAD

COOLING

HEATING

LIGHTING

RECEPTACLES

MOTORS

SUPP HEAT

MISC EQUIP

B C

CONN. VA

WIRE

NO.

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

FAULT CURRENT:

AIC RATING:

SERVES:

MOUNTING: SURFACE

LOCATION:

BKR

AMP

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

DF

1.00

0

1.25

1.0/.5

1.00

1.00

1.00

P

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

P

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

LOAD

REFRIGERATION

SIGN/DISPLAY

KITCHEN

EXISTING

LARGE MOTOR

SHOW WINDOW

LTG TRACK

EXIST. ELEC. RM 4C28

BKR

AMP

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

WIRE

NO.

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

VOLTAMPS/PHASE

A B

CONN. VA

C

DF

1.00

1.25

1.00

1.00

1.25

1.25

1.00

DESCRIPTION

RECEPT. SUITE 50

RECEPT. SUITE 49

RECEPT. SUITE 48

RECEPT. SUITE 47

RECEPT. SUITE 46

RECEPT. SUITE 45

RECEPT. SUITE 44

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SUBTOTAL

TOTALDEMAND

CKT

NO.



ER

ER

ER

ER

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

PANELBOARD: CP-4SE1 (EXISTING)

SECTION: 1

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

PANELBOARD NOTES

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

BUS AMPS: 125A

MAIN SIZE/TYPE: MLO


CKT

NO.





DESCRIPTION

RECEPT. SUITE 63

RECEPT. SUITE 62

RECEPT. SUITE 61

RECEPT. SUITE 60

RECEPT. SUITE 59

RECEPT. SUITE 58

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SUBTOTAL

TOTAL PHASE A - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PHASE B - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PHASE C - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PNLBD - VA

AMPS


VOLTAMPS/PHASE

A

LOAD

COOLING

HEATING

LIGHTING

RECEPTACLES

MOTORS

SUPP HEAT

MISC EQUIP

B C

CONN. VA

WIRE

NO.

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

FAULT CURRENT:

AIC RATING:

SERVES:

MOUNTING: SURFACE

LOCATION:

BKR

AMP

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

DF

1.00

0

1.25

1.0/.5

1.00

1.00

1.00

P

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

P

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

LOAD

REFRIGERATION

SIGN/DISPLAY

KITCHEN

EXISTING

LARGE MOTOR

SHOW WINDOW

LTG TRACK

EXIST. ELEC. RM. 4D16-1

BKR

AMP

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

WIRE

NO.

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

VOLTAMPS/PHASE

A B

CONN. VA

C

DF

1.00

1.25

1.00

1.00

1.25

1.25

1.00

DESCRIPTION

RECEPT. SUITE 51

RECEPT. SUITE 52

RECEPT. SUITE 53

RECEPT. SUITE 54

RECEPT. SUITE 55

RECEPT. SUITE 56

RECEPT. SUITE 57

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SUBTOTAL

TOTALDEMAND

CKT

NO.



ER

ER

ER

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

PANELBOARD: CP-4SW1 (EXISTING)

SECTION: 1

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

PANELBOARD NOTES

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

BUS AMPS: 125A

MAIN SIZE/TYPE: MLO


CKT

NO.



DESCRIPTION

RECEPT. SUITE 63


RECEPT. SUITE 63


RECEPT. SUITE 62


RECEPT. SUITE 62


RECEPT. SUITE 61


RECEPT. SUITE 61


RECEPT. SUITE 60


RECEPT. SUITE 60


RECEPT. SUITE 59


RECEPT. SUITE 59


SUBTOTAL

TOTAL PHASE A - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PHASE B - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PHASE C - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PNLBD - VA

AMPS

3,140

26

3,080

26

3,360

28

9,580

27

VOLTAMPS/PHASE

A

LOAD

COOLING

HEATING

LIGHTING

RECEPTACLES

MOTORS

SUPP HEAT

MISC EQUIP

B C

CONN. VA

5,580

4,000

WIRE

NO.

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

FAULT CURRENT:

AIC RATING:

SERVES:

MOUNTING: SURFACE

LOCATION:

BKR

AMP

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

DF

1.00

0

1.25

1.0/.5

1.00

1.00

1.00

P

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

P

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

LOAD

REFRIGERATION

SIGN/DISPLAY

KITCHEN

EXISTING

LARGE MOTOR

SHOW WINDOW

LTG TRACK

EXIST. ELEC. RM 4D16-1

BKR

AMP

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

WIRE

NO.

12

10

10

8

12

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

VOLTAMPS/PHASE

A

540

1,080

760

760

3,140

B

800

760

760

760

3,080

CONN. VA

C

1,080

760

760

760

3,360

DF

1.00

1.25

1.00

1.00

1.25

1.25

1.00

DESCRIPTION

RCPT. - SUITE CLUB GEN B

RCPT. - TV'S SUITE CLUB B

RCPT.-SUITE CLUB BOX D

RCPT.-SUITE CLUB BOX E

RCPT.-SUITE CLUB LOGE A

RCPT.-SUITE CLUB LOGE B

RCPT.-SUITE CLUB LOGE C

RCPT.-SUITE CLUB LOGE D

RCPT.-SUITE CLUB LOGE E

RCPT.-SUITE CLUB LOGE F

RCPT.-SUITE CLUB LOGE G

RCPT.-SUITE CLUB LOGE H

RECEPT. SUITE 54


RECEPT. SUITE 54


RECEPT. SUITE 55


RECEPT. SUITE 55


SUBTOTAL

TOTALDEMAND

9,580 VA

27 A

CKT

NO.



R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

PANELBOARD: RP-4SW2 (EXISTING)

SECTION: 1

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

31

33

35

37

39

41

PANELBOARD NOTES

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40

42

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

BUS AMPS: 225A

MAIN SIZE/TYPE: MLO


CKT

NO.





DESCRIPTION

LIGHTS -SUITE 63

LIGHTS -SUITE 62

LIGHTS -SUITE 61

LIGHTS -SUITE 60

LIGHTS -SUITE 59

LIGHTS -SUITE 58

LIGHTS -SUITE 57

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SUBTOTAL

TOTAL PHASE A - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PHASE B - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PHASE C - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PNLBD - VA

AMPS

2,236

19

2,391

20

1,783

15

6,410

18

VOLTAMPS/PHASE

A

LOAD

COOLING

HEATING

LIGHTING

RECEPTACLES

MOTORS

SUPP HEAT

MISC EQUIP

B C

CONN. VA

6,410

WIRE

NO.

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

FAULT CURRENT:

AIC RATING:

SERVES:

MOUNTING: SURFACE

LOCATION:

BKR

AMP

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

DF

1.00

0

1.25

1.0/.5

1.00

1.00

1.00

P

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

P

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

LOAD

REFRIGERATION

SIGN/DISPLAY

KITCHEN

EXISTING

LARGE MOTOR

SHOW WINDOW

LTG TRACK

EXIST. ELEC. RM. 4D16-1

BKR

AMP

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

WIRE

NO.

10

10

10

10

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

10

10

10

VOLTAMPS/PHASE

A

332

720

1,184

2,236

B

1,440

951

2,391

CONN. VA

C

1,076

707

1,783

DF

1.00

1.25

1.00

1.00

1.25

1.25

1.00

DESCRIPTION

LTS.-CLUB BAR ACCENT/DWN

LTS.-CLUB BAR PENDANTS

LTS.-CLUB SEATING COVE

LTS.- CLUB SCONCES

LIGHTS - SUITE 54

LIGHTS - SUITE 55

LIGHTS - SUITE 56

LTS.-LOGE CLUB DINING

LTS.-LOGE CLUB DWN LTS

LTS.-LOGE CLUB DWN LTS

SUBTOTAL

TOTALDEMAND

8,013 VA

22 A

CKT

NO.



R

R

R

R

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

N

N

N

PANELBOARD: RP-4SW6 (EXISTING)

SECTION: 1

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

PANELBOARD NOTES

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

N

N

BUS AMPS: 225A

MAIN SIZE/TYPE: MLO


CKT

NO.





DESCRIPTION

R(R) SUITE 37

F(R)SUITE 38

F(R)SUITE 39

F(R)SUITE 40

F(R)SUITE 41

F(R)SUITE 42

F(R)SUITE 43

FR 38 RM 4C12

FR 38 RM 4C25

TERRACE SNOW MELT 4C11

PWR. - FR33-3 (ELEC HEAT)

PWR. - FR33-3 (FAN)

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SUBTOTAL

TOTAL PHASE A - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PHASE B - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PHASE C - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PNLBD - VA

AMPS

7,644

28

3,559

13

4,000

14

15,203

18


VOLTAMPS/PHASE

A

5,000

5,000

LOAD

COOLING

HEATING

LIGHTING

RECEPTACLES

MOTORS

SUPP HEAT

MISC EQUIP

B

1,176

1,176

C

CONN. VA

10,203

5,000

WIRE

NO.

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

10

12

FAULT CURRENT:

AIC RATING:

SERVES:

MOUNTING: SURFACE

LOCATION:

BKR

AMP

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

30

25

20

DF

1.00

0

1.25

1.0/.5

1.00

1.00

1.00

P

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

3

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

P

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

3

1

1

1

LOAD

REFRIGERATION

SIGN/DISPLAY

KITCHEN

EXISTING

LARGE MOTOR

SHOW WINDOW

LTG TRACK

EXIST. ELEC. RM. 4C28

BKR

AMP

15

15

20

20

20

20

20

15

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

60

WIRE

NO.

12

12

12

12

EX

EX

EX

12

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

VOLTAMPS/PHASE

A

1,468

1,176

2,644

B

1,468

915

2,383

CONN. VA

C

4,000

4,000

DF

1.00

1.25

1.00

1.00

1.25

1.25

1.00

DESCRIPTION

PWR. - FR51-3

PWR. - FR51-3


PWR. - FR32-3 (FAN)

F(R)SUITE 46

F(R)SUITE 45

F(R)SUITE 44

FR 35 RM 4C35

HAND DRYER RM 4C26

HAND DRYER RM 4C25

VR 9/17

ESCALATOR #2

SUBTOTAL

TOTALDEMAND

15,203 VA

18 A

CKT

NO.



N

N

R

R

EX

EX

EX

N

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

PANELBOARD: PP2-4SE1 (EXISTING)

SECTION: 1

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

31

33

35

37

39

41

PANELBOARD NOTES

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40

42

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

BUS AMPS: 125A

MAIN SIZE/TYPE: MLO


CKT

NO.





DESCRIPTION

LIGHTS - SUITE 37

LIGHTS - SUITE 38

LIGHTS - SUITE 39

LIGHTS - SUITE 40

LIGHTS - SUITE 41

LIGHTS - SUITE 42

LIGHTS - SUITE 43

WEST BOWL

WEST BOWL

WEST BOWL

WEST BOWL

WEST BOWL

WEST BOWL

SUBTOTAL

TOTAL PHASE A - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PHASE B - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PHASE C - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PNLBD - VA

AMPS

VOLTAMPS/PHASE

A

LOAD

COOLING

HEATING

LIGHTING

RECEPTACLES

MOTORS

SUPP HEAT

MISC EQUIP

B C

CONN. VA

WIRE

NO.

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

FAULT CURRENT:

AIC RATING:

SERVES:

MOUNTING: SURFACE

LOCATION:

BKR

AMP

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

DF

1.00

0

1.25

1.0/.5

1.00

1.00

1.00

P

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

P

1

1

1

1

1

1

3

1

1

1

1

1

1

LOAD

REFRIGERATION

SIGN/DISPLAY

KITCHEN

EXISTING

LARGE MOTOR

SHOW WINDOW

LTG TRACK

EXIST. ELEC. RM 4C28

BKR

AMP

20

20

20

20

20

20

60

20

20

20

20

20

20

WIRE

NO.

10

12

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

VOLTAMPS/PHASE

A B

CONN. VA

C

DF

1.00

1.25

1.00

1.00

1.25

1.25

1.00

DESCRIPTION

LIGHTS - SUITE 49

LIGHTS - SUITE 48

LIGHTS - SUITE 47

LIGHTS - SUITE 46

LIGHTS - SUITE 45

LIGHTS - SUITE 44

SE SCOREBOARD

WEST BOWL

WEST BOWL

WEST BOWL

WEST BOWL

WEST BOWL

WEST BOWL

SUBTOTAL

TOTALDEMAND

CKT

NO.



EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

PANELBOARD: RP-4SE4 (EXISTING)

SECTION: 1

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

PANELBOARD NOTES

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

N

N

N

N

BUS AMPS: 225A

MAIN SIZE/TYPE: MLO


CKT

NO.





DESCRIPTION

F(R)SUITE 63

F(R)SUITE 62

F(R)SUITE 61

F(R)SUITE 60

F(R)SUITE 59

F(R)SUITE 58

FR ROOM 4D33

FR ROOM 4D32

HAND DRYER ROOM 4D32

TERRACE 4D33 SNOWMELT

HAND DRYER ROOM 4D31


PWR. - FR30-3 (FAN)


PWR. - FR31-3 (FAN)

SPACE

SPACE

SUBTOTAL

TOTAL PHASE A - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PHASE B - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PHASE C - VA

AMPS

TOTAL PNLBD - VA

AMPS

10,091

36

2,352

8

4,000

14

16,443

20


VOLTAMPS/PHASE

A

5,000

1,176

6,176

LOAD

COOLING

HEATING

LIGHTING

RECEPTACLES

MOTORS

SUPP HEAT

MISC EQUIP

B

1,176

1,176

C

4,000

4,000

CONN. VA

4,443

12,000

WIRE

NO.

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

10

12

12

12

FAULT CURRENT:

AIC RATING:

SERVES:

MOUNTING: SURFACE

LOCATION:

BKR

AMP

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

30

20

20

20

25

20

20

20

DF

1.00

0

1.25

1.0/.5

1.00

1.00

1.00

P

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

3

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

P

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

3

1

1

1

LOAD

REFRIGERATION

SIGN/DISPLAY

KITCHEN

EXISTING

LARGE MOTOR

SHOW WINDOW

LTG TRACK

EXIST. ELEC. RM 4D16-1

BKR

AMP

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

60

WIRE

NO.

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

12

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

EX

VOLTAMPS/PHASE

A

3,000

915

3,915

B

1,176

1,176

CONN. VA

C

DF

1.00

1.25

1.00

1.00

1.25

1.25

1.00

DESCRIPTION

PWR.-FR48-3 (ELEC HEAT)

PWR.-FR48-3 (FAN)

F(R)SUITE 53

F(R)SUITE 54

F(R)SUITE 55

F(R)SUITE 56

FR 54 3

FR 36 RM 4D19

HAND DRYER RM 4D18

HAND DRYER RM 4D19

F(R)SUITE 57

FR-34

VR 10/25

ESCALATOR #1

SPACE

SPACE

SPACE

SUBTOTAL

TOTALDEMAND

16,443 VA

20 A

CKT

NO.



R

R

ER

EX

EX

EX

R

EX

EX

EX

EX

ER

EX

EX

EX

EX

PANELBOARD: PP2-4SW1

SECTION: 1

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

31

33

35

37

39

41

PANELBOARD NOTES

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40

42

Fault

Point

(F#)1

23

4

ISC (1) = short circuit current at fault point 1

ISC (2) = short circuit current at fault point 2

NM - Non Magnetic Conduit, M - Magnetic Conduit, FB - Feeder Busway, PB - Plug-in Busway, TX - Transformer

Bus/Feeder

DescriptionBUS DUCT FEEDERMotor ContributionFDR - TO BUS DUCTBUS DUCT TO BUS TAP

BUS TAP TO PANEL

Phase

33

3

Source

(Fault

Point)

2

3

Source

Isc

(amps)#####1443

#####91902

88103

Feeder

Conduit

Type/TXAT MAIN SWITCHBOARD MS1The connected full load motor amps (includes compressors) on the system

MFB

M

L =C =

Material

CU or AL

CUCU

CU

Length of circuit"C" Factor from Bussman table where "C" = 1 / impedance per linear foot

#

41

1

Wire/Bus Size

Set(s) ofSet(s) of

Set(s) of

E = Line to line volts

3501200

250

kcmilBusway

kcmil

Conductor

'C' value480Y/277V - 3 phase

19704

16483

Busway

C value

76900

L-L

Volts

E

480480

480

Circuit

Length

L

10010

125

Load

Power

Factor(pf)

0.850.85

0.8

IP =Vp =

IS=

Vs=

Circuit

Load

A

12001200

202

Primary short circuit current Primary voltageSecondary short circuit current

Secondary voltage

Conductor

Resistance

R

0.0000390.000014

0.000054

Reactance

X

0.0000500.000008

0.000052

Arccos (pf)

(Radians)

0.5548110.554811

0.643501

Transformer

Type kVA

%VD CUM=R=X=

Degree

Rise

Cumulative Voltage Drop from Fault Point 1 to Fault Point #resistance in ohms per LFreactances in ohms per LF

Z V sec f

0.7260.043

2.411

MSource Isc + 6X Motor Contribution =

0.580.96

0.29

FAULT

CURRENT

Isc158658

9190288103

25830

VOLTAGE

DROP

%VD

0.64%0.07%

0.68%

TOTAL

V.D.

%VD CUM

0.64%0.71%

1.39%

v1.03

Fault

Point

(F#)1

23

4

Short-Circuit and Voltage Drop CalculationsDistances are for calculation purposes only and shall not be used for contractor takeoffs nor bidding - Contractor shall notify Engineer of any field condition that results in a change of 10% or greater circuit distance

The following calculations are based on the "Point-by-Point" method where:

ISC (2) = ISC(1) x M(1)

Feeder Types =

M= 1/(1+f) Feeder:

Feeder:

f (3Ø) =

f (1Ø)=

1.732 x L x Isc

C x E

2 x L x Isc

C x E

XFMR:

XFMR:

f (3Ø) =

f (1Ø)=

IP(sca)x Vp x 1.73 x %Z

100,000 x KVA

IP(sca)x Vp x %Z

100,000 x KVA

IS(sca)= Vp x M x IP(sca)

Vs

VOLTAGE DROP (3Ø):

%VD=

VOLTAGE DROP (1Ø):

%VD=

((R x cos(arccos(pf)) + X x sin (arccos(pf))) x L/# x I x 1.73) / E

((R x cos(arccos(pf)) + X x sin(arccos(pf))) x 2 x L/# x I) / E

PP1-4SW1EXISTING ELEC ROOM

800 AMPS208Y/120V 3� 4W

100A3P_

100A3P_

100A3P_

100A3P_

225A3P_

225A3P_

100A3P_

100A3P_

100A3P_

ETR

800A3P

ETR

ETR

ETR

ETR

ETR

ETR

ETR

ETR

MS-1 ELEC ROOM

3000 AMPS 480Y/277V 3� 4W

150KAIC

1200A3P1200AF_

1200A3P1200AF_

1200A3P1200AF_

1200A3P1200AF_

ETR

ETR

ETR

ETR

3000A3P3000AF__

225KVA480V PRI120/208V SEC

ETR

ETR

ETR

100A3P_

104

PN

LBD

RP

-4S

W5

PN

LBD

RP

-4S

W4D

254

1ONE-LINE DIAGRAMNO SCALE

CIRCUIT SCHEDULE:

ONE-LINE DIAGRAM NOTES

M

TVSS

91,902FCA0.64 %CVD100 FEET

88,103 FCA0.71 %CVD10 FEET

25,830 FCA1.39 %CVD

125 FEET

ALL CONDUCTOR SIZES ARE BASED ON75 DEG C RATED TERMINATION AND COPPERCONDUCTORS WITH TYPE THHN/THWN-2INSULATION. WHERE ALUMINUM CONDUCTORSARE ALLOWED PER SPECIFICATIONS ANDFOR TERMINATION OR INSULATION TYPESRATED LESS THAN 75 DEG C, MODIFYSIZES ACCORDING TO NFPA 70.

1 PROVIDE AND INSTALL NEW CIRCUITBREAKER INDICATED IN EXISTINGDISTRIBUTION PANEL SPACE. NEWCIRCUIT BREAKER AIC RATING SHALLMEET OR EXCEED TO AIC RATING OF THEEXISTING CIRCUIT BREAKER IN PANEL

1

ETR EXISTING FEEDER TO REMAIN

254R

P-4

SW

2

RP

-4S

W1

RP

-4S

W6

RF

-4S

W4A

(G

FI)

CP

-4S

W4C

RP

-4S

W4C

RP

-4S

W3

EXISTING SW1200 AMP 3PHASE 4 WIRE VERTICALBUSDUCT

400 AMP 3 POLE BUSDUCT FUSED DISCONNETFUSED AT 250 AMPS TOMATCH EXISTING

250 AMP, (4)-#250kcmil, (1)#4G, 2-1/2" CONDUIT

NW

120

0AM

P27

7/48

0 V

3P

H4W

BU

SD

UC

T

SE

120

0AM

P27

7/48

0 V

3P

H4W

BU

SD

UC

T

NE

120

0AM

P27

7/48

0 V

3P

H4W

BU

SD

UC

T

CABLE TAP BOX

400 AMP 3 POLE BUSDUCT FUSED DISCONNETFUSED AT 300 AMPS

FAXTEL

CB

A D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


PROJECT NORTH

®

TM

®

®


913-742-5000



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400



1-224-717-1555

BID PACKAGE #2



913 742 5000 913 742 5001LENEXA, KS 66214


www.hei-eng.com

FO

R R

EF

ER

EN

CE

ON

LY

- N

OT

FO

R C

ON

ST

RU

CT

I ON

4/15/20 16 2:21:31 PM

Ban

kers

Life

Fie

ldho

use

1 25

S. P

enns

ylv a

nia

St.,

Indi

anap

olis

, IN

462

40





04.18.2016

ELECTRICALSCHEDULES

BP2 E6 - 1

16.4224.00

04.08.2016

2016

DA

VID

D. H

AA

KE


1550002436

12" = 1'-0"1 BP2 PANELBOARD SCHEDULES

SW - SWITCH RATED

BREAKER RATED FOR 30mA ST - SHUNT TRIP

GFEP - GND FAULT EQUIPMENT PROTECTION PS - POWER SWITCHING BREAKER

GF - GFCI TYPE CIRCUIT BREAKER OL - REFER TO ONE-LINE DIAGRAM

FA - RED/HANDLE-ON CLAMP LO - HANDLE-ON CLAMP

EX - EXISTING LCK - HANDLE PADLOCKABLE-OFF DEVICE TOTAL ESTIMATED DEMAND... 73 AMISC (Z) 7984 VA 100.00% 7984 VA EM - EMERG LTG HANDLE-ON CLAMP IG - ISOLATED GROUND CIRCUIT TOTAL CONNECTED CURRENT: 87 A

RECEPTACLES 6660 VA 100.00% 6660 VA C# - VIA LTG CONTACTOR # WITH NEC 210.4(B) TOTAL ESTIMATED DEMAND: 26145 VAKITCHEN 14500 VA 65.00% 9425 VA AF - ARC FAULT CKT INTERRUPT HT - PROVIDE HANDLE TIES TO COMPLY TOTAL CONNECTED LOAD: 31220 VALOAD TYPE

CONNECTEDLOAD

DEMANDFACTOR

ESTIMATEDDEMAND PANELBOARD NOTES: PANELBOARD TOTALS

TOTAL AMPS: 76 A 91 A 98 A

TOTAL LOAD (VA): 9076 VA 10660 VA 11484 VA41 EQUIPPED SPACE -- -- -- -- -- -- 0 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- EQUIPPED SPACE 4239 EQUIPPED SPACE -- -- -- -- -- -- 0 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- EQUIPPED SPACE 4037 EQUIPPED SPACE -- -- -- -- -- -- 0 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- EQUIPPED SPACE 3835 EQUIPPED SPACE -- -- -- -- -- -- 0 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- EQUIPPED SPACE 3633 EQUIPPED SPACE -- -- -- -- -- -- 0 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- EQUIPPED SPACE 3431 EQUIPPED SPACE -- -- -- -- -- -- 0 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- EQUIPPED SPACE 3229 2800 504 1 20 12 12 Z RCPT.-L. CLUB SER. COUNT. 7.038 3027

RCPT. - LOGE CLUB FLR BOX 4.103 K 8 10 40 22800 504 1 20 12 12 Z RCPT.-L. CLUB SER. COUNT. 7.038 28

25 RCPT.-LOGE CLUB FLR BOX 12.141 K 12 12 20 1 800 700 1 20 12 12 K RCPT.-L. CLUB SER. COUNT 4.099 2623 RCPT.-A. C. FOOD SER. 4C31A R 12 12 20 1 180 1920 1 20 12 12 GF Z PWR.- LOGE CLUB BAR 17.011 2421 RCPT.-FOOD SER. 4C31A 12.181 Z 12 12 20 1 1320 180 1 20 12 12 R RCPT.-L. CLUB E. SER. COUNT. A.C. 2219 SPARE -- -- -- -- 20 1 0 1220 1 20 12 12 R RCPT.-LOGE CLUB BAR 2.038/6.003 2017 RCPT.-FOOD SER. 4C31A 16.045 Z 12 12 20 1 1500 1200 1 20 12 12 R RCPT.-LOGE CLUB BAR 3.009 1815 RCPT.-LOGE CLUB 4.099 K 12 12 20 1 1400 0 1 20 -- -- -- -- SPARE 1613 RCPT.-LOGE CLUB FLR BOX 4.099 K 12 12 20 1 1400 360 1 20 R RCPT.-L. CLUB W. SER. COUNT A.C. 1411 RCPT.-LOGE CLUB 4.099 K 12 12 20 1 1400 720 1 20 12 12 R RCPT.-LOGE CLUB SER. STA. 2.038 129 RCPT.-LOGE CLUB FLR BOX 11.032 K 12 12 20 1 800 1200 1 20 12 12 R RCPT.-LOGE CLUB SER. STA. 3.009 107 RCPT.-LOGE CLUB 18.084 K 12 12 20 1 1100 1040 1 20 12 12 R RCPT.-LOGE CLUB BAR 2.038/6.003 85 RCPT - LOGE CLUB 11.014 K 12 12 20 1 900 360 1 20 12 12 R RCPT.-A.C. LOGE CLUB BAR 63 RCPT.- LOGE CLUB 3.013 K 10 10 20 1 1700 756 1 20 12 12 GF Z RCPT.-LOGE CLUB BAR 1.115 41 RCPT. - LOGE CLUB 3.013 K 10 10 20 1 1700 756 1 20 12 12 GF Z RCPT.-LOGE CLUB BAR 1.115 2

CKTNO. DESCRIPTION

LOADTYPE

CIRCUITNOT...

WIRESIZE

GroundSize

BKRAMP P A B C P

BKRAMP

GroundSize

WIRESIZE

CIRCUITNOT...

LOADTYPE DESCRIPTION

CKTNO.

VOLT AMPS / PHASE

SUPPLIED BY: LOCATION: 04 - PANTRY WEST 11

VOLTS/PHASE: 208Y/120 V, 3PH, 4W MOUNTING: SURFACE

MAIN SIZE/TYPE: MLO SERVES:BUS AMPS: 225 A AIC RATING:

FAULT CURRENT: Square D

PANELBOARD: RP-4SW5

SW - SWITCH RATED

BREAKER RATED FOR 30mA ST - SHUNT TRIP

GFEP - GND FAULT EQUIPMENT PROTECTION PS - POWER SWITCHING BREAKER

GF - GFCI TYPE CIRCUIT BREAKER OL - REFER TO ONE-LINE DIAGRAM

FA - RED/HANDLE-ON CLAMP LO - HANDLE-ON CLAMP

EX - EXISTING LCK - HANDLE PADLOCKABLE-OFF DEVICE TOTAL ESTIMATED DEMAND... 172 AMISC EQUIP 16991 VA 100.00% 16991 VA EM - EMERG LTG HANDLE-ON CLAMP IG - ISOLATED GROUND CIRCUIT TOTAL CONNECTED CURRENT: 172 A

KITCHEN 82200 VA 100.00% 82200 VA C# - VIA LTG CONTACTOR # WITH NEC 210.4(B) TOTAL ESTIMATED DEMAND: 143156 VASUPP HEAT 43965 VA 100.00% 43965 VA AF - ARC FAULT CKT INTERRUPT HT - PROVIDE HANDLE TIES TO COMPLY TOTAL CONNECTED LOAD: 143156 VALOAD TYPE

CONNECTEDLOAD

DEMANDFACTOR

ESTIMATEDDEMAND PANELBOARD NOTES: PANELBOARD TOTALS

TOTAL AMPS: 172 A 172 A 172 ATOTAL LOAD (VA): 47719 VA 47719 VA 47719 VA

23 EQUIPPED SPACE -- -- -- -- -- -- 0 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- EQUIPPED SPACE 2421 EQUIPPED SPACE -- -- -- -- -- -- 0 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- EQUIPPED SPACE 2219 EQUIPPED SPACE -- -- -- -- -- -- 0 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- EQUIPPED SPACE 2017 EQUIPPED SPACE -- -- -- -- -- -- 0 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- EQUIPPED SPACE 1815 ---- -- -- -- -- -- -- 0 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- EQUIPPED SPACE 1613 5400 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- EQUIPPED SPACE 1411 5400 14655 129

PWR.-COMBI OVEN-STEAMER 4.095 K ST 10 10 25 35400 14655 10

7 ---- -- -- -- -- -- -- 0 146553 70 8 4 S PWR.- DISHWASHER BOOSTER

HEATER 17.013a

85 22000 5664 63 22000 5664 41

PWR.- COMBI OVEN 4.021 K ST 3 8 100 322000 5664

3 30 10 10 Z PWR.- DISHWASHER 17.0132

CKTNO. DESCRIPTION

LOADTYPE

CIRCUITNOT...

WIRESIZE

GroundSize

BKRAMP P A B C P

BKRAMP

GroundSize

WIRESIZE

CIRCUITNOT...

LOADTYPE DESCRIPTION

CKTNO.

VOLT AMPS / PHASE

SUPPLIED BY: LOCATION: 04 - KITCHEN 3

VOLTS/PHASE: 480Y/277 V, 3PH, 4W MOUNTING: SURFACE

MAIN SIZE/TYPE: MLO SERVES:BUS AMPS: 250 A AIC RATING:

FAULT CURRENT: Square D

PANELBOARD: RP-4SW4D

BP2_01

BP2_01


BP2_01 04/18/2016 BP2_Addendum 01

FAXTEL

CB

A D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


PROJECT NORTH

®

TM

®

®


913-742-5000



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400



1-224-717-1555

BID PACKAGE #2



913 742 5000 913 742 5001LENEXA, KS 66214


www.hei-eng.com

FO

R R

EF

ER

EN

CE

ON

LY

- N

OT

FO

R C

ON

ST

RU

CT

I ON

4/15/20 16 2:21:35 PM

Ban

kers

Life

Fie

ldho

use

1 25

S. P

enns

ylv a

nia

St.,

Indi

anap

olis

, IN

462

40





04.18.2016

LIGHT FIXTURESCHEDULE

BP2 E6 - 2

16.4224.00

04.08.2016

2016

DA

VID

D. H

AA

KE


1550002436

BP2 LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE

TYPE MANUFACTURER MODEL APPROVED EQUIVALENTS

LAMPS BALLAST/DRIVER

DESCRIPTION NOTESNO. TYPE VOLT TYPEINPUTWATTS

INPUTVA

SAL WILLIAMS 50G-S24-L90/835-F-A12125-DRV-UNV LITHONIA, COLUMBIA - LED PER MANUFACTURER 277 NON-DIMMING 94 105 2' X4' RECESSEC LINEAR STATIC TROFFER SUITABLE FOR GRID CEILINGS. NOMINAL 4.5" DEEP 22 GUAGEDIE-FORMED STEEL HOUSING AND END PLATES. FLAT ALUMINUM DOOR FRAME WITH MITERED CORNERS,SPRING-LOADED CAM LATCHES t-SLOT HINGE ALLOWS REVERSIBLE HINGING AND LATCHING. .125" THICKACRYLIC PATTERN 12 PRISMATIC LENS. BAKED WHITE ENAMEL FINISH FOR ALL PARTS PAINTED AFTERFABRICATION

SALE WILLIAMS SAME AS SAL LITHONIA, COLUMBIA - LED PER MANUFACTURER 277 NON-DIMMING 94 105 SAME AS SAL EXCEPT ON EMERGENCY POWERSD1 USAI LIGHTING BEVELED MINI SERIES:

2221 B1 S XXXLRTD3 9014 M2 27KS 50 NC VOLT DIML6A

LUCIFER LIGHTING#3RE SERIES

LF ILLUMINATIONVF SERIES

- LED PER MANUFACTURER80 CRI, 2700K850 LUMENS50,000 HRS

277 DIMMING:ELDOLED 0-10V

(100% - <1%)

14 15 NOMINAL 3"-1.5"(DIA) X 5.5"(H) CIRCULAR APERTURE RECESSED DOWNLIGHT WITH 50DEG OPTICAL DISTRIBUTION.LIGHT FIXTURE EQUIPPED WITH SOLITE LENS AND INTEGRAL LED DIMMING DRIVER. PROVIDE LIGHT FIXTUREWITH NEW CONSTRUCTION HOUSING. SELF-FLANGED BEVELED TRIM FINISH SHALL BE AS DETERMINED BYARCHITECT.

SD1-ALT004 USAI LIGHTING BEVELED MINI SERIES:2221 B1 S XXXLRTD3 9014 M2 27KS 50 NC VOLT DIML2




277 DIMMING:0-10V

(100% - 10%)

14 15 NOMINAL 3"-1.5"(DIA) X 5.5"(H) CIRCULAR APERTURE RECESSED DOWNLIGHT WITH 50DEG OPTICAL DISTRIBUTION.LIGHT FIXTURE EQUIPPED WITH SOLITE LENS AND INTEGRAL LED DIMMING DRIVER. PROVIDE LIGHT FIXTUREWITH NEW CONSTRUCTION HOUSING. SELF-FLANGED BEVELED TRIM FINISH SHALL BE AS DETERMINED BYARCHITECT.

8

SD1-ALT005 USAI LIGHTING BEVEL SERIES:9800 XXX P RDB100-NC VOLT


FOCAL POINTFD4 2.5 ROUND SERIES

1 35W MR16 HALOGEN IRLAMP, 35DEGREE, GU5.3

BASE

GE CONSTANT COLORPRECISE IR:

Q35MR16/HIR/CCG35

120 DIMMING:MLV

(100% - 0%)

37 37 NOMINAL 3"-1.5"(DIA) X 5.5"(H) CIRCULAR APERTURE RECESSED MR16 HALOGEN DOWNLIGHT. LIGHT FIXTUREEQUIPPED WITH PRISMATIC LENS AND INTEGRAL 12V LOW-VOLTAGE MAGNETIC TRANSFORMER. PROVIDE LIGHTFIXTURE WITH NEW CONSTRUCTION HOUSING. SELF-FLANGED BEVELED TRIM FINISH SHALL BE AS DETERMINEDBY ARCHITECT. PROVIDE WITH FACTORY INSTALLED 37W REDUCED WATTAGE LABEL.

8

SD2 USAI LIGHTING BEVELED MINI SERIES:2231B1 S XXXLRTA3 8420 M2 27KS 25 NC VOLT DIML6A AL55D





(100% - <1%)

20 22 NOMINAL 3"-1.5"(DIA) X 5.5"(H) CIRCULAR APERTURE RECESSED ADJUSTABLE DOWNLIGHT WITH ADJUSTABILITYMECHANISM TO ALLOW FOR 362DEG HORIZONTAL ROTATION AND 40DEG VERTICAL TILT - FULLY LOCKABLE ONBOTH AXIS. LIGHT FIXTURE USES NATIVE 25DEG BEAM DISTRIBUTION, PROVIDE WITH OPTICAL ACCESSORYMODIFYING OPTICS TO A 45DEG BEAM DISTRIBUTION HELD IN PLACE BY INTERNAL ACCESSORY HOLDER. LIGHTFIXTURE EQUIPPED WITH SOLITE LENS AND INTEGRAL LED DIMMING DRIVER. PROVIDE LIGHT FIXTURE WITHNEW CONSTRUCTION HOUSING. SELF-FLANGED BEVELED TRIM FINISH SHALL BE AS DETERMINED BYARCHITECT.

SD2-ALT004 USAI LIGHTING BEVELED MINI SERIES:2231B1 S XXXLRTA3 8420 M2 27KS 25 NC VOLT DIML2 AL55D




277 DIMMING:0-10V

(100% - 10%)

20 22 NOMINAL 3"-1.5"(DIA) X 5.5"(H) CIRCULAR APERTURE RECESSED ADJUSTABLE DOWNLIGHT WITH ADJUSTABILITYMECHANISM TO ALLOW FOR 362DEG HORIZONTAL ROTATION AND 40DEG VERTICAL TILT - FULLY LOCKABLE ONBOTH AXIS. LIGHT FIXTURE USES NATIVE 25DEG BEAM DISTRIBUTION, PROVIDE WITH OPTICAL ACCESSORYMODIFYING OPTICS TO A 45DEG BEAM DISTRIBUTION HELD IN PLACE BY INTERNAL ACCESSORY HOLDER. LIGHTFIXTURE EQUIPPED WITH SOLITE LENS AND INTEGRAL LED DIMMING DRIVER. PROVIDE LIGHT FIXTURE WITHNEW CONSTRUCTION HOUSING. SELF-FLANGED BEVELED TRIM FINISH SHALL BE AS DETERMINED BYARCHITECT.

8

SD2-ALT005 USAI LIGHTING BEVEL SERIES:9835 XXX P RDB101-NC VOLT




BASE


Q35MR16/HIR/CCG35

120 DIMMING:MLV

(100% - 0%)

37 37 NOMINAL 3"-1.5"(DIA) X 5.5"(H) CIRCULAR APERTURE RECESSED ADJUSTABLE MR16 HALOGEN DOWNLIGHT WITHADJUSTABILITY MECHANISM TO ALLOW FOR 362DEG HORIZONTAL ROTATION AND 40DEG VERTICAL TILT - FULLYLOCKABLE ON BOTH AXIS. LIGHT FIXTURE EQUIPPED WITH PRISMATIC LENS AND INTEGRAL 12V LOW-VOLTAGEMAGNETIC TRANSFORMER. PROVIDE LIGHT FIXTURE WITH NEW CONSTRUCTION HOUSING. SELF-FLANGEDBEVELED TRIM FINISH SHALL BE AS DETERMINED BY ARCHITECT. PROVIDE WITH FACTORY INSTALLED 37WREDUCED WATTAGE LABEL.

8

SD3 USAI LIGHTING BEVELED MINI SERIES:2251 B1 XXXLTRW3 6020 M2 27KS NC VOLT DIML6A





(100% - <1%)

20 23 NOMINAL 3"(DIA) X 5.5"(H) CIRCULAR APERTURE RECESSED LENS WALLWASH DOWNLIGHT WITH FIXEDASYMMETRICAL OPTICS. LIGHT FIXTURE EQUIPPED WITH MICRO-DIFFUSION WALL WASH LENS AND INTEGRALLED DIMMING DRIVER. PROVIDE LIGHT FIXTURE WITH NEW CONSTRUCTION HOUSING. SELF-FLANGED BEVELEDTRIM FINISH SHALL BE AS DETERMINED BY ARCHITECT.

SD3-ALT004 USAI LIGHTING BEVELED MINI SERIES:2251 B1 XXXLTRW3 6020 M2 27KS NC VOLT DIML2




277 DIMMING:0-10V

(100% - 10%)

20 23 NOMINAL 3"(DIA) X 5.5"(H) CIRCULAR APERTURE RECESSED LENS WALLWASH DOWNLIGHT WITH FIXEDASYMMETRICAL OPTICS. LIGHT FIXTURE EQUIPPED WITH MICRO-DIFFUSION WALL WASH LENS AND INTEGRALLED DIMMING DRIVER. PROVIDE LIGHT FIXTURE WITH NEW CONSTRUCTION HOUSING. SELF-FLANGED BEVELEDTRIM FINISH SHALL BE AS DETERMINED BY ARCHITECT.

8

SD3-ALT005 USAI LIGHTING BEVEL SERIES:9855 XXX RDB102-NC VOLT




BASE


Q35MR16/HIR/CCG35

120 DIMMING:MLV

(100% - 0%)

50 50 NOMINAL 3"(DIA) X 5.5"(H) CIRCULAR APERTURE RECESSED LENS WALLWASH MR16 HALOGEN DOWNLIGHT WITHFIXED ASYMMETRICAL OPTICS. LIGHT FIXTURE EQUIPPED WITH MICRO-DIFFUSION WALL WASH LENS ANDINTEGRAL 12V LOW-VOLTAGE MAGNETIC TRANSFORMER. PROVIDE LIGHT FIXTURE WITH NEW CONSTRUCTIONHOUSING. SELF-FLANGED BEVELED TRIM FINISH SHALL BE AS DETERMINED BY ARCHITECT. PROVIDE WITHFACTORY INSTALLED 37W REDUCED WATTAGE LABEL.

8

SD4 USAI LIGHTING BEVELED MINI SERIES:2131 B1 S XXXLSTA3 8420 M2 27KS 25 NC VOLT DIML6A AL80D

LUCIFER LIGHTING#3SE SERIES




(100% - <1%)

20 23 NOMINAL 3"(SQ) X 5.5"(H) SQUARE APERTURE RECESSED ADJUSTABLE DOWNLIGHT WITH ADJUSTABILITYMECHANISM TO ALLOW FOR 362DEG HORIZONTAL ROTATION AND 40DEG VERTICAL TILT - FULLY LOCKABLE ONBOTH AXIS. LIGHT FIXTURE USES NATIVE 25DEG BEAM DISTRIBUTION, PROVIDE WITH OPTICAL ACCESSORYMODIFYING OPTICS TO A 55DEG BEAM DISTRIBUTION HELD IN PLACE BY INTERNAL ACCESSORY HOLDER. LIGHTFIXTURE EQUIPPED WITH SOLITE LENS AND INTEGRAL LED DIMMING DRIVER. PROVIDE LIGHT FIXTURE WITHNEW CONSTRUCTION HOUSING. SELF-FLANGED BEVELED TRIM FINISH SHALL BE AS DETERMINED BYARCHITECT. LIGHT FIXTURE RECESSED IN A WOOD PANEL CEILING; COORDINATE THE MAXIMUM CEILINGTHICKNESS WITH FINAL ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS.

SD4-ALT004 USAI LIGHTING BEVELED MINI SERIES:2131 B1 S XXXLSTA3 8420 M2 27KS 25 NC VOLT DIML2 AL80D

LUCIFER LIGHTING#3SE SERIES




(100% - <1%)

20 23 NOMINAL 3"(SQ) X 5.5"(H) SQUARE APERTURE RECESSED ADJUSTABLE DOWNLIGHT WITH ADJUSTABILITYMECHANISM TO ALLOW FOR 362DEG HORIZONTAL ROTATION AND 40DEG VERTICAL TILT - FULLY LOCKABLE ONBOTH AXIS. LIGHT FIXTURE USES NATIVE 25DEG BEAM DISTRIBUTION, PROVIDE WITH OPTICAL ACCESSORYMODIFYING OPTICS TO A 55DEG BEAM DISTRIBUTION HELD IN PLACE BY INTERNAL ACCESSORY HOLDER. LIGHTFIXTURE EQUIPPED WITH SOLITE LENS AND INTEGRAL LED DIMMING DRIVER. PROVIDE LIGHT FIXTURE WITHNEW CONSTRUCTION HOUSING. SELF-FLANGED BEVELED TRIM FINISH SHALL BE AS DETERMINED BYARCHITECT. LIGHT FIXTURE RECESSED IN A WOOD PANEL CEILING; COORDINATE THE MAXIMUM CEILINGTHICKNESS WITH FINAL ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS.

8

SD4-ALT005 USAI LIGHTING BEVEL SERIES:9363 XXX P BL101A VOLT


FOCAL POINTFD4 2.5 SQUARE SERIES


BASE


Q35MR16/HIR/CCG35

120 DIMMING:MLV

(100% - 0%)

37 37 NOMINAL 3"(SQ) X 5.5"(H) SQUARE APERTURE RECESSED ADJUSTABLE MR16 HALOGEN DOWNLIGHT WITHADJUSTABILITY MECHANISM TO ALLOW FOR 362DEG HORIZONTAL ROTATION AND 40DEG VERTICAL TILT - FULLYLOCKABLE ON BOTH AXIS. LIGHT FIXTURE EQUIPPED WITH PRISMATIC LENS AND INTEGRAL 12V LOW-VOLTAGEMAGNETIC TRANSFORMER. PROVIDE LIGHT FIXTURE WITH NEW CONSTRUCTION HOUSING. SELF-FLANGEDBEVELED TRIM FINISH SHALL BE AS DETERMINED BY ARCHITECT. LIGHT FIXTURE RECESSED IN A WOOD PANELCEILING; COORDINATE THE MAXIMUM CEILING THICKNESS WITH FINAL ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS.PROVIDE WITH FACTORY INSTALLED 37W REDUCED WATTAGE LABEL.

8

SD5 USAI LIGHTING BEVELED MINI SERIES:2231 B1 S XXXLRTA3 8420 M2 35KS 25 NC VOLT DIML2 AL55D





(100% - 10%)

18 20 NOMINAL 3"-1.5"(DIA) X 5.5"(H) CIRCULAR APERTURE RECESSED ADJUSTABLE DOWNLIGHT WITH ADJUSTABILITYMECHANISM TO ALLOW FOR 362DEG HORIZONTAL ROTATION AND 40DEG VERTICAL TILT - FULLY LOCKABLE ONBOTH AXIS. LIGHT FIXTURE USES NATIVE 25DEG BEAM DISTRIBUTION, PROVIDE WITH OPTICAL ACCESSORYMODIFYING OPTICS TO A 45DEG BEAM DISTRIBUTION HELD IN PLACE BY INTERNAL ACCESSORY HOLDER. LIGHTFIXTURE EQUIPPED WITH SOLITE LENS AND INTEGRAL LED DIMMING DRIVER. PROVIDE LIGHT FIXTURE WITHNEW CONSTRUCTION HOUSING. SELF-FLANGED BEVELED TRIM FINISH SHALL BE AS DETERMINED BYARCHITECT. LIGHT FIXTURE LOCATED IN EXISTING CORRIDOR, COORDINATE LED MODULE COLORTEMPERATURE TO BE THE SAME AS THE ADJACENT LAMPED FIXTURES; CONFIRM WITH ON-SITE FACILITIES.

SDR EXISTINGRELOCATEDCOMPACTFLUORESCENTCORRIDORDOWNLIGHT

- 277 0 0

SDRE EXISTINGRELOCATEDCOMPACTFLUORESCENTCORRIDORDOWNLIGHT ONEMERGENCYPOWER

- 277 0 0

SF1 TIVOLI LIGHTING TIVOTAPE SERIES:TPL SB 3 I 27 C 24ADUL 240 2 4 24 DDIM OT 1 4 5 DRGLR CHAN 6.5 / S LNS LF 6.5

EDGE LIGHTINGMICRO GRAZE LIGHT CHANNEL

LUMINIIKENDO M GRAZE SERIES

- LED PER MANUFACTURER80 CRI, 2700K

216 LUMENS/FT50,000 HRS

24 DIMMING:0-10V

(100% - 10%)[REMOTE]

3 4 NOMINAL 5/16"(W) X 1/8"(T) X VARYING LENGTH CONTINUOUS FLEXIBLE LIGHT FIXTURE WITH LED DIODES ON 5/16"CENTER SPACING. LIGHT FIXTURE IS FIELD CUTTABLE ON 2" INCREMENTS; COORDINATE IN-FIELD CONNECTORSAS NEEDED - REFER TO ELECTRICAL LIGHTING DOCUMENTS AND ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS FOR ADDITIONALINFORMATION. LIGHT FIXTURE EQUIPPED WITH REMOTE 24V SECONDARY TRANSFORMER AND DIMMINGINTERFACE. PROVIDE FIXTURE WITH FIELD CUTTABLE SURFACE MOUNTED EXTRUDED ALUMINUM CHANNEL ANDLIGHT FOCUSING LENS MOUNTING ACCESSORY.

1,2

SF2 EDGE LIGHTING CIRRUS CHANNEL D1 SERIESCC D1 5WDC XXX 27K BZ MODPSB 2X96W 010 24VDC

ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING WORKSLIGHTPLANE LP1 SERIES MOD

OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT



277 DIMMING:0-10V

(100% - 10%)[REMOTE]

5 6 NOMINAL 1"(W) X 1"(T) X VARYING LENGTH SURFACE MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURE WITH EXTRUDED FROSTEDACRYLIC SNAP-IN LENS. CUSTOM RECTILINEAR ARRANGEMENT, OUTLINING (3) COFFER CEILING ELEMENTS,PROVIDING AN INSCRIBED LUMINOUS LINE OF LIGHT FACING INWARD. PROVIDE LIT INWARD TURNED MITERCORNER - REFER TO ELECTRICAL LIGHTING DOCUMENTS AND ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS FOR ADDITIONALINFORMATION. LIGHT FIXTURE EQUIPPED WITH REMOTE 24V SECONDARY TRANSFORMER AND DIMMINGINTERFACE.

1,2,7

SF3 ECOSENSELIGHTING

TROV SERIES:L35 1 XXX 04 27 80 MULTI 120

TRAXON LIGHTINGCOVE LIGHT AC DIM

PHILIPS-COLOR KINETICSEW COVE QLX POWERCORE



DIMMING:ELV

(100% - <1%)

4 5 NOMINAL 1.64"(W) X 1.41"(T) X VARYING LENGTH TANDEM MOUNTED COVE UPLIGHT WITH SYMMETRICAL 120DEGOPTICAL DISTRIBUTION. LIGHT FIXTURE EQUIPPED WITH ADJUSTABLE MECHANISM ALLOWING FOR 45DEG TILT.COORDINATE AND PROVIDE IN-FIELD CONNECTORS AS NEEDED - REFER TO ELECTRICAL LIGHTING DOCUMENTSFOR LIGHT FIXTURE LENGTH INFORMATION. LIGHT FIXTURE PROVIDED WITH INTEGRAL DIMMING DRIVER.

1,3,5

SF4 TIVOLI LIGHTING TIVOTAPE SERIES:TPL SB 3 I 27 C 24ADUL 240 2 4 24 DDIM OT 1 4 5 DTPL AL CHAN 4A 4 / TPL AL CHAN 4A LNSF

EDGE LIGHTINGMILLWORK LIGHT CHANNEL SERIES

LUMINIIKENDO R SERIES



24 DIMMING:0-10V

(100% - 10%)[REMOTE]

3 4 NOMINAL 5/16"(W) X 1/8"(T) X VARYING LENGTH CONTINUOUS FLEXIBLE LIGHT FIXTURE WITH LED DIODES ON 5/16"CENTER SPACING. LIGHT FIXTURE IS FIELD CUTTABLE ON 2" INCREMENTS; COORDINATE IN-FIELD CONNECTORSAS NEEDED - REFER TO ELECTRICAL LIGHTING DOCUMENTS AND ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS FOR ADDITIONALINFORMATION. LIGHT FIXTURE EQUIPPED WITH REMOTE 24V SECONDARY TRANSFORMER AND DIMMINGINTERFACE. PROVIDE FIXTURE WITH FIELD CUTTABLE RECESSED EXTRUDED ALUMINUM CHANNEL ANDFROSTED LENS MOUNTING ACCESSORY.

1,2

SF5L ROBERTS STEP-LITSYSTEM

RC12LED SERIES:RC LED 2700HB 2 LF-END

OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT - LED PER MANUFACTURER80 CRI, 2700K


24 NON-DIMMING:(ON/OFF)[REMOTE]

2 3 NOMINAL 5"(W) X 3.5"(T) X VARYING LENGTH CONTINUOUS STAIR NOSING LIGHT FIXTURE. LIGHT FIXTURECONSTRUCTED OF EXTRUDED ALUMINUM WITH LED LIGHT CHANNEL ORIENTED FOR DOWNWARD ILLUMINATION.LIGHT FIXTURE TO ACCEPT CARPET BOTH ALONG TREAD AND RISER MOUNTING SURFACES. LIGHT FIXTUREEQUIPPED WITH REMOTE LOW-VOLTAGE LED DRIVER.

1,2,6

SF5R ROBERTS STEP-LITSYSTEM

RC12LED SERIES:RC LED 2700HB XXX RT-END

OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT - LED PER MANUFACTURER80 CRI, 2700K


24 NON-DIMMING:(ON/OFF)[REMOTE]

2 3 SIMILAR TO SF5L EXCEPT FOR RIGHT END FEED. 1,2,6

SF6 TIVOLI LIGHTING TIVOTAPE SERIES:TPL SB 3 I 27 C 24ADUL 240 2 4 24 DDIM OT 1 4 5 DINF F CHAN 8

EDGE LIGHTINGSOFT STRIP SERIES

LUMINIILINE LED 36 SERIES



120 DIMMING:0-10V

(100% - 10%)[REMOTE]

3 4 NOMINAL 5/16"(W) X 1/8"(T) X VARYING LENGTH CONTINUOUS FLEXIBLE LIGHT FIXTURE WITH LED DIODES ON 5/16"CENTER SPACING. LIGHT FIXTURE IS FIELD CUTTABLE ON 2" INCREMENTS; COORDINATE IN-FIELD CONNECTORSAS NEEDED - REFER TO ELECTRICAL LIGHTING DOCUMENTS AND ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS FOR ADDITIONALINFORMATION. LIGHT FIXTURE EQUIPPED WITH REMOTE 24V SECONDARY TRANSFORMER AND DIMMINGINTERFACE. PROVIDE FIXTURE WITH FIELD CUTTABLE SURFACE MOUNTED EXTRUDED FROSTED CHANNELMOUNTING ACCESSORY.

1,2

SP1 RESTORATIONHARDWARE

BISTRO SERIES:BISTRO GLOBE CLEAR GLASS 8-LIGHTCHANDELIER

- 2W G16 LED FILAMENTCLEAR GLOBE WITH

CANDELABRA BASE E12800 LUMENS, 2200K

BULBRITE: LED2G16 22KFIL NOS

120 DIMMING:ELV

(100% - 10%)

480 480 NOMINAL 34"(DIA) X 82"(H) DECORATIVE CHANDELIER WITH 8-LAMP CLEAR GLASS GLOBES CONNECTED VIAMETAL TUBING. METAL FINISH AS DETERMINED BY ARCHITECT. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL ELEVATIONS FORMOUNTING HEIGHT A.F.F.

4

SR1 FOCAL POINT SEEM 4 SERIES:FSM4AL FL 375 35 UNV LD1 XXX WH 4

FINELITEHP-4 SERIES

PRUDENTIAL LIGHTINGBIONIC SERIES



120 DIMMING:ELV

(100% - 10%)

5 6 NOMINAL 3.26"(W) X 4.88"(H) X 4'(L) RECESSED LINEAR ASYMMETRIC LIGHT FIXTURE. LIGHT FIXTURE EQUIPPEDWITH EXTRUDED SNAP-IN FROSTED ACRYLIC LENS. INTERNAL REFLECTOR SYSTEM AND FROSTED TO PROVIDEAN ASYMMETRIC WALL WASH DISTRIBUTION FOR A 24-30" SETBACK FROM FOCAL SURFACE. TIGHTLY SPACEDLED DIODES RESULT IN AN UNIFORMLY LIT LENS. LIGHT FIXTURE PROVIDED WITH AN INTEGRAL LED DIMMINGDRIVER. COORDINATE CEILING MOUNTING OPTION WITH FINAL ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATION. LIGHT FIXTURELOCATED IN EXISTING CORRIDOR, COORDINATE LED MODULE COLOR TEMPERTURE TO BE THE SAME AS THEADJACENT LAMPED FIXTURES; CONFIRM WITH ON-SITE FACILITIES.

1

SR2 A LIGHT ACCOLED ACL5 SERIES:ACL5 8 LS 27 U S U G D-ELDO

FOCAL POINTSEEM2 SERIES

NULITERT2 SERIES




(100% - <1%)

5 6 NOMINAL 2.25"(W) X 3.375"(H) X 8'(L) RECESSED LINEAR LENS DOWNLIGHT. LIGHT FIXTURE EQUIPPED WITHEXTRUDED SNAP-IN FROSTED ACRYLIC LENS. INTERNAL REFLECTOR SYSTEM AND FROSTED TO PROVIDE ANSYMMETRIC DOWNLIGHT DISTRIBUTION. TIGHTLY SPACED LED DIODES RESULT IN AN UNIFORMLY LIT LENS.LIGHT FIXTURE PROVIDED WITH AN INTEGRAL LED DIMMING DRIVER.

1

SW1 RESTORATIONHARDWARE

BISTRO SERIES:BISTRO GLOBE CLEAR GLASS SINGLE SCONCE




120 DIMMING:ELV

(100% - 10%)

60 60 NOMINAL 6"(W) X 7.25"(D) X 11"(H) DECORATIVE SCONCE WITH A SINGLE CLEAR GLASS GLOBE CONNECTED VIAMETAL TUBING. METAL FINISH AS DETERMINED BY ARCHITECT. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL ELEVATIONS FORMOUNTING HEIGHT A.F.F.

4

SW2 RESTORATIONHARDWARE

BISTRO SERIES:BISTRO GLOBE CLEAR GLASS DOUBLESCONCE




120 DIMMING:ELV

(100% - 10%)

120 120 NOMINAL 14"(W) X 7.25"(D) X 11"(H) DECORATIVE SCONCE WITH DOUBLE CLEAR GLASS GLOBES CONNECTED VIAMETAL TUBING. METAL FINISH AS DETERMINED BY ARCHITECT. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL ELEVATIONS FORMOUNTING HEIGHT A.F.F.

4

SXC1 WILLIAMS EXIT/CA-SF-R-AF-BLK-EM-SDT LITHONIA, COLUMBIA - LED PER MANUFACTURER 277 6 6 AC POWERED WITH EMERGENCY BATTERY BACKUP LED EXIT SIGN, CEILING MOUNTED SINGLE FACE WITHBRUSHED ALUMINUM FACE, BLACK HOUSING AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC TEST

GENERAL NOTES:A. ANY PROPRIETARY, SOLE-SOURCED LIGHT FIXTURE LISTED IN THE LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE SHALL BE UNIT PRICED ONLY. NO PACKAGING OR LOT PRICING OF THESE

LIGHT FIXTURES SHALL BE ALLOWED. UNIT PRICES SHALL BE CLEARLY IDENTIFIED ON THE BID FORM. NO PACKAGING OF LIGHT FIXTURES ALLOWED, REFER TOSPECIFICATION SECTION 265100 OR 265600 FOR DEFINITION AND COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS.

B. REPRESENTATIVE AGENTS SHALL BE ALLOWED TO OFFER MINI-LOT PRICING (MLP) FOR LIGHT FIXTURES SPECIFED IN 265100 AND 265600 ONLY. REFER TO SPECIFICATION265100 FOR DEFINITION, TERMS AND LIMITATIONS OF MLP.

C. PACKAGING OF LIGHT FIXTURES WILL NOT BE CONSIDERED OR APPROVED.D. LIGHTING CONTROLS PRICING, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THOSE REFERENCED IN 260923 AND 262726, SHALL BE COMPLETELY SEPARATE OF ANY LIGHT FIXTURE

PRICING. ANY LIGHTING CONTROLS PRICING THAT IS SUBMITTED WITH LIGHT FIXTURE PRICING (UNIT OR MINI-LOT) WILL BE IMMEDIATELY REJECTED IN ITS ENTIRETY.E. VERIFY CEILING CONDITIONS AND COORDINATE LIGHT FIXTURE MOUNTING HARDWARE AND TRIMS NEEDED TO SUIT CEILING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING. PROVIDE

EARTHQUAKE MOUNTING AS NECESSARY.F. VERIFY QUANTITIES, MODEL NUMBERS AND DESCRIPTIONS WITH MANUFACTURER PRIOR TO PLACING ORDER.G. VERIFY FINISH AND COLOR WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO PLACING ORDER.H. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS AND DETAILS FOR EXACT LOCATIONS, MOUNTING HEIGHTS AND ADDITIONAL MOUNTING INFORMATION. CONTACT ARCHITECT

IMMEDIATELY IF THERE ARE DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN THE ARCHITECTURAL AND ELECTRICAL LIGHTING PLANS.I. CATALOG NUMBERS SHALL NOT BE CONSIDERED COMPLETE AND MATERIAL SHALL NOT BE ORDERED BY MANUFACTURER AND CATALOG NUMBERS ONLY. FIRST READ

THE COMPLETE DESCRIPTION, NOTES AND SPECIFICATIONS IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE CATALOG NUMBER TO DETERMINE THE EXACT MATERIAL AND ACCESSORIESTO BE ORDERED. THE MANUFACTURES LISTED ARE THE BASIS FOR THE DESIGN.

J. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL LIGHT FIXTURES UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.K. REFER TO DIVISION 26 SPECIFICATIONS FOR ACCEPTABLE LAMP/LED AND BALLAST/DRIVER MANUFACTURERS AND ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.L. REFER TO LIGHTING CONTROLS INFORMATION, INCLUDING SCHEDULES AND SCHEMATICS FOR CONTROL INFORMATION.M. REFER TO LIGHTING CONTACTOR OR RELAY SCHEDULE AND PANELBOARD SCHEDULES FOR CONTROL INFORMATION.N. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR FINAL TARGETING OF LIGHT FIXTURE UNDER THE DIRECTION, AND ACCORDING TO THE RECOMMENDATIONS OF THE LIGHTING

DESIGNER. AIMING SHALL TAKE PLACE AFTER DARK, AT A MUTUALLY AGREED-UPON TIME. ALL COSTS ASSOCIATED WITH THIS EFFORT SHALL BE INCLUDED IN THE BID.O. FOR ANY LIGHT FIXTURES INSTALLED WITHIN WOOD OR PANELIZED METAL CEILINGS, CONFIRM LIGHT FIXTURE TRIM COMPATIBILITY WITH CEILING TYPE A THICKNESS

PRIOR TO SUBMITTALS. INDICATE CONFIRMATION OF CEILING COMPATIBILITY WITHIN SUBMITTALS.P. CONTRACTOR TO USE ALLOWANCES INDICATED FOR DECORATIVE FIXTURES. REFER TO SPECIFICATION SECTION FOR DEFINITION OF WHAT ALLOWANCES ENTAIL.Q. LED LIFE IN HOURS INDICATED ON LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE REPRESENTS LIFE AT L70.R. CATALOG NUMBER REPRESENTS MANUFACTURER LISTED FIRST. OTHER MANUFACTURERS LISTED ARE CONSIDERED EQUIVALENT FOR SUBSTITUTION.S. EQUIVALENT LIST MANUFACTURERS SHALL MEET THE MINIMUM LUMEN OUTPUT AND MAXIMUM ALLOWED WATTAGE LISTED IN THE LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE FOR FINAL

ACCEPTANCE. MANUFACTURER TO FURNISH LED PHOTOMETRIC SHOWING COMPLIANCE WITH STATED LUMENS, CANDELA, AND BEAM DISTRIBUTION PER DESCRIPTIONTO COMPLY WITH CALCULATED LIGHT LEVELS. INFORMATION DURING SUBMITTALS.

T. MANUFACTURER TO FURNISH LED FIXTURE WITH SPECIFIED DIMMING DRIVER TYPE (FOR EXAMPLE, 0-10V, DMX, FORWARD PHASE DIMMING, ELECTRONIC LOW VOLTAGE,ETC.) ENSURE CONTROL WIRES AND POWER WIRING ARE PULLED FROM DIMMING MODULE WITHIN DIMMING CABINET/PANELS/CONTROLLER TO LIGHT FIXTURES AS PERMANUFACTURER'S WIRING DIAGRAMS TO ENSURE DIMMING, E.G. 4-WIRES FOR 0-10V AND DMX AND 3-WIRES FOR LUTRON HI-LUME. COORDINATE DIMMING REQUIREMENTSPER EACH LED SYSTEM, FIXTURE MANUFACTURER AND APPROVED LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR DIMMABLE LED FIXTURES.

U. PRESET LIGHTING SCENES, LIGHT LEVEL SETTINGS SHALL BE ESTABLISHED WITH CLIENT INPUT DURING LIGHTING/CONTROL SYSTEM SET-UP AND REQUIRE FINAL WALKTHRU WITH CLIENT AND ARCHITECT FOR APPROVAL.

LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE NOTES:1. BALLAST/DRIVER WATTAGE AND VA ARE LISTED AS PER LINEAR FOOT VALUES.2. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE A COMPLETE AND OPERATIONAL LED SYSTEM INCLUDING REMOTE LED DRIVER(S) SUITABLE FOR GIVEN LOAD. SYSTEM TO INCLUDE LINEAR

RUN OF LED, LENGTH OF LED RUN TO MATCH AND MAXIMIZE LENGTH OF RUN AS PER ARCHITECTURAL DOCUMENTS AND COORDINATED WITH DETAILS. END OF LED RUNTO HAVE POWER CORD OUT END OF FIXTURE CONNECTING TO REMOTE LED DRIVER LOCATED IN AN ACCESSIBLE, WELL VENTILATED AREA TO BE DETERMINED ON SITE.

3. TANDEM MOUNTED CONTINUOUS RUN FIXTURE MOUNTED WITHIN ARCHITECTURAL CEILING DETAIL. REFER TO ELECTRICAL LIGHTING DOCUMENTS FOR OVERALL LENGTHINTENT. PROVIDE FINAL QUANTITIES PER IN-FIELD MEASUREMENTS, QUANTITIES SHALL BE BASED ON USING 4-FOOT LENGTHS WITH 1-FOOT LENGTHS USED ONLY WHERENEEDED TO MAINTAIN NOTED END RUN TOLERANCES FROM SURFACES.

4. DUE TO AESTHETIC AND-OR PERFORMANCE CRITERIA, SPECIFIED MANUFACTURER SHALL BE THE ONLY MANUFACTURER ALLOWED TO BID UNLESS OTHERWISE APPROVEDBY ARCHITECT.

5. LIGHT FIXTURES SHALL BE MOUNTED CONTINUOUSLY END-TO-END IN COVE AND CENTERED WITHIN COVE LENGTH. LIGHT FIXTURES SHALL TERMINATE WITHIN 3" OF EACHEND OF COVE.

6. DURING SUBMITTALS, PROVIDE FACTORY-GENERATED SHOP DRAWINGS INDICATING CONTINUOUS RUN LENGTH COORDINATING WITH PRE-CAST CONCRETE SHOPDRAWINGS, CONNECTION CABLE REQUIREMENTS AND CONTROL DEVICE QUANTITIES. REFER TO DRAWING TO COORDINATE LEFT AND RIGHT END FEEDS.

7. DURING SUBMITTALS, PROVIDE FACTORY-GENERATED SHOP DRAWINGS BASED ON ON-SITE FIELD MEASUREMENTS INDICATING LAYOUT/QUANTITIES OF STRAIGHT ANDCORNER UNITS, CONNECTION COMPONENTS, AND REMOTE POWER SUPPLIES.

8. FOR LIGHT FIXTURES INDICATED AS PART OF THE ALTERNATE BID, PROVIDE SEPARATE UNIT/MINI-LOT PRICING OF LIGHT FIXTURES PER ALTERNATE NUMBER.

BP2_01


BP2_01 04/18/2016 BP2_Addendum 01

A

R27.5 R27

R27.1

R26.6

R26

R25.9

R25.3

R25.1

R24.8R24.9

R25

R24.7

R24.5

R24

R23

R22.2

R22

R20.6

OOO

R3

A.1

24.2

R22.8

R21.9

R21

R20.5

R20.7

4" S ETR

3" V ETR 1

2

3" S2

4" S 4" S ETR4" S ETR FFA/TFB

3/4" HWR ETR

1/2" HWR ETR

3

3/4" HWR2

3/4"

HW

R

4

5

3" S

3" S

2" S2" S

3" S

4" S

3" S

3" S

2" S 22

2

2

2" S 2

3" S

3" S

2" V

2

13" V

3" S

1

2

3" S4" S

3" S

(TYP)6

(TYP)7

(TYP)8

3" S2

4" S

3" S

2" S

4" S

3" S

2" S

3" S

2" S

3" S

4" S

2

2

2

22

2

4" S

3" S2

4" S

3" V

4" S

4" S

2

1

9

4" S ETR

3/4" HW

3/4" HW1

1

1" CW1" HW

1" HW1" CW 2FCV

1/2" HWR

3

BP2 P4 - 1

3" S

2" V

10

1

2

A

B

D

C

3" S 2

BP2_01

2" V1

BP2_01

BP2_01

FAXTEL

CB

A D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


PROJECT NORTH

®

TM

®

®


913-742-5000



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400



1-224-717-1555

BID PACKAGE #2



913 742 5000 913 742 5001LENEXA, KS 66214


www.hei-eng.com

FO

R R

EF

ER

EN

CE

ON

LY

- N

OT

FO

R C

ON

ST

RU

CT

I ON

4/15/20 16 2:22:02 PM

Ban

kers

Life

Fie

ldho

use

1 25

S. P

enns

ylv a

nia

St.,

Indi

anap

olis

, IN

462

40





04.18.2016

MAIN CONCOURSELEVEL - PLUMBING

PLAN - AREA D

BP2 P2 - 3D

16.4224.00

04.08.2016

2016

M. D

RE

W .

RIM

ME

R


1550002436

1/8" = 1'-0"1 150 - MAIN CONCOURSE - PLUMBING PLAN - AREA D

1 TFA2 FFA3 TFB4 CONNECT 3/4"HWR INTO EXISTING

3/4"HWR, CONTRACTOR TO VERIFYLOCATION IN FIELD.RECONFIGURE PIPING ASREQUIRED.

5 CONNECT NEW 4"S INTO EXISTINGSANITARY PIPING, CONTRACTORTO VERIFY LOCATION IN FIELD.RECONFIGURE EXISTING PIPINGAS REQUIRED. REPAIR FLOOR TOMATCH EXISTING.

6 ROUTE PIPING WITHIN BEAMPOCKETS WHERE POSSIBLE.

7 PROVIDE DRIP PAN UNDER NEWSANITARY PIPING ABOVE EXISTINGKITCHEN/CONCESSION. ROUTE3/4" DRAIN TO NEAREST EXISTINGFLOOR SINK.

8 PAINT ALL EXPOSED PIPINGBLACK, COORDINATE COLOR WITHARCHITECT.

9 EXTEND NEW 4"S TO NEARESTEXISTING 4"S OF ADEQUATEELEVATION. CONTRACTOR TOVERIFY TIE-IN POINT IN FIELD.RECONFIGURE/REROUTE PIPINGAS REQUIRED.

10 EXTEND NEW 3"S TO NEARESTEXISTING 3"S OR LARGER OFADEQUATE ELEVATION.CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY TIE-INPOINT IN FIELD.RECONFIGURE/REROUTE PIPINGAS REQUIRED.

PLUMBING PLAN NOTES


BP2_01 04/18/2016 BP2_Addendum 01

(5)

(5)

(5)

(5)

(5)

(5)

(5)

G

DC

(5)

R20.4

NNN

OOO

PPP

R7

R20.5

R20

R19.1

R19

R18.8

7

4" S ETR1

4" V ETR24" V

4" S

4" V

4" S

2" C

W E

TR

1 1/

2" H

W E

TR

2" CW ETR

3/4" HW ETR

2" V

ET

R

2" V ETR2" V

5" V

4" S

4" S

4" S ETR

4" S ETR

2" S ETR

4" S ETR

4" S ETR

5" V ETR

3

4

3

3

3

3

1 1/

2" H

W E

TR

2" C

W E

TR

(TYP)5

3" S ETR

1 1/2" V ETR

34

6

6

6

6

6

7

6

8

4" S ETR

6

4" S ETR

6

9

(TYP)5

3/4"

HW

ET

R

3/4"

CW

ET

R

4" S

1 1/

2" C

W E

TR

1 1/

2" H

W E

TR

3" S

ET

R

3" S

ETR

1 1/2" HW ETR

1 1/2" CW ETR

(TYP)10

4" V

4" V

3" S3"

S

4" V

17.011

4.030E

1.163

1.068

1.001

1.072

2.012 1.001

1.064

1.072

4.175E

4.088

FS1 3"

3/4" CW

DCV1

ETR FD

FD2 3"

2" V

11

2

12

3" S1

FCO

FS13"

FS13"

FD1 2"

FD1 2"

1 1/2" G HEADER

1 1/4" CW

11

BP2 P4 - 1TYP

FD12"

TMV

1" HW

1" CW

1 1/

2" C

W1

1/2"

HW

1313

14

15

2" V2

3" V

TMV

FS13"

2" S1

2" S

2" V

1

2

FS13"

14.001

7.039

22.102B

10

BP2 P4 - 1

2" V2

2" V

TMV

3/4" HW 3/4" CW

2" V

15

4" S

3" V

3/4" HW2

3/4" CW3/4" HW2

3/4" CW3/4" HW2

3/4" HW3/4" CW2

-

---

WHA

WHA(TYP)

1 1/2" G HEADER11

BP2 P4 - 1

3/4" HW

3/4" CW3/4" HW

3/4" CW

BP2_01

FS13"

BP2_01

(140 CFH)

(60 CFH)

BP2_01

BP2_01

FAXTEL

CB

A D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


PROJECT NORTH

®

TM

®

®


913-742-5000



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400



1-224-717-1555

BID PACKAGE #2



913 742 5000 913 742 5001LENEXA, KS 66214


www.hei-eng.com

FO

R R

EF

ER

EN

CE

ON

LY

- N

OT

FO

R C

ON

ST

RU

CT

I ON

4/15/20 16 2:22:10 PM

Ban

kers

Life

Fie

ldho

use

1 25

S. P

enns

ylv a

nia

St.,

Indi

anap

olis

, IN

462

40





04.18.2016

ENLARGEDPLUMBING PLAN

BP2 P3 - 1

16.4224.00

04.08.2016

2016

M. D

RE

W .

RIM

ME

R


1550002436

1 TFB2 FFB3 FFA4 TFA5 REFER TO

ARCHITECTURAL/FOODSERVICEDOCUMENTS FOR EXISTINGPLUMBING FIXTURES TO REMAIN.PROTECT FROM DAMAGE DURINGDEMOLITION.

6 CONNECT EXISTING SANITARYFROM FIXTURES ABOVE INTO NEWSANITARY SEWER AT THIS LEVEL.RECONFIGURE PIPING ASREQUIRED TO MEET FIELDCONDITIONS.

7 CONNECT NEW 4"S INTO EXISTING4"S STACK. CONFIGURE PIPING ASREQUIRED TO MEET FIELDCONDITIONS.

8 CONNECT EXISTING VENT PIPINGFROM EXISTING FIXTURES AT THISLEVEL TO REMAIN INTO NEW VENTPIPING AT THIS LEVEL.RECONFIGURE PIPING ASREQUIRED TO MEET FIELDCONDITIONS.

9 CONNECT NEW 5"V INTO EXISTING5"V STACK. CONFIGURE PIPING ASREQUIRED TO MEET FIELDCONDITIONS.

10 PROVIDE DRIP PAN UNDER ALLEXISTING SANITARY PIPING ABOVEKITCHEN. ROUTE 3/4" DRAIN TONEAREST FLOOR SINK.

11 CONNECT 2"V INTO EXISTING 2"V.CONTRACTOR TO VERIFYLOCATION IN FIELD,RECONFIGURE PIPING ASREQUIRED TO MEET FIELDCONDITIONS.

12 EXTEND NEW 3/4"CW TO EXISTINGCOLD WATER PIPING 3/4" ORLARGER. CONTRACTOR SHALLVERIFY EXISTING PIPINGLOCATION IN FIELD,RECONFIGURE NEW/EXISTINGPIPING AS REQUIRED.

13 RELOCATED EXISTING HAND SINKAND MOP SINK. PROVIDE WITHNEW SUPPLIES AND WASTE.PROVIDE HAND SINK WITH ADAINSULATION ON SUPPLIES ANDWASTE.

14 CONNECT 1-1/2"CW AND 1-1/2"HWINTO EXISTING DOMESTIC WATERMAINS, CONTRACTOR TO VERIFYLOCATION IN FIELD.RECONFIGURE PIPING ASREQUIRED.

15 CONNECT 3/4"CW AND 3/4"HW INTOEXISTING DOMESTIC WATERMAINS, CONTRACTOR TO VERIFYLOCATION IN FIELD.RECONFIGURE PIPING ASREQUIRED.

PLUMBING PLAN NOTES

1/4" = 1'-0"1 ENLARGED PLUMBING PLAN - LOGE CLUB BAR & KITCHEN - AREA C


BP2_01 04/18/2016 BP2_Addendum 01

48 24

48 24

4414W

TO PERMIT SERVICE &




MAINTENANCE.

18" RECOMMENDED,

SUFFICIENT ACCESS

R22.2

R22

R20.6

R21.9

R21

(TYP)1

2" V ETR

3/4" CW ETR

3/4" HW ETR

1 1/

4" H

W E

TR

1 1/

4" C

W E

TR

1 1/

2" V

ET

R

4" S ETR

1 1/2" S ETR

3" S

4" S

4" S

4" S

4" S

3" S

3" V

ET

R

3" S ETR

3" S ETR

3" S ETR

2

2

2

3" S ETR

1 1/2" V ETR3

2 3" S ETR2

4" S ETR

3" S ETR

4" S(TYP)

4

3" S ETR3"

V

3" S ETR2

3" S

3" S 5

(TYP)6

1" M

PG

ET

R

4" S

1 1/

4" H

W1

1/4"

CW

7

8

(TYP)8

8

8

9

10

1/2" HWR ETR

3/4" HWR 5

3" V ETR

4" S ETR

11

5

128

3/4" HWR

GSV1

GPR-1

(TYP)4

1314

15

1" MPG

(TYP)16

3" V

3" V

ET

R

TP-2 17

TP-2

(TYP)17

2.003D

8.002

8.018E

8.029E

2.002

12.141

14.002

17.020

17.065

17.013

14.011

14.002E

4.021

4.085

15.026

FD1 2"

2

3/4" HWR

18

TMV

WHA(TYP)

3/4" HW3/4" CW

1" CW1" HW

1" HW

1" CW

1 1/

2" G

1 1/

2" G

3/4" CW

1 1/4" HW

1 1/4" CW

3/4" CW3/4" HW

8

BP2 P4 - 1

FS13" GT1

9

BP2 P4 - 13" S

FS13"

FD1 2"

FD1 2"

FD12"

FD12"

FS1 3"

DCV-1

7

BP2 P4 - 1

RPZ-2

FS13"

1" HW

1" CW

FCO

FS1 3"

DCV1

1/2" HWR

3" V

TMVFD1 2"

FCO

3" V11

3" V

2" V

ET

R

19

3" V

3" V

1" HW1" CW 5

FCV3

BP2 P4 - 1

RPZ-1

ETR FD

(TYP 2)20

WHA (TYP)

3/4" CW

3/4" CW

3/4" CW

DCV-1

3/4"

CW

FS13"

3" V11

3" V

2" V

2" V 11

1/2"

CO

2

21

1" HW

3/4" CW

3/4" CW

3/4" HW

3/4" HW

3/4" HW3/4" CW

1" C

W

1 1/2" G HEADER11

BP2 P4 - 1FS13"

(244 CFH)

(444

CF

H)

BP2_01

BP2_01

3" S 5 22

2" V11

BP2_01

BP2_01

1" H

W

FCO

6

BP2 P4 - 1

BP2_01

FAXTEL

CB

A D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


PROJECT NORTH

®

TM

®

®


913-742-5000



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400



1-224-717-1555

BID PACKAGE #2



913 742 5000 913 742 5001LENEXA, KS 66214


www.hei-eng.com

FO

R R

EF

ER

EN

CE

ON

LY

- N

OT

FO

R C

ON

ST

RU

CT

I ON

4/15/20 16 2:22:17 PM

Ban

kers

Life

Fie

ldho

use

1 25

S. P

enns

ylv a

nia

St.,

Indi

anap

olis

, IN

462

40





04.18.2016

ENLARGEDPLUMBING PLAN

BP2 P3 - 2

16.4224.00

04.08.2016

2016

M. D

RE

W .

RIM

ME

R


1550002436

1 EXISTING PLUMBING FIXTURES TOREMAIN, UNLESS NOTEDOTHERWISE.

2 FFA3 TFA4 DO NOT ROUTE PIPING OVER

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ANDPANELS.

5 TFB6 ROUTE DOMESTIC WATER,

SANITARY AND VENT PIPING TOFOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT ANDFIXTURES. COORDINATE WITH KECFOR LOCATIONS AND ROUGH-INREQUIREMENTS. PROVIDEBACKFLOW PREVENTERS,INDIRECT DRAINS AND ALL OTHERAPPURTENANCES AS REQUIRED.

7 CONNECT 1-1/4"CW AND 1-1/4"HWINTO EXISTING DOMESTIC WATERMAINS, CONTRACTOR TO VERIFYLOCATION IN FIELD.RECONFIGURE PIPING ASREQUIRED.

8 CONNECT EXISTING SANITARYFROM FIXTURES ABOVE INTO NEWSANITARY SEWER AT THIS LEVEL.RECONFIGURE PIPING ASREQUIRED TO MEET FIELDCONDITIONS.

9 CONNECT NEW 3"V INTO EXISTING3"V STACK. CONFIGURE PIPING ASREQUIRED TO MEET FIELDCONDITIONS.

10 CONNECT 3/4"CW AND 3/4"HW INTOEXISTING DOMESTIC WATERMAINS, CONTRACTOR TO VERIFYLOCATION IN FIELD.RECONFIGURE PIPING ASREQUIRED.

11 FFB12 CONNECT NEW 4"S INTO EXISTING

4"S STACK. CONFIGURE PIPING ASREQUIRED TO MEET FIELDCONDITIONS.

13 CONNECT 1" GAS PRESSUREREGULATOR VENT INTO EXISTING1" REGULATOR VENT.CONTRACTOR TO VERIFYLOCATION IN FIELD.RECONFIGURE PIPING ASREQUIRED.

14 MOUNT GAS COCK, GAS SOLENOIDVALVE AND PRESSUREREGULATOR BELOW CEILING.

15 CONNECT 1"MPG INTO EXISTING1"MPG, CONTRACTOR TO VERIFYLOCATION IN FIELD.RECONFIGURE PIPING ASREQUIRED.

16 PROVIDE DRIP PAN UNDER ALLEXISTING SANITARY PIPING ABOVEKITCHEN. ROUTE 3/4" DRAIN TONEAREST FLOOR SINK.

17 PROVIDE TRAP PRIMERS ASREQUIRED TO SERVE ALL NEWFLOOR DRAINS IN BAR ANDKITCHEN AREAS.

18 CONNECT 3/4"HWR INTO EXISTING3/4"HWR, CONTRACTOR TO VERIFYLOCATION IN FIELD.RECONFIGURE PIPING ASREQUIRED.

19 CONNECT 2"V INTO EXISTING 2"V.CONTRACTOR TO VERIFYLOCATION IN FIELD,RECONFIGURE PIPING ASREQUIRED TO MEET FIELDCONDITIONS.

20 3/4"CW DOWN IN WALL. CONNECTTO WATER FILTER AND SODASYSTEM PER MANUFACTURER'SRECOMMENDATIONS. PROVIDEWITH REDUCED PRESSUREBACKFLOW PREVENTER "RPZ-2"UPSTREAM OF SODA SYSTEM.PROVIDE ACCUFLEX K1350PCLEARBRAID STANDARD WALLPVC HOSE. INSTALL NO COPPER,BRASS OR BRONZE DOWNSTREAMOF "RPZ-2".

21 CONNECT 1/2"CO2 INTO EXISTINGCO2 PIPING SYSTEM.CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFYLOCATION OF EXISTING CO2PIPING IN FIELD. RECONFIGUREPIPING/ROUTING AS REQUIRED TOMEET FIELD CONDITIONS.

22 ROUTE 3"S ABOVE FLOOR TO MISSEXISTING BEAM BELOW.COORDINATE PIPE ROUTING WITHEXISTING CONDITIONS AND KECPRIOR TO INSTALLATION.

PLUMBING PLAN NOTES

1/4" = 1'-0"1 ENLARGED PLUMBING PLAN - LOGE CLUB BAR & KITCHEN - AREA D


BP2_01 04/18/2016 BP2_Addendum 01

UNINSULATED STEELOR PLASTIC PIPE

UNINSULATEDCOPPER PIPE

COLD INSULATEDPIPE

SIZE AND QUANTITYOF HANGER RODS PER

MANUFACTURER'SRECOMMENDATIONS

PROVIDE METAL 360°INSULATION SHIELD AND

HIGH DENSITY INSULATIONOR PRE-ENGINEERED

THERMAL HANGER-SHIELDINSERT OF CALCIUM

SILICATE INSULATION. FORPIPES 4" AND SMALLER,

PRE-ENGINEERED THERMALHANGER-SHIELD INSERT OF

FLEXIBLE UNICELLULARINSULATION MAY BE

PROVIDED

PROVIDE TWO-PIECEPIPE CLAMP (TYP)

SUPPORT NUT(TYP)

PROVIDE 1-5/8"x1-5/8" 14GA. CHANNEL SUPPORT

PROVIDE PLASTICGALVANIC ISOLATORFOR COPPER PIPE(TYP)

PIPING ARRANGEMENT SHOWN IS SCHEMATIC. ADJUST TO SUIT FIELD CONDITONS. REFER TOSPECIFICATIONS FOR MORE INFORMATION. PIPE AND CONDUIT OF ALL TRADES MAY BECOMBINED ON THE SAME SUPPORT CHANNEL. COORDINATE SUPPORT CHANNEL LENGTH WITHPIPING AND CONDUIT TO BE SUPPORTED. SUPPORT CHANNEL SPACING SHALL BE DETERMINEDBY SMALLEST PIPE TO BE SUPPORTED. CHANNEL SUPPORT MAY BE USED AS A WALL BRACKET,ATTACH TO WALL WITH ANCHOR BOLTS PER SPECIFICATIONS. FOR HORIZONTAL INSULATEDPIPING, ATTACH CLAMPS AS INDICATED ABOVE, FOR VERTICAL INSULATED PIPING, ATTACHCLAMPS TO THE PIPE AND SEAL INSULATION AT BOTH CLAMP ENDS.

PIPE INSULATION(TYP)

HOT INSULATEDPIPE

CUT INSULATION TOFIT AROUND TRAPEZEHANGER. SEAL BOTH

ENDS OF EXPOSEDINSULATION WITH

JOINT SEALANT

SECURE PIPE HANGERTO STRUCTURE (TYP)

THREADED STEELROD WITH NUT AND

WASHER BOTH SIDES(TYP).

CLEVIS HANGER,SHOWN FOR CLARITY.

SIZE HANGER FOR COLDPIPE OUTSIDE DIAMETER

PLUS INSULATIONTHICKNESS. DO NOT

PENETRATE INSULATIONWITH HANGER.

PROVIDE A SECTIONOF HIGH DENSITY

INSULATION ORSTYROFOAM

BILLETS AT EACHHANGER OF COLDINSULATED PIPE.

PROVIDE SHORTINSULATION SHIELD

FOR LAPPINGINSULATION JACKETOVER HIGH DENSITY

INSULATION ORSTYROFOAM BILLETS.

MAINTAIN VAPORBARRIER

REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR INSULATION TYPES,INSULATION THICKNESSES, HANGER TYPES, HANGER RODCONNECTIONS TO SRUCTURE AND HANGER SPACING.

CLEVIS HANGER,SHOWN FOR CLARITY.SIZE HANGER FORHOT PIPE OUTSIDEDIAMETER.

CUT INSULATION TOFIT AROUND HANGER.SEAL EXPOSEDINSULATION ENDSWITH JOINT SEALANT

COLD PIPE HOT PIPE

HOT WATER RECIRCULATION BRANCH UNION

FLOW CONTROL VALVE; REFERTO FLOOR PLANS FOR FLOWRATE AND PIPE SIZE.

TYPICAL FULL-PORTBALL TYPE SHUT-OFF

VALVE

REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS, SCHEDULES, AND NOTES FOR MOREINFORMATION. MAKE CONNECTIONS AND PROVIDE INSTALLATION PERMANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. ARRANGEMENT SHOWN ISSCHEMATIC: PROVIDE REDUCERS AND ADAPTERS AS REQUIRED.

PIPE INSULATION

STRAINER

CHECK VALVE

ARRANGEMENT SHOWN IS SCHEMATIC. ADJUST TO SUIT FIELD CONDITIONS. PROVIDECONNECTIONS SHOWN IN EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. REFER TOSPECIFICATIONS FOR PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS, AND INSTALLATION OF HANGERS ANDSUPPORTS. PROVIDE DIELECTRIC UNION IF CONNECTING DISSIMILAR METALS. DO NOT COMBINEINDIRECT DRAIN PIPES WITH CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPES. DO NOT PROVIDE TRAP OR VENT ONINDIRECT DRAINS RECEIVING DISCHARGE UNDER PRESSURE. PROVIDE CLEANOUT IN TRAP FORNON-CLEAR LIQUID WASTE ONLY.

FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT INDIRECT WASTE: INSTALL SEPARATE INDIRECT WASTE FROMDIFFERENT EQUIPMENT - DO NOT COMBINE. SECURELY ATTACH INDIRECT DRAINS TO THEIREQUIPMENT WITH BRACKETS OR SPLIT RING PIPE CLAMPS - REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS. LOOSE,DANGLING, OR PIPES ON THE FLOOR SHALL NOT BE ACCEPTED. INSTALL INDIRECT DRAINS HIGH ASPOSSIBLE TO FACILITATE CLEANING UNDER KITCHEN EQUIPMENT.

IW

IW

PROVIDE P-TRAP IF MORETHAN 2' HORIZONTAL OR 4'TOTAL DRAIN LENGTH

MAXIMUM TAILPIECE LENGTHIS 24" IF TRAPPED

PROVIDE ADAPTER(S) ASREQUIRED TO CONNECTINDIRECT DRAIN PIPE TOEQUIPMENT OR DRAIN PAN.PROVIDE INDIRECT WASTE PIPEONE PIPE SIZE LARGER THANEQUIPMENT CONNECTION SIZE,MINIMUM 3/4" OR AS SHOWN ONPLANS

DISCHARGE INDIRECTWASTE INTO RECEPTORWHERE SHOWN ON PLANSWITH AIR GAP PER CODE

SLOPE PIPE AS MUCH ASPOSSIBLE TOWARD

DISCHARGE, 2% MINIMUM

MAINTAIN MINIMUM 1"CLEARANCE TO FLOOR, OR 6"

TO CEILING OR ROOF

INSULATE INDIRECT WASTEPIPE RECEIVING HOT OR

CHILLED WASTE: REFER TOSPECIFICATIONS. DO NOT

INSULATE INDIRECT WASTEPIPES IN FOOD SERVICE

AREAS

PROVIDE CLEANOUTS IN ENDSAND TURNS OF PIPE WITHADAPTER AND THREADED

CLEANOUT PLUG

PROVIDE TRAP PRIMERS WHERE SHOWN ON FLOOR PLANS, AND WHERE REQUIREDBY LOCAL AUTHORITIES. PIPING ARRANGEMENT SHOWN IS SCHEMATIC: ADJUSTTO SUIT FIELD CONDITIONS. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS AND PLUMBING FIXTURESCHEDULE FOR MORE INFORMATION. INSTALL TRAP PRIMER VALVE ANDDISTRIBUTION UNIT PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS.

COLD WATER MAIN CONNECT 1/2" PIPE (WITHOUTSHUT-OFF VALVE IN BRANCH)TO TRAP PRIMER VALVE OFFTOP OF BRANCH PIPE.INSULATE PIPE UPSTREAMOF TRAP PRIMER, BUT NOTDOWNSTREAM.

INSTALL TRAP PRIMER LINE(S)DOWNSTREAM OF TRAPPRIMER OR DISTRIBUTIONUNIT USING 1/2" SOFTCOPPER TUBING. INSTALLWITHOUT KINKS, AND SLOPECONTINUOUSLY TOWARDSFLOOR DRAIN.

CONCEAL PIPE(S) INPARTITION OR CHASE INFINISHED AREAS. TRAPPRIMER AND PIPES MAY BEINSTALLED EXPOSED INUNFINISHED, NON-PUBLICAREAS.

IF PIPE IS BELOW FLOORSLAB ON GRADE, PROVIDE1/2" ELASTOMERICINSULATION FROM PRIMERCONNECTION TO 1" ABOVEFLOOR SLAB.

BRANCH PIPE WITHSHUT-OFF VALVE FEEDING

PLUMBING FIXTURE(S)

AUTOMATIC TRAP PRIMERVALVE WITH INTEGRAL AIR

GAP. INSTALL TRAP PRIMERMINIMUM 12" ABOVE FLOORFOR EVERY 20' OF PRIMER

DISCHARGE PIPE.

PROVIDE DISTRIBUTIONUNIT(S) WHERE MORE THAN

ONE TRAP IS SERVED BYONE TRAP PRIMER VALVE.

IF TRAP PRIMER ISINSTALLED ABOVE HARD

CEILING, PROVIDE ACCESSDOOR PER

SPECIFICATIONS.

PROVIDE FLOOR DRAINBODY OR P-TRAP WITH

THREADED TRAP PRIMER CONNECTION. PROVIDE

SWEAT TO THREADEDADAPTER. BRAZE JOINTBELOW FLOOR SLAB ON

GRADE.

PIPING ARRANGEMENT SHOWN IS SCHEMATIC. ADJUST ASREQUIRED TO SUIT ACTUAL INSTALLATION CONDITIONSAND MEET RECOMMENDATIONS OF EQUIPMENTMANUFACTURERS.

PROVIDE 3/4" COLD WATERSUPPLY CONCEALED IN

PARTITION; STUB OUT ANDPROVIDE SHUTOFF VALVE

PROVIDE STRAINER ANDDOUBLE CHECK VALVE

BACKFLOW PREVENTERPER SPECIFICATIONS AND

SCHEDULE. LOCATE PERLOCAL REQUIREMENTS

FOR ACCESSIBILITY

IF FURNISHED WITH ICEMACHINE, INSTALL WATER

FILTER ASSEMBLY PERMANUFACTURER'S

INSTRUCTIONS, WHEREEASILY ACCESSIBLE

PROVIDE FLOOR SINKWHERE SHOWN ON FLOOR

PLANS

FILTERED COLD WATERSUPPLY TO OTHEREQUIPMENT IF/AS SHOWNON FLOOR PLAN

PROVIDE WATER HAMMERARRESTER, PDI SIZE "A"

PROVIDE ADAPTER AND SIXFOOT LONG TYPE "K" SOFTCOPPER TUBING, (SIZE OFCUBER WATER INLET) ANDCONNECT TO CUBERWATER INLET

CONNECT TO CUBERAND ICE BIN DRAINOUTLETS AS REQUIRED

REFER TO "INDIRECT WASTE" DETAIL FOR MORE INFORMATION

6"TALL VENT OPEN TOTHE ATMOSPHERE

ICE BIN

CUBER

FLOOR SINK

V

PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE

PRESSURE GAUGE

SHUTOFF VALVE

V

PIPING ARRANGEMENT SHOWN ISSCHEMATIC. ADJUST TO SUIT FIELDCONDITIONS. PROVIDE PLUMBINGCONNECTIONS AS RECOMMENDED BYEQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'SINSTALLATION MANUAL. INTERLOCK OFDRAIN WATER TEMPERING DEVICESOLENOID VALVE AND TEMPERATURESWITCHES IS SPECIFIED IN DIVISION 16.

INSTALL THERMOMETER IFFURNISHED WITH BOOSTER

HEATER (TYPICAL)

ELECTRIC BOOSTERHEATER (FURNISHED BY OTHERS)

TYPICAL PIPE UNION,DIELECTRIC IF REQUIRED BY

DISSIMILAR METALS

WATERHAMMER

ARRESTERPDI SIZE "A"

HOT WATERSUPPLY WITH

INSULATION

PROVIDE A HARD COPPER RELIEFVALVE DISCHARGE LINE FULL SIZE OF

VALVE OUTLET. ROUTE TO NEARESTFLOOR SINK AND DISCHARGE WITH 6" AIR GAP

DRAINPLUG

WASTE LINE

2" DWV COPPERTUBE & FITTINGS

FLOORSINK

FINAL RINSEOVERFLOW DISCHARGE

DRAIN TO FLOORSINK WITH 2" AIR GAP

WASTE LINE

CLEANOUT(TYPICAL)

VENT INWALL(TYPICAL)

COLD WATERSUPPLY

REDUCED PRESSUREZONE BACKFLOWPREVENTER

CONNECT COPPERDWV PIPING TODISHWASHER WASTECONNECTION2" COPPER

THREADEDTEEWITHCLEANOUTPLUG

3/4" (180°F)WITH 1"INSULATION

COMMERCIAL DISHWASHER(FURNISHED BY OTHERS)

STRAINER, SOLENOIDVALVE AND VACUUMBREAKER FURNISHED BYDISHWASHERMANUFACTURER

INSTALL BACKFLOWPREVENTER, VALVES, FITTINGS,THERMOSTATS WATER TEMPERINGDEVICE PER THE MANUFACTURER'SINSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.

AIR INTAKE

3"

2"

FLOOR

INSTALL TRAP AND SINK PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS.ARRANGEMENT SHOWN IS SCHEMATIC. ADJUST TO SUIT FIELD CONDITIONS.

18O DEGREE ELBOWBEHIND BACKSPLASH 6"ABOVE FLOODRIM

SANITIZINGCOMPARTMENT

CLEANOUT INENDS OF PIPE

FLOW CONTROL

GREASE INTERCEPTOR,REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS AND

SCHEDULES SET ON FLOORWHERE TOP CAN BE EASILY

REMOVED FOR CLEANING.

DISCHARGE INTO FLOORSINK WITH A MINIMUM AIRGAP OF TWO TIMES THEPIPE DIAMETER

PIPING ARRANGEMENT SHOWN IS SCHEMATIC. ADJUST TO SUIT FIELD CONDITIONS.REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR TYPE OF PIPE, FITTINGS, AND JOINTS. DO NOT USEPVC PIPE. INSTALL PER LOCAL CODE RULES FOR INDIRECT DRAIN PIPE. SLOPEHORIZONTAL PIPE AT MINIMUM TWO PERCENT. PROVIDE 1" THICK ELASTOMERICINSULATION OVER HEAT TRACING ON CONDENSATE DRAINS LOCATED IN FREEZERBOXES. (COORDINATE PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRIC HEATING CABLE.) OTHERWISEDO NOT INSULATE PIPE. PROVIDE CHROMATONE PAINT ON PIPE EXTERIOR TO BOX.

WALK-IN COOLEROR FREEZER BOX

DRILL HOLE IN SIDEOF BOX AND

PROVIDE GROMMETOR SLEEVE WITH

SILICONE SEALAROUND PIPE

PENETRATION TOMAKE IT WATERTIGHT

ANCHOR CONDENSATEDRAIN TO BOX

EXTERIOR WALL

PROVIDE TRAP AT BOTTOMOF RISER, FLAT AGAINSTWALL. DISCHARGE OVER

FLOOR DRAIN WITH AIRGAP PER CODE

FLOOR DRAIN:REFER TO FLOOR

PLAN FOR LOCATION

MAKE CONNECTION TOEVAPORATOR COIL DRAINPAN AS REQUIRED, ANDINCREASE ONE PIPESIZE, MINIMUM 3/4".

TYPICAL CLEANOUT INEND AND TURNS OFPIPE. CLEANOUT CANBE OMITTED IN 90°TURNS IF TWO 45°ELBOWS ARE USED,MAXIMUM 135° TURNWITHOUT CLEANOUT.

INSTALL CONDENSATEDRAIN LINE BEHINDSHELVING IN WALK-INBOX. INSTALL PIPE HIGHAS POSSIBLE, SUPPORTEDFROM WALL AT MAXIMUM6' CENTERS, MINIMUM3/4" OUT FROM WALLAND 6" FROM FLOOR. DONOT PASS ACROSSOPENING OF DOORWAY.

REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR MORE INFORMATION ABOUT PIPE, FITTINGS, ANDCONNECTIONS. PIPING ARRANGEMENT SHOWN IS SCHEMATIC; ADJUST TO SUITFIELD CONDITIONS. IF EXPOSED, ATTACH RISER AND HEADER TO WALL WITH 1"CLEARANCE BEHIND PIPE (UNLESS INSTALLED INSIDE WALL AS SHOWN ONPLANS). MAKE FINAL CONNECTION TO EQUIPMENT AS RECOMMENDED BYMANUFACTURER. INSTALL ANY GAS PRESSURE REGULATORS FURNISHED BYFOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT CONTRACTOR.

SUSPEND PIPE FROMSTRUCTURE ABOVE,NOT FROM HOOD OR

CEILING

DO NOT INSTALL ANYGAS VALVES INCEILING SPACE

EXHAUST HOOD

PROVIDE QUANTITYAND SIZE OF BRANCH

CONNECTIONS ASREQUIRED BY

EQUIPMENT SERVED.PROVIDE GAS COCK

LOCATED WHEREACCESSIBLE BESIDE

OR ABOVE EQUIPMENT.

INSTALL FLEXIBLEAPPLIANCE

CONNECTOR HOSEFURNISHED WITH

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT

KITCHEN FLOOR

ESCUTCHEON ATCEILING PENETRATION

GAS COCK

INSTALL AUTOMATICGAS SHUT-OFF VALVEFURNISHED WITHEXHAUST HOOD FIRESUPPRESSION SYSTEM

PIPE DROP OF SIZE ANDAT LOCATION SHOWNON PLAN

GAS PIPE HEADER ALONGWALL BEHIND COOKINGEQUIPMENT (OR INSIDEWALL IF INDICATED ONPLAN), SIZES AS SHOWNON PLANS

6" DIRT LEG AT BOTTOMOF RISER

CONNECT HOSE TOKITCHEN EQUIPMENT(TYPICAL)

BACKSPLASH

FLOOR

UNION

CLEANOUT

CHUTE

TRAP

WIRING IS BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR.PIPING ARRANGEMENT SHOWN IS SCHEMATIC. ADJUST TO SUIT FIELD CONDITIONS.

"GARBEL"GARBAGEDISPOSERBY KEC DO NOT CONNECT

TO GREASE WASTE

PRE-RINSEFAUCET

FAXTEL

CB

A D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


PROJECT NORTH

®

TM

®

®


913-742-5000



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400



1-224-717-1555

BID PACKAGE #2



913 742 5000 913 742 5001LENEXA, KS 66214


www.hei-eng.com

FO

R R

EF

ER

EN

CE

ON

LY

- N

OT

FO

R C

ON

ST

RU

CT

I ON

4/15/20 16 2:22:21 PM

Ban

kers

Life

Fie

ldho

use

1 25

S. P

enns

ylv a

nia

St.,

Indi

anap

olis

, IN

462

40





04.18.2016

PLUMBING DETAILS

BP2 P4 - 1

16.4224.00

04.08.2016

2016

M. D

RE

W .

RIM

ME

R


1550002436

NTS1 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGER

NTS2 PIPE HANGER DETAIL

NTS3 FLOW CONTROL VALVE

NTS4 INDIRECT WASTE INSTALLATION - IPC

NTS5 TRAP PRIMER OVERHEAD

NTS7 ICE MACHINE CONNECTIONS

NTS8

BOOSTER HEATER, DISHWASHERDIRECT WASTE AND DRAIN WATERTEMPERING DEVICE

NTS9 UTILITY SINK AND GREASE TRAP

NTS10 WALK-IN BOX CONDENSATE DRAIN

NTS11 COOKING APPLIANCE GAS PIPE

BP2_01

NTS6 DISPOSER PLUMBING CONNECTIONS

BP2_01


BP2_01 04/18/2016 BP2_Addendum 01

(5)

(5)

(5)

(5)

(5)

(5)

(5)

G

DC

(5)

TO PERMIT SERVICE &




MAINTENANCE.

18" RECOMMENDED,

SUFFICIENT ACCESS

Q

R20.4

NNN

OOO

PPP

R18.2

R17

R18

R16.5

R16.3

P.9

R16

R15.9

R16.2

R16.1

R15.7

R15

R14 R14.4

R15.1R13.9

R13.5

R7

R20.5

R20

R19.1

R19

R18.8

R16.8

EE.7

7

2

2

1 1

1

1

1

1

1 1

2

3

SUITECLUB4C31

LOGE4C32

FOODSERVICE

4C36B

S.SPONSORSPAVILION

4C34


EXISTINGOFFICE

4C23

4

4

4

4 4

EXISTINGCABLE TRAY

EXISTING LADDER RACK

SERVED FROMTELECOMMUNICATIONSROOM IDENTIFIED BYKEYNOTE 4 ON THISSHEET.

A

B

D

C

1

1

1

1

BP2_01

FAXTEL

CB

A D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


PROJECT NORTH

®

TM

®

®


913-742-5000



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400



1-224-717-1555

BID PACKAGE #2



913 742 5000 913 742 5001LENEXA, KS 66214


www.hei-eng.com

FO

R R

EF

ER

EN

CE

ON

LY

- N

OT

FO

R C

ON

ST

RU

CT

I ON

4/15/20 16 2:22:28 PM

Ban

kers

Life

Fie

ldho

use

1 25

S. P

enns

ylv a

nia

St.,

Indi

anap

olis

, IN

462

40





04.18.2016

SUITE LEVEL -TECHNOLOGY PLAN

- AREA C

BP2 TN2 - 4C

16.4224.00

04.08.2016

2016

DA

VID

D. H

AA

KE


1550002436

1/8" = 1'-0"1 200 - SUITE LEVEL - TECHNOLOGY PLAN - AREA C

1 PROVIDE DATA OUTLET IN SAMEFACE PLATE AS COAXIAL CABLE.REFER TO TA-SERIES DRAWINGSFOR COAXIAL CABLE OUTLET ANDDISPLAY HEIGHT INFORMATION.COORDINATE PRIOR TO INSTALL.

2 PROVIDE OSI PLASTICS ST-14SPLIT STEEL CONDUIT OREQUIVALENT. RELOCATE CABLESIN THE CABLE TRAY TO THE SPLITSTEEL CONDUITS IN RENOVATIONAREA. PROVIDE NYLON PULLSTRING IN CONDUITS. MOUNTCONDUITS WITH UNISTRUTSUPPORTS TO STRUCTURE. LEAVEONE OR TWO CONDUITS EMPTYFOR FUTURE CABLES.

3 REMOVE, PROTECT, ANDREINSTALL EXISTING CAMERA TONEW CEILING.

4 TERMINATE DATA CABLES TOPATCH PANEL IN EXISTINGTELECOMMUNICATIONS RACK.PROVIDE PATCH PANELS ASREQUIRED. COORDINATE OFEQUIPMENT IN THE RACK WITHBUILDING IT.

TECHNOLOGY NOTES


BP2_01 04/18/2016 BP2_Addendum 01

48 24

(5)

48 24(5)

48 24

(5)

48 24

(5)

48 24

(5)

48 24

(5)

48 24

(5)

48 24(5)

R22

R20.6

R20.4

NNN

OOO

PPP

R21

R20.5

R20

R19 EE.9

EE.2

FF

FOOD SERVICE4C36B

SUITE CLUB4C31

FOOD SERVICE4C31A

SUITE CLUB4C31

FOOD SERVICE4C36B

7.0387.038

4.099

24.104

25.503

4.030E

3.009

3.017

9.0082.038

1.1639.008

3.017

2.0383.009

25.306

3.017

3.0096.0031.001

1.149

1.1301.072 2.038

3.0091.149

1.064

1.115

2.038

1.072

1.130

1.115

25.402

12.18016.001

14.002

16.045

16.045

17.008

25.50324.104

4.0994.099 11.032

25.50324.104

12.141

25.503

24.104

4.0994.099

4.0994.099

18.084

3.0133.013

11.014

22.102

22.102A

13.144

13.14413.14413.144

13.14413.144

14.026

14.011 14.023

17.021

17.013

17.065

17.020

14.563

14.002E14.002E

21.209

20.102R

20.102L

4.085

12.6954.095

4.088

4.175E

12.084E

9.002

12.081E

12.081E

13.144

14.025

4.031

ELECTRIC PANELS

2.0012.0022.002

8.029E

8.018E

25.302

8.002

2.012

15.026

15.014

15.016

14.145

2.0996" DIA. SODACONDUIT

6.0032.038

1.001

1.068

17.011

2.038

22.102B

25.503

14.001

7.039

25.503

16.045

13.144

10.013

4.021

60" A

DA

SEC

TIO

N

2.012BP2_01

4.103

BP2_01

CBA D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


PROJECT NORTH

®

TM

®

®



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400


FOR

REFE

RENC

E ON

LY - N

OT F

OR C

ONST

RUCT

ION

BID PACKAGE #2

4/15/2016 5 :33:31 P M

Bank

ers L

ife F

ieldh

ouse

125 S

. Pe n

n sy lv

a nia

S t., I

ndian

apol i

s, IN

4624

0





04.18.2016

LOGE CLUB CLUB BAR& KITCHEN PLAN &

SCHEDULE

BP2 FS3-3.01

16.4224.00

03/30/16

1/4" = 1'-0"1 LOGE CLUB BAR & KITCHEN FOODSERVICE PLAN

EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE - LOGE CLUB BAR & KITCHEN

ITEMNO. QTY EQUIPMENT CATEGORY EQUIPMENT REMARKS

1.001 2 UNDERBAR DUMP SINK/BLENDER STATION1.064 1 UNDERBAR HANDSINK1.068 1 UNDERBAR CORNER DRAINBOARD1.072 2 UNDERBAR COCKTAIL STATION, 36"1.115 2 BACK BAR REFRIGERATOR, GLASS DOORS, LED LIGHTS1.130 2 UNDERBAR SPEED RAIL, 36"1.149 2 UNDERBAR POS CABINET1.163 1 ICE CHEST, DROP-IN2.001 1 BAG-IN-BOX RACK NIKEC2.002 2 CARBONATOR NIKEC

2.003D 1 DRAFT BEER SYSTEM EXISTING, DIFFERENT FLOOR2.012 2 DRAFT BEER TOWER, 4 TAPS, W/ DRAINER NEW2.038 6 SODA GUN NIKEC2.099 1 SODA CONDUIT3.009 4 POINT-OF-SALE UNIT W/ DRAWER NIKEC3.013 2 WARMER/DISPENSER, CHEESE3.017 3 WASTE CONTAINER4.021 1 OVEN-STEAMER, COMBINATION, BOILERLESS, ELECTRIC

4.030E 1 STEAMER EXISTING, RELOCATE4.031 1 OVEN, SLOW COOK/HOLD4.085 1 RANGE, HEAVY DUTY, GAS, 4 BURNERS W/SALAMANDER CONVECTION OVEN BASE4.088 1 BROILER, UNDER-FIRED, GAS, 24"4.095 1 GRIDDLE, ELECTRIC, 36"4.099 7 INDUCTION WARMER, DROP-IN4.103 1 COOKING SYSTEM, INDUCTION HEAT

4.175E 1 DOUBLE FRYER BATTERY, W/FILTER & FRYMATE EXISTING, RELOCATE6.003 2 BLENDER, BEVERAGE7.038 2 DROP-IN, FREEZER7.039 1 DIPPERWELL ASSEMBLY8.002 1 ICE MAKER AIR COOLED

8.018E 1 BIN, ICE EXISTING, RELOCATE8.029E 1 FILTER SYSTEM9.002 1 WALL SHEATHING9.008 2 IN-COUNTER TRASH CHUTE10.013 1 DESK, 30 X 6011.014 1 POPCORN POPPER11.032 1 CARVING STATION, PORTABLE

12.081E 2 REFRIGERATOR, REACH-IN, 2-SECTION EXISTING, RELOCATE12.084E 1 FREEZER, REACH-IN, 2-SECTION EXISTING, RELOCATE12.141 1 DROP-IN, COLD WELL12.180 1 REFRIGERATOR, ROLL-IN, ONE-SECTION12.695 1 CHEF BASE DRAWERED REFRIGERATOR13.144 8 SHELVING UNIT, 24" X 48", 5 SHELVES, MOBILE 5 SHELVES PER SECTION14.001 1 SINK, DROP-IN, HAND WITH FAUCET14.002 1 SINK, HAND, WALL MOUNT

14.002E 2 SINK, HAND, WALL MOUNT EXISTING, RELOCATE14.011 1 SINK, SCULLERY, 3 COMPARTMENTS EXISTING, RELOCATE14.023 2 SHELF, WALL MOUNT, 12" X 72", 2-TIER14.025 2 SHELF, WALL MOUNT, 12" X 96", 2-TIER14.026 2 SHELF, WALL MOUNT, 12" X 108", 2-TIER14.145 1 RACK, POT & PAN, HUNG FROM CEILING14.563 1 SHELF, SORTING, 63"15.014 1 TABLE, WORK, 30" X 72", MOBILE, DOUBLE OVERSHELF15.016 1 TABLE, WORK, 30" X 96", MOBILE, DOUBLE OVERSHELF15.026 1 TABLE, WORK, 30" X 96" W/ SINK16.001 1 RACK, PAN16.045 3 CABINET, MOBILE, WARMING17.008 1 CART, BUSSING17.011 1 GLASSWASHER17.013 1 WAREWASHER, RACK CONVEYOR, VENTLESS17.020 1 DISHTABLE, STRAIGHT, SOILED17.021 1 DISHTABLE, CLEAN17.065 1 DISPOSER, 3.0 HP18.084 1 NACHO CHIP WARMER CABINET20.102L 1 EXHAUST HOOD EXISTING, RELOCATE20.102R 1 EXHAUST HOOD EXISTING, RELOCATE21.209 1 FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM EXISTING, RELOCATE22.102 1 WALK-IN COOLER

22.102A 1 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM CONDENSING UNIT22.102B 1 EVAPORATOR COIL24.104 4 FOOD SHIELD25.302 1 BAR FRONT DIE WALL25.306 1 SERVICE COUNTER NIKEC25.402 1 BAR BACKCOUNTER NIKEC25.503 6 BUFFET COUNTER NIKEC

DISCLAIMER1 THIS DRAWING IS PREPARED FOR THE USE OF THE

DESIGN TEAM IN PREPARING THEIR RESPECTIVEDOCUMENTS; AND FOR BIDDING OF THE FOODSERVICEEQUIPMENT. THIS DRAWING SHALL NOT BE USED FORCONSTRUCTION AND FOR THE ROUGHING IN OFSERVICES. DIMENSIONED ROUGHING IN DRAWINGS WILLBE PREPARED BY THE KITCHEN EQUIPMENTCONTRACTOR.

GENERAL NOTESGENERAL NOTES

1 ANY DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN THESE PLANS,WRITTEN SPECIFICATIONS, BUILDING, HEALTH OROTHER LOCAL CODE REQUIREMENTS THAT MAYAFFECT THE DESIGN INTENT, INSTALLATION,FABRICATION OR OVERALL WORK IN ANY WAY SHALLBE BROUGHT TO THE ATENTION OF THE FOODSERVICECONSULTANTS BY THE WAY OF THE GENERALCONTRACTOR AND/OR ARCHITECT.

2 KITCHEN EQUIPMENT CONTRACTOR SHALL BERESPONSIBLE FOR ALL EQUIPMENT SHOWN ON PLANSAND MENTIONED IN THE WRITTEN SPECIFICATIONS.DISCREPANCIES IN QUANTITIES, ITEMS SHOWN ONPLAN BUT NOT MENTIONED IN THE WRITTENSPECIFICATIONS OR VISE VERSA SHALL BE BROUGHTTO THE ATTENTION OF THE FOODSERVICECONSULTANT BY THE WAY OF THE GENERALCONTRACTOR AND/OR ARCHITECT.

3 GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PPROVIDE A MEANS TOEVACUATE HEAT GENERATED BY FOODSERVICEEQUIPMENT WITHIN ENCLOSED SPACE(S).

4 GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALLBLOCKING IN WALLS FOR MOUNTING WALL SHELVES,POT RACKS, DISPLAY CASES, HOSE REEL(S), HANDSINKS, CONTROL PANELS, ETC. AS SHOWN ONPLAN(S).

5 KITCHEN EQUIPMENT CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALLFIELD DIMENSIONS.

NO. DATE DESCRIPTION04/18/2016 BP2_Addendum 01

BP2_01

BP2_01

BP2_01

48 24

(5)

48 24(5)

48 24

(5)

48 24

(5)

48 24

(5)

48 24

(5)

48 24

(5)

J

J

J

J

J

J

J

JJ

J

48 24(5)

R22

R20.6

R20.4

NNN

OOO

PPP

R21

R20.5

R20

R19 EE.9

EE.2

FF

3.0092.0382.0383.009

3.009

2.038

3.009

1.115

1.115

3.0133.013

2.0022.002

7.0387.038

4.099

4.030E

6.003

4.0994.099 11.032

4.0994.099

4.0994.099

11.014

4.085

4.095

4.175E

8.002

2.0386.003

2.038

12.180

16.045

12.141

18.084

17.013

17.065

12.695

12.084E12.081E

12.081E

15.026

17.011

2.038

22.102B 22.102A

4.031

4.021

16.045

16.045

CBA D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


PROJECT NORTH

®

TM

®

®



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400


FOR

REFE

RENC

E ON

LY - N

OT F

OR C

ONST

RUCT

ION

BID PACKAGE #2

4/15/2016 5 :33:43 P M

Bank

ers L

ife F

ieldh

ouse

125 S

. Pe n

n sy lv

a nia

S t., I

ndian

apol i

s, IN

4624

0





04.18.2016

LOGE CLUB CLUB BAR& KITCHEN ELECTRIC

SPOTS

BP2 FS3-3.01E

16.4224.00

03/30/16

1/4" = 1'-0"1 LOGE CLUB BAR & KITCHEN ELECTRIC SPOTS









ELECTRICAL SCHEDULE - LOGE CLUB BAR & KITCHEN

ITEMNO. QTY EQUIPMENT CATEGORY AM

PS

KW HP

VOLT

S

PHAS

E

DIR

ECT

PLU

G

NEM

A

ELEC

AFF

(IN

)

ELECTRICAL REMARKS1.115 2 BACK BAR REFRIGERATOR, GLASS DOORS, LED LIGHTS 6.3 1/3 120 1 X 5-20P 122.002 2 CARBONATOR 1/3 120 1 X 5-20P

2.003D 1 DRAFT BEER SYSTEM 13.4 3/4 120 1 X 5-20P 1082.038 6 SODA GUN 3.0 120 1 X 5-20P 123.009 4 POINT-OF-SALE UNIT W/ DRAWER 5.0 120 1 X 5-20P 12 DATA LINE REQUIRED3.013 2 WARMER/DISPENSER, CHEESE 13.8 1.7 120 1 X 5-20P 484.021 1 OVEN-STEAMER, COMBINATION, BOILERLESS, ELECTRIC 79.4 66 480 3 X 10

4.030E 1 STEAMER 49.0 17.5 208 3 X 614.031 1 OVEN, SLOW COOK/HOLD 30.0 7.2 208 1 X 724.085 1 RANGE, HEAVY DUTY, GAS, 4 BURNERS W/SALAMANDER 1/2 120 1 X 5-20P 364.095 1 GRIDDLE, ELECTRIC, 36" 45.0 16.2 480 3 X 484.099 7 INDUCTION WARMER, DROP-IN 15.0 0.7 120 1 X 5-20P 304.103 1 COOKING SYSTEM, INDUCTION HEAT 27.0 5.6 208 1 X 14-50P

4.175E 1 DOUBLE FRYER BATTERY, W/FILTER & FRYMATE 5.0 120 1 X 5-20P 366.003 2 BLENDER, BEVERAGE 120 1 X 5-20P 127.038 2 DROP-IN, FREEZER 4.2 1/5 120 1 X 5-20P 148.002 1 ICE MAKER 6.9 208 3 X 8411.014 1 POPCORN POPPER 7.5 120 1 X 5-20P 4811.032 1 CARVING STATION, PORTABLE 6.3 0.8 120 1 X 5-20P

12.081E 2 REFRIGERATOR, REACH-IN, 2-SECTION 5.8 120 1 X 5-20P 8412.084E 1 FREEZER, REACH-IN, 2-SECTION 11.0 120 1 X 5-20P 8412.141 1 DROP-IN, COLD WELL 6.7 0.8 1/4 120 1 X 5-20P12.180 1 REFRIGERATOR, ROLL-IN, ONE-SECTION 11.0 1/2 120 1 X 5-20P 8412.695 1 CHEF BASE DRAWERED REFRIGERATOR 8.1 1/3 120 1 X 5-20P 1215.026 1 TABLE, WORK, 30" X 96" W/ SINK (2) @ 16.0 120 1 X 5-20P 48 CONVENIENCE OUTLETS IN WALL ABOVE TABLE16.045 3 CABINET, MOBILE, WARMING 12.0 1.5 120 1 X 5-20P 4817.011 1 GLASSWASHER 16.0 120 1 X 1217.013 1 WAREWASHER, RACK CONVEYOR, VENTLESS 50.1 15.0 2-1/10 208 1 X 6317.013a 1 BOOSTER HEATER 24.0 208 3 X 617.065 1 DISPOSER, 3.0 HP 6.0 3.0 208 3 X 418.084 1 NACHO CHIP WARMER CABINET 9.0 1.1 120 1 X 5-20P 48

22.102A 1 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM CONDENSING UNIT 6.8 1 208 1 X 10822.102B 1 EVAPORATOR COIL 2.0 115 1 X

TO BE PROVIDED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR

1 DRAWING SHOWS CONNECTION POINTS ON EQUIPMENT.ROUGH-IN POINTS ARE NOT THE SAME ANDALLOWANCES SHALL BE MADE FOR DISCONNECTS,ACCESS, ETC. ALL ROUGH-INS AND CONNECTIONSSHALL BE PER APPLICABLE CODE.

2 DRAWING SHOWS REQUIREMENTS FOR FOOD SERVICEEQUIPMENT ONLY; SEE ELECTRIC DRAWINGS FORADDITIONAL INFORMATION.

3 ALL CONDUITS, BOXES, ETC. SHALL BE CONCEALEDWITHIN WALLS AND STUBBED OUT AS CLOSE ASPOSSIBLE TO THE CONNECTION POINT. DO NOT RUNEXPOSED ON THE WALL.

4 CONDUIT EXPOSED ABOVE THE WORKING SURFACE OFTHE EQUIPMENT SHALL BE STAINLESS STEEL, CHROMEPLATED, OR SHROUDED IN A STAINLESS STEEL COVER.

5 ALL ELECTRICAL SERVICES UNDER A TYPE I EXHAUSTHOOD MUST BE FED FROM A BREAKER PANEL WITHSHUNT TRIP PROTECTION INTERWIRED WITH THEEXTINGUISHING SYSTEM.

6 THE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM REQUIRES AN EMPTYJ-BOX AT THE EXIT FROM THE HAZARD AREA FORINSTALLATION OF THE REMOTE PULL. REMOTE PULL TOBE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED AS PART OF THEEXTINGUISHING SYSTEM PACKAGE.

7 INTERCONNECT EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM TO SHUNTTRIP BREAKERS AND REMOTE NOTIFICATION, PERREQUIREMENTS OF NFPA 96.

8 PROVIDE FIVE (5) #12 THHN WIRES FROM THECOMPRESSOR LOCATION TO THE EVAPORATOR COIL.(FREEZER SYSTEMS ONLY).

9 CASH REGISTERS AND SIMILAR COMPUTERIZEDPOINT-OF-SALE EQUIPMENT REQUIRE CLEAN, ISOLATEDSERVICE.

10 PROVIDE EMPTY EMT BETWEEN CASH REGISTERS,POINT-OF-SALE UNITS AND CENTRAL LOCATION.

11 ELECTRICAL SOLENOID VALVE FOR THE GAS LINE WILLBE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY THE KITCHENEQUIPMENT CONTRACTOR. THIS VALVE WILL BEFURNISHED WITH A MOMENTARY POWER INTERRUPTIONDEVICE AS MANUFACTURED BY POWER GUARDTECHNOLOGIES, OR EQUAL.

12 PROVIDE DUPLEX CONVENIENCE OUTLET (DCO), 120/1,20 AMPS AT HEIGHT INDICATED.

13 PROVIDE PENDANT RECEPTACLE, 120/1, 20 AMPS, AT 78"ABOVE THE FINISHED FLOOR.


HOODINFORMATION

1

2

20.102L

20.102R

Captrate Solo Filter

Captrate Solo Filter

7

7

16"

16"

16"

16"

93% See Filter Spec.

93% See Filter Spec.

3

3

Screw In 12W LED

L55 Series E26

NO

NO Right Ansul R102 3.0/3.0 SC-010110FP1 Light1 Fan

YES

YES

482 LBS

628 LBS

HOODNO. TAG

FILTER(S)

TYPE QTY. HEIGHT LENGTH EFFICIENCY @ 9 MICRONS

LIGHT(S)

QTY. TYPE WIREGUARD

UTILITY CABINET(S)

LOCATIONFIRE SYSTEM

TYPE SIZE

ELECTRICAL

MODEL #

SWITCHES

QUANTITY

FIRESYSTEMPIPING

HOODHANGING

WGHT

HOODOPTIONS

1

2

20.102L

20.102R

FIELD WRAPPER 18.00" High Front, LeftBACKSPLASH 80.00" High X 264.00" Long 430 SS VerticalBALANCE DAMPERSFIELD WRAPPER 18.00" High Front, RightBALANCE DAMPERS

RIGHT VERTICAL END PANEL 27" Top Width, 21" Bottom Width, 80" High Insulated4" Legs 430 SS

HOOD NO. TAG OPTION

RR

RR

RR

SL I DTE

R

2" Captrate Grease-Stop SoloFilter

1000800400200 AIRFLOW(cfm)

600

1.4

1.6

1.2

1

0.6

0.4

0

0

0.2

RESI

STA

NCE

(in.

H20

)

0.8

RESISTANCE VS. AIRFLOW -

SPECIFICATION: CAPTRATE GREASE-STOP SOLO FILTER

A UNIQUE S-BAFFLE DESIGN IN CONJUNCTION WITH A SLOTTED REAR BAFFLE DESIGN,THE CAPTRATE GREASE-STOP SOLO FILTER IS A SINGLE-STAGE FILTER FEATURING

LARGER, WITH A CORRESPONDING PRESSURE DROP NOT TO EXCEED 1.0 INCHES OF WATER GAUGE.

FILTER IS STAINLESS STEEL CONSTRUCTION, AND SIZED TO FIT INTO STANDARD

GREASE EXTRACTION EFFICIENCY PERFORMANCE SHALL REMOVE AT LEAST 75% OF GREASEPARTICLES FIVE MICRONS IN SIZE, AND 90% GREASE PARTICLES SEVEN MICRONS IN SIZE AND

COMPONENTS WHEN ASSEMBLED.

2-INCH DEEP HOOD CHANNEL(S).

TO DELIVER EXCEPTIONAL FILTRATION EFFICIENCY.

UNITS SHALL INCLUDE STAINLESS STEEL HANDLES AND A FASTENING DEVICE TO SECURE THE TWO

FILT

RATI

ON

EFF

ICIE

NCY

(%)

0

0.1

10

20

30

40

1PARTICLE DIAMETER(um)

10

FILTER COLLECTIONEFFICIENCY

90

50

60

80

70

100

2" Captrate Grease-Stop SoloFilter

THE CAPTRATE GREASE-STOP SOLO WAS TESTED TO ASTM STANDARD ASTM F2519-05.

TE

A

NS F ACCORDANCE

No. 96NFPAWITH

BUILTINO

CH

BN

RAN I,OR M

.

YR

OR

L AI GNTS B

AT

CAPTRATE FILTERS ARE BUILT IN COMPLIANCE WITH:.NFPA #96NSF STANDARD #2UL STANDARD #1046INT. MECH. CODE (IMC)

10' 6.00"Nom./10' 6.00"OD

60"

3"

63" 63"

9"

10"

25"

PLAN VIEW - Hood #1 (20.102L)10' 6.00" LONG 6024ND-2

U.L. Listed Screw In 12WLED Bulb

10' 6.00"Nom./10' 6.00"OD

11'-6.00" Overall Length

60"

12"

UtilityCabinet

3"

63" 63"

9"

10"

17"

PLAN VIEW - Hood #2 (20.102R)10' 6.00" LONG 6024ND-2

U.L. Listed L55 Series E26 Canopy Light Fixture -High Temp Assembly

3" INTERNAL STANDOFF

GREASE DRAINWITH REMOVABLE CUP

4"

BALANCE DAMPERS

HANGING ANGLE

SCREW IN 12W LED BULB, L55 SERIES E26CANOPY LIGHT FIXTURE - HIGH TEMP ASSEMBLY,2700K-3500K, INCLUDES CLEAR THERMAL ANDSHOCK RESISTANT GLOBE

BACKSPLASH 80.00" HIGHX 264.00" LONG

FIELD WRAPPER 18.00" HIGH(SEE HOOD OPTIONS TABLE)

EQUIPMENT BY OTHERS

48.0" MAX

80" AFF REFERENCE

24" NOM.

60"

SECTION VIEW - MODEL6024ND-2HOOD - #1(20.102L)

IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE ARCHITECT/OWNER TO

ENSURE THAT THE HOOD CLEARANCE FROM LIMITED-COMBUSTIBLE

AND COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS IS IN COMPLIANCE WITH

LOCAL CODE REQUIREMENTS.

16" CAPTRATE SOLOFILTER WITH HOOK

Fire System Information -Job#2573604

1 21.209 Ansul R102 3.0/3.0 8 Fire Cabinet Right Right

FIRESYSTEM

NO.Tag TYPE SIZE FLOW

POINTS

INSTALLATION

SYSTEM LOCATION ON HOOD

JOB NO

JOB NAME

MODEL NUMBER

DATE

DRAWN BY

DWG NO

SCHEMATIC TYPE

BREAKER 1PH

CONTROL POWER. DO NOT WIRETO SHUNT TRIP BREAKER.1ST HOOD LIGHT BREAKER SHARED W/ CONTROLPOWER. SWITCH #1

FAN STARTERCOIL CONTROLFOR EXHAUST WIRE TO FAN

STARTER COILGROUP 1

WIRE C1 TO COMMON (1).

C1 TO AR1 SHOULD HAVE

CONTROL PANEL

FIRE SYSTEMTO

MICROSWITCH

CONTINUITY WHEN ARMED.

IF MORE THAN ONE

WIRE AR1 TO NORMALLY CLOSED (2).

CAPOFF

CAPOFF

CAPOFFFIRE SYSTEM, WIRE

IN SERIES AS SHOWN

CONTROL PANEL

KILL SWITCHTO

LOOP

IF MORE THAN ONECARTRIDGE SW, WIREIN SERIES AS SHOWN

120V SIGNAL THROUGH KILLSWITCH LOOP. SWITCH SHOULDBE CLOSED IN NORMAL STATEAND OPEN IN ALARM.

ALL SWITCHES FACTORY WIREDCAT-5 CONNECTION

CONTROL PANEL

SWITCHESTO

CONTROL PANEL

HOOD LIGHTSTO

1400 W MAX WIRE TO J-BOX ON TOP OF HOOD

WIRE TO CONTROL BOARD.SENSOR MOUNTED IN ROOM AWAYFROM HEAT SOURCES. SEE MANUAL

CONTROL PANEL

KITCHEN TEMPTO

SENSOR

FACTORY WIRED TEMPERATURESENSOR. MOUNTED IN EXHAUST DUCT

CONTROL PANEL

DUCT SENSORTO

WIRE TO CONTROL BOARD.SENSOR MOUNTED IN EXHAUST DUCT

CONTROL PANEL

DUCT SENSORTO

THE FOLLOWING CONNECTIONSMAY OR MAY NOT BE

REQUIRED BASED ON JOBSITESPECIFICATIONS

CONTROL PANEL

EXTERNALSIGNAL FOR

SHUNT TRIPST TERMINAL IS ENERGIZEDIN FIRE CONDITION.

SYSTEM DRYSPARE FIRE

CONTACT

CONTROL PANEL

SPARE CONTACTS WILL MAKE C2 TOAR2 WHEN SYSTEM IS ARMED. THEYARE USED TO DISABLE EQUIPMENTOR PROVIDE SIGNALS. (NOT FORBUILDING FIRE ALARM WHICH MUSTBE WIRED DIRECTL TO THE ANSULALARM INITIATING SWITCH LOCATEDIN ANSUL AUTOMAN)

CONTROL PANEL

EXTERNALTO

SWITCHSIGNAL SWITCH THROUGH BMSWILL ACTIVATE ZONE1 FANS ANDLIGHTS

HotNeutral

H1N1120 V

15 AGround GND

EF1N1

HOT

NEUTRALA2A1

EXHAUST

C1AR1

MICROSWITCH 1

1:C4:NO2:NC

MS-11:C

4:NO2:NC

1:C4:NO2:NC

MS-2C1

AR1

H1KTS

CARTRIDGE SW

1:C2:NC4:NO

CR-11:C

1:CCR-2

H1

KTS

2:NC4:NO

2:NC4:NO

J4

B1W1

GND

HOOD LIGHTS 1

T1AT1B ROOM TEMP

T2AT2B HOOD 2

RISER 1

T3AT3B HOOD 1

RISER 1

STN1 NEUTRAL FROM SHUNT COIL

HOT TO SHUNT COIL SHUNT COIL

C2AR2

COMMONNORMALLY OPEN

H1IO1

BMS SWITCHC NO

BREAKER PANEL CONTROL PANEL

CONTROL PANEL FANS

CONTROL PANEL COMPONENT

BREAKER PANEL TO CONTROL PANELResponsibility: Electrician

BREAKER SIZE SHOWN IS THE MAXIMUM ALLOWED

CONTROL PANEL TO FANSResponsibility: Electrician

CONTROL PANEL TO ACCESSORY ITEMSResponsibility: Electrician

2573604Bankers Life - Loge Club

SC-010110FP DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION:

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

12/21/2016

INSTALL

ECP #1-1

Starter Coil Control Only w/ control for 1 Exhaust Fan, Exhaust on in Fire, Lights out in Fire, Fan(s) On/Off Thermostatically Controlled. Room temperature sensor shippedloose for field installation.

BLACKBLACK

BLACKWHITE

GREEN

C US

ww

w.c

aptiv

eaire

.com

SHEET NO.

SCALE:

DWG.#:

DRAWN

DATE:

BY:

REVISIONS

DESCRIPTION DATE:

AC

CORD

ANC

E

No.

96

BUI

LT

NF

PA

WIT

H

IN

S

L

ID

TE

R

SL I DTE

R

UL 710 & ULC710 STANDARDSE.T.L. LISTED 3054804-001 TO

CAPTIVE-AIRE HOODS AREBUILT IN COMPLIANCE WITH

NFPA #96NSF

WITH

Y

.IC

, M

HN N A R B O

A

R

NFPANo. 96

RATO R

OAB

ETN

S F

STING LBUILT

INACCORDANCE

NO. ILLINOIS FOOD SERVICE SALES/ENGINEERING OFFICE

PHONE: (630) 377-2611 FAX; (630) 377-2644203 E. Illinois Ave. ST. Charles, IL 60174

FOR QUESTIONS & PRICING, CALL THE

PRELIMINARY MECHANIC

AL IN

FORMATION

DUCT MOUNTEDHEAT SENSORFIELD WIRED BACKTO FAN CONTROL PANEL

DUCT MOUNTEDHEAT SENSORFIELD WIRED BACKTO FAN CONTROL PANEL

2573604

MASTER DRAWING

WEM

1

2/21/2016

Bank

ers

Life

- Lo

ge C

lub

3/4" = 1'-0"

125

S PE

NN

SYLV

ANIA

ST,

Chi

cago

Foo

dser

vice

Div

isio

n20

3 E.

Illin

ois

Ave,

St.

Cha

rles,

IL, 6

0174

PH

ON

E: (6

30) 3

77-2

611

FAX:

(630

) 377

-264

4 EM

AIL:

reg5

5@ca

ptiv

eaire

.com

IND

IAN

APO

LIS,

IN, 4

6204

ACTUAL FIRE SYSTEM PIPING SCHEMATIC TO BE PROVIDED BYCONTRACTED FIRE SYSTEM DISTRIBUTOR AT TIME OF PERMITTING

TYPICAL INTEGRATED COMPONENT LAYOUTDETAIL

DECTECTOR

CONTROL PADFAN AND LIGHT

PLENUM PROTECTION

PRE-WIRED ELECTRICALTERMINAL BOX WITH TERMINAL STRIPS,3-PHASE CONTACTORS AND OVERLOADS

NOZZLEAPPLIANCE PROTECTION

NOZZLE

DUCT PROTECTIONNOZZLE

REMOVABLE STAINLESSSTEEL SERVICE DOOR

OEM RELEASE/BRACKET ASSEMBLY

AGENT TANK

REMOTE MANUALPULL STATION

EP1

ROOM TEMPERATURESENSOR

FAN LIGHTS

HOOD INFORMATION -Job#2573604

1

2

20.102L

20.102R

6024

ND-2

6024

ND-2

10' 6.00"

10' 6.00"

600 Deg.

600 Deg.

2632

1837

10"

10"

25"

17"

2632

1837

-1.008"

-0.782"

100%LEFT

RIGHT

ALONE

ALONE

HOODNO. TAG MODEL LENGTH

MAX.COOKING

TEMP.

EXHAUST PLENUM

TOTALEXH. CFM

RISER(S)

WIDTH LENG. DIA. CFM S.P.

HOODCONSTRUCTION

HOOD CONFIG.

END TOEND ROW

304 SS

304 SS

100%

CBA D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


PROJECT NORTH

®

TM

®

®



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400


FOR

REFE

RENC

E ON

LY - N

OT F

OR C

ONST

RUCT

ION

BID PACKAGE #2

4/15/2016 5 :33:51 P M

Bank

ers L

ife F

ieldh

ouse

125 S

. Pe n

n sy lv

a nia

S t., I

ndian

apol i

s, IN

4624

0





04.18.2016

LOGE CLUB CLUB BAR& KITCHEN EXHAUST

HOODS

BP2 FS3-3.01H

16.4224.00

03/30/16

3/4" = 1'-0"1 LOGE CLUB KITCHEN EXHAUST HOOD DETAIL


48 24

(5)

48 24(5)

48 24

(5)

48 24

(5)

48 24

(5)

48 24

(5)

48 24

(5)

G

4414W

DC

48 24(5)

DCC

R22

R20.6

R20.4

NNN

OOO

PPP

R21

R20.5

R20

R19 EE.9

EE.2

FF

4.030E

1.163

1.001

1.072

1.064

14.002

12.141

14.011

17.013

17.065

17.020

14.002E14.002E

4.085

4.088

4.175E

2.003D

2.0022.002

8.018E

8.002

2.012

15.026

1.001

1.068

17.011

1.072

8.029E

22.102B

7.039

FS

FS

FS

FS

FS

FS

FS

FS

FS

FS

FS

FS

14.001

4.021

2.012BP2_01

CBA D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


PROJECT NORTH

®

TM

®

®



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400


FOR

REFE

RENC

E ON

LY - N

OT F

OR C

ONST

RUCT

ION

BID PACKAGE #2

4/15/2016 5 :34:44 P M

Bank

ers L

ife F

ieldh

ouse

125 S

. Pe n

n sy lv

a nia

S t., I

ndian

apol i

s, IN

4624

0





04.18.2016

LOGE CLUB CLUB BAR& KITCHEN PLUMBING

SPOTS

BP2 FS3-3.01M1

16.4224.00

03/30/16









THESE NOTES APPLY TO THE WORK OF THE MECHANICAL ANDPLUMBING TRADES.

1 DRAWING SHOWS CONNECTION POINTS ON EQUIPMENT.ROUGH-IN POINTS ARE NOT HE SAME AND ALLOWANCES SHALLBE MADE FOR VALVES, STOPS, ACCESS, ETC. ALL ROUGH-INSAND CONNECTIONS SHALL BE PER APPLICABLE CODE.

2 DRAWING SHOWS REQUIREMENTS FOR FOOD SERVICEEQUIPMENT ONLY; SEE MECHANICAL AND PLUMBINGDRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.

3 ALL PIPE, FITTINGS, ETC. SHALL BE CONCEALED WITHIN WALLSAND STUBBED OUT AS CLOSE AS POSSIBLE TO THECONNECTION POINT. DO NOT RUN EXPOSED ON THE WALL.

4 PIPING EXPOSED ABOVE THE WORKING SURFACE OF THEEQUIPMENT SHALL BE STAINLESS STEEL, CHROME PLATED, ORSHROUDED IN A STAINLESS STEEL COVER.

5 ALL PIPING SHALL BE AT LEAST 6" ABOVE THE FLOOR TOALLOW FOR EASE OF CLEANING.

6 TYPE I HOODS REQUIRE WELDED DUCTWORK PER CODE.7 TYPE II HOODS AND VENTS ABOVE DISHWASHERS AND OTHER

STEAM AND VAPOR PRODUCING EQUIPMENT SHALL BEPROVIDED WITH DUCTWORK PER APPLICABLE CODE.

8 TYPE I DUCTS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH FIRE EXTINGUISHINGPER CODE.

9 KITCHEN EQUIPMENT CONTRACTOR WILL FURNISHMECHANICAL OR ELECTRICAL SOLENOID GAS VALVES LOOSEFOR FIELD INSTALLATION.

10 WE RECOMMEND CENTRAL GREASE TRAPS EXTERNAL OF THEBUILDING CODE OR FOOD-SERVICE SPACE. IF THIS IS NOTPOSSIBLE, THEN RECCESSED, POINT-OF-USE GREASE TRAPSARE PERMITTED; COORDINATE LOCATION WITH KITCHENDESIGNER.

11 REFRIGERATED EQUIPMENT IS DESIGNED FOR OPERATION INAN AMBIENT TEMPERATURE NOT EXCEEDING 100 DEGREESFAHRENHEIT. AIR COOLED EQUIPMENT REQUIRES VENTILATIONAT 1,000 CFM PER HORSEPOWER; WATER-COOLED EQUIPMENTREQUIRES COOLING WATER AT 70 DEGREES FAHRENHEIT ATTHE RATE OF 1.5 GPM PER HORSEPOWER.

12 SOME EQUIPMENT MAY REQUIRE COMPRESSED AIR.INTERCONNECT FROM THE AIR COMPRESSOR TO THISEQUIPMENT.

1/4" = 1'-0"1 LOGE CLUB BAR & KITCHEN PLUMBING SPOTS

MECHANICAL LOAD SCHEDULE ON FS3-301M2


CBA D

PROJECT NO.

Copyright C

ISSUED BY:

ISSUED DATE:

SHEET TITLE:


REVISIONS


PROJECT NORTH

®

TM

®

®



8345 Lenexa Drive

1-317-872-8400


FOR

REFE

RENC

E ON

LY - N

OT F

OR C

ONST

RUCT

ION

BID PACKAGE #2

4/15/2016 5 :34:50 P M

Bank

ers L

ife F

ieldh

ouse

125 S

. Pe n

n sy lv

a nia

S t., I

ndian

apol i

s, IN

4624

0





04.18.2016

LOGE CLUB CLUB BAR& KITCHEN

MECHANICAL LOADSCHEDULE

BP2 FS3-3.01M2

16.4224.00

03/30/16

MECHANICAL LOAD SCHEDULE - LOGE CLUB BAR & KITCHEN

ITEMNO. QTY EQUIPMENT CATEGORY C

OLD

WAT

ER S

IZE

(IN)

CO

LD W

ATER

AFF

(IN

)

HO

T W

ATER

SIZ

E (IN

)

HO

T W

ATER

AFF

(IN

)

DIR

ECT

DR

AIN

SIZ

E (IN

)

DIR

ECT

DR

AIN

AFF

(IN

)

IND

IREC

T D

RAI

N S

IZE

(IN)

PLUMBING REMARKS GAS

SIZ

E (IN

)

GAS

AFF

(IN

)

MBT

UH

HVA

C E

XHAU

ST D

UC

T SI

ZE (I

N)

HVA

C E

XHAU

ST C

FM

HVA

C E

XHAU

ST S

PWG

HVA

C E

XHAU

ST A

FF (I

N)

HVA

C M

AKE-

UP

DU

CT

SIZE

(IN

)

HVA

C M

AKE-

UP

CFM

HVA

C M

AKE-

UP

SPW

G

HVA

C M

AKE-

UP

AFF

(IN)

HVAC REMARKSREFRIGERATION

REMARKS1.001 2 UNDERBAR DUMP SINK/BLENDER STATION 1/2 13 1/2 13 1-1/21.064 1 UNDERBAR HANDSINK 1/2 13 1/2 13 1-1/21.068 1 UNDERBAR CORNER DRAINBOARD 1-1/21.072 2 UNDERBAR COCKTAIL STATION, 36" 1/2 FLOOR SINK REQUIRED1.163 1 ICE CHEST, DROP-IN 1/2 FLOOR SINK REQUIRED2.002 2 CARBONATOR 1/2 84 1/2 84 CO2 SUPPLY REQUIRED

2.003D 1 DRAFT BEER SYSTEM 1/2 3.752.012 2 DRAFT BEER TOWER, 4 TAPS, W/ DRAINER 1/24.021 1 OVEN-STEAMER, COMBINATION, BOILERLESS, ELECTRIC 3/4 70 1-1/2 FLOOR SINK REQUIRED

4.030E 1 STEAMER 1/2 34 2 FLOOR SINK REQUIRED4.085 1 RANGE, HEAVY DUTY, GAS, 4 BURNERS W/SALAMANDER 1" REAR 36 2444.088 1 BROILER, UNDER-FIRED, GAS, 24" 3/4 36 60

4.175E 1 DOUBLE FRYER BATTERY, W/FILTER & FRYMATE 1-1/4 36 1407.039 1 DIPPERWELL ASSEMBLY8.002 1 ICE MAKER 1/2 84 3/4 FLOOR SINK REQUIRED

8.018E 1 BIN, ICE 1 FLOOR SINK REQUIRED12.141 1 DROP-IN, COLD WELL 1-1/414.001 1 SINK, DROP-IN, HAND 1/2 32 1/2 32 1-1/2 1914.002 1 SINK, HAND, WALL MOUNT 1/2 21 1/2 21 1-1/2 22

14.002E 2 SINK, HAND, WALL MOUNT 1/2 21 1/2 21 1-1/2 2214.011 1 SINK, SCULLERY, 3 COMPARTMENTS 1/2 38 1/2 38 (3) @ 2 1615.026 1 TABLE, WORK, 30" X 96" W/ SINK 1/2 32 1/2 32 1-1/2 FLOOR SINK REQUIRED17.011 1 GLASSWASHER 1/2 6 1 FLOOR SINK REQUIRED17.013 1 WAREWASHER, RACK CONVEYOR, VENTLESS 1/2 61 1-1/2 FLOOR SINK REQUIRED17.013a 1 BOOSTER HEATER 1/2 817.020 1 DISHTABLE, STRAIGHT, SOILED 1/2 38 1/2 3817.065 1 DISPOSER, 3.0 HP 1/2 20 3 12

22.102B 1 EVAPORATOR COIL 3/4
